August 2020 - Devel - Libvirt List Archives

[libvirt PATCH] build-aux: remove some syntax-check cruft

by Daniel P. Berrangé

sc_proper_name_utf8_requires_ICONV looks for Makefile.am files, so is not going to work correctly with meson. The 'today' variable is not referenced anywhere. The 'writable-files' target is not used anywhere sc_prohibit_reversed_compare_failure only checks 'init.sh' which does not exist in libvirt. Signed-off-by: Daniel P. Berrangé <berrange(a)redhat.com> --- build-aux/syntax-check.mk | 54 --------------------------------------- 1 file changed, 54 deletions(-) diff --git a/build-aux/syntax-check.mk b/build-aux/syntax-check.mk index 9256532ab3..6eb59cf90e 100644 --- a/build-aux/syntax-check.mk +++ b/build-aux/syntax-check.mk @@ -72,10 +72,6 @@ VC_LIST_EXCEPT = \ | $(GREP) -Ev -e '($(VC_LIST_ALWAYS_EXCLUDE_REGEX)|$(_sc_excl))' \ $(_prepend_srcdir_prefix) -# Override this in syntax-check.mk if you are using a different format in your -# NEWS file. -today = $(shell date +%Y-%m-%d) - # Prevent programs like 'sort' from considering distinct strings to be equal. # Doing it here saves us from having to set LC_ALL elsewhere in this file. export LC_ALL = C @@ -1744,29 +1740,6 @@ sc_prohibit_test_double_equal: halt='use "test x = x", not "test x =''= x"' \ $(_sc_search_regexp) -# Each program that uses proper_name_utf8 must link with one of the -# ICONV libraries. Otherwise, some ICONV library must appear in LDADD. -# The perl -0777 invocation below extracts the possibly-multi-line -# definition of LDADD from the appropriate Makefile.am and exits 0 -# when it contains "ICONV". -sc_proper_name_utf8_requires_ICONV: - @progs=$$($(VC_LIST_EXCEPT) \ - | xargs $(GREP) -l 'proper_name_utf8 ''("'); \ - if test "x$$progs" != x; then \ - fail=0; \ - for p in $$progs; do \ - dir=$$(dirname "$$p"); \ - perl -0777 \ - -ne 'exit !(/^LDADD =(.+?[^\\]\n)/ms && $$1 =~ /ICONV/)' \ - $$dir/Makefile.am && continue; \ - base=$$(basename "$$p" .c); \ - $(GREP) "$${base}_LDADD.*ICONV)" $$dir/Makefile.am > /dev/null \ - || { fail=1; echo 1>&2 "$(ME): $$p uses proper_name_utf8"; }; \ - done; \ - test $$fail = 1 && \ - { echo 1>&2 '$(ME): the above do not link with any ICONV library'; \ - exit 1; } || :; \ - fi # Warn about "c0nst struct Foo const foo[]", # but not about "char const *const foo" or "#define const const". @@ -1828,33 +1801,6 @@ sc_po_check: rm -f $@-1 $@-2; \ fi -# Check that 'make alpha' will not fail at the end of the process, -# i.e., when pkg-M.N.tar.xz already exists (either in "." or in ../release) -# and is read-only. -writable-files: - $(AM_V_GEN)if test -d $(release_archive_dir); then \ - for file in $(DIST_ARCHIVES); do \ - for p in ./ $(release_archive_dir)/; do \ - test -e $$p$$file || continue; \ - test -w $$p$$file \ - || { echo ERROR: $$p$$file is not writable; fail=1; }; \ - done; \ - done; \ - test "$$fail" && exit 1 || : ; \ - else :; \ - fi - - -# BRE regex of file contents to identify a test script. -_test_script_regex ?= \<init\.sh\> - -# In tests, use "compare expected actual", not the reverse. -sc_prohibit_reversed_compare_failure: - @prohibit='\<compare [^ ]+ ([^ ]*exp|/dev/null)' \ - containing='$(_test_script_regex)' \ - halt='reversed compare arguments' \ - $(_sc_search_regexp) - # #if HAVE_... will evaluate to false for any non numeric string. # That would be flagged by using -Wundef, however gnulib currently # tests many undefined macros, and so we can't enable that option. -- 2.26.2

4 years, 2 months

2
1
0 / 0

[libvirt PATCH] network: Use single quotes in default network configuration

by Andrea Bolognani

Whenever libvirt is upgraded on a Debian system, the user will be prompted along the lines of Configuration file '/etc/libvirt/qemu/networks/default.xml' ==> Modified (by you or by a script) since installation. ==> Package distributor has shipped an updated version. What would you like to do about it ? Your options are: Y or I : install the package maintainer's version N or O : keep your currently-installed version D : show the differences between the versions Z : start a shell to examine the situation The default action is to keep your current version. *** default.xml (Y/I/N/O/D/Z) [default=N] ? d --- /etc/libvirt/qemu/networks/default.xml 2020-08-04 12:57:25.450911143 +0200 +++ /etc/libvirt/qemu/networks/default.xml.dpkg-new 2020-08-03 22:47:15.000000000 +0200 @@ -1,19 +1,11 @@ - - <network> <name>default</name> - <uuid>612a2cab-72fb-416d-92bc-4d9e597bfb63</uuid> - <forward mode='nat'/> - <bridge name='virbr0' stp='on' delay='0'/> - <mac address='52:54:00:1f:03:79'/> - <ip address='192.168.122.1' netmask='255.255.255.0'> + <uuid>d020b839-4379-492c-aa74-eab7365076e6</uuid> + <bridge name="virbr0"/> + <forward/> + <ip address="192.168.122.1" netmask="255.255.255.0"> <dhcp> - <range start='192.168.122.2' end='192.168.122.254'/> + <range start="192.168.122.2" end="192.168.122.254"/> </dhcp> </ip> </network> The UUID situation should probably be handled the same way it is in the spec file by stripping it, and in general we could behave much better towards users, but one part of the diff that immediately stands out is that some lines are highlighted not because they are semantically different, but simply because they use different types of quotes around attributes. Since the canonical version of all libvirt XML documents (as returned by the various vir*GetXMLDesc() APIs) as well as the on-disk representations use single quotes, let's use the same for configuration files we install as well. Signed-off-by: Andrea Bolognani <abologna(a)redhat.com> --- src/network/default.xml.in | 6 +++--- 1 file changed, 3 insertions(+), 3 deletions(-) diff --git a/src/network/default.xml.in b/src/network/default.xml.in index d7241d0c16..08a3632eb6 100644 --- a/src/network/default.xml.in +++ b/src/network/default.xml.in @@ -1,10 +1,10 @@ <network> <name>default</name> - <bridge name="virbr0"/> + <bridge name='virbr0'/> <forward/> - <ip address="192.168.122.1" netmask="255.255.255.0"> + <ip address='192.168.122.1' netmask='255.255.255.0'> <dhcp> - <range start="192.168.122.2" end="192.168.122.254"/> + <range start='192.168.122.2' end='192.168.122.254'/> </dhcp> </ip> </network> -- 2.25.4

4 years, 2 months

2
1
0 / 0

[PATCH] mdev: fix daemon crash on reattach mdevs

by Binfeng Wu

Causing a crash when virMediatedDeviceListFindIndex because of some pointers in mgr->activeMediatedHostdevs become dangling pointers if goto cleanup label in virMediatedDeviceListMarkDevices. Reproduction scenario: 1. start vm1 with mdev1 2. start vm2 with mdev2, mdev1 (the order cannot be changed) Backtrace: #0 0x0000ffffb8c36250 in strcmp #1 0x0000ffffb9b80754 in virMediatedDeviceListFindIndex #2 0x0000ffffb9b80870 in virMediatedDeviceListFind #3 0x0000ffffb9c9e168 in virHostdevReAttachMediatedDevices #4 0x0000ffff9949f724 in qemuHostdevReAttachMediatedDevices #5 0x0000ffff9949f7f8 in qemuHostdevReAttachDomainDevices #6 0x0000ffff994bcd70 in qemuProcessStop #7 0x0000ffff994bf4e0 in qemuProcessStart ..... Signed-off-by: Binfeng Wu <wubinfeng(a)huawei.com> --- src/util/virmdev.c | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/src/util/virmdev.c b/src/util/virmdev.c index b8023dd991..26cb8300ff 100644 --- a/src/util/virmdev.c +++ b/src/util/virmdev.c @@ -439,7 +439,7 @@ virMediatedDeviceListMarkDevices(virMediatedDeviceListPtr dst, if (virMediatedDeviceIsUsed(mdev, dst) || virMediatedDeviceSetUsedBy(mdev, drvname, domname) < 0) - goto cleanup; + goto rollback; /* Copy mdev references to the driver list: * - caller is responsible for NOT freeing devices in @src on success -- 2.26.2.windows.1

4 years, 2 months

2
1
0 / 0

[libvirt PATCH 0/2] header fixes

by Pavel Hrdina

Pavel Hrdina (2): remote: remove duplicated header src/logging: no need to include log_protocol.h in log_manager.h src/logging/log_manager.h | 2 -- src/qemu/qemu_command.c | 1 + src/remote/remote_daemon_dispatch.c | 1 - 3 files changed, 1 insertion(+), 3 deletions(-) -- 2.26.2

4 years, 2 months

2
3
0 / 0

[PATCH 0/7] docs: css: Tweak appearance of documents converted from RST

by Peter Krempa

Note that patch 5 is just RFC. It can be dropped if we don't want to add the gray background. Here are the options for the ToC separation done by patches 3-5: Current state: https://libvirt.org/kbase/debuglogs.html With just separation of the ToC and 'Contents:' hidden: https://pipo.sk.gitlab.io/-/libvirt/-/jobs/667749501/artifacts/website/kb... Above with grey box: https://pipo.sk.gitlab.io/-/libvirt/-/jobs/668221137/artifacts/website/kb... Patch 6 then modifies the 'kbase' article directory: Current state: https://libvirt.org/kbase.html New state: https://pipo.sk.gitlab.io/-/libvirt/-/jobs/668221137/artifacts/website/kb... Peter Krempa (7): docs: build: Don't include stylesheet in intermediate html files generated from RST docs: css: Make definition list 'code' entries bold when converted from rst docs: css: Add separation for table of contents generated from RST docs: css: Hide redundant 'Contents:' line in table of contents of RST docs docs: css: Add a gray box around table of contents of RST based docs docs: css: Modify appearance of the kbase directory page docs: kbase: Remove unused 'container' docs/generic.css | 2 +- docs/kbase.rst | 60 +++++++++++++++++++-------------------- docs/libvirt.css | 35 +++++++++++++++-------- docs/manpages/meson.build | 2 +- docs/meson.build | 2 +- 5 files changed, 55 insertions(+), 46 deletions(-) -- 2.26.2

4 years, 2 months

3
16
0 / 0

[libvirt PATCH 0/2] ci: Some cirrus-run related changes

by Andrea Bolognani

The corresponding libvirt-ci MR is https://gitlab.com/libvirt/libvirt-ci/-/merge_requests/41 and this is what it looks like in action: https://gitlab.com/abologna/libvirt/-/jobs/669949971 https://gitlab.com/abologna/libvirt/-/jobs/669949970 Let's help test the upcoming cirrus-run release :) Andrea Bolognani (2): ci: Show build log for Cirrus CI jobs ci: Temporarily enable verbose mode for cirrus-run .gitlab-ci.yml | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) -- 2.25.4

4 years, 2 months

2
3
0 / 0

[PATCH 0/8] Further Debian/Ubuntu Apparmor Delta

by Christian Ehrhardt

Hi, I don't even remember which number of submissions that is #5 maybe? Anyway - I'm hereby continuing to bring Debian and Ubuntu apparmor Delta into upstream libvirt. I have kept out all patches that are either Distro-specific or we ran into trouble/discussions in the past. But there are enough left for a new submission. I have kept the most-original (read the earliest - as some patches appeared in Ubuntu and later with a different Author in Debian) patch author that I could find intact and git-send-email should auto-cc them. I added some more bug links and descriptions so one can understand the case a commit tries to fix without knowing too much context. Christian Ehrhardt (2): apparmor: allow virt-aa-helper nameservices apparmor: let qemu load old shared objects after upgrades Jamie Strandboge (1): apparmor: read only access to overcommit_memory Sam Hartman (1): apparmor: allow default pki path Serge Hallyn (1): apparmor: allow virt-aa-helper to read openvswitch sockets Stefan Bader (3): apparmor: allow libvirtd to call pygrub apparmor: qemu access to @{PROC}/*/auxv for hw_cap apparmor: allow virt-aa-helper to read from tmp src/security/apparmor/libvirt-qemu | 9 +++++++++ src/security/apparmor/usr.lib.libvirt.virt-aa-helper.in | 5 +++++ src/security/apparmor/usr.sbin.libvirtd.in | 1 + 3 files changed, 15 insertions(+) -- 2.27.0

4 years, 2 months

2
20
0 / 0

[libvirt PATCH] meson_options: change default value to auto for driver_esx

by Pavel Hrdina

Reported-by: Daniel P. Berrangé <berrange(a)redhat.com> Signed-off-by: Pavel Hrdina <phrdina(a)redhat.com> --- meson_options.txt | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/meson_options.txt b/meson_options.txt index a1bb6505b8..1313effd09 100644 --- a/meson_options.txt +++ b/meson_options.txt @@ -48,7 +48,7 @@ option('yajl', type: 'feature', value: 'auto', description: 'yajl support') # build driver options option('driver_bhyve', type: 'feature', value: 'auto', description: 'bhyve driver') -option('driver_esx', type: 'feature', value: 'enabled', description: 'esx driver') +option('driver_esx', type: 'feature', value: 'auto', description: 'esx driver') option('driver_hyperv', type: 'feature', value: 'auto', description: 'Hyper-V driver') option('driver_interface', type: 'feature', value: 'auto', description: 'host interface driver') option('driver_libvirtd', type: 'feature', value: 'auto', description: 'libvirtd driver') -- 2.26.2

4 years, 2 months

2
1
0 / 0

[PATCH v2] conf: Add support for initiator IQN setting for iSCSI hostdevs

by Peter Krempa

We already allow controlling the initiator IQN for iSCSI based disks. Add the same for host devices. Signed-off-by: Peter Krempa <pkrempa(a)redhat.com> --- Rebased on top of the latest patch to convert formatdomain to rst and fixed 'since' tag. docs/formatdomain.rst | 4 ++++ docs/schemas/domaincommon.rng | 3 +++ src/conf/domain_conf.c | 5 +++++ .../hostdev-scsi-virtio-scsi.x86_64-4.1.0.args | 3 ++- .../hostdev-scsi-virtio-scsi.x86_64-latest.args | 1 + tests/qemuxml2argvdata/hostdev-scsi-virtio-scsi.xml | 3 +++ tests/qemuxml2xmloutdata/hostdev-scsi-virtio-scsi.xml | 3 +++ 7 files changed, 21 insertions(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/docs/formatdomain.rst b/docs/formatdomain.rst index a39e0c4adf..4372b79061 100644 --- a/docs/formatdomain.rst +++ b/docs/formatdomain.rst @@ -3909,6 +3909,10 @@ or: same ``name`` attribute and optionally using the ``auth`` element to provide the authentication credentials to the iSCSI server. + :since:`Since 6.7.0`, the optional ``initiator`` sub-element controls the + IQN of the initiator ran by the hypervisor via it's ``<iqn name='iqn...'`` + subelement. + ``scsi_host`` :since:`Since 2.5.0` , multiple LUNs behind a single SCSI HBA are described by a ``protocol`` attribute set to "vhost" and a ``wwpn`` diff --git a/docs/schemas/domaincommon.rng b/docs/schemas/domaincommon.rng index c196a97511..0d0dcbc5ce 100644 --- a/docs/schemas/domaincommon.rng +++ b/docs/schemas/domaincommon.rng @@ -5058,6 +5058,9 @@ <optional> <ref name='diskAuth'/> </optional> + <optional> + <ref name="initiatorinfo"/> + </optional> </interleave> </group> </choice> diff --git a/src/conf/domain_conf.c b/src/conf/domain_conf.c index 69e0439e7e..a6d23a2238 100644 --- a/src/conf/domain_conf.c +++ b/src/conf/domain_conf.c @@ -8354,6 +8354,8 @@ virDomainHostdevSubsysSCSIiSCSIDefParseXML(xmlNodePtr sourcenode, iscsisrc->src->auth = g_steal_pointer(&authdef); } + virStorageSourceInitiatorParseXML(ctxt, &iscsisrc->src->initiator); + if (flags & VIR_DOMAIN_DEF_PARSE_STATUS && xmlopt && xmlopt->privateData.storageParse) { if ((ctxt->node = virXPathNode("./privateData", ctxt)) && @@ -26164,6 +26166,9 @@ virDomainHostdevDefFormatSubsysSCSI(virBufferPtr buf, if (iscsisrc->src->auth) virStorageAuthDefFormat(&sourceChildBuf, iscsisrc->src->auth); + + virStorageSourceInitiatorFormatXML(&iscsisrc->src->initiator, + &sourceChildBuf); } else { virBufferAsprintf(&sourceChildBuf, "<adapter name='%s'/>\n", scsihostsrc->adapter); diff --git a/tests/qemuxml2argvdata/hostdev-scsi-virtio-scsi.x86_64-4.1.0.args b/tests/qemuxml2argvdata/hostdev-scsi-virtio-scsi.x86_64-4.1.0.args index de4047000e..f2591d6956 100644 --- a/tests/qemuxml2argvdata/hostdev-scsi-virtio-scsi.x86_64-4.1.0.args +++ b/tests/qemuxml2argvdata/hostdev-scsi-virtio-scsi.x86_64-4.1.0.args @@ -60,7 +60,8 @@ data=9eao5F8qtkGt+seB1HYivWIxbtwUu6MQtg1zpj/oDtUsPr1q8wBYM91uEHCn6j/1,\ keyid=masterKey0,iv=AAECAwQFBgcICQoLDA0ODw==,format=base64 \ -drive file.driver=iscsi,file.portal=example.org:3260,\ file.target=iqn.1992-01.com.example:storage,file.lun=2,file.transport=tcp,\ -file.user=myname,file.password-secret=hostdev5-secret0,if=none,format=raw,\ +file.user=myname,file.password-secret=hostdev5-secret0,\ +file.initiator-name=iqn.2020-07.com.example:test,if=none,format=raw,\ id=drive-hostdev5 \ -device scsi-generic,bus=scsi0.0,channel=0,scsi-id=3,lun=5,\ drive=drive-hostdev5,id=hostdev5 \ diff --git a/tests/qemuxml2argvdata/hostdev-scsi-virtio-scsi.x86_64-latest.args b/tests/qemuxml2argvdata/hostdev-scsi-virtio-scsi.x86_64-latest.args index 72980d58b8..f86cbd7314 100644 --- a/tests/qemuxml2argvdata/hostdev-scsi-virtio-scsi.x86_64-latest.args +++ b/tests/qemuxml2argvdata/hostdev-scsi-virtio-scsi.x86_64-latest.args @@ -67,6 +67,7 @@ keyid=masterKey0,iv=AAECAwQFBgcICQoLDA0ODw==,format=base64 \ -blockdev '{"driver":"iscsi","portal":"example.org:3260",\ "target":"iqn.1992-01.com.example:storage","lun":2,"transport":"tcp",\ "user":"myname","password-secret":"hostdev5-secret0",\ +"initiator-name":"iqn.2020-07.com.example:test",\ "node-name":"libvirt-hostdev5-backend","read-only":false}' \ -device scsi-generic,bus=scsi0.0,channel=0,scsi-id=3,lun=5,\ drive=libvirt-hostdev5-backend,id=hostdev5 \ diff --git a/tests/qemuxml2argvdata/hostdev-scsi-virtio-scsi.xml b/tests/qemuxml2argvdata/hostdev-scsi-virtio-scsi.xml index 775b678b36..f1caf80644 100644 --- a/tests/qemuxml2argvdata/hostdev-scsi-virtio-scsi.xml +++ b/tests/qemuxml2argvdata/hostdev-scsi-virtio-scsi.xml @@ -67,6 +67,9 @@ <auth username='myname'> <secret type='iscsi' usage='mycluster_myname'/> </auth> + <initiator> + <iqn name='iqn.2020-07.com.example:test'/> + </initiator> </source> <address type='drive' controller='0' bus='0' target='3' unit='5'/> </hostdev> diff --git a/tests/qemuxml2xmloutdata/hostdev-scsi-virtio-scsi.xml b/tests/qemuxml2xmloutdata/hostdev-scsi-virtio-scsi.xml index 9c823809ab..6c7e22d0c3 100644 --- a/tests/qemuxml2xmloutdata/hostdev-scsi-virtio-scsi.xml +++ b/tests/qemuxml2xmloutdata/hostdev-scsi-virtio-scsi.xml @@ -74,6 +74,9 @@ <auth username='myname'> <secret type='iscsi' usage='mycluster_myname'/> </auth> + <initiator> + <iqn name='iqn.2020-07.com.example:test'/> + </initiator> </source> <address type='drive' controller='0' bus='0' target='3' unit='5'/> </hostdev> -- 2.26.2

4 years, 2 months

2
1
0 / 0

[PATCH] docs: formatdomain: Convert to rst

by Peter Krempa

For now just plain conversion to rst. Anchors which existed until now are preserved, but the table of contents now uses the docutils-generated ones. Additionally <code> which was nested in a link (<a>) was removed as rst doesn't support nesting of inline markup. The only anchor which wasn't restored is 'elementsDiskBackingStoreIndex' and it's only reference was removed. Signed-off-by: Peter Krempa <pkrempa(a)redhat.com> --- A rebased version of this patch. For now anchors and links are kept as-is as there wasn't a consensus on how to approach it. This file is a magnet for conflicts so it's broken often and thus splitting it up will be made later once I will not get rippling conflicts. The idea to split up into sections (if we decide to do so) can be done incrementally. As a first step the hacky HTML anchors will be removed and links will be fixed and then we can split up everyting, but that's for later. For now I've updated the file manually from the last posting, but you can look how I did the automatic part at: https://gitlab.com/pipo.sk/libvirt/-/commit/3d7e23948564502ff01160a73abd3... docs/formatdomain.html.in | 9860 ------------------------------------- docs/formatdomain.rst | 7453 ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ docs/meson.build | 2 +- 3 files changed, 7454 insertions(+), 9861 deletions(-) delete mode 100644 docs/formatdomain.html.in create mode 100644 docs/formatdomain.rst diff --git a/docs/formatdomain.html.in b/docs/formatdomain.html.in deleted file mode 100644 index 3fc41801a4..0000000000 --- a/docs/formatdomain.html.in +++ /dev/null @@ -1,9860 +0,0 @@ -<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?> -<!DOCTYPE html> -<html xmlns="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml"> - <body> - <h1>Domain XML format</h1> - - <ul id="toc"></ul> - - - This section describes the XML format used to represent domains, there are - variations on the format based on the kind of domains run and the options - used to launch them. For hypervisor specific details consult the - <a href="drivers.html">driver docs</a> - - - - <h2><a id="elements">Element and attribute overview</a></h2> - - - The root element required for all virtual machines is - named <code>domain</code>. It has two attributes, the - <a id="attributeDomainType"><code>type</code></a> - specifies the hypervisor used for running - the domain. The allowed values are driver specific, but - include "xen", "kvm", "qemu" and "lxc". The - second attribute is <code>id</code> which is a unique - integer identifier for the running guest machine. Inactive - machines have no id value. - - - - <h3><a id="elementsMetadata">General metadata</a></h3> - -<pre> -<domain type='kvm' id='1'> - <name>MyGuest</name> - <uuid>4dea22b3-1d52-d8f3-2516-782e98ab3fa0</uuid> - <genid>43dc0cf8-809b-4adb-9bea-a9abb5f3d90e</genid> - <title>A short description - title - of the domain</title> - <description>Some human readable description</description> - <metadata> - <app1:foo xmlns:app1="http://app1.org/app1/">..</app1:foo> - <app2:bar xmlns:app2="http://app1.org/app2/">..</app2:bar> - </metadata> - ...</pre> - - <dl> - <dt><code>name</code></dt> - <dd>The content of the <code>name</code> element provides - a short name for the virtual machine. This name should - consist only of alpha-numeric characters and is required - to be unique within the scope of a single host. It is - often used to form the filename for storing the persistent - configuration file. Since 0.0.1</dd> - <dt><code>uuid</code></dt> - <dd>The content of the <code>uuid</code> element provides - a globally unique identifier for the virtual machine. - The format must be RFC 4122 compliant, - eg <code>3e3fce45-4f53-4fa7-bb32-11f34168b82b</code>. - If omitted when defining/creating a new machine, a random - UUID is generated. It is also possible to provide the UUID - via a <a href="#elementsSysinfo"><code>sysinfo</code></a> - specification. Since 0.0.1, sysinfo - since 0.8.7</dd> - - <dt><code>genid</code></dt> - <dd>Since 4.4.0, the <code>genid</code> - element can be used to add a Virtual Machine Generation ID which - exposes a 128-bit, cryptographically random, integer value identifier, - referred to as a Globally Unique Identifier (GUID) using the same - format as the <code>uuid</code>. The value is used to help notify - the guest operating system when the virtual machine is re-executing - something that has already executed before, such as: - - <ul> - <li>VM starts executing a snapshot</li> - <li>VM is recovered from backup</li> - <li>VM is failover in a disaster recovery environment</li> - <li>VM is imported, copied, or cloned</li> - </ul> - - The guest operating system notices the change and is then able to - react as appropriate by marking its copies of distributed databases - as dirty, re-initializing its random number generator, etc. - - - The libvirt XML parser will accept both a provided GUID value - or just <genid/> in which case a GUID will be generated - and saved in the XML. For the transitions such as above, libvirt - will change the GUID before re-executing.</dd> - - <dt><code>title</code></dt> - <dd>The optional element <code>title</code> provides space for a - short description of the domain. The title should not contain - any newlines. Since 0.9.10.</dd> - - <dt><code>description</code></dt> - <dd>The content of the <code>description</code> element provides a - human readable description of the virtual machine. This data is not - used by libvirt in any way, it can contain any information the user - wants. Since 0.7.2</dd> - - <dt><code>metadata</code></dt> - <dd>The <code>metadata</code> node can be used by applications - to store custom metadata in the form of XML - nodes/trees. Applications must use custom namespaces on their - XML nodes/trees, with only one top-level element per namespace - (if the application needs structure, they should have - sub-elements to their namespace - element). Since 0.9.10</dd> - </dl> - - <h3><a id="elementsOS">Operating system booting</a></h3> - - - There are a number of different ways to boot virtual machines - each with their own pros and cons. - - - <h4><a id="elementsOSBIOS">BIOS bootloader</a></h4> - - - Booting via the BIOS is available for hypervisors supporting - full virtualization. In this case the BIOS has a boot order - priority (floppy, harddisk, cdrom, network) determining where - to obtain/find the boot image. - - -<pre> -... -<os firmware='efi'> - <type>hvm</type> - <loader readonly='yes' secure='no' type='rom'>/usr/lib/xen/boot/hvmloader</loader> - <nvram template='/usr/share/OVMF/OVMF_VARS.fd'>/var/lib/libvirt/nvram/guest_VARS.fd</nvram> - <boot dev='hd'/> - <boot dev='cdrom'/> - <bootmenu enable='yes' timeout='3000'/> - <smbios mode='sysinfo'/> - <bios useserial='yes' rebootTimeout='0'/> -</os> -...</pre> - - <dl> - <dt><code>firmware</code></dt> - <dd>The <code>firmware</code> attribute allows management - applications to automatically fill <code><loader/></code> - and <code><nvram/></code> elements and possibly enable - some features required by selected firmware. Accepted values are - <code>bios</code> and <code>efi</code>. - The selection process scans for files describing installed - firmware images in specified location and uses the most specific - one which fulfils domain requirements. The locations in order of - preference (from generic to most specific one) are: - <ul> - <li><code>/usr/share/qemu/firmware</code></li> - <li><code>/etc/qemu/firmware</code></li> - <li><code>$XDG_CONFIG_HOME/qemu/firmware</code></li> - </ul> - For more information refer to firmware metadata specification as - described in <code>docs/interop/firmware.json</code> in QEMU - repository. Regular users do not need to bother. - Since 5.2.0 (QEMU and KVM only) - For VMware guests, this is set to <code>efi</code> when the guest - uses UEFI, and it is not set when using BIOS. - Since 5.3.0 (VMware ESX and Workstation/Player) - </dd> - <dt><code>type</code></dt> - <dd>The content of the <code>type</code> element specifies the - type of operating system to be booted in the virtual machine. - <code>hvm</code> indicates that the OS is one designed to run - on bare metal, so requires full virtualization. <code>linux</code> - (badly named!) refers to an OS that supports the Xen 3 hypervisor - guest ABI. There are also two optional attributes, <code>arch</code> - specifying the CPU architecture to virtualization, - and <a id="attributeOSTypeMachine"><code>machine</code></a> referring - to the machine type. The <a href="formatcaps.html">Capabilities XML</a> - provides details on allowed values for - these. If <code>arch</code> is omitted then for most hypervisor - drivers, the host native arch will be chosen. For the <code>test</code>, - <code>ESX</code> and <code>VMWare</code> hypervisor drivers, however, - the <code>i686</code> arch will always be chosen even on an - <code>x86_64</code> host. Since 0.0.1</dd> - <dt><a id="elementLoader"><code>loader</code></a></dt> - <dd>The optional <code>loader</code> tag refers to a firmware blob, - which is specified by absolute path, - used to assist the domain creation process. It is used by Xen - fully virtualized domains as well as setting the QEMU BIOS file - path for QEMU/KVM domains. Xen since 0.1.0, - QEMU/KVM since 0.9.12 Then, since - 1.2.8 it's possible for the element to have two - optional attributes: <code>readonly</code> (accepted values are - <code>yes</code> and <code>no</code>) to reflect the fact that the - image should be writable or read-only. The second attribute - <code>type</code> accepts values <code>rom</code> and - <code>pflash</code>. It tells the hypervisor where in the guest - memory the file should be mapped. For instance, if the loader - path points to an UEFI image, <code>type</code> should be - <code>pflash</code>. Moreover, some firmwares may - implement the Secure boot feature. Attribute - <code>secure</code> can be used then to control it. - Since 2.1.0</dd> - <dt><code>nvram</code></dt> - <dd>Some UEFI firmwares may want to use a non-volatile memory to store - some variables. In the host, this is represented as a file and the - absolute path to the file is stored in this element. Moreover, when the - domain is started up libvirt copies so called master NVRAM store file - defined in <code>qemu.conf</code>. If needed, the <code>template</code> - attribute can be used to per domain override map of master NVRAM stores - from the config file. Note, that for transient domains if the NVRAM file - has been created by libvirt it is left behind and it is management - application's responsibility to save and remove file (if needed to be - persistent). Since 1.2.8</dd> - <dt><code>boot</code></dt> - <dd>The <code>dev</code> attribute takes one of the values "fd", "hd", - "cdrom" or "network" and is used to specify the next boot device - to consider. The <code>boot</code> element can be repeated multiple - times to setup a priority list of boot devices to try in turn. - Multiple devices of the same type are sorted according to their - targets while preserving the order of buses. After defining the - domain, its XML configuration returned by libvirt (through - virDomainGetXMLDesc) lists devices in the sorted order. Once sorted, - the first device is marked as bootable. Thus, e.g., a domain - configured to boot from "hd" with vdb, hda, vda, and hdc disks - assigned to it will boot from vda (the sorted list is vda, vdb, hda, - hdc). Similar domain with hdc, vda, vdb, and hda disks will boot from - hda (sorted disks are: hda, hdc, vda, vdb). It can be tricky to - configure in the desired way, which is why per-device boot elements - (see <a href="#elementsDisks">disks</a>, - <a href="#elementsNICS">network interfaces</a>, and - <a href="#elementsHostDev">USB and PCI devices</a> sections below) were - introduced and they are the preferred way providing full control over - booting order. The <code>boot</code> element and per-device boot - elements are mutually exclusive. Since 0.1.3, - per-device boot since 0.8.8 - </dd> - <dt><code>smbios</code></dt> - <dd>How to populate SMBIOS information visible in the guest. - The <code>mode</code> attribute must be specified, and is either - "emulate" (let the hypervisor generate all values), "host" (copy - all of Block 0 and Block 1, except for the UUID, from the host's - SMBIOS values; - the <a href="html/libvirt-libvirt-host.html#virConnectGetSysinfo"> - <code>virConnectGetSysinfo</code></a> call can be - used to see what values are copied), or "sysinfo" (use the values in - the <a href="#elementsSysinfo">sysinfo</a> element). If not - specified, the hypervisor default is used. - Since 0.8.7 - </dd> - </dl> - Up till here the BIOS/UEFI configuration knobs are generic enough to - be implemented by majority (if not all) firmwares out there. However, - from now on not every single setting makes sense to all firmwares. For - instance, <code>rebootTimeout</code> doesn't make sense for UEFI, - <code>useserial</code> might not be usable with a BIOS firmware that - doesn't produce any output onto serial line, etc. Moreover, firmwares - don't usually export their capabilities for libvirt (or users) to check. - And the set of their capabilities can change with every new release. - Hence users are advised to try the settings they use before relying on - them in production. - <dl> - <dt><code>bootmenu</code></dt> - <dd> Whether or not to enable an interactive boot menu prompt on guest - startup. The <code>enable</code> attribute can be either "yes" or "no". - If not specified, the hypervisor default is used. - Since 0.8.3 - Additional attribute <code>timeout</code> takes the number of milliseconds - the boot menu should wait until it times out. Allowed values are numbers - in range [0, 65535] inclusive and it is ignored unless <code>enable</code> - is set to "yes". Since 1.2.8 - </dd> - <dt><code>bios</code></dt> - <dd>This element has attribute <code>useserial</code> with possible - values <code>yes</code> or <code>no</code>. It enables or disables - Serial Graphics Adapter which allows users to see BIOS messages - on a serial port. Therefore, one needs to have - <a href="#elementCharSerial">serial port</a> defined. - Since 0.9.4. - Since 0.10.2 (QEMU only) there is - another attribute, <code>rebootTimeout</code> that controls - whether and after how long the guest should start booting - again in case the boot fails (according to BIOS). The value is - in milliseconds with maximum of <code>65535</code> and special - value <code>-1</code> disables the reboot. - </dd> - </dl> - - <h4><a id="elementsOSBootloader">Host bootloader</a></h4> - - - Hypervisors employing paravirtualization do not usually emulate - a BIOS, and instead the host is responsible to kicking off the - operating system boot. This may use a pseudo-bootloader in the - host to provide an interface to choose a kernel for the guest. - An example is <code>pygrub</code> with Xen. The Bhyve hypervisor - also uses a host bootloader, either <code>bhyveload</code> or - <code>grub-bhyve</code>. - - -<pre> -... -<bootloader>/usr/bin/pygrub</bootloader> -<bootloader_args>--append single</bootloader_args> -...</pre> - - <dl> - <dt><code>bootloader</code></dt> - <dd>The content of the <code>bootloader</code> element provides - a fully qualified path to the bootloader executable in the - host OS. This bootloader will be run to choose which kernel - to boot. The required output of the bootloader is dependent - on the hypervisor in use. Since 0.1.0</dd> - <dt><code>bootloader_args</code></dt> - <dd>The optional <code>bootloader_args</code> element allows - command line arguments to be passed to the bootloader. - Since 0.2.3 - </dd> - - </dl> - - <h4><a id="elementsOSKernel">Direct kernel boot</a></h4> - - - When installing a new guest OS it is often useful to boot directly - from a kernel and initrd stored in the host OS, allowing command - line arguments to be passed directly to the installer. This capability - is usually available for both para and full virtualized guests. - - -<pre> -... -<os> - <type>hvm</type> - <loader>/usr/lib/xen/boot/hvmloader</loader> - <kernel>/root/f8-i386-vmlinuz</kernel> - <initrd>/root/f8-i386-initrd</initrd> - <cmdline>console=ttyS0 ks=http://example.com/f8-i386/os/</cmdline> - <dtb>/root/ppc.dtb</dtb> - <acpi> - <table type='slic'>/path/to/slic.dat</table> - </acpi> -</os> -...</pre> - - <dl> - <dt><code>type</code></dt> - <dd>This element has the same semantics as described earlier in the - <a href="#elementsOSBIOS">BIOS boot section</a></dd> - <dt><code>loader</code></dt> - <dd>This element has the same semantics as described earlier in the - <a href="#elementsOSBIOS">BIOS boot section</a></dd> - <dt><code>kernel</code></dt> - <dd>The contents of this element specify the fully-qualified path - to the kernel image in the host OS.</dd> - <dt><code>initrd</code></dt> - <dd>The contents of this element specify the fully-qualified path - to the (optional) ramdisk image in the host OS.</dd> - <dt><code>cmdline</code></dt> - <dd>The contents of this element specify arguments to be passed to - the kernel (or installer) at boot time. This is often used to - specify an alternate primary console (eg serial port), or the - installation media source / kickstart file</dd> - <dt><code>dtb</code></dt> - <dd>The contents of this element specify the fully-qualified path - to the (optional) device tree binary (dtb) image in the host OS. - Since 1.0.4</dd> - <dt><code>acpi</code></dt> - <dd>The <code>table</code> element contains a fully-qualified path - to the ACPI table. The <code>type</code> attribute contains the - ACPI table type (currently only <code>slic</code> is supported) - Since 1.3.5 (QEMU) - Since 5.9.0 (Xen)</dd> - </dl> - - <h4><a id="elementsOSContainer">Container boot</a></h4> - - - When booting a domain using container based virtualization, instead - of a kernel / boot image, a path to the init binary is required, using - the <code>init</code> element. By default this will be launched with - no arguments. To specify the initial argv, use the <code>initarg</code> - element, repeated as many time as is required. The <code>cmdline</code> - element, if set will be used to provide an equivalent to <code>/proc/cmdline</code> - but will not affect init argv. - - - To set environment variables, use the <code>initenv</code> element, one - for each variable. - - - To set a custom work directory for the init, use the <code>initdir</code> - element. - - - To run the init command as a given user or group, use the <code>inituser</code> - or <code>initgroup</code> elements respectively. Both elements can be provided - either a user (resp. group) id or a name. Prefixing the user or group id with - a <code>+</code> will force it to be considered like a numeric value. Without - this, it will be first tried as a user or group name. - - - <pre> -<os> - <type arch='x86_64'>exe</type> - <init>/bin/systemd</init> - <initarg>--unit</initarg> - <initarg>emergency.service</initarg> - <initenv name='MYENV'>some value</initenv> - <initdir>/my/custom/cwd</initdir> - <inituser>tester</inituser> - <initgroup>1000</initgroup> -</os> - </pre> - - - - If you want to enable user namespace, set the <code>idmap</code> element. - The <code>uid</code> and <code>gid</code> elements have three attributes: - - - <dl> - <dt><code>start</code></dt> - <dd>First user ID in container. It must be '0'.</dd> - <dt><code>target</code></dt> - <dd>The first user ID in container will be mapped to this target user - ID in host.</dd> - <dt><code>count</code></dt> - <dd>How many users in container are allowed to map to host's user.</dd> - </dl> - - <pre> -<idmap> - <uid start='0' target='1000' count='10'/> - <gid start='0' target='1000' count='10'/> -</idmap> - </pre> - - - <h3><a id="elementsSysinfo">SMBIOS System Information</a></h3> - - - Some hypervisors allow control over what system information is - presented to the guest (for example, SMBIOS fields can be - populated by a hypervisor and inspected via - the <code>dmidecode</code> command in the guest). The - optional <code>sysinfo</code> element covers all such categories - of information. Since 0.8.7 - - -<pre> -... -<os> - <smbios mode='sysinfo'/> - ... -</os> -<sysinfo type='smbios'> - <bios> - <entry name='vendor'>LENOVO</entry> - </bios> - <system> - <entry name='manufacturer'>Fedora</entry> - <entry name='product'>Virt-Manager</entry> - <entry name='version'>0.9.4</entry> - </system> - <baseBoard> - <entry name='manufacturer'>LENOVO</entry> - <entry name='product'>20BE0061MC</entry> - <entry name='version'>0B98401 Pro</entry> - <entry name='serial'>W1KS427111E</entry> - </baseBoard> - <chassis> - <entry name='manufacturer'>Dell Inc.</entry> - <entry name='version'>2.12</entry> - <entry name='serial'>65X0XF2</entry> - <entry name='asset'>40000101</entry> - <entry name='sku'>Type3Sku1</entry> - </chassis> - <oemStrings> - <entry>myappname:some arbitrary data</entry> - <entry>otherappname:more arbitrary data</entry> - </oemStrings> -</sysinfo> -<sysinfo type='fwcfg'> - <entry name='opt/com.example/name'>example value</entry> - <entry name='opt/com.coreos/config' file='/tmp/provision.ign'/> -</sysinfo> -...</pre> - - - The <code>sysinfo</code> element has a mandatory - attribute <code>type</code> that determine the layout of - sub-elements, with supported values of: - - - <dl> - <dt><code>smbios</code></dt> - <dd>Sub-elements call out specific SMBIOS values, which will - affect the guest if used in conjunction with - the <code>smbios</code> sub-element of - the <a href="#elementsOS"><code>os</code></a> element. Each - sub-element of <code>sysinfo</code> names a SMBIOS block, and - within those elements can be a list of <code>entry</code> - elements that describe a field within the block. The following - blocks and entries are recognized: - <dl> - <dt><code>bios</code></dt> - <dd> - This is block 0 of SMBIOS, with entry names drawn from: - <dl> - <dt><code>vendor</code></dt> - <dd>BIOS Vendor's Name</dd> - <dt><code>version</code></dt> - <dd>BIOS Version</dd> - <dt><code>date</code></dt> - <dd>BIOS release date. If supplied, is in either mm/dd/yy or - mm/dd/yyyy format. If the year portion of the string is - two digits, the year is assumed to be 19yy.</dd> - <dt><code>release</code></dt> - <dd>System BIOS Major and Minor release number values - concatenated together as one string separated by - a period, for example, 10.22.</dd> - </dl> - </dd> - <dt><code>system</code></dt> - <dd> - This is block 1 of SMBIOS, with entry names drawn from: - <dl> - <dt><code>manufacturer</code></dt> - <dd>Manufacturer of BIOS</dd> - <dt><code>product</code></dt> - <dd>Product Name</dd> - <dt><code>version</code></dt> - <dd>Version of the product</dd> - <dt><code>serial</code></dt> - <dd>Serial number</dd> - <dt><code>uuid</code></dt> - <dd>Universal Unique ID number. If this entry is provided - alongside a top-level - <a href="#elementsMetadata"><code>uuid</code></a> element, - then the two values must match.</dd> - <dt><code>sku</code></dt> - <dd>SKU number to identify a particular configuration.</dd> - <dt><code>family</code></dt> - <dd>Identify the family a particular computer belongs to.</dd> - </dl> - </dd> - <dt><code>baseBoard</code></dt> - <dd> - This is block 2 of SMBIOS. This element can be repeated multiple - times to describe all the base boards; however, not all - hypervisors necessarily support the repetition. The element can - have the following children: - <dl> - <dt><code>manufacturer</code></dt> - <dd>Manufacturer of BIOS</dd> - <dt><code>product</code></dt> - <dd>Product Name</dd> - <dt><code>version</code></dt> - <dd>Version of the product</dd> - <dt><code>serial</code></dt> - <dd>Serial number</dd> - <dt><code>asset</code></dt> - <dd>Asset tag</dd> - <dt><code>location</code></dt> - <dd>Location in chassis</dd> - </dl> - NB: Incorrectly supplied entries for the - <code>bios</code>, <code>system</code> or <code>baseBoard</code> - blocks will be ignored without error. Other than <code>uuid</code> - validation and <code>date</code> format checking, all values are - passed as strings to the hypervisor driver. - </dd> - <dt><code>chassis</code></dt> - <dd> - Since 4.1.0, this is block 3 of - SMBIOS, with entry names drawn from: - <dl> - <dt><code>manufacturer</code></dt> - <dd>Manufacturer of Chassis</dd> - <dt><code>version</code></dt> - <dd>Version of the Chassis</dd> - <dt><code>serial</code></dt> - <dd>Serial number</dd> - <dt><code>asset</code></dt> - <dd>Asset tag</dd> - <dt><code>sku</code></dt> - <dd>SKU number</dd> - </dl> - </dd> - <dt><code>oemStrings</code></dt> - <dd> - This is block 11 of SMBIOS. This element should appear once and - can have multiple <code>entry</code> child elements, each providing - arbitrary string data. There are no restrictions on what data can - be provided in the entries, however, if the data is intended to be - consumed by an application in the guest, it is recommended to use - the application name as a prefix in the string. (Since 4.1.0) - </dd> - </dl> - </dd> - - <dt><code>fwcfg</code></dt> - <dd> - Some hypervisors provide unified way to tweak how firmware configures - itself, or may contain tables to be installed for the guest OS, for - instance boot order, ACPI, SMBIOS, etc. It even allows users to define - their own config blobs. In case of QEMU, these then appear under domain's - sysfs, under <code>/sys/firmware/qemu_fw_cfg</code>. Note, that these - values apply regardless the <smbios/> mode under <os/>. - Since 6.5.0 - -<pre> - <smbios type='fwcfg'> - <entry name='opt/com.example/name'>example value</entry> - <entry name='opt/com.coreos/config' file='/tmp/provision.ign'/> - </smbios> -</pre> - - The <code>smbios</code> element can have multiple <code>entry</code> - child elements. Each element then has mandatory <code>name</code> - attribute, which defines the name of the blob and must begin with - <code>"opt/"</code> and to avoid clashing with other names is advised to - be in form <code>"opt/$RFQDN/$name"</code> where <code>$RFQDN</code> is a - reverse fully qualified domain name you control. - Then, the element can either contain the value (to set the blob value - directly), or <code>file</code> attribute (to set the blob value from - the file). - </dd> - </dl> - - <h3><a id="elementsCPUAllocation">CPU Allocation</a></h3> - -<pre> -<domain> - ... - <vcpu placement='static' cpuset="1-4,^3,6" current="1">2</vcpu> - <vcpus> - <vcpu id='0' enabled='yes' hotpluggable='no' order='1'/> - <vcpu id='1' enabled='no' hotpluggable='yes'/> - </vcpus> - ... -</domain> -</pre> - - <dl> - <dt><code>vcpu</code></dt> - <dd>The content of this element defines the maximum number of virtual - CPUs allocated for the guest OS, which must be between 1 and - the maximum supported by the hypervisor. - <dl> - <dt><code>cpuset</code></dt> - <dd> - The optional attribute <code>cpuset</code> is a comma-separated - list of physical CPU numbers that domain process and virtual CPUs - can be pinned to by default. (NB: The pinning policy of domain - process and virtual CPUs can be specified separately by - <code>cputune</code>. If the attribute <code>emulatorpin</code> - of <code>cputune</code> is specified, the <code>cpuset</code> - specified by <code>vcpu</code> here will be ignored. Similarly, - for virtual CPUs which have the <code>vcpupin</code> specified, - the <code>cpuset</code> specified by <code>cpuset</code> here - will be ignored. For virtual CPUs which don't have - <code>vcpupin</code> specified, each will be pinned to the physical - CPUs specified by <code>cpuset</code> here). - Each element in that list is either a single CPU number, - a range of CPU numbers, or a caret followed by a CPU number to - be excluded from a previous range. - Since 0.4.4 - </dd> - <dt><code>current</code></dt> - <dd> - The optional attribute <code>current</code> can - be used to specify whether fewer than the maximum number of - virtual CPUs should be enabled. - Since 0.8.5 - </dd> - <dt><code>placement</code></dt> - <dd> - The optional attribute <code>placement</code> can be used to - indicate the CPU placement mode for domain process. The value can - be either "static" or "auto", but defaults to <code>placement</code> - of <code>numatune</code> or "static" if <code>cpuset</code> is - specified. Using "auto" indicates the domain process will be pinned - to the advisory nodeset from querying numad and the value of - attribute <code>cpuset</code> will be ignored if it's specified. - If both <code>cpuset</code> and <code>placement</code> are not - specified or if <code>placement</code> is "static", but no - <code>cpuset</code> is specified, the domain process will be - pinned to all the available physical CPUs. - Since 0.9.11 (QEMU and KVM only) - </dd> - </dl> - </dd> - <dt><code>vcpus</code></dt> - <dd> - The vcpus element allows to control state of individual vCPUs. - - The <code>id</code> attribute specifies the vCPU id as used by libvirt - in other places such as vCPU pinning, scheduler information and NUMA - assignment. Note that the vCPU ID as seen in the guest may differ from - libvirt ID in certain cases. Valid IDs are from 0 to the maximum vCPU - count as set by the <code>vcpu</code> element minus 1. - - The <code>enabled</code> attribute allows to control the state of the - vCPU. Valid values are <code>yes</code> and <code>no</code>. - - <code>hotpluggable</code> controls whether given vCPU can be hotplugged - and hotunplugged in cases when the CPU is enabled at boot. Note that - all disabled vCPUs must be hotpluggable. Valid values are - <code>yes</code> and <code>no</code>. - - <code>order</code> allows to specify the order to add the online vCPUs. - For hypervisors/platforms that require to insert multiple vCPUs at once - the order may be duplicated across all vCPUs that need to be - enabled at once. Specifying order is not necessary, vCPUs are then - added in an arbitrary order. If order info is used, it must be used for - all online vCPUs. Hypervisors may clear or update ordering information - during certain operations to assure valid configuration. - - Note that hypervisors may create hotpluggable vCPUs differently from - boot vCPUs thus special initialization may be necessary. - - Hypervisors may require that vCPUs enabled on boot which are not - hotpluggable are clustered at the beginning starting with ID 0. It may - be also required that vCPU 0 is always present and non-hotpluggable. - - Note that providing state for individual CPUs may be necessary to enable - support of addressable vCPU hotplug and this feature may not be - supported by all hypervisors. - - For QEMU the following conditions are required. vCPU 0 needs to be - enabled and non-hotpluggable. On PPC64 along with it vCPUs that are in - the same core need to be enabled as well. All non-hotpluggable CPUs - present at boot need to be grouped after vCPU 0. - Since 2.2.0 (QEMU only) - </dd> - </dl> - - <h3><a id="elementsIOThreadsAllocation">IOThreads Allocation</a></h3> - - IOThreads are dedicated event loop threads for supported disk - devices to perform block I/O requests in order to improve - scalability especially on an SMP host/guest with many LUNs. - Since 1.2.8 (QEMU only) - - -<pre> -<domain> - ... - <iothreads>4</iothreads> - ... -</domain> -</pre> -<pre> -<domain> - ... - <iothreadids> - <iothread id="2"/> - <iothread id="4"/> - <iothread id="6"/> - <iothread id="8"/> - </iothreadids> - ... -</domain> -</pre> - - <dl> - <dt><code>iothreads</code></dt> - <dd> - The content of this optional element defines the number - of IOThreads to be assigned to the domain for use by - supported target storage devices. There - should be only 1 or 2 IOThreads per host CPU. There may be more - than one supported device assigned to each IOThread. - Since 1.2.8 - </dd> - <dt><code>iothreadids</code></dt> - <dd> - The optional <code>iothreadids</code> element provides the capability - to specifically define the IOThread ID's for the domain. By default, - IOThread ID's are sequentially numbered starting from 1 through the - number of <code>iothreads</code> defined for the domain. The - <code>id</code> attribute is used to define the IOThread ID. The - <code>id</code> attribute must be a positive integer greater than 0. - If there are less <code>iothreadids</code> defined than - <code>iothreads</code> defined for the domain, then libvirt will - sequentially fill <code>iothreadids</code> starting at 1 avoiding - any predefined <code>id</code>. If there are more - <code>iothreadids</code> defined than <code>iothreads</code> - defined for the domain, then the <code>iothreads</code> value - will be adjusted accordingly. - Since 1.2.15 - </dd> - </dl> - - <h3><a id="elementsCPUTuning">CPU Tuning</a></h3> - -<pre> -<domain> - ... - <cputune> - <vcpupin vcpu="0" cpuset="1-4,^2"/> - <vcpupin vcpu="1" cpuset="0,1"/> - <vcpupin vcpu="2" cpuset="2,3"/> - <vcpupin vcpu="3" cpuset="0,4"/> - <emulatorpin cpuset="1-3"/> - <iothreadpin iothread="1" cpuset="5,6"/> - <iothreadpin iothread="2" cpuset="7,8"/> - <shares>2048</shares> - <period>1000000</period> - <quota>-1</quota> - <global_period>1000000</global_period> - <global_quota>-1</global_quota> - <emulator_period>1000000</emulator_period> - <emulator_quota>-1</emulator_quota> - <iothread_period>1000000</iothread_period> - <iothread_quota>-1</iothread_quota> - <vcpusched vcpus='0-4,^3' scheduler='fifo' priority='1'/> - <iothreadsched iothreads='2' scheduler='batch'/> - <cachetune vcpus='0-3'> - <cache id='0' level='3' type='both' size='3' unit='MiB'/> - <cache id='1' level='3' type='both' size='3' unit='MiB'/> - <monitor level='3' vcpus='1'/> - <monitor level='3' vcpus='0-3'/> - </cachetune> - <cachetune vcpus='4-5'> - <monitor level='3' vcpus='4'/> - <monitor level='3' vcpus='5'/> - </cachetune> - <memorytune vcpus='0-3'> - <node id='0' bandwidth='60'/> - </memorytune> - - </cputune> - ... -</domain> -</pre> - - <dl> - <dt><code>cputune</code></dt> - <dd> - The optional <code>cputune</code> element provides details - regarding the CPU tunable parameters for the domain. - Note: for the qemu driver, the optional <code>vcpupin</code> - and <code>emulatorpin</code> pinning settings are honored after - the emulator is launched and NUMA constraints considered. This - means that it is expected that other physical CPUs of the host - will be used during this time by the domain, which will be - reflected by the output of <code>virsh cpu-stats</code>. - Since 0.9.0 - </dd> - <dt><code>vcpupin</code></dt> - <dd> - The optional <code>vcpupin</code> element specifies which of host's - physical CPUs the domain vCPU will be pinned to. If this is omitted, - and attribute <code>cpuset</code> of element <code>vcpu</code> is - not specified, the vCPU is pinned to all the physical CPUs by default. - It contains two required attributes, the attribute <code>vcpu</code> - specifies vCPU id, and the attribute <code>cpuset</code> is same as - attribute <code>cpuset</code> of element <code>vcpu</code>. - (NB: Only qemu driver support) - Since 0.9.0 - </dd> - <dt><code>emulatorpin</code></dt> - <dd> - The optional <code>emulatorpin</code> element specifies which of host - physical CPUs the "emulator", a subset of a domain not including vCPU - or iothreads will be pinned to. If this is omitted, and attribute - <code>cpuset</code> of element <code>vcpu</code> is not specified, - "emulator" is pinned to all the physical CPUs by default. It contains - one required attribute <code>cpuset</code> specifying which physical - CPUs to pin to. - </dd> - <dt><code>iothreadpin</code></dt> - <dd> - The optional <code>iothreadpin</code> element specifies which of host - physical CPUs the IOThreads will be pinned to. If this is omitted - and attribute <code>cpuset</code> of element <code>vcpu</code> is - not specified, the IOThreads are pinned to all the physical CPUs - by default. There are two required attributes, the attribute - <code>iothread</code> specifies the IOThread ID and the attribute - <code>cpuset</code> specifying which physical CPUs to pin to. See - the <code>iothreadids</code> - <a href="#elementsIOThreadsAllocation"><code>description</code></a> - for valid <code>iothread</code> values. - Since 1.2.9 - </dd> - <dt><code>shares</code></dt> - <dd> - The optional <code>shares</code> element specifies the proportional - weighted share for the domain. If this is omitted, it defaults to - the OS provided defaults. NB, There is no unit for the value, - it's a relative measure based on the setting of other VM, - e.g. A VM configured with value - 2048 will get twice as much CPU time as a VM configured with value 1024. - Since 0.9.0 - </dd> - <dt><code>period</code></dt> - <dd> - The optional <code>period</code> element specifies the enforcement - interval (unit: microseconds). Within <code>period</code>, each vCPU of - the domain will not be allowed to consume more than <code>quota</code> - worth of runtime. The value should be in range [1000, 1000000]. A period - with value 0 means no value. - Only QEMU driver support since 0.9.4, LXC since - 0.9.10 - </dd> - <dt><code>quota</code></dt> - <dd> - The optional <code>quota</code> element specifies the maximum allowed - bandwidth (unit: microseconds). A domain with <code>quota</code> as any - negative value indicates that the domain has infinite bandwidth for - vCPU threads, which means that it is not bandwidth controlled. The value - should be in range [1000, 18446744073709551] or less than 0. A quota - with value 0 means no value. You can use this feature to ensure that all - vCPUs run at the same speed. - Only QEMU driver support since 0.9.4, LXC since - 0.9.10 - </dd> - <dt><code>global_period</code></dt> - <dd> - The optional <code>global_period</code> element specifies the - enforcement CFS scheduler interval (unit: microseconds) for the whole - domain in contrast with <code>period</code> which enforces the interval - per vCPU. The value should be in range 1000, 1000000]. A - <code>global_period</code> with value 0 means no value. - Only QEMU driver support since 1.3.3 - </dd> - <dt><code>global_quota</code></dt> - <dd> - The optional <code>global_quota</code> element specifies the maximum - allowed bandwidth (unit: microseconds) within a period for the whole - domain. A domain with <code>global_quota</code> as any negative - value indicates that the domain has infinite bandwidth, which means that - it is not bandwidth controlled. The value should be in range - [1000, 18446744073709551] or less than 0. A <code>global_quota</code> - with value 0 means no value. - Only QEMU driver support since 1.3.3 - </dd> - - <dt><code>emulator_period</code></dt> - <dd> - The optional <code>emulator_period</code> element specifies the enforcement - interval (unit: microseconds). Within <code>emulator_period</code>, emulator - threads (those excluding vCPUs) of the domain will not be allowed to consume - more than <code>emulator_quota</code> worth of runtime. The value should be - in range [1000, 1000000]. A period with value 0 means no value. - Only QEMU driver support since 0.10.0 - </dd> - <dt><code>emulator_quota</code></dt> - <dd> - The optional <code>emulator_quota</code> element specifies the maximum - allowed bandwidth (unit: microseconds) for domain's emulator threads (those - excluding vCPUs). A domain with <code>emulator_quota</code> as any negative - value indicates that the domain has infinite bandwidth for emulator threads - (those excluding vCPUs), which means that it is not bandwidth controlled. - The value should be in range [1000, 18446744073709551] or less than 0. A - quota with value 0 means no value. - Only QEMU driver support since 0.10.0 - </dd> - - <dt><code>iothread_period</code></dt> - <dd> - The optional <code>iothread_period</code> element specifies the - enforcement interval (unit: microseconds) for IOThreads. Within - <code>iothread_period</code>, each IOThread of the domain will - not be allowed to consume more than <code>iothread_quota</code> - worth of runtime. The value should be in range [1000, 1000000]. - An iothread_period with value 0 means no value. - Only QEMU driver support since 2.1.0 - </dd> - <dt><code>iothread_quota</code></dt> - <dd> - The optional <code>iothread_quota</code> element specifies the maximum - allowed bandwidth (unit: microseconds) for IOThreads. A domain with - <code>iothread_quota</code> as any negative value indicates that the - domain IOThreads have infinite bandwidth, which means that it is - not bandwidth controlled. The value should be in range - [1000, 18446744073709551] or less than 0. An <code>iothread_quota</code> - with value 0 means no value. You can use this feature to ensure that - all IOThreads run at the same speed. - Only QEMU driver support since 2.1.0 - </dd> - - <dt><code>vcpusched</code>, <code>iothreadsched</code> - and <code>emulatorsched</code></dt> - <dd> - The optional - <code>vcpusched</code>, <code>iothreadsched</code> - and <code>emulatorsched</code> elements specify the scheduler type - (values <code>batch</code>, <code>idle</code>, <code>fifo</code>, - <code>rr</code>) for particular vCPU, IOThread and emulator threads - respecively. For <code>vcpusched</code> and <code>iothreadsched</code> - the attributes <code>vcpus</code> and <code>iothreads</code> select - which vCPUs/IOThreads this setting applies to, leaving them out sets the - default. The element <code>emulatorsched</code> does not have that - attribute. Valid <code>vcpus</code> values start at 0 through one less - than the number of vCPU's defined for the - domain. Valid <code>iothreads</code> values are described in - the <code>iothreadids</code> - <a href="#elementsIOThreadsAllocation"><code>description</code></a>. - If no <code>iothreadids</code> are defined, then libvirt numbers - IOThreads from 1 to the number of <code>iothreads</code> available - for the domain. For real-time schedulers (<code>fifo</code>, - <code>rr</code>), priority must be specified as - well (and is ignored for non-real-time ones). The value range - for the priority depends on the host kernel (usually 1-99). - Since 1.2.13 - <code>emulatorsched</code> since 5.3.0 - </dd> - - <dt><code>cachetune</code>Since 4.1.0</dt> - <dd> - Optional <code>cachetune</code> element can control allocations for CPU - caches using the resctrl on the host. Whether or not is this supported - can be gathered from capabilities where some limitations like minimum - size and required granularity are reported as well. The required - attribute <code>vcpus</code> specifies to which vCPUs this allocation - applies. A vCPU can only be member of one <code>cachetune</code> element - allocation. The vCPUs specified by cachetune can be identical with those - in memorytune, however they are not allowed to overlap. - Supported subelements are: - <dl> - <dt><code>cache</code></dt> - <dd> - This optional element controls the allocation of CPU cache and has - the following attributes: - <dl> - <dt><code>level</code></dt> - <dd> - Host cache level from which to allocate. - </dd> - <dt><code>id</code></dt> - <dd> - Host cache id from which to allocate. - </dd> - <dt><code>type</code></dt> - <dd> - Type of allocation. Can be <code>code</code> for code - (instructions), <code>data</code> for data or <code>both</code> - for both code and data (unified). Currently the allocation can - be done only with the same type as the host supports, meaning - you cannot request <code>both</code> for host with CDP - (code/data prioritization) enabled. - </dd> - <dt><code>size</code></dt> - <dd> - The size of the region to allocate. The value by default is in - bytes, but the <code>unit</code> attribute can be used to scale - the value. - </dd> - <dt><code>unit</code> (optional)</dt> - <dd> - If specified it is the unit such as KiB, MiB, GiB, or TiB - (described in the <code>memory</code> element - for <a href="#elementsMemoryAllocation">Memory Allocation</a>) - in which <code>size</code> is specified, defaults to bytes. - </dd> - </dl> - </dd> - <dt><code>monitor</code>Since 4.10.0</dt> - <dd> - The optional element <code>monitor</code> creates the cache - monitor(s) for current cache allocation and has the following - required attributes: - <dl> - <dt><code>level</code></dt> - <dd> - Host cache level the monitor belongs to. - </dd> - <dt><code>vcpus</code></dt> - <dd> - vCPU list the monitor applies to. A monitor's vCPU list - can only be the member(s) of the vCPU list of the associated - allocation. The default monitor has the same vCPU list as the - associated allocation. For non-default monitors, overlapping - vCPUs are not permitted. - </dd> - </dl> - </dd> - </dl> - </dd> - - <dt><code>memorytune</code>Since 4.7.0</dt> - <dd> - Optional <code>memorytune</code> element can control allocations for - memory bandwidth using the resctrl on the host. Whether or not is this - supported can be gathered from capabilities where some limitations like - minimum bandwidth and required granularity are reported as well. The - required attribute <code>vcpus</code> specifies to which vCPUs this - allocation applies. A vCPU can only be member of one - <code>memorytune</code> element allocation. The <code>vcpus</code> specified - by <code>memorytune</code> can be identical to those specified by - <code>cachetune</code>. However they are not allowed to overlap each other. - Supported subelements are: - <dl> - <dt><code>node</code></dt> - <dd> - This element controls the allocation of CPU memory bandwidth and has the - following attributes: - <dl> - <dt><code>id</code></dt> - <dd> - Host node id from which to allocate memory bandwidth. - </dd> - <dt><code>bandwidth</code></dt> - <dd> - The memory bandwidth to allocate from this node. The value by default - is in percentage. - </dd> - </dl> - </dd> - </dl> - </dd> - </dl> - - - <h3><a id="elementsMemoryAllocation">Memory Allocation</a></h3> - -<pre> -<domain> - ... - <maxMemory slots='16' unit='KiB'>1524288</maxMemory> - <memory unit='KiB'>524288</memory> - <currentMemory unit='KiB'>524288</currentMemory> - ... -</domain> -</pre> - - <dl> - <dt><code>memory</code></dt> - <dd>The maximum allocation of memory for the guest at boot time. The - memory allocation includes possible additional memory devices specified - at start or hotplugged later. - The units for this value are determined by the optional - attribute <code>unit</code>, which defaults to "KiB" - (kibibytes, 210 or blocks of 1024 bytes). Valid - units are "b" or "bytes" for bytes, "KB" for kilobytes - (103 or 1,000 bytes), "k" or "KiB" for kibibytes - (1024 bytes), "MB" for megabytes (106 or 1,000,000 - bytes), "M" or "MiB" for mebibytes (220 or - 1,048,576 bytes), "GB" for gigabytes (109 or - 1,000,000,000 bytes), "G" or "GiB" for gibibytes - (230 or 1,073,741,824 bytes), "TB" for terabytes - (1012 or 1,000,000,000,000 bytes), or "T" or "TiB" - for tebibytes (240 or 1,099,511,627,776 bytes). - However, the value will be rounded up to the nearest kibibyte - by libvirt, and may be further rounded to the granularity - supported by the hypervisor. Some hypervisors also enforce a - minimum, such as 4000KiB. - - In case <a href="#elementsCPU">NUMA</a> is configured for the guest the - <code>memory</code> element can be omitted. - - In the case of crash, optional attribute <code>dumpCore</code> - can be used to control whether the guest memory should be - included in the generated coredump or not (values "on", "off"). - - <code>unit</code> since 0.9.11, - <code>dumpCore</code> since 0.10.2 - (QEMU only)</dd> - <dt><code>maxMemory</code></dt> - <dd>The run time maximum memory allocation of the guest. The initial - memory specified by either the <code><memory></code> element or - the NUMA cell size configuration can be increased by hot-plugging of - memory to the limit specified by this element. - - The <code>unit</code> attribute behaves the same as for - <code><memory></code>. - - The <code>slots</code> attribute specifies the number of slots - available for adding memory to the guest. The bounds are hypervisor - specific. - - Note that due to alignment of the memory chunks added via memory - hotplug the full size allocation specified by this element may be - impossible to achieve. - Since 1.2.14 supported by the QEMU driver. - </dd> - - <dt><code>currentMemory</code></dt> - <dd>The actual allocation of memory for the guest. This value can - be less than the maximum allocation, to allow for ballooning - up the guests memory on the fly. If this is omitted, it defaults - to the same value as the <code>memory</code> element. - The <code>unit</code> attribute behaves the same as - for <code>memory</code>.</dd> - </dl> - - - <h3><a id="elementsMemoryBacking">Memory Backing</a></h3> - -<pre> -<domain> - ... - <memoryBacking> - <hugepages> - <page size="1" unit="G" nodeset="0-3,5"/> - <page size="2" unit="M" nodeset="4"/> - </hugepages> - <nosharepages/> - <locked/> - <source type="file|anonymous|memfd"/> - <access mode="shared|private"/> - <allocation mode="immediate|ondemand"/> - <discard/> - </memoryBacking> - ... -</domain> -</pre> - - The optional <code>memoryBacking</code> element may contain several - elements that influence how virtual memory pages are backed by host - pages. - - <dl> - <dt><code>hugepages</code></dt> - <dd>This tells the hypervisor that the guest should have its memory - allocated using hugepages instead of the normal native page size. - Since 1.2.5 it's possible to set hugepages - more specifically per numa node. The <code>page</code> element is - introduced. It has one compulsory attribute <code>size</code> which - specifies which hugepages should be used (especially useful on systems - supporting hugepages of different sizes). The default unit for the - <code>size</code> attribute is kilobytes (multiplier of 1024). If you - want to use different unit, use optional <code>unit</code> attribute. - For systems with NUMA, the optional <code>nodeset</code> attribute may - come handy as it ties given guest's NUMA nodes to certain hugepage - sizes. From the example snippet, one gigabyte hugepages are used for - every NUMA node except node number four. For the correct syntax see - <a href="#elementsNUMATuning">this</a>.</dd> - <dt><code>nosharepages</code></dt> - <dd>Instructs hypervisor to disable shared pages (memory merge, KSM) for - this domain. Since 1.0.6</dd> - <dt><code>locked</code></dt> - <dd>When set and supported by the hypervisor, memory pages belonging - to the domain will be locked in host's memory and the host will not - be allowed to swap them out, which might be required for some - workloads such as real-time. For QEMU/KVM guests, the memory used by - the QEMU process itself will be locked too: unlike guest memory, this - is an amount libvirt has no way of figuring out in advance, so it has - to remove the limit on locked memory altogether. Thus, enabling this - option opens up to a potential security risk: the host will be unable - to reclaim the locked memory back from the guest when it's running out - of memory, which means a malicious guest allocating large amounts of - locked memory could cause a denial-of-service attack on the host. - Because of this, using this option is discouraged unless your workload - demands it; even then, it's highly recommended to set a - <code>hard_limit</code> (see - <a href="#elementsMemoryTuning">memory tuning</a>) on memory allocation - suitable for the specific environment at the same time to mitigate - the risks described above. Since 1.0.6</dd> - <dt><code>source</code></dt> - <dd>Using the <code>type</code> attribute, it's possible to - provide "file" to utilize file memorybacking or keep the - default "anonymous". Since 4.10.0, - you may choose "memfd" backing. (QEMU/KVM only)</dd> - <dt><code>access</code></dt> - <dd>Using the <code>mode</code> attribute, specify if the memory is - to be "shared" or "private". This can be overridden per numa node by - <code>memAccess</code>.</dd> - <dt><code>allocation</code></dt> - <dd>Using the <code>mode</code> attribute, specify when to allocate - the memory by supplying either "immediate" or "ondemand".</dd> - <dt><code>discard</code></dt> - <dd>When set and supported by hypervisor the memory - content is discarded just before guest shuts down (or - when DIMM module is unplugged). Please note that this is - just an optimization and is not guaranteed to work in - all cases (e.g. when hypervisor crashes). - Since 4.4.0 (QEMU/KVM only) - </dd> - </dl> - - - <h3><a id="elementsMemoryTuning">Memory Tuning</a></h3> - -<pre> -<domain> - ... - <memtune> - <hard_limit unit='G'>1</hard_limit> - <soft_limit unit='M'>128</soft_limit> - <swap_hard_limit unit='G'>2</swap_hard_limit> - <min_guarantee unit='bytes'>67108864</min_guarantee> - </memtune> - ... -</domain> -</pre> - - <dl> - <dt><code>memtune</code></dt> - <dd> The optional <code>memtune</code> element provides details - regarding the memory tunable parameters for the domain. If this is - omitted, it defaults to the OS provided defaults. For QEMU/KVM, the - parameters are applied to the QEMU process as a whole. Thus, when - counting them, one needs to add up guest RAM, guest video RAM, and - some memory overhead of QEMU itself. The last piece is hard to - determine so one needs guess and try. For each tunable, it - is possible to designate which unit the number is in on - input, using the same values as - for <code><memory></code>. For backwards - compatibility, output is always in - KiB. <code>unit</code> - since 0.9.11 - Possible values for all *_limit parameters are in range from 0 to - VIR_DOMAIN_MEMORY_PARAM_UNLIMITED.</dd> - <dt><code>hard_limit</code></dt> - <dd> The optional <code>hard_limit</code> element is the maximum memory - the guest can use. The units for this value are kibibytes (i.e. blocks - of 1024 bytes). Users of QEMU and KVM are strongly advised not to set - this limit as domain may get killed by the kernel if the guess is too - low, and determining the memory needed for a process to run is an - <a href="http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Undecidable_problem"> - undecidable problem</a>; that said, if you already set - <code>locked</code> in - <a href="#elementsMemoryBacking">memory backing</a> because your - workload demands it, you'll have to take into account the specifics of - your deployment and figure out a value for <code>hard_limit</code> that - is large enough to support the memory requirements of your guest, but - small enough to protect your host against a malicious guest locking all - memory.</dd> - <dt><code>soft_limit</code></dt> - <dd> The optional <code>soft_limit</code> element is the memory limit to - enforce during memory contention. The units for this value are - kibibytes (i.e. blocks of 1024 bytes)</dd> - <dt><code>swap_hard_limit</code></dt> - <dd> The optional <code>swap_hard_limit</code> element is the maximum - memory plus swap the guest can use. The units for this value are - kibibytes (i.e. blocks of 1024 bytes). This has to be more than - hard_limit value provided</dd> - <dt><code>min_guarantee</code></dt> - <dd> The optional <code>min_guarantee</code> element is the guaranteed - minimum memory allocation for the guest. The units for this value are - kibibytes (i.e. blocks of 1024 bytes). This element is only supported - by VMware ESX and OpenVZ drivers.</dd> - </dl> - - - <h3><a id="elementsNUMATuning">NUMA Node Tuning</a></h3> - -<pre> -<domain> - ... - <numatune> - <memory mode="strict" nodeset="1-4,^3"/> - <memnode cellid="0" mode="strict" nodeset="1"/> - <memnode cellid="2" mode="preferred" nodeset="2"/> - </numatune> - ... -</domain> -</pre> - - <dl> - <dt><code>numatune</code></dt> - <dd> - The optional <code>numatune</code> element provides details of - how to tune the performance of a NUMA host via controlling NUMA policy - for domain process. NB, only supported by QEMU driver. - Since 0.9.3 - </dd> - <dt><code>memory</code></dt> - <dd> - The optional <code>memory</code> element specifies how to allocate memory - for the domain process on a NUMA host. It contains several optional - attributes. Attribute <code>mode</code> is either 'interleave', - 'strict', or 'preferred', defaults to 'strict'. Attribute - <code>nodeset</code> specifies the NUMA nodes, using the same syntax as - attribute <code>cpuset</code> of element <code>vcpu</code>. Attribute - <code>placement</code> (since 0.9.12) can be - used to indicate the memory placement mode for domain process, its value - can be either "static" or "auto", defaults to <code>placement</code> of - <code>vcpu</code>, or "static" if <code>nodeset</code> is specified. - "auto" indicates the domain process will only allocate memory from the - advisory nodeset returned from querying numad, and the value of attribute - <code>nodeset</code> will be ignored if it's specified. - - If <code>placement</code> of <code>vcpu</code> is 'auto', and - <code>numatune</code> is not specified, a default <code>numatune</code> - with <code>placement</code> 'auto' and <code>mode</code> 'strict' will - be added implicitly. - - Since 0.9.3 - </dd> - <dt><code>memnode</code></dt> - <dd> - Optional <code>memnode</code> elements can specify memory allocation - policies per each guest NUMA node. For those nodes having no - corresponding <code>memnode</code> element, the default from - element <code>memory</code> will be used. Attribute <code>cellid</code> - addresses guest NUMA node for which the settings are applied. - Attributes <code>mode</code> and <code>nodeset</code> have the same - meaning and syntax as in <code>memory</code> element. - - This setting is not compatible with automatic placement. - QEMU Since 1.2.7 - </dd> - </dl> - - - <h3><a id="elementsBlockTuning">Block I/O Tuning</a></h3> -<pre> -<domain> - ... - <blkiotune> - <weight>800</weight> - <device> - <path>/dev/sda</path> - <weight>1000</weight> - </device> - <device> - <path>/dev/sdb</path> - <weight>500</weight> - <read_bytes_sec>10000</read_bytes_sec> - <write_bytes_sec>10000</write_bytes_sec> - <read_iops_sec>20000</read_iops_sec> - <write_iops_sec>20000</write_iops_sec> - </device> - </blkiotune> - ... -</domain> -</pre> - - <dl> - <dt><code>blkiotune</code></dt> - <dd> The optional <code>blkiotune</code> element provides the ability - to tune Blkio cgroup tunable parameters for the domain. If this is - omitted, it defaults to the OS provided - defaults. Since 0.8.8</dd> - <dt><code>weight</code></dt> - <dd> The optional <code>weight</code> element is the overall I/O - weight of the guest. The value should be in the range [100, - 1000]. After kernel 2.6.39, the value could be in the - range [10, 1000].</dd> - <dt><code>device</code></dt> - <dd>The domain may have multiple <code>device</code> elements - that further tune the weights for each host block device in - use by the domain. Note that - multiple <a href="#elementsDisks">guest disks</a> can share a - single host block device, if they are backed by files within - the same host file system, which is why this tuning parameter - is at the global domain level rather than associated with each - guest disk device (contrast this to - the <a href="#elementsDisks"><code><iotune></code></a> - element which can apply to an - individual <code><disk></code>). - Each <code>device</code> element has two - mandatory sub-elements, <code>path</code> describing the - absolute path of the device, and <code>weight</code> giving - the relative weight of that device, in the range [100, - 1000]. After kernel 2.6.39, the value could be in the - range [10, 1000]. Since 0.9.8 - Additionally, the following optional sub-elements can be used: - <dl> - <dt><code>read_bytes_sec</code></dt> - <dd>Read throughput limit in bytes per second. - Since 1.2.2</dd> - <dt><code>write_bytes_sec</code></dt> - <dd>Write throughput limit in bytes per second. - Since 1.2.2</dd> - <dt><code>read_iops_sec</code></dt> - <dd>Read I/O operations per second limit. - Since 1.2.2</dd> - <dt><code>write_iops_sec</code></dt> - <dd>Write I/O operations per second limit. - Since 1.2.2</dd> - </dl></dd></dl> - - - <h3><a id="resPartition">Resource partitioning</a></h3> - - - Hypervisors may allow for virtual machines to be placed into - resource partitions, potentially with nesting of said partitions. - The <code>resource</code> element groups together configuration - related to resource partitioning. It currently supports a child - element <code>partition</code> whose content defines the absolute path - of the resource partition in which to place the domain. If no - partition is listed, then the domain will be placed in a default - partition. It is the responsibility of the app/admin to ensure - that the partition exists prior to starting the guest. Only the - (hypervisor specific) default partition can be assumed to exist - by default. - -<pre> -... -<resource> - <partition>/virtualmachines/production</partition> -</resource> -... -</pre> - - - Resource partitions are currently supported by the QEMU and - LXC drivers, which map partition paths to cgroups directories, - in all mounted controllers. Since 1.0.5 - - - <h3><a id="elementsCPU">CPU model and topology</a></h3> - - - Requirements for CPU model, its features and topology can be specified - using the following collection of elements. - Since 0.7.5 - - -<pre> -... -<cpu match='exact'> - <model fallback='allow'>core2duo</model> - <vendor>Intel</vendor> - <topology sockets='1' dies='1' cores='2' threads='1'/> - <cache level='3' mode='emulate'/> - <feature policy='disable' name='lahf_lm'/> -</cpu> -...</pre> - -<pre> -<cpu mode='host-model'> - <model fallback='forbid'/> - <topology sockets='1' dies='1' cores='2' threads='1'/> -</cpu> -...</pre> - -<pre> -<cpu mode='host-passthrough' migratable='off'> - <cache mode='passthrough'/> - <feature policy='disable' name='lahf_lm'/> -...</pre> - - - In case no restrictions need to be put on CPU model and its features, a - simpler <code>cpu</code> element can be used. - Since 0.7.6 - - -<pre> -... -<cpu> - <topology sockets='1' dies='1' cores='2' threads='1'/> -</cpu> -...</pre> - - <dl> - <dt><code>cpu</code></dt> - <dd>The <code>cpu</code> element is the main container for describing - guest CPU requirements. Its <code>match</code> attribute specifies how - strictly the virtual CPU provided to the guest matches these - requirements. Since 0.7.6 the - <code>match</code> attribute can be omitted if <code>topology</code> - is the only element within <code>cpu</code>. Possible values for the - <code>match</code> attribute are: - - <dl> - <dt><code>minimum</code></dt> - <dd>The specified CPU model and features describes the minimum - requested CPU. A better CPU will be provided to the guest if it - is possible with the requested hypervisor on the current host. - This is a constrained <code>host-model</code> mode; the domain - will not be created if the provided virtual CPU does not meet - the requirements.</dd> - - <dt><code>exact</code></dt> - <dd>The virtual CPU provided to the guest should exactly match the - specification. If such CPU is not supported, libvirt will refuse - to start the domain.</dd> - - <dt><code>strict</code></dt> - <dd>The domain will not be created unless the host CPU exactly - matches the specification. This is not very useful in practice - and should only be used if there is a real reason.</dd> - </dl> - - Since 0.8.5 the <code>match</code> - attribute can be omitted and will default to <code>exact</code>. - - Sometimes the hypervisor is not able to create a virtual CPU exactly - matching the specification passed by libvirt. - Since 3.2.0, an optional <code>check</code> - attribute can be used to request a specific way of checking whether - the virtual CPU matches the specification. It is usually safe to omit - this attribute when starting a domain and stick with the default - value. Once the domain starts, libvirt will automatically change the - <code>check</code> attribute to the best supported value to ensure the - virtual CPU does not change when the domain is migrated to another - host. The following values can be used: - - <dl> - <dt><code>none</code></dt> - <dd>Libvirt does no checking and it is up to the hypervisor to - refuse to start the domain if it cannot provide the requested CPU. - With QEMU this means no checking is done at all since the default - behavior of QEMU is to emit warnings, but start the domain anyway. - </dd> - - <dt><code>partial</code></dt> - <dd>Libvirt will check the guest CPU specification before starting - a domain, but the rest is left on the hypervisor. It can still - provide a different virtual CPU.</dd> - - <dt><code>full</code></dt> - <dd>The virtual CPU created by the hypervisor will be checked - against the CPU specification and the domain will not be started - unless the two CPUs match.</dd> - </dl> - - Since 0.9.10, an optional <code>mode</code> - attribute may be used to make it easier to configure a guest CPU to be - as close to host CPU as possible. Possible values for the - <code>mode</code> attribute are: - - <dl> - <dt><code>custom</code></dt> - <dd>In this mode, the <code>cpu</code> element describes the CPU - that should be presented to the guest. This is the default when no - <code>mode</code> attribute is specified. This mode makes it so that - a persistent guest will see the same hardware no matter what host - the guest is booted on.</dd> - <dt><code>host-model</code></dt> - <dd>The <code>host-model</code> mode is essentially a shortcut to - copying host CPU definition from capabilities XML into domain XML. - Since the CPU definition is copied just before starting a domain, - exactly the same XML can be used on different hosts while still - providing the best guest CPU each host supports. The - <code>match</code> attribute can't be used in this mode. Specifying - CPU model is not supported either, but <code>model</code>'s - <code>fallback</code> attribute may still be used. Using the - <code>feature</code> element, specific flags may be enabled or - disabled specifically in addition to the host model. This may be - used to fine tune features that can be emulated. - (Since 1.1.1). - Libvirt does not model every aspect of each CPU so - the guest CPU will not match the host CPU exactly. On the other - hand, the ABI provided to the guest is reproducible. During - migration, complete CPU model definition is transferred to the - destination host so the migrated guest will see exactly the same CPU - model for the running instance of the guest, even if the destination - host contains more capable CPUs or newer kernel; but shutting down and restarting - the guest may present different hardware to the guest according to - the capabilities of the new host. Prior to libvirt 3.2.0 and QEMU - 2.9.0 detection of the host CPU model via QEMU is not supported. - Thus the CPU configuration created using <code>host-model</code> - may not work as expected. - Since 3.2.0 and QEMU 2.9.0 this mode - works the way it was designed and it is indicated by the - <code>fallback</code> attribute set to <code>forbid</code> in the - host-model CPU definition advertised in - <a href="formatdomaincaps.html#elementsCPU">domain capabilities XML</a>. - When <code>fallback</code> attribute is set to <code>allow</code> - in the domain capabilities XML, it is recommended to use - <code>custom</code> mode with just the CPU model from the host - capabilities XML. Since 1.2.11 PowerISA - allows processors to run VMs in binary compatibility mode supporting - an older version of ISA. Libvirt on PowerPC architecture uses the - <code>host-model</code> to signify a guest mode CPU running in - binary compatibility mode. Example: - When a user needs a power7 VM to run in compatibility mode - on a Power8 host, this can be described in XML as follows : -<pre> -<cpu mode='host-model'> - <model>power7</model> -</cpu> -...</pre> - </dd> - <dt><code>host-passthrough</code></dt> - <dd>With this mode, the CPU visible to the guest should be exactly - the same as the host CPU even in the aspects that libvirt does not - understand. Though the downside of this mode is that the guest - environment cannot be reproduced on different hardware. Thus, if you - hit any bugs, you are on your own. Further details of that CPU can - be changed using <code>feature</code> elements. Migration of a guest - using host-passthrough is dangerous if the source and destination hosts - are not identical in both hardware, QEMU version, microcode version - and configuration. If such a migration is attempted then the guest may - hang or crash upon resuming execution on the destination host. - Depending on hypervisor version the virtual CPU may or may not - contain features which may block migration even to an identical host. - Since 6.5.0 optional - <code>migratable</code> attribute may be used to explicitly request - such features to be removed from (<code>on</code>) or kept in - (<code>off</code>) the virtual CPU. This attribute does not make - migration to another host safer: even with - <code>migratable='on'</code> migration will be dangerous unless both - hosts are identical as described above. - </dd> - </dl> - - Both <code>host-model</code> and <code>host-passthrough</code> modes - make sense when a domain can run directly on the host CPUs (for - example, domains with type <code>kvm</code>). The actual host CPU is - irrelevant for domains with emulated virtual CPUs (such as domains with - type <code>qemu</code>). However, for backward compatibility - <code>host-model</code> may be implemented even for domains running on - emulated CPUs in which case the best CPU the hypervisor is able to - emulate may be used rather then trying to mimic the host CPU model. - </dd> - - <dt><code>model</code></dt> - <dd>The content of the <code>model</code> element specifies CPU model - requested by the guest. The list of available CPU models and their - definition can be found in <code>cpu_map.xml</code> file installed - in libvirt's data directory. If a hypervisor is not able to use the - exact CPU model, libvirt automatically falls back to a closest model - supported by the hypervisor while maintaining the list of CPU - features. Since 0.9.10, an optional - <code>fallback</code> attribute can be used to forbid this behavior, - in which case an attempt to start a domain requesting an unsupported - CPU model will fail. Supported values for <code>fallback</code> - attribute are: <code>allow</code> (this is the default), and - <code>forbid</code>. The optional <code>vendor_id</code> attribute - (Since 0.10.0) can be used to set the - vendor id seen by the guest. It must be exactly 12 characters long. - If not set the vendor id of the host is used. Typical possible - values are "AuthenticAMD" and "GenuineIntel".</dd> - - <dt><code>vendor</code></dt> - <dd>Since 0.8.3 the content of the - <code>vendor</code> element specifies CPU vendor requested by the - guest. If this element is missing, the guest can be run on a CPU - matching given features regardless on its vendor. The list of - supported vendors can be found in <code>cpu_map.xml</code>.</dd> - - <dt><code>topology</code></dt> - <dd>The <code>topology</code> element specifies requested topology of - virtual CPU provided to the guest. Four attributes, <code>sockets</code>, - <code>dies</code>, <code>cores</code>, and <code>threads</code>, - accept non-zero positive integer values. They refer to the number of - CPU sockets per NUMA node, number of dies per socket, number of cores - per die, and number of threads per core, respectively. The <code>dies</code> - attribute is optional and will default to 1 if omitted, while the other - attributes are all mandatory. Hypervisors may require that the maximum - number of vCPUs specified by the <code>cpus</code> element equals to - the number of vcpus resulting from the topology.</dd> - - <dt><code>feature</code></dt> - <dd>The <code>cpu</code> element can contain zero or more - <code>elements</code> used to fine-tune features provided by the - selected CPU model. The list of known feature names can be found in - the same file as CPU models. The meaning of each <code>feature</code> - element depends on its <code>policy</code> attribute, which has to be - set to one of the following values: - - <dl> - <dt><code>force</code></dt> - <dd>The virtual CPU will claim the feature is supported regardless - of it being supported by host CPU.</dd> - <dt><code>require</code></dt> - <dd>Guest creation will fail unless the feature is supported by the - host CPU or the hypervisor is able to emulate it.</dd> - <dt><code>optional</code></dt> - <dd>The feature will be supported by virtual CPU if and only if it - is supported by host CPU.</dd> - <dt><code>disable</code></dt> - <dd>The feature will not be supported by virtual CPU.</dd> - <dt><code>forbid</code></dt> - <dd>Guest creation will fail if the feature is supported by host - CPU.</dd> - </dl> - - Since 0.8.5 the <code>policy</code> - attribute can be omitted and will default to <code>require</code>. - - Individual CPU feature names are specified as part of the - <code>name</code> attribute. For example, to explicitly specify - the 'pcid' feature with Intel IvyBridge CPU model: - - -<pre> -... -<cpu match='exact'> - <model fallback='forbid'>IvyBridge</model> - <vendor>Intel</vendor> - <feature policy='require' name='pcid'/> -</cpu> -...</pre> - - </dd> - - <dt><code>cache</code></dt> - <dd>Since 3.3.0 the <code>cache</code> - element describes the virtual CPU cache. If the element is missing, - the hypervisor will use a sensible default. - - <dl> - <dt><code>level</code></dt> - <dd>This optional attribute specifies which cache level is described - by the element. Missing attribute means the element describes all - CPU cache levels at once. Mixing <code>cache</code> elements with - the <code>level</code> attribute set and those without the - attribute is forbidden.</dd> - - <dt><code>mode</code></dt> - <dd> - The following values are supported: - <dl> - <dt><code>emulate</code></dt> - <dd>The hypervisor will provide a fake CPU cache data.</dd> - - <dt><code>passthrough</code></dt> - <dd>The real CPU cache data reported by the host CPU will be - passed through to the virtual CPU.</dd> - - <dt><code>disable</code></dt> - <dd>The virtual CPU will report no CPU cache of the specified - level (or no cache at all if the <code>level</code> attribute - is missing).</dd> - </dl> - </dd> - </dl> - </dd> - </dl> - - - Guest NUMA topology can be specified using the <code>numa</code> element. - Since 0.9.8 - - -<pre> -... -<cpu> - ... - <numa> - <cell id='0' cpus='0-3' memory='512000' unit='KiB' discard='yes'/> - <cell id='1' cpus='4-7' memory='512000' unit='KiB' memAccess='shared'/> - </numa> - ... -</cpu> -...</pre> - - - Each <code>cell</code> element specifies a NUMA cell or a NUMA node. - <code>cpus</code> specifies the CPU or range of CPUs that are - part of the node. Since 6.5.0 For the qemu - driver, if the emulator binary supports disjointed <code>cpus</code> ranges - in each <code>cell</code>, the sum of all CPUs declared in each <code>cell</code> - will be matched with the maximum number of virtual CPUs declared in the - <code>vcpu</code> element. This is done by filling any remaining CPUs - into the first NUMA <code>cell</code>. Users are encouraged to supply a - complete NUMA topology, where the sum of the NUMA CPUs matches the maximum - virtual CPUs number declared in <code>vcpus</code>, to make the domain - consistent across qemu and libvirt versions. - <code>memory</code> specifies the node memory - in kibibytes (i.e. blocks of 1024 bytes). - Since 6.6.0 the <code>cpus</code> attribute - is optional and if omitted a CPU-less NUMA node is created. - Since 1.2.11 one can use an additional <a - href="#elementsMemoryAllocation"><code>unit</code></a> attribute to - define units in which <code>memory</code> is specified. - Since 1.2.7 all cells should - have <code>id</code> attribute in case referring to some cell is - necessary in the code, otherwise the cells are - assigned <code>id</code>s in the increasing order starting from - 0. Mixing cells with and without the <code>id</code> attribute - is not recommended as it may result in unwanted behaviour. - - Since 1.2.9 the optional attribute - <code>memAccess</code> can control whether the memory is to be - mapped as "shared" or "private". This is valid only for - hugepages-backed memory and nvdimm modules. - - Each <code>cell</code> element can have an optional - <code>discard</code> attribute which fine tunes the discard - feature for given numa node as described under - <a href="#elementsMemoryBacking">Memory Backing</a>. - Accepted values are <code>yes</code> and <code>no</code>. - Since 4.4.0 - - - - This guest NUMA specification is currently available only for - QEMU/KVM and Xen. - - - - A NUMA hardware architecture supports the notion of distances - between NUMA cells. Since 3.10.0 it - is possible to define the distance between NUMA cells using the - <code>distances</code> element within a NUMA <code>cell</code> - description. The <code>sibling</code> sub-element is used to - specify the distance value between sibling NUMA cells. For more - details, see the chapter explaining the system's SLIT (System - Locality Information Table) within the ACPI (Advanced - Configuration and Power Interface) specification. - - -<pre> -... -<cpu> - ... - <numa> - <cell id='0' cpus='0,4-7' memory='512000' unit='KiB'> - <distances> - <sibling id='0' value='10'/> - <sibling id='1' value='21'/> - <sibling id='2' value='31'/> - <sibling id='3' value='41'/> - </distances> - </cell> - <cell id='1' cpus='1,8-10,12-15' memory='512000' unit='KiB' memAccess='shared'> - <distances> - <sibling id='0' value='21'/> - <sibling id='1' value='10'/> - <sibling id='2' value='21'/> - <sibling id='3' value='31'/> - </distances> - </cell> - <cell id='2' cpus='2,11' memory='512000' unit='KiB' memAccess='shared'> - <distances> - <sibling id='0' value='31'/> - <sibling id='1' value='21'/> - <sibling id='2' value='10'/> - <sibling id='3' value='21'/> - </distances> - </cell> - <cell id='3' cpus='3' memory='512000' unit='KiB'> - <distances> - <sibling id='0' value='41'/> - <sibling id='1' value='31'/> - <sibling id='2' value='21'/> - <sibling id='3' value='10'/> - </distances> - </cell> - </numa> - ... -</cpu> -...</pre> - - - Describing distances between NUMA cells is currently only supported - by Xen and QEMU. If no <code>distances</code> are given to describe - the SLIT data between different cells, it will default to a scheme - using 10 for local and 20 for remote distances. - - - <h4><a id="hmat">ACPI Heterogeneous Memory Attribute Table</a></h4> - -<pre> -... -<cpu> - ... - <numa> - <cell id='0' cpus='0-3' memory='512000' unit='KiB' discard='yes'/> - <cell id='1' cpus='4-7' memory='512000' unit='KiB' memAccess='shared'/> - <cell id='3' cpus='0-3' memory='2097152' unit='KiB'> - <cache level='1' associativity='direct' policy='writeback'> - <size value='10' unit='KiB'/> - <line value='8' unit='B'/> - </cache> - </cell> - <interconnects> - <latency initiator='0' target='0' type='access' value='5'/> - <latency initiator='0' target='0' cache='1' type='access' value='10'/> - <bandwidth initiator='0' target='0' type='access' value='204800' unit='KiB'/> - </interconnects> - </numa> - ... -</cpu> -...</pre> - - - Since 6.6.0 the <code>cell</code> element can - have a <code>cache</code> child element which describes memory side cache - for memory proximity domains. The <code>cache</code> element has a - <code>level</code> attribute describing the cache level and thus the - element can be repeated multiple times to describe different levels of - the cache. - - - - The <code>cache</code> element then has following mandatory attributes: - - - <dl> - <dt><code>level</code></dt> - <dd> - Level of the cache this description refers to. - </dd> - - <dt><code>associativity</code></dt> - <dd> - Describes cache associativity (accepted values are <code>none</code>, - <code>direct</code> and <code>full</code>). - </dd> - - <dt><code>policy</code></dt> - <dd> - Describes cache write associativity (accepted values are - <code>none</code>, <code>writeback</code> and - <code>writethrough</code>). - </dd> - </dl> - - - The <code>cache</code> element has two mandatory child elements then: - <code>size</code> and <code>line</code> which describe cache size and - cache line size. Both elements accept two attributes: <code>value</code> - and <code>unit</code> which set the value of corresponding cache - attribute. - - - - The NUMA description has an optional <code>interconnects</code> element that - describes the normalized memory read/write latency, read/write bandwidth - between Initiator Proximity Domains (Processor or I/O) and Target - Proximity Domains (Memory). - - - - The <code>interconnects</code> element can have zero or more - <code>latency</code> child elements to describe latency between two - memory nodes and zero or more <code>bandwidth</code> child elements to - describe bandwidth between two memory nodes. Both these have the - following mandatory attributes: - - - <dl> - <dt><code>initiator</code></dt> - <dd>Refers to the source NUMA node</dd> - - <dt><code>target</code></dt> - <dd>Refers to the target NUMA node</dd> - - <dt><code>type</code></dt> - <dd>The type of the access. Accepted values: <code>access</code>, - <code>read</code>, <code>write</code></dd> - - <dt><code>value</code></dt> - <dd>The actual value. For latency this is delay in nanoseconds, for - bandwidth this value is in kibibytes per second. Use additional - <code>unit</code> attribute to change the units.</dd> - </dl> - - - To describe latency from one NUMA node to a cache of another NUMA node - the <code>latency</code> element has optional <code>cache</code> - attribute which in combination with <code>target</code> attribute creates - full reference to distant NUMA node's cache level. For instance, - <code>target='0' cache='1'</code> refers to the first level cache of NUMA - node 0. - - - <h3><a id="elementsEvents">Events configuration</a></h3> - - - It is sometimes necessary to override the default actions taken - on various events. Not all hypervisors support all events and actions. - The actions may be taken as a result of calls to libvirt APIs - <a href="html/libvirt-libvirt-domain.html#virDomainReboot"> - <code>virDomainReboot</code> - </a>, - <a href="html/libvirt-libvirt-domain.html#virDomainShutdown"> - <code>virDomainShutdown</code> - </a>, - or - <a href="html/libvirt-libvirt-domain.html#virDomainShutdownFlags"> - <code>virDomainShutdownFlags</code> - </a>. - Using <code>virsh reboot</code> or <code>virsh shutdown</code> would - also trigger the event. - - -<pre> -... -<on_poweroff>destroy</on_poweroff> -<on_reboot>restart</on_reboot> -<on_crash>restart</on_crash> -<on_lockfailure>poweroff</on_lockfailure> -...</pre> - - - The following collections of elements allow the actions to be - specified when a guest OS triggers a lifecycle operation. A - common use case is to force a reboot to be treated as a poweroff - when doing the initial OS installation. This allows the VM to be - re-configured for the first post-install bootup. - - <dl> - <dt><code>on_poweroff</code></dt> - <dd>The content of this element specifies the action to take when - the guest requests a poweroff.</dd> - <dt><code>on_reboot</code></dt> - <dd>The content of this element specifies the action to take when - the guest requests a reboot.</dd> - <dt><code>on_crash</code></dt> - <dd>The content of this element specifies the action to take when - the guest crashes.</dd> - </dl> - - - Each of these states allow for the same four possible actions. - - - <dl> - <dt><code>destroy</code></dt> - <dd>The domain will be terminated completely and all resources - released.</dd> - <dt><code>restart</code></dt> - <dd>The domain will be terminated and then restarted with - the same configuration.</dd> - <dt><code>preserve</code></dt> - <dd>The domain will be terminated and its resource preserved - to allow analysis.</dd> - <dt><code>rename-restart</code></dt> - <dd>The domain will be terminated and then restarted with - a new name.</dd> - </dl> - - - QEMU/KVM supports the <code>on_poweroff</code> and <code>on_reboot</code> - events handling the <code>destroy</code> and <code>restart</code> actions. - The <code>preserve</code> action for an <code>on_reboot</code> event - is treated as a <code>destroy</code> and the <code>rename-restart</code> - action for an <code>on_poweroff</code> event is treated as a - <code>restart</code> event. - - - - The <code>on_crash</code> event supports these additional - actions since 0.8.4. - - - <dl> - <dt><code>coredump-destroy</code></dt> - <dd>The crashed domain's core will be dumped, and then the - domain will be terminated completely and all resources - released</dd> - <dt><code>coredump-restart</code></dt> - <dd>The crashed domain's core will be dumped, and then the - domain will be restarted with the same configuration</dd> - </dl> - - - Since 3.9.0, the lifecycle events can - be configured via the - <a href="html/libvirt-libvirt-domain.html#virDomainSetLifecycleAction"> - <code>virDomainSetLifecycleAction</code></a> API. - - - - The <code>on_lockfailure</code> element (since - 1.0.0) may be used to configure what action should be - taken when a lock manager loses resource locks. The following - actions are recognized by libvirt, although not all of them need - to be supported by individual lock managers. When no action is - specified, each lock manager will take its default action. - - <dl> - <dt><code>poweroff</code></dt> - <dd>The domain will be forcefully powered off.</dd> - <dt><code>restart</code></dt> - <dd>The domain will be powered off and started up again to - reacquire its locks.</dd> - <dt><code>pause</code></dt> - <dd>The domain will be paused so that it can be manually resumed - when lock issues are solved.</dd> - <dt><code>ignore</code></dt> - <dd>Keep the domain running as if nothing happened.</dd> - </dl> - - <h3><a id="elementsPowerManagement">Power Management</a></h3> - - - Since 0.10.2 it is possible to - forcibly enable or disable BIOS advertisements to the guest - OS. (NB: Only qemu driver support) - - -<pre> -... -<pm> - <suspend-to-disk enabled='no'/> - <suspend-to-mem enabled='yes'/> -</pm> -...</pre> - - <dl> - <dt><code>pm</code></dt> - <dd>These elements enable ('yes') or disable ('no') BIOS support - for S3 (suspend-to-mem) and S4 (suspend-to-disk) ACPI sleep - states. If nothing is specified, then the hypervisor will be - left with its default value. - Note: This setting cannot prevent the guest OS from performing - a suspend as the guest OS itself can choose to circumvent the - unavailability of the sleep states (e.g. S4 by turning off - completely).</dd> - </dl> - - <h3><a id="elementsFeatures">Hypervisor features</a></h3> - - - Hypervisors may allow certain CPU / machine features to be - toggled on/off. - - -<pre> -... -<features> - <pae/> - <acpi/> - <apic/> - <hap/> - <privnet/> - <hyperv> - <relaxed state='on'/> - <vapic state='on'/> - <spinlocks state='on' retries='4096'/> - <vpindex state='on'/> - <runtime state='on'/> - <synic state='on'/> - <stimer state='on'> - <direct state='on'/> - </stimer> - <reset state='on'/> - <vendor_id state='on' value='KVM Hv'/> - <frequencies state='on'/> - <reenlightenment state='on'/> - <tlbflush state='on'/> - <ipi state='on'/> - <evmcs state='on'/> - </hyperv> - <kvm> - <hidden state='on'/> - <hint-dedicated state='on'/> - </kvm> - <xen> - <e820_host state='on'/> - <passthrough state='on' mode='share_pt'/> - </xen> - <pvspinlock state='on'/> - <gic version='2'/> - <ioapic driver='qemu'/> - <hpt resizing='required'> - <maxpagesize unit='MiB'>16</maxpagesize> - </hpt> - <vmcoreinfo state='on'/> - <smm state='on'> - <tseg unit='MiB'>48</tseg> - </smm> - <htm state='on'/> - <ccf-assist state='on'/> - <msrs unknown='ignore'/> - <cfpc value='workaround'/> - <sbbc value='workaround'/> - <ibs value='fixed-na'/> -</features> -...</pre> - - - All features are listed within the <code>features</code> - element, omitting a togglable feature tag turns it off. - The available features can be found by asking - for the <a href="formatcaps.html">capabilities XML</a> and - <a href="formatdomaincaps.html">domain capabilities XML</a>, - but a common set for fully virtualized domains are: - - - <dl> - <dt><code>pae</code></dt> - <dd>Physical address extension mode allows 32-bit guests - to address more than 4 GB of memory.</dd> - <dt><code>acpi</code></dt> - <dd>ACPI is useful for power management, for example, with - KVM guests it is required for graceful shutdown to work. - </dd> - <dt><code>apic</code></dt> - <dd>APIC allows the use of programmable IRQ - management. Since 0.10.2 (QEMU only) there is - an optional attribute <code>eoi</code> with values <code>on</code> - and <code>off</code> which toggles the availability of EOI (End of - Interrupt) for the guest. - </dd> - <dt><code>hap</code></dt> - <dd>Depending on the <code>state</code> attribute (values <code>on</code>, - <code>off</code>) enable or disable use of Hardware Assisted Paging. - The default is <code>on</code> if the hypervisor detects availability - of Hardware Assisted Paging. - </dd> - <dt><code>viridian</code></dt> - <dd>Enable Viridian hypervisor extensions for paravirtualizing - guest operating systems - </dd> - <dt><code>privnet</code></dt> - <dd>Always create a private network namespace. This is - automatically set if any interface devices are defined. - This feature is only relevant for container based - virtualization drivers, such as LXC. - </dd> - <dt><code>hyperv</code></dt> - <dd>Enable various features improving behavior of guests - running Microsoft Windows. - <table class="top_table"> - <tr> - <th>Feature</th> - <th>Description</th> - <th>Value</th> - <th>Since</th> - </tr> - <tr> - <td>relaxed</td> - <td>Relax constraints on timers</td> - <td>on, off</td> - <td>1.0.0 (QEMU 2.0)</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td>vapic</td> - <td>Enable virtual APIC</td> - <td>on, off</td> - <td>1.1.0 (QEMU 2.0)</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td>spinlocks</td> - <td>Enable spinlock support</td> - <td>on, off; retries - at least 4095</td> - <td>1.1.0 (QEMU 2.0)</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td>vpindex</td> - <td>Virtual processor index</td> - <td>on, off</td> - <td>1.3.3 (QEMU 2.5)</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td>runtime</td> - <td>Processor time spent on running guest code and on behalf of guest code</td> - <td>on, off</td> - <td>1.3.3 (QEMU 2.5)</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td>synic</td> - <td>Enable Synthetic Interrupt Controller (SynIC)</td> - <td>on, off</td> - <td>1.3.3 (QEMU 2.6)</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td>stimer</td> - <td>Enable SynIC timers, optionally with Direct Mode support</td> - <td>on, off; direct - on,off</td> - <td>1.3.3 (QEMU 2.6), direct mode 5.7.0 (QEMU 4.1)</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td>reset</td> - <td>Enable hypervisor reset</td> - <td>on, off</td> - <td>1.3.3 (QEMU 2.5)</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td>vendor_id</td> - <td>Set hypervisor vendor id</td> - <td>on, off; value - string, up to 12 characters</td> - <td>1.3.3 (QEMU 2.5)</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td>frequencies</td> - <td>Expose frequency MSRs</td> - <td>on, off</td> - <td>4.7.0 (QEMU 2.12)</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td>reenlightenment</td> - <td>Enable re-enlightenment notification on migration</td> - <td>on, off</td> - <td>4.7.0 (QEMU 3.0)</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td>tlbflush</td> - <td>Enable PV TLB flush support</td> - <td>on, off</td> - <td>4.7.0 (QEMU 3.0)</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td>ipi</td> - <td>Enable PV IPI support</td> - <td>on, off</td> - <td>4.10.0 (QEMU 3.1)</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td>evmcs</td> - <td>Enable Enlightened VMCS</td> - <td>on, off</td> - <td>4.10.0 (QEMU 3.1)</td> - </tr> - </table> - </dd> - <dt><code>pvspinlock</code></dt> - <dd>Notify the guest that the host supports paravirtual spinlocks - for example by exposing the pvticketlocks mechanism. This feature - can be explicitly disabled by using <code>state='off'</code> - attribute. - </dd> - <dt><code>kvm</code></dt> - <dd>Various features to change the behavior of the KVM hypervisor. - <table class="top_table"> - <tr> - <th>Feature</th> - <th>Description</th> - <th>Value</th> - <th>Since</th> - </tr> - <tr> - <td>hidden</td> - <td>Hide the KVM hypervisor from standard MSR based discovery</td> - <td>on, off</td> - <td>1.2.8 (QEMU 2.1.0)</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td>hint-dedicated</td> - <td>Allows a guest to enable optimizations when running on dedicated vCPUs</td> - <td>on, off</td> - <td>5.7.0 (QEMU 2.12.0)</td> - </tr> - </table> - </dd> - <dt><code>xen</code></dt> - <dd>Various features to change the behavior of the Xen hypervisor. - <table class="top_table"> - <tr> - <th>Feature</th> - <th>Description</th> - <th>Value</th> - <th>Since</th> - </tr> - <tr> - <td>e820_host</td> - <td>Expose the host e820 to the guest (PV only)</td> - <td>on, off</td> - <td>6.3.0</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td>passthrough</td> - <td>Enable IOMMU mappings allowing PCI passthrough</td> - <td>on, off; mode - optional string sync_pt or share_pt</td> - <td>6.3.0</td> - </tr> - </table> - </dd> - <dt><code>pmu</code></dt> - <dd>Depending on the <code>state</code> attribute (values <code>on</code>, - <code>off</code>, default <code>on</code>) enable or disable the - performance monitoring unit for the guest. - Since 1.2.12 - </dd> - <dt><code>vmport</code></dt> - <dd>Depending on the <code>state</code> attribute (values <code>on</code>, - <code>off</code>, default <code>on</code>) enable or disable - the emulation of VMware IO port, for vmmouse etc. - Since 1.2.16 - </dd> - <dt><code>gic</code></dt> - <dd>Enable for architectures using a General Interrupt - Controller instead of APIC in order to handle interrupts. - For example, the 'aarch64' architecture uses - <code>gic</code> instead of <code>apic</code>. The optional - attribute <code>version</code> specifies the GIC version; - however, it may not be supported by all hypervisors. Accepted - values are <code>2</code>, <code>3</code> and <code>host</code>. - Since 1.2.16 - </dd> - <dt><code>smm</code></dt> - <dd> - - Depending on the <code>state</code> attribute (values <code>on</code>, - <code>off</code>, default <code>on</code>) enable or disable - System Management Mode. - Since 2.1.0 - Optional sub-element <code>tseg</code> can be used to specify - the amount of memory dedicated to SMM's extended TSEG. That offers a - fourth option size apart from the existing ones (1 MiB, 2 MiB and 8 - MiB) that the guest OS (or rather loader) can choose from. The size - can be specified as a value of that element, optional attribute - <code>unit</code> can be used to specify the unit of the - aforementioned value (defaults to 'MiB'). If set to 0 the extended - size is not advertised and only the default ones (see above) are - available. - - If the VM is booting you should leave this option alone, unless you - are very certain you know what you are doing. - - This value is configurable due to the fact that the calculation cannot - be done right with the guarantee that it will work correctly. In - QEMU, the user-configurable extended TSEG feature was unavailable up - to and including <code>pc-q35-2.9</code>. Starting with - <code>pc-q35-2.10</code> the feature is available, with default size - 16 MiB. That should suffice for up to roughly 272 vCPUs, 5 GiB guest - RAM in total, no hotplug memory range, and 32 GiB of 64-bit PCI MMIO - aperture. Or for 48 vCPUs, with 1TB of guest RAM, no hotplug DIMM - range, and 32GB of 64-bit PCI MMIO aperture. The values may also vary - based on the loader the VM is using. - - Additional size might be needed for significantly higher vCPU counts - or increased address space (that can be memory, maxMemory, 64-bit PCI - MMIO aperture size; roughly 8 MiB of TSEG per 1 TiB of address space) - which can also be rounded up. - - Due to the nature of this setting being similar to "how much RAM - should the guest have" users are advised to either consult the - documentation of the guest OS or loader (if there is any), or test - this by trial-and-error changing the value until the VM boots - successfully. Yet another guiding value for users might be the fact - that 48 MiB should be enough for pretty large guests (240 vCPUs and - 4TB guest RAM), but it is on purpose not set as default as 48 MiB of - unavailable RAM might be too much for small guests (e.g. with 512 MiB - of RAM). - - See <a href="#elementsMemoryAllocation">Memory Allocation</a> - for more details about the <code>unit</code> attribute. - Since 4.5.0 (QEMU only) - - </dd> - <dt><code>ioapic</code></dt> - <dd>Tune the I/O APIC. Possible values for the - <code>driver</code> attribute are: - <code>kvm</code> (default for KVM domains) - and <code>qemu</code> which puts I/O APIC in userspace - which is also known as a split I/O APIC mode. - Since 3.4.0 (QEMU/KVM only) - </dd> - <dt><code>hpt</code></dt> - <dd>Configure the HPT (Hash Page Table) of a pSeries guest. Possible - values for the <code>resizing</code> attribute are - <code>enabled</code>, which causes HPT resizing to be enabled if - both the guest and the host support it; <code>disabled</code>, which - causes HPT resizing to be disabled regardless of guest and host - support; and <code>required</code>, which prevents the guest from - starting unless both the guest and the host support HPT resizing. If - the attribute is not defined, the hypervisor default will be used. - Since 3.10.0 (QEMU/KVM only). - - The optional <code>maxpagesize</code> subelement can be used to - limit the usable page size for HPT guests. Common values are 64 KiB, - 16 MiB and 16 GiB; when not specified, the hypervisor default will - be used. Since 4.5.0 (QEMU/KVM only). - </dd> - <dt><code>vmcoreinfo</code></dt> - <dd>Enable QEMU vmcoreinfo device to let the guest kernel save debug - details. Since 4.4.0 (QEMU only) - </dd> - <dt><code>htm</code></dt> - <dd>Configure HTM (Hardware Transational Memory) availability for - pSeries guests. Possible values for the <code>state</code> attribute - are <code>on</code> and <code>off</code>. If the attribute is not - defined, the hypervisor default will be used. - Since 4.6.0 (QEMU/KVM only) - </dd> - <dt><code>nested-hv</code></dt> - <dd>Configure nested HV availability for pSeries guests. This needs to - be enabled from the host (L0) in order to be effective; having HV - support in the (L1) guest is very desiderable if it's planned to - run nested (L2) guests inside it, because it will result in those - nested guests having much better performance than they would when - using KVM PR or TCG. - Possible values for the <code>state</code> attribute are - <code>on</code> and <code>off</code>. If the attribute is not - defined, the hypervisor default will be used. - Since 4.10.0 (QEMU/KVM only) - </dd> - <dt><code>msrs</code></dt> - <dd>Some guests might require ignoring unknown - Model Specific Registers (MSRs) reads and writes. It's possible - to switch this by setting <code>unknown</code> attribute - of <code>msrs</code> to <code>ignore</code>. If the attribute is - not defined, or set to <code>fault</code>, unknown reads and writes - will not be ignored. - Since 5.1.0 (bhyve only) - </dd> - <dt><code>ccf-assist</code></dt> - <dd>Configure ccf-assist (Count Cache Flush Assist) availability for - pSeries guests. - Possible values for the <code>state</code> attribute - are <code>on</code> and <code>off</code>. If the attribute is not - defined, the hypervisor default will be used. - Since 5.9.0 (QEMU/KVM only) - </dd> - <dt><code>cfpc</code></dt> - <dd>Configure cfpc (Cache Flush on Privilege Change) availability for - pSeries guests. - Possible values for the <code>value</code> attribute - are <code>broken</code> (no protection), <code>workaround</code> - (software workaround available) and <code>fixed</code> (fixed in - hardware). If the attribute is not defined, the hypervisor - default will be used. - Since 6.3.0 (QEMU/KVM only) - </dd> - <dt><code>sbbc</code></dt> - <dd>Configure sbbc (Speculation Barrier Bounds Checking) availability for - pSeries guests. - Possible values for the <code>value</code> attribute - are <code>broken</code> (no protection), <code>workaround</code> - (software workaround available) and <code>fixed</code> (fixed in - hardware). If the attribute is not defined, the hypervisor - default will be used. - Since 6.3.0 (QEMU/KVM only) - </dd> - <dt><code>ibs</code></dt> - <dd>Configure ibs (Indirect Branch Speculation) availability for - pSeries guests. - Possible values for the <code>value</code> attribute - are <code>broken</code> (no protection), <code>workaround</code> - (count cache flush), <code>fixed-ibs</code> (fixed by - serializing indirect branches), <code>fixed-ccd</code> (fixed by - disabling the cache count) and <code>fixed-na (fixed in - hardware - no longer applicable)</code>. - If the attribute is not defined, the hypervisor - default will be used. - Since 6.3.0 (QEMU/KVM only) - </dd> - </dl> - - <h3><a id="elementsTime">Time keeping</a></h3> - - - The guest clock is typically initialized from the host clock. - Most operating systems expect the hardware clock to be kept - in UTC, and this is the default. Windows, however, expects - it to be in so called 'localtime'. - - -<pre> -... -<clock offset='localtime'> - <timer name='rtc' tickpolicy='catchup' track='guest'> - <catchup threshold='123' slew='120' limit='10000'/> - </timer> - <timer name='pit' tickpolicy='delay'/> -</clock> -...</pre> - - <dl> - <dt><code>clock</code></dt> - <dd> - The <code>offset</code> attribute takes four possible - values, allowing fine grained control over how the guest - clock is synchronized to the host. NB, not all hypervisors - support all modes. - <dl> - <dt><code>utc</code></dt> - <dd> - The guest clock will always be synchronized to UTC when - booted. - Since 0.9.11 'utc' mode can be converted - to 'variable' mode, which can be controlled by using the - <code>adjustment</code> attribute. If the value is 'reset', the - conversion is never done (not all hypervisors can - synchronize to UTC on each boot; use of 'reset' will cause - an error on those hypervisors). A numeric value - forces the conversion to 'variable' mode using the value as the - initial adjustment. The default <code>adjustment</code> is - hypervisor specific. - </dd> - <dt><code>localtime</code></dt> - <dd> - The guest clock will be synchronized to the host's configured - timezone when booted, if any. - Since 0.9.11, the <code>adjustment</code> - attribute behaves the same as in 'utc' mode. - </dd> - <dt><code>timezone</code></dt> - <dd> - The guest clock will be synchronized to the requested timezone - using the <code>timezone</code> attribute. - Since 0.7.7 - </dd> - <dt><code>variable</code></dt> - <dd> - The guest clock will have an arbitrary offset applied - relative to UTC or localtime, depending on the <code>basis</code> - attribute. The delta relative to UTC (or localtime) is specified - in seconds, using the <code>adjustment</code> attribute. - The guest is free to adjust the RTC over time and expect - that it will be honored at next reboot. This is in - contrast to 'utc' and 'localtime' mode (with the optional - attribute adjustment='reset'), where the RTC adjustments are - lost at each reboot. Since 0.7.7 - Since 0.9.11 the <code>basis</code> - attribute can be either 'utc' (default) or 'localtime'. - </dd> - </dl> - - A <code>clock</code> may have zero or more - <code>timer</code> sub-elements. Since - 0.8.0 - - </dd> - <dt><code>timer</code></dt> - <dd> - - Each timer element requires a <code>name</code> attribute, - and has other optional attributes that depend on - the <code>name</code> specified. Various hypervisors - support different combinations of attributes. - - <dl> - <dt><code>name</code></dt> - <dd> - The <code>name</code> attribute selects which timer is - being modified, and can be one of - "platform" (currently unsupported), - "hpet" (xen, qemu, lxc), "kvmclock" (qemu), - "pit" (qemu), "rtc" (qemu, lxc), "tsc" (xen, qemu - - since 3.2.0), "hypervclock" - (qemu - since 1.2.2) or - "armvtimer" (qemu - since 6.1.0). - - The <code>hypervclock</code> timer adds support for the - reference time counter and the reference page for iTSC - feature for guests running the Microsoft Windows - operating system. - </dd> - <dt><code>track</code></dt> - <dd> - The <code>track</code> attribute specifies what the timer - tracks, and can be "boot", "guest", or "wall". - Only valid for <code>name="rtc"</code> - or <code>name="platform"</code>. - </dd> - <dt><code>tickpolicy</code></dt> - <dd> - - The <code>tickpolicy</code> attribute determines what - happens when QEMU misses a deadline for injecting a - tick to the guest. This can happen, for example, because the - guest was paused. - - <dl> - <dt><code>delay</code></dt> - <dd>Continue to deliver ticks at the normal rate. The guest OS - will not notice anything is amiss, as from its point of view - time will have continued to flow normally. The time in the - guest should now be behind the time in the host by exactly - the amount of time during which ticks have been missed.</dd> - <dt><code>catchup</code></dt> - <dd>Deliver ticks at a higher rate to catch up with the missed - ticks. The guest OS will not notice anything is amiss, as - from its point of view time will have continued to flow - normally. Once the timer has managed to catch up with all - the missing ticks, the time in the guest and in the host - should match.</dd> - <dt><code>merge</code></dt> - <dd>Merge the missed tick(s) into one tick and - inject. The guest time may be delayed, depending - on how the OS reacts to the merging of ticks</dd> - <dt><code>discard</code></dt> - <dd>Throw away the missed ticks and continue with future - injection normally. The guest OS will see the timer jump - ahead by a potentially quite significant amount all at once, - as if the intervening chunk of time had simply not existed; - needless to say, such a sudden jump can easily confuse a - guest OS which is not specifically prepared to deal with it. - Assuming the guest OS can deal correctly with the time jump, - the time in the guest and in the host should now match.</dd> - </dl> - If the policy is "catchup", there can be further details in - the <code>catchup</code> sub-element. - <dl> - <dt><code>catchup</code></dt> - <dd> - The <code>catchup</code> element has three optional - attributes, each a positive integer. The attributes - are <code>threshold</code>, <code>slew</code>, - and <code>limit</code>. - </dd> - </dl> - - Note that hypervisors are not required to support all policies across all time sources - - </dd> - <dt><code>frequency</code></dt> - <dd> - The <code>frequency</code> attribute is an unsigned - integer specifying the frequency at - which <code>name="tsc"</code> runs. - </dd> - <dt><code>mode</code></dt> - <dd> - The <code>mode</code> attribute controls how - the <code>name="tsc"</code> timer is managed, and can be - "auto", "native", "emulate", "paravirt", or "smpsafe". - Other timers are always emulated. - </dd> - <dt><code>present</code></dt> - <dd> - The <code>present</code> attribute can be "yes" or "no" to - specify whether a particular timer is available to the guest. - </dd> - </dl> - </dd> - </dl> - - <h3><a id="elementsPerf">Performance monitoring events</a></h3> - - - Some platforms allow monitoring of performance of the virtual machine and - the code executed inside. To enable the performance monitoring events - you can either specify them in the <code>perf</code> element or enable - them via <code>virDomainSetPerfEvents</code> API. The performance values - are then retrieved using the virConnectGetAllDomainStats API. - Since 2.0.0 - - -<pre> -... -<perf> - <event name='cmt' enabled='yes'/> - <event name='mbmt' enabled='no'/> - <event name='mbml' enabled='yes'/> - <event name='cpu_cycles' enabled='no'/> - <event name='instructions' enabled='yes'/> - <event name='cache_references' enabled='no'/> - <event name='cache_misses' enabled='no'/> - <event name='branch_instructions' enabled='no'/> - <event name='branch_misses' enabled='no'/> - <event name='bus_cycles' enabled='no'/> - <event name='stalled_cycles_frontend' enabled='no'/> - <event name='stalled_cycles_backend' enabled='no'/> - <event name='ref_cpu_cycles' enabled='no'/> - <event name='cpu_clock' enabled='no'/> - <event name='task_clock' enabled='no'/> - <event name='page_faults' enabled='no'/> - <event name='context_switches' enabled='no'/> - <event name='cpu_migrations' enabled='no'/> - <event name='page_faults_min' enabled='no'/> - <event name='page_faults_maj' enabled='no'/> - <event name='alignment_faults' enabled='no'/> - <event name='emulation_faults' enabled='no'/> -</perf> -... -</pre> - - <table class="top_table"> - <tr> - <th>event name</th> - <th>Description</th> - <th>stats parameter name</th> - </tr> - <tr> - <td><code>cmt</code></td> - <td>usage of l3 cache in bytes by applications running on the platform</td> - <td><code>perf.cmt</code></td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td><code>mbmt</code></td> - <td>total system bandwidth from one level of cache</td> - <td><code>perf.mbmt</code></td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td><code>mbml</code></td> - <td>bandwidth of memory traffic for a memory controller</td> - <td><code>perf.mbml</code></td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td><code>cpu_cycles</code></td> - <td>the count of CPU cycles (total/elapsed)</td> - <td><code>perf.cpu_cycles</code></td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td><code>instructions</code></td> - <td>the count of instructions by applications running on the platform</td> - <td><code>perf.instructions</code></td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td><code>cache_references</code></td> - <td>the count of cache hits by applications running on the platform</td> - <td><code>perf.cache_references</code></td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td><code>cache_misses</code></td> - <td>the count of cache misses by applications running on the platform</td> - <td><code>perf.cache_misses</code></td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td><code>branch_instructions</code></td> - <td>the count of branch instructions by applications running on the platform</td> - <td><code>perf.branch_instructions</code></td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td><code>branch_misses</code></td> - <td>the count of branch misses by applications running on the platform</td> - <td><code>perf.branch_misses</code></td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td><code>bus_cycles</code></td> - <td>the count of bus cycles by applications running on the platform</td> - <td><code>perf.bus_cycles</code></td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td><code>stalled_cycles_frontend</code></td> - <td>the count of stalled CPU cycles in the frontend of the instruction - processor pipeline by applications running on the platform</td> - <td><code>perf.stalled_cycles_frontend</code></td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td><code>stalled_cycles_backend</code></td> - <td>the count of stalled CPU cycles in the backend of the instruction - processor pipeline by applications running on the platform</td> - <td><code>perf.stalled_cycles_backend</code></td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td><code>ref_cpu_cycles</code></td> - <td>the count of total CPU cycles not affected by CPU frequency scaling - by applications running on the platform</td> - <td><code>perf.ref_cpu_cycles</code></td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td><code>cpu_clock</code></td> - <td>the count of CPU clock time, as measured by a monotonic - high-resolution per-CPU timer, by applications running on - the platform</td> - <td><code>perf.cpu_clock</code></td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td><code>task_clock</code></td> - <td>the count of task clock time, as measured by a monotonic - high-resolution CPU timer, specific to the task that - is run by applications running on the platform</td> - <td><code>perf.task_clock</code></td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td><code>page_faults</code></td> - <td>the count of page faults by applications running on the - platform. This includes minor, major, invalid and other - types of page faults</td> - <td><code>perf.page_faults</code></td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td><code>context_switches</code></td> - <td>the count of context switches by applications running on - the platform</td> - <td><code>perf.context_switches</code></td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td><code>cpu_migrations</code></td> - <td>the count of CPU migrations, that is, where the process - moved from one logical processor to another, by - applications running on the platform</td> - <td><code>perf.cpu_migrations</code></td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td><code>page_faults_min</code></td> - <td>the count of minor page faults, that is, where the - page was present in the page cache, and therefore - the fault avoided loading it from storage, by - applications running on the platform</td> - <td><code>perf.page_faults_min</code></td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td><code>page_faults_maj</code></td> - <td>the count of major page faults, that is, where the - page was not present in the page cache, and - therefore had to be fetched from storage, by - applications running on the platform</td> - <td><code>perf.page_faults_maj</code></td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td><code>alignment_faults</code></td> - <td>the count of alignment faults, that is when - the load or store is not aligned properly, by - applications running on the platform</td> - <td><code>perf.alignment_faults</code></td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td><code>emulation_faults</code></td> - <td>the count of emulation faults, that is when - the kernel traps on unimplemented instrucions - and emulates them for user space, by - applications running on the platform</td> - <td><code>perf.emulation_faults</code></td> - </tr> - </table> - - <h3><a id="elementsDevices">Devices</a></h3> - - - The final set of XML elements are all used to describe devices - provided to the guest domain. All devices occur as children - of the main <code>devices</code> element. - Since 0.1.3 - - -<pre> -... -<devices> - <emulator>/usr/lib/xen/bin/qemu-dm</emulator> -</devices> -...</pre> - - <dl> - <dt><a id="elementEmulator"><code>emulator</code></a></dt> - <dd> - The contents of the <code>emulator</code> element specify - the fully qualified path to the device model emulator binary. - The <a href="formatcaps.html">capabilities XML</a> specifies - the recommended default emulator to use for each particular - domain type / architecture combination. - </dd> - </dl> - - - To help users identifying devices they care about, every - device can have direct child <code>alias</code> element - which then has <code>name</code> attribute where users can - store identifier for the device. The identifier has to have - "ua-" prefix and must be unique within the domain. Additionally, the - identifier must consist only of the following characters: - <code>[a-zA-Z0-9_-]</code>. - Since 3.9.0 - - -<pre> -<devices> - <disk type='file'> - <alias name='ua-myDisk'/> - </disk> - <interface type='network' trustGuestRxFilters='yes'> - <alias name='ua-myNIC'/> - </interface> - ... -</devices> -</pre> - - <h4><a id="elementsDisks">Hard drives, floppy disks, CDROMs</a></h4> - - - Any device that looks like a disk, be it a floppy, harddisk, - cdrom, or paravirtualized driver is specified via the <code>disk</code> - element. - - -<pre> -... -<devices> - <disk type='file' snapshot='external'> - <driver name="tap" type="aio" cache="default"/> - <source file='/var/lib/xen/images/fv0' startupPolicy='optional'> - <seclabel relabel='no'/> - </source> - <target dev='hda' bus='ide'/> - <iotune> - <total_bytes_sec>10000000</total_bytes_sec> - <read_iops_sec>400000</read_iops_sec> - <write_iops_sec>100000</write_iops_sec> - </iotune> - <boot order='2'/> - <encryption type='...'> - ... - </encryption> - <shareable/> - <serial> - ... - </serial> - </disk> - ... - <disk type='network'> - <driver name="qemu" type="raw" io="threads" ioeventfd="on" event_idx="off"/> - <source protocol="sheepdog" name="image_name"> - <host name="hostname" port="7000"/> - </source> - <target dev="hdb" bus="ide"/> - <boot order='1'/> - <transient/> - <address type='drive' controller='0' bus='1' unit='0'/> - </disk> - <disk type='network'> - <driver name="qemu" type="raw"/> - <source protocol="rbd" name="image_name2"> - <host name="hostname" port="7000"/> - <snapshot name="snapname"/> - <config file="/path/to/file"/> - <auth username='myuser'> - <secret type='ceph' usage='mypassid'/> - </auth> - </source> - <target dev="hdc" bus="ide"/> - </disk> - <disk type='block' device='cdrom'> - <driver name='qemu' type='raw'/> - <target dev='hdd' bus='ide' tray='open'/> - <readonly/> - </disk> - <disk type='network' device='cdrom'> - <driver name='qemu' type='raw'/> - <source protocol="http" name="url_path" query="foo=bar&amp;baz=flurb> - <host name="hostname" port="80"/> - <cookies> - <cookie name="test">somevalue</cookie> - </cookies> - <readahead size='65536'/> - <timeout seconds='6'/> - </source> - <target dev='hde' bus='ide' tray='open'/> - <readonly/> - </disk> - <disk type='network' device='cdrom'> - <driver name='qemu' type='raw'/> - <source protocol="https" name="url_path"> - <host name="hostname" port="443"/> - <ssl verify="no"/> - </source> - <target dev='hdf' bus='ide' tray='open'/> - <readonly/> - </disk> - <disk type='network' device='cdrom'> - <driver name='qemu' type='raw'/> - <source protocol="ftp" name="url_path"> - <host name="hostname" port="21"/> - </source> - <target dev='hdg' bus='ide' tray='open'/> - <readonly/> - </disk> - <disk type='network' device='cdrom'> - <driver name='qemu' type='raw'/> - <source protocol="ftps" name="url_path"> - <host name="hostname" port="990"/> - </source> - <target dev='hdh' bus='ide' tray='open'/> - <readonly/> - </disk> - <disk type='network' device='cdrom'> - <driver name='qemu' type='raw'/> - <source protocol="tftp" name="url_path"> - <host name="hostname" port="69"/> - </source> - <target dev='hdi' bus='ide' tray='open'/> - <readonly/> - </disk> - <disk type='block' device='lun'> - <driver name='qemu' type='raw'/> - <source dev='/dev/sda'> - <slices> - <slice type='storage' offset='12345' size='123'/> - </slices> - <reservations managed='no'> - <source type='unix' path='/path/to/qemu-pr-helper' mode='client'/> - </reservations> - </source> - <target dev='sda' bus='scsi'/> - <address type='drive' controller='0' bus='0' target='3' unit='0'/> - </disk> - <disk type='block' device='disk'> - <driver name='qemu' type='raw'/> - <source dev='/dev/sda'/> - <geometry cyls='16383' heads='16' secs='63' trans='lba'/> - <blockio logical_block_size='512' physical_block_size='4096'/> - <target dev='hdj' bus='ide'/> - </disk> - <disk type='volume' device='disk'> - <driver name='qemu' type='raw'/> - <source pool='blk-pool0' volume='blk-pool0-vol0'/> - <target dev='hdk' bus='ide'/> - </disk> - <disk type='network' device='disk'> - <driver name='qemu' type='raw'/> - <source protocol='iscsi' name='iqn.2013-07.com.example:iscsi-nopool/2'> - <host name='example.com' port='3260'/> - <auth username='myuser'> - <secret type='iscsi' usage='libvirtiscsi'/> - </auth> - </source> - <target dev='vda' bus='virtio'/> - </disk> - <disk type='network' device='lun'> - <driver name='qemu' type='raw'/> - <source protocol='iscsi' name='iqn.2013-07.com.example:iscsi-nopool/1'> - <host name='example.com' port='3260'/> - <auth username='myuser'> - <secret type='iscsi' usage='libvirtiscsi'/> - </auth> - </source> - <target dev='sdb' bus='scsi'/> - </disk> - <disk type='network' device='lun'> - <driver name='qemu' type='raw'/> - <source protocol='iscsi' name='iqn.2013-07.com.example:iscsi-nopool/0'> - <host name='example.com' port='3260'/> - <initiator> - <iqn name='iqn.2013-07.com.example:client'/> - </initiator> - </source> - <target dev='sdb' bus='scsi'/> - </disk> - <disk type='volume' device='disk'> - <driver name='qemu' type='raw'/> - <source pool='iscsi-pool' volume='unit:0:0:1' mode='host'/> - <target dev='vdb' bus='virtio'/> - </disk> - <disk type='volume' device='disk'> - <driver name='qemu' type='raw'/> - <source pool='iscsi-pool' volume='unit:0:0:2' mode='direct'/> - <target dev='vdc' bus='virtio'/> - </disk> - <disk type='file' device='disk'> - <driver name='qemu' type='qcow2' queues='4'/> - <source file='/var/lib/libvirt/images/domain.qcow'/> - <backingStore type='file'> - <format type='qcow2'/> - <source file='/var/lib/libvirt/images/snapshot.qcow'/> - <backingStore type='block'> - <format type='raw'/> - <source dev='/dev/mapper/base'/> - <backingStore/> - </backingStore> - </backingStore> - <target dev='vdd' bus='virtio'/> - </disk> - <disk type='nvme' device='disk'> - <driver name='qemu' type='raw'/> - <source type='pci' managed='yes' namespace='1'> - <address domain='0x0000' bus='0x01' slot='0x00' function='0x0'/> - </source> - <target dev='vde' bus='virtio'/> - </disk> -</devices> -...</pre> - - <dl> - <dt><code>disk</code></dt> - <dd>The <code>disk</code> element is the main container for - describing disks and supports the following attributes: - <dl> - <dt><code>type</code></dt> - <dd> - Valid values are "file", "block", - "dir" (since 0.7.5), - "network" (since 0.8.7), or - "volume" (since 1.0.5), or - "nvme" (since 6.0.0) - and refer to the underlying source for the disk. - Since 0.0.3 - </dd> - <dt><code>device</code></dt> - <dd> - Indicates how the disk is to be exposed to the guest OS. Possible - values for this attribute are "floppy", "disk", "cdrom", and "lun", - defaulting to "disk". - - Using "lun" (since 0.9.10) is only - valid when the <code>type</code> is "block" or "network" for - <code>protocol='iscsi'</code> or when the <code>type</code> - is "volume" when using an iSCSI source <code>pool</code> - for <code>mode</code> "host" or as an - <a href="http://wiki.libvirt.org/page/NPIV_in_libvirt">NPIV</a> - virtual Host Bus Adapter (vHBA) using a Fibre Channel storage pool. - Configured in this manner, the LUN behaves identically to "disk", - except that generic SCSI commands from the guest are accepted - and passed through to the physical device. Also note that - device='lun' will only be recognized for actual raw devices, - but never for individual partitions or LVM partitions (in those - cases, the kernel will reject the generic SCSI commands, making - it identical to device='disk'). - Since 0.1.4 - - </dd> - <dt><code>model</code></dt> - <dd> - Indicates the emulated device model of the disk. Typically - this is indicated solely by the <code>bus</code> property but - for <code>bus</code> "virtio" the model can be specified further - with "virtio-transitional", "virtio-non-transitional", or - "virtio". See - <a href="#elementsVirtioTransitional">Virtio transitional devices</a> - for more details. - Since 5.2.0 - </dd> - <dt><code>rawio</code></dt> - <dd> - Indicates whether the disk needs rawio capability. Valid - settings are "yes" or "no" (default is "no"). If any one disk - in a domain has rawio='yes', rawio capability will be enabled - for all disks in the domain (because, in the case of QEMU, this - capability can only be set on a per-process basis). This attribute - is only valid when device is "lun". NB, <code>rawio</code> intends - to confine the capability per-device, however, current QEMU - implementation gives the domain process broader capability - than that (per-process basis, affects all the domain disks). - To confine the capability as much as possible for QEMU driver - as this stage, <code>sgio</code> is recommended, it's more - secure than <code>rawio</code>. - Since 0.9.10 - </dd> - <dt><code>sgio</code></dt> - <dd> - If supported by the hypervisor and OS, indicates whether - unprivileged SG_IO commands are filtered for the disk. Valid - settings are "filtered" or "unfiltered" where the default is - "filtered". Only available when the <code>device</code> is 'lun'. - Since 1.0.2 - </dd> - <dt><code>snapshot</code></dt> - <dd> - Indicates the default behavior of the disk during disk snapshots: - "<code>internal</code>" requires a file format such as qcow2 that - can store both the snapshot and the data changes since the snapshot; - "<code>external</code>" will separate the snapshot from the live - data; and "<code>no</code>" means the disk will not participate in - snapshots. Read-only disks default to "<code>no</code>", while the - default for other disks depends on the hypervisor's capabilities. - Some hypervisors allow a per-snapshot choice as well, during - <a href="formatsnapshot.html">domain snapshot creation</a>. - Not all snapshot modes are supported; for example, enabling - snapshots with a transient disk generally does not make sense. - Since 0.9.5 - </dd> - </dl> - </dd> - <dt><code>source</code></dt> - <dd>Representation of the disk <code>source</code> depends on the - disk <code>type</code> attribute value as follows: - <dl> - <dt><code>file</code></dt> - <dd> - The <code>file</code> attribute specifies the fully-qualified - path to the file holding the disk. - Since 0.0.3 - </dd> - <dt><code>block</code></dt> - <dd> - The <code>dev</code> attribute specifies the fully-qualified path - to the host device to serve as the disk. - Since 0.0.3 - </dd> - <dt><code>dir</code></dt> - <dd> - The <code>dir</code> attribute specifies the fully-qualified path - to the directory to use as the disk. - Since 0.7.5 - </dd> - <dt><code>network</code></dt> - <dd> - The <code>protocol</code> attribute specifies the protocol to - access to the requested image. Possible values are "nbd", - "iscsi", "rbd", "sheepdog", "gluster", "vxhs", "http", "https", - "ftp", ftps", or "tftp". - - For any <code>protocol</code> other than <code>nbd</code> - an additional attribute <code>name</code> - is mandatory to specify which volume/image will be used. - - - For "nbd", the <code>name</code> attribute is optional. TLS - transport for NBD can be enabled by setting the <code>tls</code> - attribute to <code>yes</code>. For the QEMU hypervisor, usage of - a TLS environment can also be globally controlled on the host by - the <code>nbd_tls</code> and <code>nbd_tls_x509_cert_dir</code> in - /etc/libvirt/qemu.conf. - ('tls' Since 4.5.0) - - - For protocols <code>http</code> and <code>https</code> an - optional attribute <code>query</code> specifies the query string. - (Since 6.2.0) - - - For "iscsi" (since 1.0.4), the - <code>name</code> attribute may include a logical unit number, - separated from the target's name by a slash (e.g., - <code>iqn.2013-07.com.example:iscsi-pool/1</code>). If not - specified, the default LUN is zero. - - - For "vxhs" (since 3.8.0), the - <code>name</code> is the UUID of the volume, assigned by the - HyperScale server. Additionally, an optional attribute - <code>tls</code> (QEMU only) can be used to control whether a - VxHS block device would utilize a hypervisor configured TLS - X.509 certificate environment in order to encrypt the data - channel. For the QEMU hypervisor, usage of a TLS environment can - also be globally controlled on the host by the - <code>vxhs_tls</code> and <code>vxhs_tls_x509_cert_dir</code> or - <code>default_tls_x509_cert_dir</code> settings in the file - /etc/libvirt/qemu.conf. If <code>vxhs_tls</code> is enabled, - then unless the domain <code>tls</code> attribute is set to "no", - libvirt will use the host configured TLS environment. If the - <code>tls</code> attribute is set to "yes", then regardless of - the qemu.conf setting, TLS authentication will be attempted. - - Since 0.8.7 - </dd> - <dt><code>volume</code></dt> - <dd> - The underlying disk source is represented by attributes - <code>pool</code> and <code>volume</code>. Attribute - <code>pool</code> specifies the name of the - <a href="formatstorage.html">storage pool</a> (managed - by libvirt) where the disk source resides. Attribute - <code>volume</code> specifies the name of storage volume (managed - by libvirt) used as the disk source. The value for the - <code>volume</code> attribute will be the output from the "Name" - column of a <code>virsh vol-list [pool-name]</code> command. - - Use the attribute <code>mode</code> - (since 1.1.1) to indicate how to - represent the LUN as the disk source. Valid values are - "direct" and "host". If <code>mode</code> is not specified, - the default is to use "host". - - Using "direct" as the <code>mode</code> value indicates to use - the <a href="formatstorage.html">storage pool's</a> - <code>source</code> element <code>host</code> attribute as - the disk source to generate the libiscsi URI (e.g. - 'file=iscsi://example.com:3260/iqn.2013-07.com.example:iscsi-pool/1'). - - Using "host" as the <code>mode</code> value indicates to use the - LUN's path as it shows up on host (e.g. - 'file=/dev/disk/by-path/ip-example.com:3260-iscsi-iqn.2013-07.com.example:iscsi-pool-lun-1'). - - Using a LUN from an iSCSI source pool provides the same - features as a <code>disk</code> configured using - <code>type</code> 'block' or 'network' and <code>device</code> - of 'lun' with respect to how the LUN is presented to and - may be used by the guest. - - Since 1.0.5 - - </dd> - <dt><code>nvme</code></dt> - <dd> - To specify disk source for NVMe disk the <code>source</code> - element has the following attributes: - <dl> - <dt><code>type</code></dt> - <dd>The type of address specified in <code>address</code> - sub-element. Currently, only <code>pci</code> value is - accepted. - </dd> - - <dt><code>managed</code></dt> - <dd>This attribute instructs libvirt to detach NVMe - controller automatically on domain startup (<code>yes</code>) - or expect the controller to be detached by system - administrator (<code>no</code>). - </dd> - - <dt><code>namespace</code></dt> - <dd>The namespace ID which should be assigned to the domain. - According to NVMe standard, namespace numbers start from 1, - including. - </dd> - </dl> - - The difference between <code><disk type='nvme'></code> - and <code><hostdev/></code> is that the latter is plain - host device assignment with all its limitations (e.g. no live - migration), while the former makes hypervisor to run the NVMe - disk through hypervisor's block layer thus enabling all - features provided by the layer (e.g. snapshots, domain - migration, etc.). Moreover, since the NVMe disk is unbinded - from its PCI driver, the host kernel storage stack is not - involved (compared to passing say <code>/dev/nvme0n1</code> via - <code><disk type='block'></code> and therefore lower - latencies can be achieved. - </dd> - </dl> - With "file", "block", and "volume", one or more optional - sub-elements <code>seclabel</code>, <a href="#seclabel">described - below</a> (and since 0.9.9), can be - used to override the domain security labeling policy for just - that source file. (NB, for "volume" type disk, <code>seclabel</code> - is only valid when the specified storage volume is of 'file' or - 'block' type). - - The <code>source</code> element may also have the <code>index</code> - attribute with same semantics the <a href='#elementsDiskBackingStoreIndex'> - <code>index</code></a> attribute of <code>backingStore</code> - - - The <code>source</code> element may contain the following sub elements: - - - <dl> - <dt><code>host</code></dt> - <dd> - - When the disk <code>type</code> is "network", the <code>source</code> - may have zero or more <code>host</code> sub-elements used to - specify the hosts to connect. - - The <code>host</code> element supports 4 attributes, viz. "name", - "port", "transport" and "socket", which specify the hostname, - the port number, transport type and path to socket, respectively. - The meaning of this element and the number of the elements depend - on the protocol attribute. - - <table class="top_table"> - <tr> - <th> Protocol </th> - <th> Meaning </th> - <th> Number of hosts </th> - <th> Default port </th> - </tr> - <tr> - <td> nbd </td> - <td> a server running nbd-server </td> - <td> only one </td> - <td> 10809 </td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td> iscsi </td> - <td> an iSCSI server </td> - <td> only one </td> - <td> 3260 </td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td> rbd </td> - <td> monitor servers of RBD </td> - <td> one or more </td> - <td> librados default </td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td> sheepdog </td> - <td> one of the sheepdog servers (default is localhost:7000) </td> - <td> zero or one </td> - <td> 7000 </td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td> gluster </td> - <td> a server running glusterd daemon </td> - <td> one or more (Since 2.1.0), just one prior to that </td> - <td> 24007 </td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td> vxhs </td> - <td> a server running Veritas HyperScale daemon </td> - <td> only one </td> - <td> 9999 </td> - </tr> - </table> - - gluster supports "tcp", "rdma", "unix" as valid values for the - transport attribute. nbd supports "tcp" and "unix". Others only - support "tcp". If nothing is specified, "tcp" is assumed. If the - transport is "unix", the socket attribute specifies the path to an - AF_UNIX socket. - - </dd> - <dt><code>snapshot</code></dt> - <dd> - The <code>name</code> attribute of <code>snapshot</code> element can - optionally specify an internal snapshot name to be used as the - source for storage protocols. - Supported for 'rbd' since 1.2.11 (QEMU only). - </dd> - <dt><code>config</code></dt> - <dd> - The <code>file</code> attribute for the <code>config</code> element - provides a fully qualified path to a configuration file to be - provided as a parameter to the client of a networked storage - protocol. Supported for 'rbd' since 1.2.11 - (QEMU only). - </dd> - <dt><code>auth</code></dt> - <dd>Since libvirt 3.9.0, the - <code>auth</code> element is supported for a disk - <code>type</code> "network" that is using a <code>source</code> - element with the <code>protocol</code> attributes "rbd" or "iscsi". - If present, the <code>auth</code> element provides the - authentication credentials needed to access the source. It - includes a mandatory attribute <code>username</code>, which - identifies the username to use during authentication, as well - as a sub-element <code>secret</code> with mandatory - attribute <code>type</code>, to tie back to - a <a href="formatsecret.html">libvirt secret object</a> that - holds the actual password or other credentials (the domain XML - intentionally does not expose the password, only the reference - to the object that does manage the password). - Known secret types are "ceph" for Ceph RBD network sources and - "iscsi" for CHAP authentication of iSCSI targets. - Both will require either a <code>uuid</code> attribute - with the UUID of the secret object or a <code>usage</code> - attribute matching the key that was specified in the - secret object. - </dd> - <dt><code>encryption</code></dt> - <dd>Since libvirt 3.9.0, the - <code>encryption</code> can be a sub-element of the - <code>source</code> element for encrypted storage sources. - If present, specifies how the storage source is encrypted - See the - <a href="formatstorageencryption.html">Storage Encryption</a> - page for more information. - - Note that the 'qcow' format of encryption is broken and thus is no - longer supported for use with disk images. - (Since libvirt 4.5.0) - </dd> - <dt><code>reservations</code></dt> - <dd>Since libvirt 4.4.0, the - <code>reservations</code> can be a sub-element of the - <code>source</code> element for storage sources (QEMU driver only). - If present it enables persistent reservations for SCSI - based disks. The element has one mandatory attribute - <code>managed</code> with accepted values <code>yes</code> and - <code>no</code>. If <code>managed</code> is enabled libvirt prepares - and manages any resources needed. When the persistent reservations - are unmanaged, then the hypervisor acts as a client and the path to - the server socket must be provided in the child element - <code>source</code>, which currently accepts only the following - attributes: - <code>type</code> with one value <code>unix</code>, - <code>path</code> path to the socket, and - finally <code>mode</code> which accepts one value - <code>client</code> specifying the role of hypervisor. - It's recommended to allow libvirt manage the persistent - reservations. - </dd> - <dt><code>initiator</code></dt> - <dd>Since libvirt 4.7.0, the - <code>initiator</code> element is supported for a disk - <code>type</code> "network" that is using a <code>source</code> - element with the <code>protocol</code> attribute "iscsi". - If present, the <code>initiator</code> element provides the - initiator IQN needed to access the source via mandatory - attribute <code>name</code>. - </dd> - <dt><code>address</code></dt> - <dd>For disk of type <code>nvme</code> this element - specifies the PCI address of the host NVMe - controller. - Since 6.0.0 - </dd> - <dt><code>slices</code></dt> - <dd>The <code>slices</code> element using its <code>slice</code> - sub-elements allows configuring offset and size of either the - location of the image format (<code>slice type='storage'</code>) - inside the storage source or the guest data inside the image format - container (future expansion). - - The <code>offset</code> and <code>size</code> values are in bytes. - Since 6.1.0 - </dd> - <dt><code>ssl</code></dt> - <dd> - For <code>https</code> and <code>ftps</code> accessed storage it's - possible to tweak the SSL transport parameters with this element. - The <code>verify</code> attribute allows to turn on or off SSL - certificate validation. Supported values are <code>yes</code> and - <code>no</code>. Since 6.2.0 - </dd> - <dt><code>cookies</code></dt> - <dd> - For <code>http</code> and <code>https</code> accessed storage it's - possible to pass one or more cookies. The cookie name and value - must conform to the HTTP specification. - Since 6.2.0 - </dd> - <dt><code>readahead</code></dt> - <dd> - Specifies the size of the readahead buffer for protocols - which support it. (all 'curl' based drivers in qemu). The size - is in bytes. Note that '0' is considered as if the value is not - provided. - Since 6.2.0 - </dd> - <dt><code>timeout</code></dt> - <dd> - Specifies the connection timeout for protocols which support it. - Note that '0' is considered as if the value is not provided. - Since 6.2.0 - </dd> - </dl> - - - For a "file" or "volume" disk type which represents a cdrom or floppy - (the <code>device</code> attribute), it is possible to define - policy what to do with the disk if the source file is not accessible. - (NB, <code>startupPolicy</code> is not valid for "volume" disk unless - the specified storage volume is of "file" type). This is done by the - <code>startupPolicy</code> attribute - (since 0.9.7), - accepting these values: - - <table class="top_table"> - <tr> - <td> mandatory </td> - <td> fail if missing for any reason (the default) </td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td> requisite </td> - <td> fail if missing on boot up, - drop if missing on migrate/restore/revert </td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td> optional </td> - <td> drop if missing at any start attempt </td> - </tr> - </table> - - Since 1.1.2 the <code>startupPolicy</code> - is extended to support hard disks besides cdrom and floppy. On guest - cold bootup, if a certain disk is not accessible or its disk chain is - broken, with startupPolicy 'optional' the guest will drop this disk. - This feature doesn't support migration currently. - - </dd> - <dt><code>backingStore</code></dt> - <dd> - This element describes the backing store used by the disk - specified by sibling <code>source</code> element. - Since 1.2.4. - - If the hypervisor driver does not support the - <a href='formatdomaincaps.html#featureBackingStoreInput'> - <code>backingStoreInput</code></a> - (Since 5.10.0) - domain feature the <code>backingStore</code> is ignored on - input and only used for output to describe the detected - backing chains of running domains. - - If <code>backingStoreInput</code> is supported - the <code>backingStore</code> is used as the backing image of - <code>source</code> or other <code>backingStore</code> overriding - any backing image information recorded in the image metadata. - - An empty <code>backingStore</code> element means the sibling - source is self-contained and is not based on any backing store. - - For the detected backing chain information to be accurate, the - backing format must be correctly specified in the metadata of - each file of the chain (files created by libvirt satisfy this - property, but using existing external files for snapshot or - block copy operations requires the end user to pre-create the - file correctly). The following attributes are - supported in <code>backingStore</code>: - <dl> - <dt><code>type</code></dt> - <dd> - The <code>type</code> attribute represents the type of disk used - by the backing store, see disk type attribute above for more - details and possible values. - </dd> - <dt><code><a id="elementsDiskBackingStoreIndex">index</a></code></dt> - <dd> - This attribute is only valid in output (and ignored on input) and - it can be used to refer to a specific part of the disk chain when - doing block operations (such as via the - <code>virDomainBlockRebase</code> API). For example, - <code>vda[2]</code> refers to the backing store with - <code>index='2'</code> of the disk with <code>vda</code> target. - </dd> - </dl> - Moreover, <code>backingStore</code> supports the following sub-elements: - <dl> - <dt><code>format</code></dt> - <dd> - The <code>format</code> element contains <code>type</code> - attribute which specifies the internal format of the backing - store, such as <code>raw</code> or <code>qcow2</code>. - </dd> - <dt><code>source</code></dt> - <dd> - This element has the same structure as the <code>source</code> - element in <code>disk</code>. It specifies which file, device, - or network location contains the data of the described backing - store. - </dd> - <dt><code>backingStore</code></dt> - <dd> - If the backing store is not self-contained, the next element - in the chain is described by nested <code>backingStore</code> - element. - </dd> - </dl> - </dd> - <dt><code>mirror</code></dt> - <dd> - This element is present if the hypervisor has started a - long-running block job operation, where the mirror location in - the <code>source</code> sub-element will eventually have the - same contents as the source, and with the file format in the - sub-element <code>format</code> (which might differ from the - format of the source). The details of the <code>source</code> - sub-element are determined by the <code>type</code> attribute - of the mirror, similar to what is done for the - overall <code>disk</code> device element. The <code>job</code> - attribute mentions which API started the operation ("copy" for - the <code>virDomainBlockRebase</code> API, or "active-commit" - for the <code>virDomainBlockCommit</code> - API), since 1.2.7. The - attribute <code>ready</code>, if present, tracks progress of - the job: <code>yes</code> if the disk is known to be ready to - pivot, or, since - 1.2.7, <code>abort</code> or <code>pivot</code> if the - job is in the process of completing. If <code>ready</code> is - not present, the disk is probably still - copying. For now, this element only valid in output; it is - ignored on input. The <code>source</code> sub-element exists - for all two-phase jobs since 1.2.6. - Older libvirt supported only block copy to a - file, since 0.9.12; for - compatibility with older clients, such jobs include redundant - information in the attributes <code>file</code> - and <code>format</code> in the <code>mirror</code> element. - </dd> - <dt><code>target</code></dt> - <dd>The <code>target</code> element controls the bus / device - under which the disk is exposed to the guest - OS. The <code>dev</code> attribute indicates the "logical" - device name. The actual device name specified is not - guaranteed to map to the device name in the guest OS. Treat it - as a device ordering hint. The optional <code>bus</code> - attribute specifies the type of disk device to emulate; - possible values are driver specific, with typical values being - "ide", "scsi", "virtio", "xen", "usb", "sata", or - "sd" "sd" since 1.1.2. If omitted, the bus - type is inferred from the style of the device name (e.g. a device named - 'sda' will typically be exported using a SCSI bus). The optional - attribute <code>tray</code> indicates the tray status of the - removable disks (i.e. CDROM or Floppy disk), the value can be either - "open" or "closed", defaults to "closed". NB, the value of - <code>tray</code> could be updated while the domain is running. - The optional attribute <code>removable</code> sets the - removable flag for USB disks, and its value can be either "on" - or "off", defaulting to "off". Since - 0.0.3; <code>bus</code> attribute since 0.4.3; - <code>tray</code> attribute since 0.9.11; "usb" attribute value since - after 0.4.4; "sata" attribute value since 0.9.7; "removable" attribute - value since 1.1.3 - </dd> - <dt><code>iotune</code></dt> - <dd>The optional <code>iotune</code> element provides the - ability to provide additional per-device I/O tuning, with - values that can vary for each device (contrast this to - the <a href="#elementsBlockTuning"><code><blkiotune></code></a> - element, which applies globally to the domain). Currently, - the only tuning available is Block I/O throttling for qemu. - This element has optional sub-elements; any sub-element not - specified or given with a value of 0 implies no - limit. Since 0.9.8 - <dl> - <dt><code>total_bytes_sec</code></dt> - <dd>The optional <code>total_bytes_sec</code> element is the - total throughput limit in bytes per second. This cannot - appear with <code>read_bytes_sec</code> - or <code>write_bytes_sec</code>.</dd> - <dt><code>read_bytes_sec</code></dt> - <dd>The optional <code>read_bytes_sec</code> element is the - read throughput limit in bytes per second.</dd> - <dt><code>write_bytes_sec</code></dt> - <dd>The optional <code>write_bytes_sec</code> element is the - write throughput limit in bytes per second.</dd> - <dt><code>total_iops_sec</code></dt> - <dd>The optional <code>total_iops_sec</code> element is the - total I/O operations per second. This cannot - appear with <code>read_iops_sec</code> - or <code>write_iops_sec</code>.</dd> - <dt><code>read_iops_sec</code></dt> - <dd>The optional <code>read_iops_sec</code> element is the - read I/O operations per second.</dd> - <dt><code>write_iops_sec</code></dt> - <dd>The optional <code>write_iops_sec</code> element is the - write I/O operations per second.</dd> - <dt><code>total_bytes_sec_max</code></dt> - <dd>The optional <code>total_bytes_sec_max</code> element is the - maximum total throughput limit in bytes per second. This cannot - appear with <code>read_bytes_sec_max</code> - or <code>write_bytes_sec_max</code>.</dd> - <dt><code>read_bytes_sec_max</code></dt> - <dd>The optional <code>read_bytes_sec_max</code> element is the - maximum read throughput limit in bytes per second.</dd> - <dt><code>write_bytes_sec_max</code></dt> - <dd>The optional <code>write_bytes_sec_max</code> element is the - maximum write throughput limit in bytes per second.</dd> - <dt><code>total_iops_sec_max</code></dt> - <dd>The optional <code>total_iops_sec_max</code> element is the - maximum total I/O operations per second. This cannot - appear with <code>read_iops_sec_max</code> - or <code>write_iops_sec_max</code>.</dd> - <dt><code>read_iops_sec_max</code></dt> - <dd>The optional <code>read_iops_sec_max</code> element is the - maximum read I/O operations per second.</dd> - <dt><code>write_iops_sec_max</code></dt> - <dd>The optional <code>write_iops_sec_max</code> element is the - maximum write I/O operations per second.</dd> - <dt><code>size_iops_sec</code></dt> - <dd>The optional <code>size_iops_sec</code> element is the - size of I/O operations per second. - - Throughput limits since 1.2.11 and QEMU 1.7 - - </dd> - <dt><code>group_name</code></dt> - <dd>The optional <code>group_name</code> provides the cability - to share I/O throttling quota between multiple drives. This - prevents end-users from circumventing a hosting provider's - throttling policy by splitting 1 large drive in N small drives - and getting N times the normal throttling quota. Any name may - be used. - - group_name since 3.0.0 and QEMU 2.4 - - </dd> - <dt><code>total_bytes_sec_max_length</code></dt> - <dd>The optional <code>total_bytes_sec_max_length</code> - element is the maximum duration in seconds for the - <code>total_bytes_sec_max</code> burst period. Only valid - when the <code>total_bytes_sec_max</code> is set.</dd> - <dt><code>read_bytes_sec_max_length</code></dt> - <dd>The optional <code>read_bytes_sec_max_length</code> - element is the maximum duration in seconds for the - <code>read_bytes_sec_max</code> burst period. Only valid - when the <code>read_bytes_sec_max</code> is set.</dd> - <dt><code>write_bytes_sec_max</code></dt> - <dd>The optional <code>write_bytes_sec_max_length</code> - element is the maximum duration in seconds for the - <code>write_bytes_sec_max</code> burst period. Only valid - when the <code>write_bytes_sec_max</code> is set.</dd> - <dt><code>total_iops_sec_max_length</code></dt> - <dd>The optional <code>total_iops_sec_max_length</code> - element is the maximum duration in seconds for the - <code>total_iops_sec_max</code> burst period. Only valid - when the <code>total_iops_sec_max</code> is set.</dd> - <dt><code>read_iops_sec_max_length</code></dt> - <dd>The optional <code>read_iops_sec_max_length</code> - element is the maximum duration in seconds for the - <code>read_iops_sec_max</code> burst period. Only valid - when the <code>read_iops_sec_max</code> is set.</dd> - <dt><code>write_iops_sec_max</code></dt> - <dd>The optional <code>write_iops_sec_max_length</code> - element is the maximum duration in seconds for the - <code>write_iops_sec_max</code> burst period. Only valid - when the <code>write_iops_sec_max</code> is set. - - Throughput length since 2.4.0 and QEMU 2.6 - - </dd> - </dl> - </dd> - <dt><code>driver</code></dt> - <dd> - The optional driver element allows specifying further details - related to the hypervisor driver used to provide the disk. - Since 0.1.8 - <ul> - <li> - If the hypervisor supports multiple backend drivers, then - the <code>name</code> attribute selects the primary - backend driver name, while the optional <code>type</code> - attribute provides the sub-type. For example, xen - supports a name of "tap", "tap2", "phy", or "file", with a - type of "aio", while qemu only supports a name of "qemu", - but multiple types including "raw", "bochs", "qcow2", and - "qed". - </li> - <li> - The optional <code>cache</code> attribute controls the - cache mechanism, possible values are "default", "none", - "writethrough", "writeback", "directsync" (like - "writethrough", but it bypasses the host page cache) and - "unsafe" (host may cache all disk io, and sync requests from - guest are ignored). - - Since 0.6.0, - "directsync" since 0.9.5, - "unsafe" since 0.9.7 - - </li> - <li> - The optional <code>error_policy</code> attribute controls - how the hypervisor will behave on a disk read or write - error, possible values are "stop", "report", "ignore", and - "enospace".Since 0.8.0, "report" since - 0.9.7 The default is left to the discretion of the - hypervisor. There is also an - optional <code>rerror_policy</code> that controls behavior - for read errors only. Since - 0.9.7. If no rerror_policy is given, error_policy - is used for both read and write errors. If rerror_policy - is given, it overrides the <code>error_policy</code> for - read errors. Also note that "enospace" is not a valid - policy for read errors, so if <code>error_policy</code> is - set to "enospace" and no <code>rerror_policy</code> is - given, the read error policy will be left at its default. - </li> - <li> - The optional <code>io</code> attribute controls specific - policies on I/O; qemu guests support "threads" and - "native" Since 0.8.8, io_uring - Since 6.3.0 (QEMU 5.0). - </li> - <li> - The optional <code>ioeventfd</code> attribute allows users to - set <a href='https://patchwork.kernel.org/patch/43390/'> - domain I/O asynchronous handling</a> for disk device. - The default is left to the discretion of the hypervisor. - Accepted values are "on" and "off". Enabling this allows - qemu to execute VM while a separate thread handles I/O. - Typically guests experiencing high system CPU utilization - during I/O will benefit from this. On the other hand, - on overloaded host it could increase guest I/O latency. - Since 0.9.3 (QEMU and KVM only) - In general you should leave this option alone, unless you - are very certain you know what you are doing. - </li> - <li> - The optional <code>event_idx</code> attribute controls - some aspects of device event processing. The value can be - either 'on' or 'off' - if it is on, it will reduce the - number of interrupts and exits for the guest. The default - is determined by QEMU; usually if the feature is - supported, default is on. In case there is a situation - where this behavior is suboptimal, this attribute provides - a way to force the feature off. - Since 0.9.5 (QEMU and KVM only) - In general you should leave this option alone, unless you - are very certain you know what you are doing. - </li> - <li> - The optional <code>copy_on_read</code> attribute controls - whether to copy read backing file into the image file. The - value can be either "on" or "off". - Copy-on-read avoids accessing the same backing file sectors - repeatedly and is useful when the backing file is over a slow - network. By default copy-on-read is off. - Since 0.9.10 (QEMU and KVM only) - </li> - <li> - The optional <code>discard</code> attribute controls whether - discard requests (also known as "trim" or "unmap") are - ignored or passed to the filesystem. The value can be either - "unmap" (allow the discard request to be passed) or "ignore" - (ignore the discard request). - Since 1.0.6 (QEMU and KVM only) - </li> - <li> - The optional <code>detect_zeroes</code> attribute controls whether - to detect zero write requests. The value can be "off", "on" or - "unmap". First two values turn the detection off and on, - respectively. The third value ("unmap") turns the detection on - and additionally tries to discard such areas from the image based - on the value of <code>discard</code> above (it will act as "on" - if <code>discard</code> is set to "ignore"). NB enabling the - detection is a compute intensive operation, but can save file - space and/or time on slow media. - Since 2.0.0 - </li> - <li> - The optional <code>iothread</code> attribute assigns the - disk to an IOThread as defined by the range for the domain - <a href="#elementsIOThreadsAllocation"><code>iothreads</code></a> - value. Multiple disks may be assigned to the same IOThread and - are numbered from 1 to the domain iothreads value. Available - for a disk device <code>target</code> configured to use "virtio" - <code>bus</code> and "pci" or "ccw" <code>address</code> types. - Since 1.2.8 (QEMU 2.1) - </li> - <li> - The optional <code>queues</code> attribute specifies the number of - virt queues for virtio-blk. (Since 3.9.0) - </li> - <li> - For virtio disks, - <a href="#elementsVirtio">Virtio-specific options</a> can also be - set. (Since 3.5.0) - </li> - </ul> - </dd> - <dt><code>backenddomain</code></dt> - <dd>The optional <code>backenddomain</code> element allows specifying a - backend domain (aka driver domain) hosting the disk. Use the - <code>name</code> attribute to specify the backend domain name. - Since 1.2.13 (Xen only) - </dd> - <dt><code>boot</code></dt> - <dd>Specifies that the disk is bootable. The <code>order</code> - attribute determines the order in which devices will be tried during - boot sequence. On the S390 architecture only the first boot device is - used. The optional <code>loadparm</code> attribute is an 8 character - string which can be queried by guests on S390 via sclp or diag 308. - Linux guests on S390 can use <code>loadparm</code> to select a boot - entry. Since 3.5.0 - The per-device <code>boot</code> elements cannot be used together - with general boot elements in - <a href="#elementsOSBIOS">BIOS bootloader</a> section. - Since 0.8.8 - </dd> - <dt><code>encryption</code></dt> - <dd>Starting with libvirt 3.9.0 the - <code>encryption</code> element is preferred to be a sub-element - of the <code>source</code> element. If present, specifies how the - volume is encrypted using "qcow". See the - <a href="formatstorageencryption.html">Storage Encryption</a> page - for more information. - </dd> - <dt><code>readonly</code></dt> - <dd>If present, this indicates the device cannot be modified by - the guest. For now, this is the default for disks with - attribute <code>device='cdrom'</code>. - </dd> - <dt><code>shareable</code></dt> - <dd>If present, this indicates the device is expected to be shared - between domains (assuming the hypervisor and OS support this), - which means that caching should be deactivated for that device. - </dd> - <dt><code>transient</code></dt> - <dd>If present, this indicates that changes to the device - contents should be reverted automatically when the guest - exits. With some hypervisors, marking a disk transient - prevents the domain from participating in migration or - snapshots. Only suppported in vmx hypervisor. - Since 0.9.5 - </dd> - <dt><code>serial</code></dt> - <dd>If present, this specify serial number of virtual hard drive. - For example, it may look - like <code><serial>WD-WMAP9A966149</serial></code>. - Not supported for scsi-block devices, that is those using - disk <code>type</code> 'block' using <code>device</code> 'lun' - on <code>bus</code> 'scsi'. - Since 0.7.1 - </dd> - <dt><code>wwn</code></dt> - <dd>If present, this element specifies the WWN (World Wide Name) - of a virtual hard disk or CD-ROM drive. It must be composed - of 16 hexadecimal digits. - Since 0.10.1 - </dd> - <dt><code>vendor</code></dt> - <dd>If present, this element specifies the vendor of a virtual hard - disk or CD-ROM device. It must not be longer than 8 printable - characters. - Since 1.0.1 - </dd> - <dt><code>product</code></dt> - <dd>If present, this element specifies the product of a virtual hard - disk or CD-ROM device. It must not be longer than 16 printable - characters. - Since 1.0.1 - </dd> - <dt><code>address</code></dt> - <dd>If present, the <code>address</code> element ties the disk - to a given slot of a controller (the - actual <code><controller></code> device can often be - inferred by libvirt, although it can - be <a href="#elementsControllers">explicitly specified</a>). - The <code>type</code> attribute is mandatory, and is typically - "pci" or "drive". For a "pci" controller, additional - attributes for <code>bus</code>, <code>slot</code>, - and <code>function</code> must be present, as well as - optional <code>domain</code> and <code>multifunction</code>. - Multifunction defaults to 'off'; any other value requires - QEMU 0.1.3 and libvirt 0.9.7. For a - "drive" controller, additional attributes - <code>controller</code>, <code>bus</code>, <code>target</code> - (libvirt 0.9.11), and <code>unit</code> - are available, each defaulting to 0. - </dd> - <dt><code>auth</code></dt> - <dd>Starting with libvirt 3.9.0 the - <code>auth</code> element is preferred to be a sub-element of - the <code>source</code> element. The element is still read and - managed as a <code>disk</code> sub-element. It is invalid to use - <code>auth</code> as both a sub-element of <code>disk</code> - and <code>source</code>. The <code>auth</code> element was - introduced as a <code>disk</code> sub-element in - libvirt 0.9.7. - </dd> - <dt><code>geometry</code></dt> - <dd>The optional <code>geometry</code> element provides the - ability to override geometry settings. This mostly useful for - S390 DASD-disks or older DOS-disks. 0.10.0 - <dl> - <dt><code>cyls</code></dt> - <dd>The <code>cyls</code> attribute is the - number of cylinders. </dd> - <dt><code>heads</code></dt> - <dd>The <code>heads</code> attribute is the - number of heads. </dd> - <dt><code>secs</code></dt> - <dd>The <code>secs</code> attribute is the - number of sectors per track. </dd> - <dt><code>trans</code></dt> - <dd>The optional <code>trans</code> attribute is the - BIOS-Translation-Modus (none, lba or auto)</dd> - </dl> - </dd> - <dt><code>blockio</code></dt> - <dd>If present, the <code>blockio</code> element allows - to override any of the block device properties listed below. - Since 0.10.2 (QEMU and KVM) - <dl> - <dt><code>logical_block_size</code></dt> - <dd>The logical block size the disk will report to the guest - OS. For Linux this would be the value returned by the - BLKSSZGET ioctl and describes the smallest units for disk - I/O. - </dd> - <dt><code>physical_block_size</code></dt> - <dd>The physical block size the disk will report to the guest - OS. For Linux this would be the value returned by the - BLKPBSZGET ioctl and describes the disk's hardware sector - size which can be relevant for the alignment of disk data. - </dd> - </dl> - </dd> - </dl> - - <h4><a id="elementsFilesystems">Filesystems</a></h4> - - - A directory on the host that can be accessed directly from the guest. - since 0.3.3, since 0.8.5 for QEMU/KVM - - -<pre> -... -<devices> - <filesystem type='template'> - <source name='my-vm-template'/> - <target dir='/'/> - </filesystem> - <filesystem type='mount' accessmode='passthrough' multidevs='remap'> - <driver type='path' wrpolicy='immediate'/> - <source dir='/export/to/guest'/> - <target dir='/import/from/host'/> - <readonly/> - </filesystem> - <filesystem type='file' accessmode='passthrough'> - <driver type='loop' format='raw'/> - <driver type='path' wrpolicy='immediate'/> - <source file='/export/to/guest.img'/> - <target dir='/import/from/host'/> - <readonly/> - </filesystem> - <filesystem type='mount' accessmode='passthrough'> - <driver type='virtiofs' queue='1024'/> - <binary path='/usr/libexec/virtiofsd' xattr='on'> - <cache mode='always'/> - <lock posix='on' flock='on'/> - </binary> - <source dir='/path'/> - <target dir='mount_tag'/> - </filesystem> - ... -</devices> -...</pre> - - <dl> - <dt><code>filesystem</code></dt> - <dd> - - The filesystem attribute <code>type</code> specifies the type of the - <code>source</code>. The possible values are: - - <dl> - <dt><code>mount</code></dt> - <dd> - A host directory to mount in the guest. Used by LXC, - OpenVZ (since 0.6.2) - and QEMU/KVM (since 0.8.5). - This is the default <code>type</code> if one is not specified. - This mode also has an optional - sub-element <code>driver</code>, with an - attribute <code>type='path'</code> - or <code>type='handle'</code> (since - 0.9.7). The driver block has an optional attribute - <code>wrpolicy</code> that further controls interaction with - the host page cache; omitting the attribute gives default behavior, - while the value <code>immediate</code> means that a host writeback - is immediately triggered for all pages touched during a guest file - write operation (since 0.9.10). - Since 6.2.0, <code>type='virtiofs'</code> - is also supported. Using virtiofs requires setting up shared memory, - see the guide: <a href="kbase/virtiofs.html">Virtio-FS</a> - </dd> - <dt><code>template</code></dt> - <dd> - OpenVZ filesystem template. Only used by OpenVZ driver. - </dd> - <dt><code>file</code></dt> - <dd> - A host file will be treated as an image and mounted in - the guest. The filesystem format will be autodetected. - Only used by LXC driver. - </dd> - <dt><code>block</code></dt> - <dd> - A host block device to mount in the guest. The filesystem - format will be autodetected. Only used by LXC driver - (since 0.9.5). - </dd> - <dt><code>ram</code></dt> - <dd> - An in-memory filesystem, using memory from the host OS. - The source element has a single attribute <code>usage</code> - which gives the memory usage limit in KiB, unless units - are specified by the <code>units</code> attribute. Only used - by LXC driver. - (since 0.9.13)</dd> - <dt><code>bind</code></dt> - <dd> - A directory inside the guest will be bound to another - directory inside the guest. Only used by LXC driver - (since 0.9.13)</dd> - </dl> - - The filesystem element has an optional attribute <code>accessmode</code> - which specifies the security mode for accessing the source - (since 0.8.5). Currently this only works - with <code>type='mount'</code> for the QEMU/KVM driver. - For driver type <code>virtiofs</code>, only <code>passthrough</code> is - supported. For other driver types, the possible - values are: - - <dl> - <dt><code>passthrough</code></dt> - <dd> - The <code>source</code> is accessed with the permissions of the - user inside the guest. This is the default <code>accessmode</code> if - one is not specified. - <a href="http://lists.gnu.org/archive/html/qemu-devel/2010-05/msg02673.html">More info</a> - </dd> - <dt><code>mapped</code></dt> - <dd> - The <code>source</code> is accessed with the permissions of the - hypervisor (QEMU process). - <a href="http://lists.gnu.org/archive/html/qemu-devel/2010-05/msg02673.html">More info</a> - </dd> - <dt><code>squash</code></dt> - <dd> - Similar to 'passthrough', the exception is that failure of - privileged operations like 'chown' are ignored. This makes a - passthrough-like mode usable for people who run the hypervisor - as non-root. - <a href="http://lists.gnu.org/archive/html/qemu-devel/2010-09/msg00121.html">More info</a> - </dd> - </dl> - - - Since 5.2.0, the filesystem element - has an optional attribute <code>model</code> with supported values - "virtio-transitional", "virtio-non-transitional", or "virtio". - See <a href="#elementsVirtioTransitional">Virtio transitional devices</a> - for more details. - - - - The filesystem element has an optional attribute <code>multidevs</code> - which specifies how to deal with a filesystem export containing more than - one device, in order to avoid file ID collisions on guest when using 9pfs - (since 6.3.0, requires QEMU 4.2). - This attribute is not available for virtiofs. The possible values are: - - - <dl> - <dt><code>default</code></dt> - <dd> - Use QEMU's default setting (which currently is <code>warn</code>). - </dd> - <dt><code>remap</code></dt> - <dd> - This setting allows guest to access multiple devices per export without - encountering misbehaviours. Inode numbers from host are automatically - remapped on guest to actively prevent file ID collisions if guest - accesses one export containing multiple devices. - </dd> - <dt><code>forbid</code></dt> - <dd> - Only allow to access one device per export by guest. Attempts to access - additional devices on the same export will cause the individual - filesystem access by guest to fail with an error and being logged (once) - as error on host side. - </dd> - <dt><code>warn</code></dt> - <dd> - This setting resembles the behaviour of 9pfs prior to QEMU 4.2, that is - no action is performed to prevent any potential file ID collisions if an - export contains multiple devices, with the only exception: a warning is - logged (once) on host side now. This setting may lead to misbehaviours - on guest side if more than one device is exported per export, due to the - potential file ID collisions this may cause on guest side in that case. - </dd> - </dl> - - </dd> - - - The <code>filesystem</code> element may contain the following subelements: - - - <dt><code>driver</code></dt> - <dd> - The optional driver element allows specifying further details - related to the hypervisor driver used to provide the filesystem. - Since 1.0.6 - <ul> - <li> - If the hypervisor supports multiple backend drivers, then - the <code>type</code> attribute selects the primary - backend driver name, while the <code>format</code> - attribute provides the format type. For example, LXC - supports a type of "loop", with a format of "raw" or - "nbd" with any format. QEMU supports a type of "path" - or "handle", but no formats. Virtuozzo driver supports - a type of "ploop" with a format of "ploop". - </li> - <li> - For virtio-backed devices, - <a href="#elementsVirtio">Virtio-specific options</a> can also be - set. (Since 3.5.0) - </li> - <li> - For <code>virtiofs</code>, the <code>queue</code> attribute can be used - to specify the queue size (i.e. how many requests can the queue fit). - (Since 6.2.0) - </li> - </ul> - </dd> - - <dt><code>binary</code></dt> - <dd> - The optional <code>binary</code> element can tune the options for virtiofsd. - All of the following attributes and elements are optional. - The attribute <code>path</code> can be used to override the path to the daemon. - Attribute <code>xattr</code> enables the use of filesystem extended attributes. - Caching can be tuned via the <code>cache</code> element, possible <code>mode</code> - values being <code>none</code> and <code>always</code>. - Locking can be controlled via the <code>lock</code> - element - attributes <code>posix</code> and <code>flock</code> both accepting - values <code>on</code> or <code>off</code>. - (Since 6.2.0) - </dd> - - <dt><code>source</code></dt> - <dd> - The resource on the host that is being accessed in the guest. The - <code>name</code> attribute must be used with - <code>type='template'</code>, and the <code>dir</code> attribute must - be used with <code>type='mount'</code>. The <code>usage</code> attribute - is used with <code>type='ram'</code> to set the memory limit in KiB, - unless units are specified by the <code>units</code> attribute. - </dd> - - <dt><code>target</code></dt> - <dd> - Where the <code>source</code> can be accessed in the guest. For - most drivers this is an automatic mount point, but for QEMU/KVM - this is merely an arbitrary string tag that is exported to the - guest as a hint for where to mount. - </dd> - - <dt><code>readonly</code></dt> - <dd> - Enables exporting filesystem as a readonly mount for guest, by - default read-write access is given (currently only works for - QEMU/KVM driver). - </dd> - - <dt><code>space_hard_limit</code></dt> - <dd> - Maximum space available to this guest's filesystem. - Since 0.9.13 - </dd> - - <dt><code>space_soft_limit</code></dt> - <dd> - Maximum space available to this guest's filesystem. The container is - permitted to exceed its soft limits for a grace period of time. Afterwards the - hard limit is enforced. - Since 0.9.13 - </dd> - </dl> - - <h4><a id="elementsAddress">Device Addresses</a></h4> - - - Many devices have an optional <code><address></code> - sub-element to describe where the device is placed on the - virtual bus presented to the guest. If an address (or any - optional attribute within an address) is omitted on - input, libvirt will generate an appropriate address; but an - explicit address is required if more control over layout is - required. See below for device examples including an address - element. - - - - Every address has a mandatory attribute <code>type</code> that - describes which bus the device is on. The choice of which - address to use for a given device is constrained in part by the - device and the architecture of the guest. For example, - a <code><disk></code> device - uses <code>type='drive'</code>, while - a <code><console></code> device would - use <code>type='pci'</code> on i686 or x86_64 guests, - or <code>type='spapr-vio'</code> on PowerPC64 pseries guests. - Each address type has further optional attributes that control - where on the bus the device will be placed: - - - <dl> - <dt><code>pci</code></dt> - <dd>PCI addresses have the following additional - attributes: <code>domain</code> (a 2-byte hex integer, not - currently used by qemu), <code>bus</code> (a hex value between - 0 and 0xff, inclusive), <code>slot</code> (a hex value between - 0x0 and 0x1f, inclusive), and <code>function</code> (a value - between 0 and 7, inclusive). Also available is - the <code>multifunction</code> attribute, which controls - turning on the multifunction bit for a particular - slot/function in the PCI control register - (since 0.9.7, requires QEMU - 0.13). <code>multifunction</code> defaults to 'off', - but should be set to 'on' for function 0 of a slot that will - have multiple functions used. - (Since 4.10.0), PCI address extensions - depending on the architecture are supported. For example, PCI - addresses for S390 guests will have a <code>zpci</code> child - element, with two attributes: <code>uid</code> (a hex value - between 0x0001 and 0xffff, inclusive), and <code>fid</code> (a - hex value between 0x00000000 and 0xffffffff, inclusive) used by - PCI devices on S390 for User-defined Identifiers and Function - Identifiers. - Since 1.3.5, some hypervisor - drivers may accept an <code><address type='pci'/></code> - element with no other attributes as an explicit request to - assign a PCI address for the device rather than some other - type of address that may also be appropriate for that same - device (e.g. virtio-mmio). - The relationship between the PCI addresses configured in the domain - XML and those seen by the guest OS can sometime seem confusing: a - separate document describes <a href="pci-addresses.html">how PCI - addresses work</a> in more detail. - </dd> - <dt><code>drive</code></dt> - <dd>Drive addresses have the following additional - attributes: <code>controller</code> (a 2-digit controller - number), <code>bus</code> (a 2-digit bus number), - <code>target</code> (a 2-digit target number), - and <code>unit</code> (a 2-digit unit number on the bus). - </dd> - <dt><code>virtio-serial</code></dt> - <dd>Each virtio-serial address has the following additional - attributes: <code>controller</code> (a 2-digit controller - number), <code>bus</code> (a 2-digit bus number), - and <code>slot</code> (a 2-digit slot within the bus). - </dd> - <dt><code>ccid</code></dt> - <dd>A CCID address, for smart-cards, has the following - additional attributes: <code>bus</code> (a 2-digit bus - number), and <code>slot</code> attribute (a 2-digit slot - within the bus). Since 0.8.8. - </dd> - <dt><code>usb</code></dt> - <dd>USB addresses have the following additional - attributes: <code>bus</code> (a hex value between 0 and 0xfff, - inclusive), and <code>port</code> (a dotted notation of up to - four octets, such as 1.2 or 2.1.3.1). - </dd> - <dt><code>spapr-vio</code></dt> - <dd>On PowerPC pseries guests, devices can be assigned to the - SPAPR-VIO bus. It has a flat 32-bit address space; by - convention, devices are generally assigned at a non-zero - multiple of 0x00001000, but other addresses are valid and - permitted by libvirt. Each address has the following - additional attribute: <code>reg</code> (the hex value address - of the starting register). Since - 0.9.9. - </dd> - <dt><code>ccw</code></dt> - <dd>S390 guests with a <code>machine</code> value of - s390-ccw-virtio use the native CCW bus for I/O devices. - CCW bus addresses have the following additional attributes: - <code>cssid</code> (a hex value between 0 and 0xfe, inclusive), - <code>ssid</code> (a value between 0 and 3, inclusive) and - <code>devno</code> (a hex value between 0 and 0xffff, inclusive). - Partially specified bus addresses are not allowed. - If omitted, libvirt will assign a free bus address with - cssid=0xfe and ssid=0. Virtio-ccw devices must have their cssid - set to 0xfe. - Since 1.0.4 - </dd> - <dt><code>virtio-mmio</code></dt> - <dd>This places the device on the virtio-mmio transport, which is - currently only available for some <code>armv7l</code> and - <code>aarch64</code> virtual machines. virtio-mmio addresses - do not have any additional attributes. - Since 1.1.3 - If the guest architecture is <code>aarch64</code> and the machine - type is <code>virt</code>, libvirt will automatically assign PCI - addresses to devices; however, the presence of a single device - with virtio-mmio address in the guest configuration will cause - libvirt to assign virtio-mmio addresses to all further devices. - Since 3.0.0 - </dd> - <dt><code>isa</code></dt> - <dd>ISA addresses have the following additional - attributes: <code>iobase</code> and <code>irq</code>. - Since 1.2.1 - </dd> - <dt><code>unassigned</code></dt> - <dd>For PCI hostdevs, <code><address type='unassigned'/></code> - allows the admin to include a PCI hostdev in the domain XML definition, - without making it available for the guest. This allows for configurations - in which Libvirt manages the device as a regular PCI hostdev, - regardless of whether the guest will have access to it. - <code><address type='unassigned'/></code> is an invalid address - type for all other device types. - Since 6.0.0 - </dd> - </dl> - - <h4><a id="elementsVirtio">Virtio-related options</a></h4> - - - QEMU's virtio devices have some attributes related to the virtio transport under - the <code>driver</code> element: - The <code>iommu</code> attribute enables the use of emulated IOMMU - by the device. The attribute <code>ats</code> controls the Address - Translation Service support for PCIe devices. This is needed to make use - of IOTLB support (see <a href="#elementsIommu">IOMMU device</a>). - Possible values are <code>on</code> or <code>off</code>. - Since 3.5.0 - - - The attribute <code>packed</code> controls if QEMU should try to use - packed virtqueues. Compared to regular split queues, packed queues - consist of only a single descriptor ring replacing available and used - ring, index and descriptor buffer. This can result in better cache - utilization and performance. If packed virtqueues are actually used - depends on the feature negotiation between QEMU, vhost backends and guest - drivers. Possible values are <code>on</code> or <code>off</code>. - Since 6.3.0 (QEMU and KVM only) - - - <h4><a id="elementsVirtioTransitional">Virtio transitional devices</a></h4> - - - Since 5.2.0, some of QEMU's virtio devices, - when used with PCI/PCIe machine types, accept the following - <code>model</code> values: - - - <dl> - <dt><code>virtio-transitional</code></dt> - <dd>This device can work both with virtio 0.9 and virtio 1.0 guest - drivers, so it's the best choice when compatibility with older - guest operating systems is desired. libvirt will plug the device - into a conventional PCI slot. - </dd> - <dt><code>virtio-non-transitional</code></dt> - <dd>This device can only work with virtio 1.0 guest drivers, and it's - the recommended option unless compatibility with older guest - operating systems is necessary. libvirt will plug the device into - either a PCI Express slot or a conventional PCI slot based on the - machine type, resulting in a more optimized PCI topology. - </dd> - <dt><code>virtio</code></dt> - <dd>This device will work like a <code>virtio-non-transitional</code> - device when plugged into a PCI Express slot, and like a - <code>virtio-transitional</code> device otherwise; libvirt will - pick one or the other based on the machine type. This is the best - choice when compatibility with libvirt versions older than 5.2.0 - is necessary, but it's otherwise not recommended to use it. - </dd> - </dl> - - - While the information outlined above applies to most virtio devices, - there are a few exceptions: - - - <ul> - <li> - for SCSI controllers, <code>virtio-scsi</code> must be used instead - of <code>virtio</code> for backwards compatibility reasons; - </li> - <li> - some devices, such as GPUs and input devices (keyboard, tablet and - mouse), are only defined in the virtio 1.0 spec and as such don't - have a transitional variant: the only accepted model is - <code>virtio</code>, which will result in a non-transitional device. - </li> - </ul> - - - For more details see the - <a href="https://lists.gnu.org/archive/html/qemu-devel/2018-12/msg00923.html">qemu patch posting</a> and the - <a href="http://docs.oasis-open.org/virtio/virtio/v1.0/virtio-v1.0.html">virtio-1.0 spec</a>. - - - - <h4><a id="elementsControllers">Controllers</a></h4> - - - Depending on the guest architecture, some device buses can - appear more than once, with a group of virtual devices tied to a - virtual controller. Normally, libvirt can automatically infer such - controllers without requiring explicit XML markup, but sometimes - it is necessary to provide an explicit controller element, notably - when planning the <a href="pci-hotplug.html">PCI topology</a> - for guests where device hotplug is expected. - - -<pre> -... -<devices> - <controller type='ide' index='0'/> - <controller type='virtio-serial' index='0' ports='16' vectors='4'/> - <controller type='virtio-serial' index='1'> - <address type='pci' domain='0x0000' bus='0x00' slot='0x0a' function='0x0'/> - </controller> - <controller type='scsi' index='0' model='virtio-scsi'> - <driver iothread='4'/> - <address type='pci' domain='0x0000' bus='0x00' slot='0x0b' function='0x0'/> - </controller> - <controller type='xenbus' maxGrantFrames='64' maxEventChannels='2047'/> - ... -</devices> -...</pre> - - - Each controller has a mandatory attribute <code>type</code>, - which must be one of 'ide', 'fdc', 'scsi', 'sata', 'usb', - 'ccid', 'virtio-serial' or 'pci', and a mandatory - attribute <code>index</code> which is the decimal integer - describing in which order the bus controller is encountered (for - use in <code>controller</code> attributes of - <code><address></code> elements). - Since 1.3.5 the index is optional; if - not specified, it will be auto-assigned to be the lowest unused - index for the given controller type. Some controller types have - additional attributes that control specific features, such as: - - - <dl> - <dt><code>virtio-serial</code></dt> - <dd>The <code>virtio-serial</code> controller has two additional - optional attributes <code>ports</code> and <code>vectors</code>, - which control how many devices can be connected through the - controller. Since 5.2.0, it - supports an optional attribute <code>model</code> which can - be 'virtio', 'virtio-transitional', or 'virtio-non-transitional'. See - <a href="#elementsVirtioTransitional">Virtio transitional devices</a> - for more details. - </dd> - <dt><code>scsi</code></dt> - <dd>A <code>scsi</code> controller has an optional attribute - <code>model</code>, which is one of 'auto', 'buslogic', 'ibmvscsi', - 'lsilogic', 'lsisas1068', 'lsisas1078', 'virtio-scsi', - 'vmpvscsi', 'virtio-transitional', 'virtio-non-transitional'. See - <a href="#elementsVirtioTransitional">Virtio transitional devices</a> - for more details. - </dd> - <dt><code>usb</code></dt> - <dd>A <code>usb</code> controller has an optional attribute - <code>model</code>, which is one of "piix3-uhci", "piix4-uhci", - "ehci", "ich9-ehci1", "ich9-uhci1", "ich9-uhci2", "ich9-uhci3", - "vt82c686b-uhci", "pci-ohci", "nec-xhci", "qusb1" (xen pvusb - with qemu backend, version 1.1), "qusb2" (xen pvusb with qemu - backend, version 2.0) or "qemu-xhci". Additionally, - since 0.10.0, if the USB bus needs to - be explicitly disabled for the guest, <code>model='none'</code> - may be used. Since 1.0.5, no default - USB controller will be built on s390. - Since 1.3.5, USB controllers accept a - <code>ports</code> attribute to configure how many devices can be - connected to the controller.</dd> - <dt><code>ide</code></dt> - <dd>Since 3.10.0 for the vbox driver, the - <code>ide</code> controller has an optional attribute - <code>model</code>, which is one of "piix3", "piix4" or "ich6".</dd> - <dt><code>xenbus</code></dt> - <dd>Since 5.2.0, the <code>xenbus</code> - controller has an optional attribute <code>maxGrantFrames</code>, - which specifies the maximum number of grant frames the controller - makes available for connected devices. - Since 6.3.0, the xenbus controller - supports the optional <code>maxEventChannels</code> attribute, - which specifies maximum number of event channels (PV interrupts) - that can be used by the guest.</dd> - </dl> - - - Note: The PowerPC64 "spapr-vio" addresses do not have an - associated controller. - - - - For controllers that are themselves devices on a PCI or USB bus, - an optional sub-element <code><address></code> can specify - the exact relationship of the controller to its master bus, with - semantics <a href="#elementsAddress">given above</a>. - - - - An optional sub-element <code>driver</code> can specify the driver - specific options: - - <dl> - <dt><code>queues</code></dt> - <dd> - The optional <code>queues</code> attribute specifies the number of - queues for the controller. For best performance, it's recommended to - specify a value matching the number of vCPUs. - Since 1.0.5 (QEMU and KVM only) - </dd> - <dt><code>cmd_per_lun</code></dt> - <dd> - The optional <code>cmd_per_lun</code> attribute specifies the maximum - number of commands that can be queued on devices controlled by the - host. - Since 1.2.7 (QEMU and KVM only) - </dd> - <dt><code>max_sectors</code></dt> - <dd> - The optional <code>max_sectors</code> attribute specifies the maximum - amount of data in bytes that will be transferred to or from the device - in a single command. The transfer length is measured in sectors, where - a sector is 512 bytes. - Since 1.2.7 (QEMU and KVM only) - </dd> - <dt><code>ioeventfd</code></dt> - <dd> - The optional <code>ioeventfd</code> attribute specifies - whether the controller should use - <a href='https://patchwork.kernel.org/patch/43390/'> - I/O asynchronous handling</a> or not. Accepted values are - "on" and "off". Since 1.2.18 - </dd> - <dt><code>iothread</code></dt> - <dd> - Supported for controller type <code>scsi</code> using model - <code>virtio-scsi</code> for <code>address</code> types - <code>pci</code> and <code>ccw</code> - since 1.3.5 (QEMU 2.4). - - The optional <code>iothread</code> attribute assigns the controller - to an IOThread as defined by the range for the domain - <a href="#elementsIOThreadsAllocation"><code>iothreads</code></a> - value. Each SCSI <code>disk</code> assigned to use the specified - <code>controller</code> will utilize the same IOThread. If a specific - IOThread is desired for a specific SCSI <code>disk</code>, then - multiple controllers must be defined each having a specific - <code>iothread</code> value. The <code>iothread</code> value - must be within the range 1 to the domain iothreads value. - </dd> - <dt>virtio options</dt> - <dd> - For virtio controllers, - <a href="#elementsVirtio">Virtio-specific options</a> can also be - set. (Since 3.5.0) - </dd> - </dl> - - USB companion controllers have an optional - sub-element <code><master></code> to specify the exact - relationship of the companion to its master controller. - A companion controller is on the same bus as its master, so - the companion <code>index</code> value should be equal. - Not all controller models can be used as companion controllers - and libvirt might provide some sensible defaults (settings - of <code>master startport</code> and <code>function</code> of an - address) for some particular models. - Preferred companion controllers are <code>ich-uhci[123]</code>. - - -<pre> -... -<devices> - <controller type='usb' index='0' model='ich9-ehci1'> - <address type='pci' domain='0' bus='0' slot='4' function='7'/> - </controller> - <controller type='usb' index='0' model='ich9-uhci1'> - <master startport='0'/> - <address type='pci' domain='0' bus='0' slot='4' function='0' multifunction='on'/> - </controller> - ... -</devices> -...</pre> - - - PCI controllers have an optional <code>model</code> attribute; possible - values for this attribute are - - <ul> - <li> - <code>pci-root</code>, <code>pci-bridge</code> - (since 1.0.5) - </li> - <li> - <code>pcie-root</code>, <code>dmi-to-pci-bridge</code> - (since 1.1.2) - </li> - <li> - <code>pcie-root-port</code>, <code>pcie-switch-upstream-port</code>, - <code>pcie-switch-downstream-port</code> - (since 1.2.19) - </li> - <li> - <code>pci-expander-bus</code>, <code>pcie-expander-bus</code> - (since 1.3.4) - </li> - <li> - <code>pcie-to-pci-bridge</code> - (since 4.3.0) - </li> - </ul> - - The root controllers (<code>pci-root</code> - and <code>pcie-root</code>) have an - optional <code>pcihole64</code> element specifying how big (in - kilobytes, or in the unit specified by <code>pcihole64</code>'s - <code>unit</code> attribute) the 64-bit PCI hole should be. Some guests (like - Windows XP or Windows Server 2003) might crash when QEMU and Seabios - are recent enough to support 64-bit PCI holes, unless this is disabled - (set to 0). Since 1.1.2 (QEMU only) - - - PCI controllers also have an optional - subelement <code><model></code> with an attribute - <code>name</code>. The name attribute holds the name of the - specific device that qemu is emulating (e.g. "i82801b11-bridge") - rather than simply the class of device ("pcie-to-pci-bridge", - "pci-bridge"), which is set in the controller element's - model attribute. In almost all cases, you should not - manually add a <code><model></code> subelement to a - controller, nor should you modify one that is automatically - generated by libvirt. Since 1.2.19 (QEMU - only). - - - PCI controllers also have an optional - subelement <code><target></code> with the attributes and - subelements listed below. These are configurable items that 1) - are visible to the guest OS so must be preserved for guest ABI - compatibility, and 2) are usually left to default values or - derived automatically by libvirt. In almost all cases, you - should not manually add a <code><target></code> subelement - to a controller, nor should you modify the values in the those - that are automatically generated by - libvirt. Since 1.2.19 (QEMU only). - - <dl> - <dt><code>chassisNr</code></dt> - <dd> - PCI controllers that have attribute model="pci-bridge", can - also have a <code>chassisNr</code> attribute in - the <code><target></code> subelement, which is used to - control QEMU's "chassis_nr" option for the pci-bridge device - (normally libvirt automatically sets this to the same value as - the index attribute of the pci controller). If set, chassisNr - must be between 1 and 255. - </dd> - <dt><code>chassis</code></dt> - <dd> - pcie-root-port and pcie-switch-downstream-port controllers can - also have a <code>chassis</code> attribute in - the <code><target></code> subelement, which is used to - set the controller's "chassis" configuration value, which is - visible to the virtual machine. If set, chassis must be - between 0 and 255. - </dd> - <dt><code>port</code></dt> - <dd> - pcie-root-port and pcie-switch-downstream-port controllers can - also have a <code>port</code> attribute in - the <code><target></code> subelement, which - is used to set the controller's "port" configuration value, - which is visible to the virtual machine. If set, port must be - between 0 and 255. - </dd> - <dt><code>hotplug</code></dt> - <dd> - pcie-root-port and pcie-switch-downstream-port controllers can - also have a <code>hotplug</code> attribute in - the <code><target></code> subelement, which is used to - disable hotplug/unplug of devices on a particular - controller. The default setting of <code>hotplug</code> - is <code>on</code>; it should be set to <code>off</code> to - disable hotplug/unplug of devices on a particular controller. - Since 6.3.0 - </dd> - <dt><code>busNr</code></dt> - <dd> - pci-expander-bus and pcie-expander-bus controllers can have an - optional <code>busNr</code> attribute (1-254). This will be - the bus number of the new bus; All bus numbers between that - specified and 255 will be available only for assignment to - PCI/PCIe controllers plugged into the hierarchy starting with - this expander bus, and bus numbers less than the specified - value will be available to the next lower expander-bus (or the - root-bus if there are no lower expander buses). If you do not - specify a busNumber, libvirt will find the lowest existing - busNumber in all other expander buses (or use 256 if there are - no others) and auto-assign the busNr of that found bus - 2, - which provides one bus number for the pci-expander-bus and one - for the pci-bridge that is automatically attached to it (if - you plan on adding more pci-bridges to the hierarchy of the - bus, you should manually set busNr to a lower value). - - A similar algorithm is used for automatically determining - the busNr attribute for pcie-expander-bus, but since the - pcie-expander-bus doesn't have any built-in pci-bridge, the - 2nd bus-number is just being reserved for the pcie-root-port - that must necessarily be connected to the bus in order to - actually plug in an endpoint device. If you intend to plug - multiple devices into a pcie-expander-bus, you must connect - a pcie-switch-upstream-port to the pcie-root-port that is - plugged into the pcie-expander-bus, and multiple - pcie-switch-downstream-ports to the - pcie-switch-upstream-port, and of course for this to work - properly, you will need to decrease the pcie-expander-bus' - busNr accordingly so that there are enough unused bus - numbers above it to accommodate giving out one bus number for - the upstream-port and one for each downstream-port (in - addition to the pcie-root-port and the pcie-expander-bus - itself). - - </dd> - <dt><code>node</code></dt> - <dd> - Some PCI controllers (<code>pci-expander-bus</code> for the pc - machine type, <code>pcie-expander-bus</code> for the q35 machine - type and, since 3.6.0, - <code>pci-root</code> for the pseries machine type) can have an - optional <code><node></code> subelement within - the <code><target></code> subelement, which is used to - set the NUMA node reported to the guest OS for that bus - the - guest OS will then know that all devices on that bus are a - part of the specified NUMA node (it is up to the user of the - libvirt API to attach host devices to the correct - pci-expander-bus when assigning them to the domain). - </dd> - <dt><code>index</code></dt> - <dd> - pci-root controllers for pSeries guests use this attribute to - record the order they will show up in the guest. - Since 3.6.0 - </dd> - </dl> - - For machine types which provide an implicit PCI bus, the pci-root - controller with index=0 is auto-added and required to use PCI devices. - pci-root has no address. - PCI bridges are auto-added if there are too many devices to fit on - the one bus provided by pci-root, or a PCI bus number greater than zero - was specified. - PCI bridges can also be specified manually, but their addresses should - only refer to PCI buses provided by already specified PCI controllers. - Leaving gaps in the PCI controller indexes might lead to an invalid - configuration. - -<pre> -... -<devices> - <controller type='pci' index='0' model='pci-root'/> - <controller type='pci' index='1' model='pci-bridge'> - <address type='pci' domain='0' bus='0' slot='5' function='0' multifunction='off'/> - </controller> -</devices> -...</pre> - - - For machine types which provide an implicit PCI Express (PCIe) - bus (for example, the machine types based on the Q35 chipset), - the pcie-root controller with index=0 is auto-added to the - domain's configuration. pcie-root has also no address, provides - 31 slots (numbered 1-31) that can be used to attach PCIe or PCI - devices (although libvirt will never auto-assign a PCI device to - a PCIe slot, it will allow manual specification of such an - assignment). Devices connected to pcie-root cannot be - hotplugged. If traditional PCI devices are present in the guest - configuration, a <code>pcie-to-pci-bridge</code> controller will - automatically be added: this controller, which plugs into a - <code>pcie-root-port</code>, provides 31 usable PCI slots (1-31) with - hotplug support (since 4.3.0). If the QEMU - binary doesn't support the corresponding device, then a - <code>dmi-to-pci-bridge</code> controller will be added instead, - usually at the defacto standard location of slot=0x1e. A - dmi-to-pci-bridge controller plugs into a PCIe slot (as provided - by pcie-root), and itself provides 31 standard PCI slots (which - also do not support device hotplug). In order to have - hot-pluggable PCI slots in the guest system, a pci-bridge - controller will also be automatically created and connected to - one of the slots of the auto-created dmi-to-pci-bridge - controller; all guest PCI devices with addresses that are - auto-determined by libvirt will be placed on this pci-bridge - device. (since 1.1.2). - - - Domains with an implicit pcie-root can also add controllers - with <code>model='pcie-root-port'</code>, - <code>model='pcie-switch-upstream-port'</code>, - and <code>model='pcie-switch-downstream-port'</code>. pcie-root-port - is a simple type of bridge device that can connect only to one - of the 31 slots on the pcie-root bus on its upstream side, and - makes a single (PCIe, hotpluggable) port available on the - downstream side (at slot='0'). pcie-root-port can be used to - provide a single slot to later hotplug a PCIe device (but is not - itself hotpluggable - it must be in the configuration when the - domain is started). - (since 1.2.19) - - - pcie-switch-upstream-port is a more flexible (but also more - complex) device that can only plug into a pcie-root-port or - pcie-switch-downstream-port on the upstream side (and only - before the domain is started - it is not hot-pluggable), and - provides 32 ports on the downstream side (slot='0' - slot='31') - that accept only pcie-switch-downstream-port devices; each - pcie-switch-downstream-port device can only plug into a - pcie-switch-upstream-port on its upstream side (again, not - hot-pluggable), and on its downstream side provides a single - hotpluggable pcie port that can accept any standard pci or pcie - device (or another pcie-switch-upstream-port), i.e. identical in - function to a pcie-root-port. (since - 1.2.19) - -<pre> -... -<devices> - <controller type='pci' index='0' model='pcie-root'/> - <controller type='pci' index='1' model='pcie-root-port'> - <address type='pci' domain='0x0000' bus='0x00' slot='0x01' function='0x0'/> - </controller> - <controller type='pci' index='2' model='pcie-to-pci-bridge'> - <address type='pci' domain='0x0000' bus='0x01' slot='0x00' function='0x0'/> - </controller> -</devices> -...</pre> - - <h4><a id="elementsLease">Device leases</a></h4> - - - When using a lock manager, it may be desirable to record device leases - against a VM. The lock manager will ensure the VM won't start unless - the leases can be acquired. - - -<pre> -... -<devices> - ... - <lease> - <lockspace>somearea</lockspace> - <key>somekey</key> - <target path='/some/lease/path' offset='1024'/> - </lease> - ... -</devices> -...</pre> - - <dl> - <dt><code>lockspace</code></dt> - <dd>This is an arbitrary string, identifying the lockspace - within which the key is held. Lock managers may impose - extra restrictions on the format, or length of the lockspace - name.</dd> - <dt><code>key</code></dt> - <dd>This is an arbitrary string, uniquely identifying the - lease to be acquired. Lock managers may impose extra - restrictions on the format, or length of the key. - </dd> - <dt><code>target</code></dt> - <dd>This is the fully qualified path of the file associated - with the lockspace. The offset specifies where the lease - is stored within the file. If the lock manager does not - require an offset, just pass 0. - </dd> - </dl> - - <h4><a id="elementsHostDev">Host device assignment</a></h4> - - <h5><a id="elementsHostDevSubsys">USB / PCI / SCSI devices</a></h5> - - - USB, PCI and SCSI devices attached to the host can be passed through - to the guest using the <code>hostdev</code> element. - since after 0.4.4 for USB, 0.6.0 for PCI (KVM only) - and 1.0.6 for SCSI (KVM only): - - -<pre> -... -<devices> - <hostdev mode='subsystem' type='usb'> - <source startupPolicy='optional'> - <vendor id='0x1234'/> - <product id='0xbeef'/> - </source> - <boot order='2'/> - </hostdev> -</devices> -...</pre> - - or: - -<pre> -... -<devices> - <hostdev mode='subsystem' type='pci' managed='yes'> - <source> - <address domain='0x0000' bus='0x06' slot='0x02' function='0x0'/> - </source> - <boot order='1'/> - <rom bar='on' file='/etc/fake/boot.bin'/> - </hostdev> -</devices> -...</pre> - - or: - -<pre> -... -<devices> - <hostdev mode='subsystem' type='scsi' sgio='filtered' rawio='yes'> - <source> - <adapter name='scsi_host0'/> - <address bus='0' target='0' unit='0'/> - </source> - <readonly/> - <address type='drive' controller='0' bus='0' target='0' unit='0'/> - </hostdev> -</devices> -...</pre> - - - or: - -<pre> -... -<devices> - <hostdev mode='subsystem' type='scsi'> - <source protocol='iscsi' name='iqn.2014-08.com.example:iscsi-nopool/1'> - <host name='example.com' port='3260'/> - <auth username='myuser'> - <secret type='iscsi' usage='libvirtiscsi'/> - </auth> - </source> - <address type='drive' controller='0' bus='0' target='0' unit='0'/> - </hostdev> -</devices> -...</pre> - - or: - -<pre> - ... - <devices> - <hostdev mode='subsystem' type='scsi_host'> - <source protocol='vhost' wwpn='naa.50014057667280d8'/> - </hostdev> - </devices> - ...</pre> - - or: - -<pre> - ... - <devices> - <hostdev mode='subsystem' type='mdev' model='vfio-pci'> - <source> - <address uuid='c2177883-f1bb-47f0-914d-32a22e3a8804'/> - </source> - </hostdev> - <hostdev mode='subsystem' type='mdev' model='vfio-ccw'> - <source> - <address uuid='9063cba3-ecef-47b6-abcf-3fef4fdcad85'/> - </source> - <address type='ccw' cssid='0xfe' ssid='0x0' devno='0x0001'/> - </hostdev> - </devices> - ...</pre> - - <dl> - <dt><code>hostdev</code></dt> - <dd>The <code>hostdev</code> element is the main container for describing - host devices. For each device, the <code>mode</code> is always - "subsystem" and the <code>type</code> is one of the following values - with additional attributes noted. - <dl> - <dt><code>usb</code></dt> - <dd>USB devices are detached from the host on guest startup - and reattached after the guest exits or the device is - hot-unplugged. - </dd> - <dt><code>pci</code></dt> - <dd>For PCI devices, when <code>managed</code> is "yes" it is - detached from the host before being passed on to the guest - and reattached to the host after the guest exits. If - <code>managed</code> is omitted or "no", the user is - responsible to call <code>virNodeDeviceDetachFlags</code> - (or <code>virsh nodedev-detach</code> before starting the guest - or hot-plugging the device and <code>virNodeDeviceReAttach</code> - (or <code>virsh nodedev-reattach</code>) after hot-unplug or - stopping the guest. - </dd> - <dt><code>scsi</code></dt> - <dd>For SCSI devices, user is responsible to make sure the device - is not used by host. If supported by the hypervisor and OS, the - optional <code>sgio</code> (since 1.0.6) - attribute indicates whether unprivileged SG_IO commands are - filtered for the disk. Valid settings are "filtered" or - "unfiltered", where the default is "filtered". - The optional <code>rawio</code> - (since 1.2.9) attribute indicates - whether the lun needs the rawio capability. Valid settings are - "yes" or "no". See the rawio description within the - <a href="#elementsDisks">disk</a> section. - If a disk lun in the domain already has the rawio capability, - then this setting not required. - </dd> - <dt><code>scsi_host</code></dt> - <dd>since 2.5.0For SCSI devices, user - is responsible to make sure the device is not used by host. This - <code>type</code> passes all LUNs presented by a single HBA to - the guest. Since 5.2.0, the - <code>model</code> attribute can be specified further - with "virtio-transitional", "virtio-non-transitional", or - "virtio". See - <a href="#elementsVirtioTransitional">Virtio transitional devices</a> - for more details. - </dd> - <dt><code>mdev</code></dt> - <dd>For mediated devices (Since 3.2.0) - the <code>model</code> attribute specifies the device API which - determines how the host's vfio driver will expose the device to the - guest. Currently, <code>model='vfio-pci'</code>, - <code>model='vfio-ccw'</code> (Since 4.4.0) - and <code>model='vfio-ap'</code> (Since 4.9.0) - is supported. <a href="drvnodedev.html#MDEV">MDEV</a> section - provides more information about mediated devices as well as how to - create mediated devices on the host. - Since 4.6.0 (QEMU 2.12) an optional - <code>display</code> attribute may be used to enable or disable - support for an accelerated remote desktop backed by a mediated - device (such as NVIDIA vGPU or Intel GVT-g) as an alternative to - emulated <a href="#elementsVideo">video devices</a>. This attribute - is limited to <code>model='vfio-pci'</code> only. Supported values - are either <code>on</code> or <code>off</code> (default is 'off'). - It is required to use a - <a href="#elementsGraphics">graphical framebuffer</a> in order to - use this attribute, currently only supported with VNC, Spice and - egl-headless graphics devices. - - Since version 5.10.0, there is an optional - <code>ramfb</code> attribute for devices with - <code>model='vfio-pci'</code>. Supported values are either - <code>on</code> or <code>off</code> (default is 'off'). When - enabled, this attribute provides a memory framebuffer device to the - guest. This framebuffer will be used as a boot display when a vgpu - device is the primary display. - - Note: There are also some implications on the usage of guest's - address type depending on the <code>model</code> attribute, - see the <code>address</code> element below. - - </dd> - </dl> - - Note: The <code>managed</code> attribute is only used with - <code>type='pci'</code> and is ignored by all the other device types, - thus setting <code>managed</code> explicitly with other than a PCI - device has the same effect as omitting it. Similarly, - <code>model</code> attribute is only supported by mediated devices and - ignored by all other device types. - - </dd> - <dt><code>source</code></dt> - <dd>The source element describes the device as seen from the host using - the following mechanism to describe: - <dl> - <dt><code>usb</code></dt> - <dd>The USB device can either be addressed by vendor / product id - using the <code>vendor</code> and <code>product</code> elements - or by the device's address on the host using the - <code>address</code> element. - - Since 1.0.0, the <code>source</code> - element of USB devices may contain <code>startupPolicy</code> - attribute which can be used to define policy what to do if the - specified host USB device is not found. The attribute accepts - the following values: - - <table class="top_table"> - <tr> - <td> mandatory </td> - <td> fail if missing for any reason (the default) </td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td> requisite </td> - <td> fail if missing on boot up, - drop if missing on migrate/restore/revert </td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td> optional </td> - <td> drop if missing at any start attempt </td> - </tr> - </table> - </dd> - <dt><code>pci</code></dt> - <dd>PCI devices can only be described by their <code>address</code>. - </dd> - <dt><code>scsi</code></dt> - <dd>SCSI devices are described by both the <code>adapter</code> - and <code>address</code> elements. The <code>address</code> - element includes a <code>bus</code> attribute (a 2-digit bus - number), a <code>target</code> attribute (a 10-digit target - number), and a <code>unit</code> attribute (a 20-digit unit - number on the bus). Not all hypervisors support larger - <code>target</code> and <code>unit</code> values. It is up - to each hypervisor to determine the maximum value supported - for the adapter. - - Since 1.2.8, the <code>source</code> - element of a SCSI device may contain the <code>protocol</code> - attribute. When the attribute is set to "iscsi", the host - device XML follows the network <a href="#elementsDisks">disk</a> - device using the same <code>name</code> attribute and optionally - using the <code>auth</code> element to provide the authentication - credentials to the iSCSI server. - - </dd> - <dt><code>scsi_host</code></dt> - <dd>Since 2.5.0, multiple LUNs behind a - single SCSI HBA are described by a <code>protocol</code> - attribute set to "vhost" and a <code>wwpn</code> attribute that - is the vhost_scsi wwpn (16 hexadecimal digits with a prefix of - "naa.") established in the host configfs. - </dd> - <dt><code>mdev</code></dt> - <dd>Mediated devices (Since 3.2.0) are - described by the <code>address</code> element. The - <code>address</code> element contains a single mandatory attribute - <code>uuid</code>. - </dd> - </dl> - </dd> - <dt><code>vendor</code>, <code>product</code></dt> - <dd>The <code>vendor</code> and <code>product</code> elements each have an - <code>id</code> attribute that specifies the USB vendor and product id. - The ids can be given in decimal, hexadecimal (starting with 0x) or - octal (starting with 0) form.</dd> - <dt><code>boot</code></dt> - <dd>Specifies that the device is bootable. The <code>order</code> - attribute determines the order in which devices will be tried during - boot sequence. The per-device <code>boot</code> elements cannot be - used together with general boot elements in - <a href="#elementsOSBIOS">BIOS bootloader</a> section. - Since 0.8.8 for PCI devices, - Since 1.0.1 for USB devices. - </dd> - <dt><code>rom</code></dt> - <dd>The <code>rom</code> element is used to change how a PCI - device's ROM is presented to the guest. The optional <code>bar</code> - attribute can be set to "on" or "off", and determines whether - or not the device's ROM will be visible in the guest's memory - map. (In PCI documentation, the "rombar" setting controls the - presence of the Base Address Register for the ROM). If no rom - bar is specified, the qemu default will be used (older - versions of qemu used a default of "off", while newer qemus - have a default of "on"). Since - 0.9.7 (QEMU and KVM only). The optional - <code>file</code> attribute contains an absolute path to a binary file - to be presented to the guest as the device's ROM BIOS. This - can be useful, for example, to provide a PXE boot ROM for a - virtual function of an sr-iov capable ethernet device (which - has no boot ROMs for the VFs). - Since 0.9.10 (QEMU and KVM only). - The optional <code>enabled</code> attribute can be set to - <code>no</code> to disable PCI ROM loading completely for the device; - if PCI ROM loading is disabled through this attribute, attempts to - tweak the loading process further using the <code>bar</code> or - <code>file</code> attributes will be rejected. - Since 4.3.0 (QEMU and KVM only). - </dd> - <dt><code>address</code></dt> - <dd>The <code>address</code> element for USB devices has a - <code>bus</code> and <code>device</code> attribute to specify the - USB bus and device number the device appears at on the host. - The values of these attributes can be given in decimal, hexadecimal - (starting with 0x) or octal (starting with 0) form. - For PCI devices the element carries 4 attributes allowing to designate - the device as can be found with the <code>lspci</code> or - with <code>virsh nodedev-list</code>. For SCSI devices a 'drive' - address type must be used. For mediated devices, which are software-only - devices defining an allocation of resources on the physical parent device, - the address type used must conform to the <code>model</code> attribute - of element <code>hostdev</code>, e.g. any address type other than PCI for - <code>vfio-pci</code> device API or any address type other than CCW for - <code>vfio-ccw</code> device API will result in an error. - <a href="#elementsAddress">See above</a> for more details on the address - element.</dd> - <dt><code>driver</code></dt> - <dd> - PCI devices can have an optional <code>driver</code> - subelement that specifies which backend driver to use for PCI - device assignment. Use the <code>name</code> attribute to - select either "vfio" (for the new VFIO device assignment - backend, which is compatible with UEFI SecureBoot) or "kvm" - (the legacy device assignment handled directly by the KVM - kernel module)Since 1.0.5 (QEMU and KVM - only, requires kernel 3.6 or newer). When specified, - device assignment will fail if the requested method of device - assignment isn't available on the host. When not specified, - the default is "vfio" on systems where the VFIO driver is - available and loaded, and "kvm" on older systems, or those - where the VFIO driver hasn't been - loaded Since 1.1.3 (prior to that - the default was always "kvm"). - </dd> - <dt><code>readonly</code></dt> - <dd>Indicates that the device is readonly, only supported by SCSI host - device now. Since 1.0.6 (QEMU and KVM only) - </dd> - <dt><code>shareable</code></dt> - <dd>If present, this indicates the device is expected to be shared - between domains (assuming the hypervisor and OS support this). - Only supported by SCSI host device. - Since 1.0.6 - - Note: Although <code>shareable</code> was introduced - in 1.0.6, it did not work as - as expected until 1.2.2. - - </dd> - </dl> - - - <h5><a id="elementsHostDevCaps">Block / character devices</a></h5> - - - Block / character devices from the host can be passed through - to the guest using the <code>hostdev</code> element. This is - only possible with container based virtualization. Devices are specified - by a fully qualified path. - since after 1.0.1 for LXC: - - - <pre> -... -<hostdev mode='capabilities' type='storage'> - <source> - <block>/dev/sdf1</block> - </source> -</hostdev> -... - </pre> - - <pre> -... -<hostdev mode='capabilities' type='misc'> - <source> - <char>/dev/input/event3</char> - </source> -</hostdev> -... - </pre> - - <pre> -... -<hostdev mode='capabilities' type='net'> - <source> - <interface>eth0</interface> - </source> -</hostdev> -... - </pre> - - <dl> - <dt><code>hostdev</code></dt> - <dd>The <code>hostdev</code> element is the main container for describing - host devices. For block/character device passthrough <code>mode</code> is - always "capabilities" and <code>type</code> is "storage" for a block - device, "misc" for a character device and "net" for a host network - interface. - </dd> - <dt><code>source</code></dt> - <dd>The source element describes the device as seen from the host. - For block devices, the path to the block device in the host - OS is provided in the nested "block" element, while for character - devices the "char" element is used. For network interfaces, the - name of the interface is provided in the "interface" element. - </dd> - </dl> - - <h4><a id="elementsRedir">Redirected devices</a></h4> - - - USB device redirection through a character device is - supported since after 0.9.5 (KVM - only): - - -<pre> -... -<devices> - <redirdev bus='usb' type='tcp'> - <source mode='connect' host='localhost' service='4000'/> - <boot order='1'/> - </redirdev> - <redirfilter> - <usbdev class='0x08' vendor='0x1234' product='0xbeef' version='2.56' allow='yes'/> - <usbdev allow='no'/> - </redirfilter> -</devices> -...</pre> - - <dl> - <dt><code>redirdev</code></dt> - <dd>The <code>redirdev</code> element is the main container for - describing redirected devices. <code>bus</code> must be "usb" - for a USB device. - - An additional attribute <code>type</code> is required, - matching one of the - supported <a href="#elementsConsole">serial device</a> types, - to describe the host side of the - tunnel; <code>type='tcp'</code> - or <code>type='spicevmc'</code> (which uses the usbredir - channel of a <a href="#elementsGraphics">SPICE graphics - device</a>) are typical. The redirdev element has an optional - sub-element <code><address></code> which can tie the - device to a particular controller. Further sub-elements, - such as <code><source></code>, may be required according - to the given type, although a <code><target></code> sub-element - is not required (since the consumer of the character device is - the hypervisor itself, rather than a device visible in the guest). - </dd> - <dt><code>boot</code></dt> - - <dd>Specifies that the device is bootable. - The <code>order</code> attribute determines the order in which - devices will be tried during boot sequence. The per-device - <code>boot</code> elements cannot be used together with general - boot elements in <a href="#elementsOSBIOS">BIOS bootloader</a> section. - (Since 1.0.1) - </dd> - <dt><code>redirfilter</code></dt> - <dd>The<code> redirfilter </code>element is used for creating the - filter rule to filter out certain devices from redirection. - It uses sub-element <code><usbdev></code> to define each filter rule. - <code>class</code> attribute is the USB Class code, for example, - 0x08 represents mass storage devices. The USB device can be addressed by - vendor / product id using the <code>vendor</code> and <code>product</code> attributes. - <code>version</code> is the device revision from the bcdDevice field (not - the version of the USB protocol). - These four attributes are optional and <code>-1</code> can be used to allow - any value for them. <code>allow</code> attribute is mandatory, - 'yes' means allow, 'no' for deny. - </dd> - </dl> - - <h4><a id="elementsSmartcard">Smartcard devices</a></h4> - - - A virtual smartcard device can be supplied to the guest via the - <code>smartcard</code> element. A USB smartcard reader device on - the host cannot be used on a guest with simple device - passthrough, since it will then not be available on the host, - possibly locking the host computer when it is "removed". - Therefore, some hypervisors provide a specialized virtual device - that can present a smartcard interface to the guest, with - several modes for describing how credentials are obtained from - the host or even a from a channel created to a third-party - smartcard provider. Since 0.8.8 - - -<pre> -... -<devices> - <smartcard mode='host'/> - <smartcard mode='host-certificates'> - <certificate>cert1</certificate> - <certificate>cert2</certificate> - <certificate>cert3</certificate> - <database>/etc/pki/nssdb/</database> - </smartcard> - <smartcard mode='passthrough' type='tcp'> - <source mode='bind' host='127.0.0.1' service='2001'/> - <protocol type='raw'/> - <address type='ccid' controller='0' slot='0'/> - </smartcard> - <smartcard mode='passthrough' type='spicevmc'/> -</devices> -... -</pre> - - - The <code><smartcard></code> element has a mandatory - attribute <code>mode</code>. The following modes are supported; - in each mode, the guest sees a device on its USB bus that - behaves like a physical USB CCID (Chip/Smart Card Interface - Device) card. - - - <dl> - <dt><code>host</code></dt> - <dd>The simplest operation, where the hypervisor relays all - requests from the guest into direct access to the host's - smartcard via NSS. No other attributes or sub-elements are - required. See below about the use of an - optional <code><address></code> sub-element.</dd> - - <dt><code>host-certificates</code></dt> - <dd>Rather than requiring a smartcard to be plugged into the - host, it is possible to provide three NSS certificate names - residing in a database on the host. These certificates can be - generated via the command <code>certutil -d /etc/pki/nssdb -x -t - CT,CT,CT -S -s CN=cert1 -n cert1</code>, and the resulting three - certificate names must be supplied as the content of each of - three <code><certificate></code> sub-elements. An - additional sub-element <code><database></code> can specify - the absolute path to an alternate directory (matching - the <code>-d</code> option of the <code>certutil</code> command - when creating the certificates); if not present, it defaults to - /etc/pki/nssdb.</dd> - - <dt><code>passthrough</code></dt> - <dd>Rather than having the hypervisor directly communicate with - the host, it is possible to tunnel all requests through a - secondary character device to a third-party provider (which may - in turn be talking to a smartcard or using three certificate - files). In this mode of operation, an additional - attribute <code>type</code> is required, matching one of the - supported <a href="#elementsConsole">serial device</a> types, to - describe the host side of the tunnel; <code>type='tcp'</code> - or <code>type='spicevmc'</code> (which uses the smartcard - channel of a <a href="#elementsGraphics">SPICE graphics - device</a>) are typical. Further sub-elements, such - as <code><source></code>, may be required according to the - given type, although a <code><target></code> sub-element - is not required (since the consumer of the character device is - the hypervisor itself, rather than a device visible in the - guest).</dd> - </dl> - - - Each mode supports an optional - sub-element <code><address></code>, which fine-tunes the - correlation between the smartcard and a ccid bus - controller, <a href="#elementsAddress">documented above</a>. - For now, qemu only supports at most one - smartcard, with an address of bus=0 slot=0. - - - <h4><a id="elementsNICS">Network interfaces</a></h4> - -<pre> -... -<devices> - <interface type='direct' trustGuestRxFilters='yes'> - <source dev='eth0'/> - <mac address='52:54:00:5d:c7:9e'/> - <boot order='1'/> - <rom bar='off'/> - </interface> -</devices> -...</pre> - - - There are several possibilities for specifying a network - interface visible to the guest. Each subsection below provides - more details about common setup options. - - - Since 1.2.10), - the <code>interface</code> element - property <code>trustGuestRxFilters</code> provides the - capability for the host to detect and trust reports from the - guest regarding changes to the interface mac address and receive - filters by setting the attribute to <code>yes</code>. The default - setting for the attribute is <code>no</code> for security - reasons and support depends on the guest network device model as - well as the type of connection on the host - currently it is - only supported for the virtio device model and for macvtap - connections on the host. - - - Each <code><interface></code> element has an - optional <code><address></code> sub-element that can tie - the interface to a particular pci slot, with - attribute <code>type='pci'</code> - as <a href="#elementsAddress">documented above</a>. - - - Since 6.6.0, one can force libvirt to keep the - provided MAC address when it's in the reserved VMware range by adding a - <code>type="static"</code> attribute to the <code><mac/></code> element. - Note that this attribute is useless if the provided MAC address is outside of - the reserved VMWare ranges. - - - <h5><a id="elementsNICSVirtual">Virtual network</a></h5> - - - - This is the recommended config for general guest connectivity on - hosts with dynamic / wireless networking configs (or multi-host - environments where the host hardware details are described - separately in a <code><network></code> - definition Since 0.9.4). - - - - - - Provides a connection whose details are described by the named - network definition. Depending on the virtual network's "forward - mode" configuration, the network may be totally isolated - (no <code><forward></code> element given), NAT'ing to an - explicit network device or to the default route - (<code><forward mode='nat'></code>), routed with no NAT - (<code><forward mode='route'/></code>), or connected - directly to one of the host's network interfaces (via macvtap) - or bridge devices ((<code><forward - mode='bridge|private|vepa|passthrough'/></code> Since - 0.9.4) - - - For networks with a forward mode of bridge, private, vepa, and - passthrough, it is assumed that the host has any necessary DNS - and DHCP services already setup outside the scope of libvirt. In - the case of isolated, nat, and routed networks, DHCP and DNS are - provided on the virtual network by libvirt, and the IP range can - be determined by examining the virtual network config with - '<code>virsh net-dumpxml [networkname]</code>'. There is one - virtual network called 'default' setup out of the box which does - NAT'ing to the default route and has an IP range - of <code>192.168.122.0/255.255.255.0</code>. Each guest will - have an associated tun device created with a name of vnetN, - which can also be overridden with the <target> element - (see - <a href="#elementsNICSTargetOverride">overriding the target element</a>). - - - When the source of an interface is a network, - a <code>portgroup</code> can be specified along with the name of - the network; one network may have multiple portgroups defined, - with each portgroup containing slightly different configuration - information for different classes of network - connections. Since 0.9.4. - - - When a guest is running an interface of type <code>network</code> - may include a <code>portid</code> attribute. This provides the UUID - of an associated virNetworkPortPtr object that records the association - between the domain interface and the network. This attribute is - read-only since port objects are create and deleted automatically - during startup and shutdown. Since 5.1.0 - - - Also, similar to <code>direct</code> network connections - (described below), a connection of type <code>network</code> may - specify a <code>virtualport</code> element, with configuration - data to be forwarded to a vepa (802.1Qbg) or 802.1Qbh compliant - switch (Since 0.8.2), or to an - Open vSwitch virtual switch (Since - 0.9.11). - - - Since the actual type of switch may vary depending on the - configuration in the <code><network></code> on the host, - it is acceptable to omit the virtualport <code>type</code> - attribute, and specify attributes from multiple different - virtualport types (and also to leave out certain attributes); at - domain startup time, a complete <code><virtualport></code> - element will be constructed by merging together the type and - attributes defined in the network and the portgroup referenced - by the interface. The newly-constructed virtualport is a combination - of them. The attributes from lower virtualport can't make change - on the ones defined in higher virtualport. - Interface takes the highest priority, portgroup is lowest priority. - (Since 0.10.0). For example, in order - to work properly with both an 802.1Qbh switch and an Open vSwitch - switch, you may choose to specify no type, but both - a <code>profileid</code> (in case the switch is 802.1Qbh) and - an <code>interfaceid</code> (in case the switch is Open vSwitch) - (you may also omit the other attributes, such as managerid, - typeid, or profileid, to be filled in from the - network's <code><virtualport></code>). If you want to - limit a guest to connecting only to certain types of switches, - you can specify the virtualport type, but still omit some/all of - the parameters - in this case if the host's network has a - different type of virtualport, connection of the interface will - fail. - - -<pre> -... -<devices> - <interface type='network'> - <source network='default'/> - </interface> - ... - <interface type='network'> - <source network='default' portgroup='engineering'/> - <target dev='vnet7'/> - <mac address="00:11:22:33:44:55"/> - <virtualport> - <parameters instanceid='09b11c53-8b5c-4eeb-8f00-d84eaa0aaa4f'/> - </virtualport> - </interface> -</devices> -...</pre> - - <h5><a id="elementsNICSBridge">Bridge to LAN</a></h5> - - - - This is the recommended config for general guest connectivity on - hosts with static wired networking configs. - - - - - Provides a bridge from the VM directly to the LAN. This assumes - there is a bridge device on the host which has one or more of the hosts - physical NICs attached. The guest VM will have an associated tun device - created with a name of vnetN, which can also be overridden with the - <target> element (see - <a href="#elementsNICSTargetOverride">overriding the target element</a>). - The tun device will be attached to the bridge. The IP range / network - configuration is whatever is used on the LAN. This provides the guest VM - full incoming & outgoing net access just like a physical machine. - - - On Linux systems, the bridge device is normally a standard Linux - host bridge. On hosts that support Open vSwitch, it is also - possible to connect to an Open vSwitch bridge device by adding - a <code><virtualport type='openvswitch'/></code> to the - interface definition. (Since - 0.9.11). The Open vSwitch type virtualport accepts two - parameters in its <code><parameters></code> element - - an <code>interfaceid</code> which is a standard uuid used to - uniquely identify this particular interface to Open vSwitch (if - you do not specify one, a random interfaceid will be generated - for you when you first define the interface), and an - optional <code>profileid</code> which is sent to Open vSwitch as - the interfaces "port-profile". - -<pre> -... -<devices> - ... - <interface type='bridge'> - <source bridge='br0'/> - </interface> - <interface type='bridge'> - <source bridge='br1'/> - <target dev='vnet7'/> - <mac address="00:11:22:33:44:55"/> - </interface> - <interface type='bridge'> - <source bridge='ovsbr'/> - <virtualport type='openvswitch'> - <parameters profileid='menial' interfaceid='09b11c53-8b5c-4eeb-8f00-d84eaa0aaa4f'/> - </virtualport> - </interface> - ... -</devices> -...</pre> - - - On hosts that support Open vSwitch on the kernel side and have the - Midonet Host Agent configured, it is also possible to connect to the - 'midonet' bridge device by adding a - <code><virtualport type='midonet'/></code> to the - interface definition. (Since - 1.2.13). The Midonet virtualport type requires an - <code>interfaceid</code> attribute in its - <code><parameters></code> element. This interface id is the UUID - that specifies which port in the virtual network topology will be bound - to the interface. - -<pre> -... -<devices> - ... - <interface type='bridge'> - <source bridge='br0'/> - </interface> - <interface type='bridge'> - <source bridge='br1'/> - <target dev='vnet7'/> - <mac address="00:11:22:33:44:55"/> - </interface> - <interface type='bridge'> - <source bridge='midonet'/> - <virtualport type='midonet'> - <parameters interfaceid='0b2d64da-3d0e-431e-afdd-804415d6ebbb'/> - </virtualport> - </interface> - ... -</devices> -...</pre> - - <h5><a id="elementsNICSSlirp">Userspace SLIRP stack</a></h5> - - - Provides a virtual LAN with NAT to the outside world. The virtual - network has DHCP & DNS services and will give the guest VM addresses - starting from <code>10.0.2.15</code>. The default router will be - <code>10.0.2.2</code> and the DNS server will be <code>10.0.2.3</code>. - This networking is the only option for unprivileged users who need their - VMs to have outgoing access. Since 3.8.0 - it is possible to override the default network address by - including an <code>ip</code> element specifying an IPv4 - address in its one mandatory attribute, <code>address</code>. - Optionally, a second <code>ip</code> element with a - <code>family</code> attribute set to "ipv6" can be - specified to add an IPv6 address to the interface. - <code>address</code>. Optionally, address - <code>prefix</code> can be specified. - - -<pre> -... -<devices> - <interface type='user'/> - ... - <interface type='user'> - <mac address="00:11:22:33:44:55"/> - <ip family='ipv4' address='172.17.2.0' prefix='24'/> - <ip family='ipv6' address='2001:db8:ac10:fd01::' prefix='64'/> - </interface> -</devices> -...</pre> - - - <h5><a id="elementsNICSEthernet">Generic ethernet connection</a></h5> - - - Provides a means to use a new or existing tap device (or veth - device pair, depening on the needs of the hypervisor driver) - that is partially or wholly setup external to libvirt (either - prior to the guest starting, or while the guest is being started - via an optional script specified in the config). - - - The name of the tap device can optionally be specified with - the <code>dev</code> attribute of the - <code><target></code> element. If no target dev is - specified, libvirt will create a new standard tap device with a - name of the pattern "vnetN", where "N" is replaced with a - number. If a target dev is specified and that device doesn't - exist, then a new standard tap device will be created with the - exact dev name given. If the specified target dev does exist, - then that existing device will be used. Usually some basic setup - of the device is done by libvirt, including setting a MAC - address, and the IFF_UP flag, but if the <code>dev</code> is a - pre-existing device, and the <code>managed</code> attribute of - the <code>target</code> element is also set to "no" (the default - value is "yes"), even this basic setup will not be performed - - libvirt will simply pass the device on to the hypervisor with no - setup at all. Since 5.7.0 Using - managed='no' with a pre-created tap device is useful because - it permits a virtual machine managed by an unprivileged libvirtd - to have emulated network devices based on tap devices. - - - After creating/opening the tap device, an optional shell script - (given in the <code>path</code> attribute of - the <code><script></code> element) will be run. - Since 0.2.1 - Also, after detaching/closing the tap device, an optional shell - script (given in the <code>path</code> attribute of - the <code><downscript></code> element) will be run. - Since 5.1.0 - These can be used to do whatever extra host network integration is - required. - - -<pre> -... -<devices> - <interface type='ethernet'> - <script path='/etc/qemu-ifup-mynet'/> - <downscript path='/etc/qemu-ifdown-mynet'/> - </interface> - ... - <interface type='ethernet'> - <target dev='mytap1' managed='no'/> - <model type='virtio'/> - </interface> -</devices> -...</pre> - - <h5><a id="elementsNICSDirect">Direct attachment to physical interface</a></h5> - - - Provides direct attachment of the virtual machine's NIC to the given - physical interface of the host. - Since 0.7.7 (QEMU and KVM only) - This setup requires the Linux macvtap - driver to be available. (Since Linux 2.6.34.) - One of the modes 'vepa' - ( <a href="http://www.ieee802.org/1/files/public/docs2009/new-evb-congdon-vepa-modul..."> - 'Virtual Ethernet Port Aggregator'</a>), 'bridge' or 'private' - can be chosen for the operation mode of the macvtap device, 'vepa' - being the default mode. The individual modes cause the delivery of - packets to behave as follows: - - - If the model type is set to <code>virtio</code> and - interface's <code>trustGuestRxFilters</code> attribute is set - to <code>yes</code>, changes made to the interface mac address, - unicast/multicast receive filters, and vlan settings in the - guest will be monitored and propagated to the associated macvtap - device on the host (Since - 1.2.10). If <code>trustGuestRxFilters</code> is not set, - or is not supported for the device model in use, an attempted - change to the mac address originating from the guest side will - result in a non-working network connection. - - - <dl> - <dt><code>vepa</code></dt> - <dd>All VMs' packets are sent to the external bridge. Packets - whose destination is a VM on the same host as where the - packet originates from are sent back to the host by the VEPA - capable bridge (today's bridges are typically not VEPA capable).</dd> - <dt><code>bridge</code></dt> - <dd>Packets whose destination is on the same host as where they - originate from are directly delivered to the target macvtap device. - Both origin and destination devices need to be in bridge mode - for direct delivery. If either one of them is in <code>vepa</code> mode, - a VEPA capable bridge is required.</dd> - <dt><code>private</code></dt> - <dd>All packets are sent to the external bridge and will only be - delivered to a target VM on the same host if they are sent through an - external router or gateway and that device sends them back to the - host. This procedure is followed if either the source or destination - device is in <code>private</code> mode.</dd> - <dt><code>passthrough</code></dt> - <dd>This feature attaches a virtual function of a SRIOV capable - NIC directly to a VM without losing the migration capability. - All packets are sent to the VF/IF of the configured network device. - Depending on the capabilities of the device additional prerequisites or - limitations may apply; for example, on Linux this requires - kernel 2.6.38 or newer. Since 0.9.2</dd> - </dl> - -<pre> -... -<devices> - ... - <interface type='direct' trustGuestRxFilters='no'> - <source dev='eth0' mode='vepa'/> - </interface> -</devices> -...</pre> - - - The network access of direct attached virtual machines can be - managed by the hardware switch to which the physical interface - of the host machine is connected to. - - - The interface can have additional parameters as shown below, - if the switch is conforming to the IEEE 802.1Qbg standard. - The parameters of the virtualport element are documented in more detail - in the IEEE 802.1Qbg standard. The values are network specific and - should be provided by the network administrator. In 802.1Qbg terms, - the Virtual Station Interface (VSI) represents the virtual interface - of a virtual machine. Since 0.8.2 - - - Please note that IEEE 802.1Qbg requires a non-zero value for the - VLAN ID. - - <dl> - <dt><code>managerid</code></dt> - <dd>The VSI Manager ID identifies the database containing the VSI type - and instance definitions. This is an integer value and the - value 0 is reserved.</dd> - <dt><code>typeid</code></dt> - <dd>The VSI Type ID identifies a VSI type characterizing the network - access. VSI types are typically managed by network administrator. - This is an integer value. - </dd> - <dt><code>typeidversion</code></dt> - <dd>The VSI Type Version allows multiple versions of a VSI Type. - This is an integer value. - </dd> - <dt><code>instanceid</code></dt> - <dd>The VSI Instance ID Identifier is generated when a VSI instance - (i.e. a virtual interface of a virtual machine) is created. - This is a globally unique identifier. - </dd> - </dl> -<pre> -... -<devices> - ... - <interface type='direct'> - <source dev='eth0.2' mode='vepa'/> - <virtualport type="802.1Qbg"> - <parameters managerid="11" typeid="1193047" typeidversion="2" instanceid="09b11c53-8b5c-4eeb-8f00-d84eaa0aaa4f"/> - </virtualport> - </interface> -</devices> -...</pre> - - - The interface can have additional parameters as shown below - if the switch is conforming to the IEEE 802.1Qbh standard. - The values are network specific and should be provided by the - network administrator. Since 0.8.2 - - <dl> - <dt><code>profileid</code></dt> - <dd>The profile ID contains the name of the port profile that is to - be applied to this interface. This name is resolved by the port - profile database into the network parameters from the port profile, - and those network parameters will be applied to this interface. - </dd> - </dl> - <pre> -... -<devices> - ... - <interface type='direct'> - <source dev='eth0' mode='private'/> - <virtualport type='802.1Qbh'> - <parameters profileid='finance'/> - </virtualport> - </interface> -</devices> -... -</pre> - - - <h5><a id="elementsNICSHostdev">PCI Passthrough</a></h5> - - - A PCI network device (specified by the <source> element) - is directly assigned to the guest using generic device - passthrough, after first optionally setting the device's MAC - address to the configured value, and associating the device with - an 802.1Qbh capable switch using an optionally specified - <virtualport> element (see the examples of virtualport - given above for type='direct' network devices). Note that - due - to limitations in standard single-port PCI ethernet card driver - design - only SR-IOV (Single Root I/O Virtualization) virtual - function (VF) devices can be assigned in this manner; to assign - a standard single-port PCI or PCIe ethernet card to a guest, use - the traditional <hostdev> device definition and - Since 0.9.11 - - - - To use VFIO device assignment rather than traditional/legacy KVM - device assignment (VFIO is a new method of device assignment - that is compatible with UEFI Secure Boot), a type='hostdev' - interface can have an optional <code>driver</code> sub-element - with a <code>name</code> attribute set to "vfio". To use legacy - KVM device assignment you can set <code>name</code> to "kvm" (or - simply omit the <code><driver></code> element, since "kvm" - is currently the default). - Since 1.0.5 (QEMU and KVM only, requires kernel 3.6 or newer) - - - - Note that this "intelligent passthrough" of network devices is - very similar to the functionality of a standard <hostdev> - device, the difference being that this method allows specifying - a MAC address and <virtualport> for the passed-through - device. If these capabilities are not required, if you have a - standard single-port PCI, PCIe, or USB network card that doesn't - support SR-IOV (and hence would anyway lose the configured MAC - address during reset after being assigned to the guest domain), - or if you are using a version of libvirt older than 0.9.11, you - should use standard <hostdev> to assign the device to the - guest instead of <interface type='hostdev'/>. - - - - Similar to the functionality of a standard <hostdev> device, - when <code>managed</code> is "yes", it is detached from the host - before being passed on to the guest, and reattached to the host - after the guest exits. If <code>managed</code> is omitted or "no", - the user is responsible to call <code>virNodeDeviceDettach</code> - (or <code>virsh nodedev-detach</code>) before starting the guest - or hot-plugging the device, and <code>virNodeDeviceReAttach</code> - (or <code>virsh nodedev-reattach</code>) after hot-unplug or - stopping the guest. - - -<pre> -... -<devices> - <interface type='hostdev' managed='yes'> - <driver name='vfio'/> - <source> - <address type='pci' domain='0x0000' bus='0x00' slot='0x07' function='0x0'/> - </source> - <mac address='52:54:00:6d:90:02'/> - <virtualport type='802.1Qbh'> - <parameters profileid='finance'/> - </virtualport> - </interface> -</devices> -...</pre> - - <h5><a id="elementsTeaming">Teaming a virtio/hostdev NIC pair</a></h5> - - - Since 6.1.0 (QEMU and KVM only, requires - QEMU 4.2.0 or newer and a guest virtio-net driver supporting - the "failover" feature, such as the one included in Linux - kernel 4.18 and newer) - - The <code><teaming></code> element of two interfaces can - be used to connect them as a team/bond device in the guest - (assuming proper support in the hypervisor and the guest - network driver). - - -<pre> -... -<devices> - <interface type='network'> - <source network='mybridge'/> - <mac address='00:11:22:33:44:55'/> - <model type='virtio'/> - <teaming type='persistent'/> - <alias name='ua-backup0'/> - </interface> - <interface type='network'> - <source network='hostdev-pool'/> - <mac address='00:11:22:33:44:55'/> - <model type='virtio'/> - <teaming type='transient' persistent='ua-backup0'/> - </interface> -</devices> -...</pre> - - - The <code><teaming></code> element required - attribute <code>type</code> will be set to - either <code>"persistent"</code> to indicate a device that - should always be present in the domain, - or <code>"transient"</code> to indicate a device that may - periodically be removed, then later re-added to the domain. When - type="transient", there should be a second attribute - to <code><teaming></code> called <code>"persistent"</code> - - this attribute should be set to the alias name of the other - device in the pair (the one that has <code><teaming - type="persistent'/></code>). - - - In the particular case of QEMU, - libvirt's <code><teaming></code> element is used to setup - a virtio-net "failover" device pair. For this setup, the - persistent device must be an interface with <code><model - type="virtio"/></code>, and the transient device must - be <code><interface type='hostdev'/></code> - (or <code><interface type='network'/></code> where the - referenced network defines a pool of SRIOV VFs). The guest will - then have a simple network team/bond device made of the virtio - NIC + hostdev NIC pair. In this configuration, the - higher-performing hostdev NIC will normally be preferred for all - network traffic, but when the domain is migrated, QEMU will - automatically unplug the VF from the guest, and then hotplug a - similar device once migration is completed; while migration is - taking place, network traffic will use the virtio NIC. (Of - course the emulated virtio NIC and the hostdev NIC must be - connected to the same subnet for bonding to work properly). - - - NB1: Since you must know the alias name of the virtio NIC when - configuring the hostdev NIC, it will need to be manually set in - the virtio NIC's configuration (as with all other manually set - alias names, this means it must start with "ua-"). - - - NB2: Currently the only implementation of the guest OS - virtio-net driver supporting virtio-net failover requires that - the MAC addresses of the virtio and hostdev NIC must - match. Since that may not always be a requirement in the future, - libvirt doesn't enforce this limitation - it is up to the - person/management application that is creating the configuration - to assure the MAC addresses of the two devices match. - - - NB3: Since the PCI addresses of the SRIOV VFs on the hosts that - are the source and destination of the migration will almost - certainly be different, either higher level management software - will need to modify the <code><source></code> of the - hostdev NIC (<code><interface type='hostdev'></code>) at - the start of migration, or (a simpler solution) the - configuration will need to use a libvirt "hostdev" virtual - network that maintains a pool of such devices, as is implied in - the example's use of the libvirt network named "hostdev-pool" - - as long as the hostdev network pools on both hosts have the same - name, libvirt itself will take care of allocating an appropriate - device on both ends of the migration. Similarly the XML for the - virtio interface must also either work correctly unmodified on - both the source and destination of the migration (e.g. by - connecting to the same bridge device on both hosts, or by using - the same virtual network), or the management software must - properly modify the interface XML during migration so that the - virtio device remains connected to the same network segment - before and after migration. - - - <h5><a id="elementsNICSMulticast">Multicast tunnel</a></h5> - - - A multicast group is setup to represent a virtual network. Any VMs - whose network devices are in the same multicast group can talk to each - other even across hosts. This mode is also available to unprivileged - users. There is no default DNS or DHCP support and no outgoing network - access. To provide outgoing network access, one of the VMs should have a - 2nd NIC which is connected to one of the first 4 network types and do the - appropriate routing. The multicast protocol is compatible with that used - by user mode linux guests too. The source address used must be from the - multicast address block. - - -<pre> -... -<devices> - <interface type='mcast'> - <mac address='52:54:00:6d:90:01'/> - <source address='230.0.0.1' port='5558'/> - </interface> -</devices> -...</pre> - - <h5><a id="elementsNICSTCP">TCP tunnel</a></h5> - - - A TCP client/server architecture provides a virtual network. One VM - provides the server end of the network, all other VMS are configured as - clients. All network traffic is routed between the VMs via the server. - This mode is also available to unprivileged users. There is no default - DNS or DHCP support and no outgoing network access. To provide outgoing - network access, one of the VMs should have a 2nd NIC which is connected - to one of the first 4 network types and do the appropriate routing. - -<pre> -... -<devices> - <interface type='server'> - <mac address='52:54:00:22:c9:42'/> - <source address='192.168.0.1' port='5558'/> - </interface> - ... - <interface type='client'> - <mac address='52:54:00:8b:c9:51'/> - <source address='192.168.0.1' port='5558'/> - </interface> -</devices> -...</pre> - - <h5><a id="elementsNICSUDP">UDP unicast tunnel</a></h5> - - - A UDP unicast architecture provides a virtual network which enables - connections between QEMU instances using QEMU's UDP infrastructure. - - The xml "source" address is the endpoint address to which the UDP socket - packets will be sent from the host running QEMU. - The xml "local" address is the address of the interface from which the - UDP socket packets will originate from the QEMU host. - Since 1.2.20 - -<pre> -... -<devices> - <interface type='udp'> - <mac address='52:54:00:22:c9:42'/> - <source address='127.0.0.1' port='11115'> - <local address='127.0.0.1' port='11116'/> - </source> - </interface> -</devices> -...</pre> - - <h5><a id="elementsNICSModel">Setting the NIC model</a></h5> - -<pre> -... -<devices> - <interface type='network'> - <source network='default'/> - <target dev='vnet1'/> - <model type='ne2k_pci'/> - </interface> -</devices> -...</pre> - - - For hypervisors which support this, you can set the model of - emulated network interface card. - - - - The values for <code>type</code> aren't defined specifically by - libvirt, but by what the underlying hypervisor supports (if - any). For QEMU and KVM you can get a list of supported models - with these commands: - - -<pre> -qemu -net nic,model=? /dev/null -qemu-kvm -net nic,model=? /dev/null -</pre> - - - Typical values for QEMU and KVM include: - ne2k_isa i82551 i82557b i82559er ne2k_pci pcnet rtl8139 e1000 virtio. - Since 5.2.0, <code>virtio-transitional</code> - and <code>virtio-non-transitional</code> values are supported. - See <a href="#elementsVirtioTransitional">Virtio transitional devices</a> - for more details. - - - <h5><a id="elementsDriverBackendOptions">Setting NIC driver-specific options</a></h5> - -<pre> -... -<devices> - <interface type='network'> - <source network='default'/> - <target dev='vnet1'/> - <model type='virtio'/> - <driver name='vhost' txmode='iothread' ioeventfd='on' event_idx='off' queues='5' rx_queue_size='256' tx_queue_size='256'> - <host csum='off' gso='off' tso4='off' tso6='off' ecn='off' ufo='off' mrg_rxbuf='off'/> - <guest csum='off' tso4='off' tso6='off' ecn='off' ufo='off'/> - </driver> - </interface> -</devices> -...</pre> - - - Some NICs may have tunable driver-specific options. These are - set as attributes of the <code>driver</code> sub-element of the - interface definition. Currently the following attributes are - available for the <code>"virtio"</code> NIC driver: - - - <dl> - <dt><code>name</code></dt> - <dd> - The optional <code>name</code> attribute forces which type of - backend driver to use. The value can be either 'qemu' (a - user-space backend) or 'vhost' (a kernel backend, which - requires the vhost module to be provided by the kernel); an - attempt to require the vhost driver without kernel support - will be rejected. If this attribute is not present, then the - domain defaults to 'vhost' if present, but silently falls back - to 'qemu' without error. - Since 0.8.8 (QEMU and KVM only) - </dd> - <dd> - For interfaces of type='hostdev' (PCI passthrough devices) - the <code>name</code> attribute can optionally be set to - "vfio" or "kvm". "vfio" tells libvirt to use VFIO device - assignment rather than traditional KVM device assignment (VFIO - is a new method of device assignment that is compatible with - UEFI Secure Boot), and "kvm" tells libvirt to use the legacy - device assignment performed directly by the kvm kernel module - (the default is currently "kvm", but is subject to change). - Since 1.0.5 (QEMU and KVM only, requires - kernel 3.6 or newer) - </dd> - <dd> - For interfaces of type='vhostuser', the <code>name</code> - attribute is ignored. The backend driver used is always - vhost-user. - </dd> - - <dt><code>txmode</code></dt> - <dd> - The <code>txmode</code> attribute specifies how to handle - transmission of packets when the transmit buffer is full. The - value can be either 'iothread' or 'timer'. - Since 0.8.8 (QEMU and KVM only) - - If set to 'iothread', packet tx is all done in an iothread in - the bottom half of the driver (this option translates into - adding "tx=bh" to the qemu commandline -device virtio-net-pci - option). - - If set to 'timer', tx work is done in qemu, and if there is - more tx data than can be sent at the present time, a timer is - set before qemu moves on to do other things; when the timer - fires, another attempt is made to send more data. - - The resulting difference, according to the qemu developer who - added the option is: "bh makes tx more asynchronous and reduces - latency, but potentially causes more processor bandwidth - contention since the CPU doing the tx isn't necessarily the - CPU where the guest generated the packets." - - In general you should leave this option alone, unless you - are very certain you know what you are doing. - </dd> - <dt><code>ioeventfd</code></dt> - <dd> - This optional attribute allows users to set - <a href='https://patchwork.kernel.org/patch/43390/'> - domain I/O asynchronous handling</a> for interface device. - The default is left to the discretion of the hypervisor. - Accepted values are "on" and "off". Enabling this allows - qemu to execute VM while a separate thread handles I/O. - Typically guests experiencing high system CPU utilization - during I/O will benefit from this. On the other hand, - on overloaded host it could increase guest I/O latency. - Since 0.9.3 (QEMU and KVM only) - - In general you should leave this option alone, unless you - are very certain you know what you are doing. - </dd> - <dt><code>event_idx</code></dt> - <dd> - The <code>event_idx</code> attribute controls some aspects of - device event processing. The value can be either 'on' or 'off' - - if it is on, it will reduce the number of interrupts and - exits for the guest. The default is determined by QEMU; - usually if the feature is supported, default is on. In case - there is a situation where this behavior is suboptimal, this - attribute provides a way to force the feature off. - Since 0.9.5 (QEMU and KVM only) - - In general you should leave this option alone, unless you - are very certain you know what you are doing. - </dd> - <dt><code>queues</code></dt> - <dd> - The optional <code>queues</code> attribute controls the number - of queues to be used for either - <a href="https://www.linux-kvm.org/page/Multiqueue"> Multiqueue - virtio-net</a> or <a href="#elementVhostuser">vhost-user</a> network - interfaces. Use of multiple packet processing queues requires the - interface having the <code><model type='virtio'/></code> - element. Each queue will potentially be handled by a different - processor, resulting in much higher throughput. - virtio-net since 1.0.6 (QEMU and KVM only) - vhost-user since 1.2.17 (QEMU and KVM only) - </dd> - <dt><code>rx_queue_size</code></dt> - <dd> - The optional <code>rx_queue_size</code> attribute controls - the size of virtio ring for each queue as described above. - The default value is hypervisor dependent and may change - across its releases. Moreover, some hypervisors may pose - some restrictions on actual value. For instance, latest - QEMU (as of 2016-09-01) requires value to be a power of two - from [256, 1024] range. - Since 2.3.0 (QEMU and KVM only) - - In general you should leave this option alone, unless you - are very certain you know what you are doing. - </dd> - <dt><code>tx_queue_size</code></dt> - <dd> - The optional <code>tx_queue_size</code> attribute controls - the size of virtio ring for each queue as described above. - The default value is hypervisor dependent and may change - across its releases. Moreover, some hypervisors may pose - some restrictions on actual value. For instance, QEMU - v2.9 requires value to be a power of two from [256, 1024] - range. In addition to that, this may work only for a subset of - interface types, e.g. aforementioned QEMU enables this option - only for <code>vhostuser</code> type. - Since 3.7.0 (QEMU and KVM only) - - In general you should leave this option alone, unless you - are very certain you know what you are doing. - </dd> - <dt>virtio options</dt> - <dd> - For virtio interfaces, - <a href="#elementsVirtio">Virtio-specific options</a> can also be - set. (Since 3.5.0) - </dd> - </dl> - - Offloading options for the host and guest can be configured using - the following sub-elements: - - <dl> - <dt><code>host</code></dt> - <dd> - The <code>csum</code>, <code>gso</code>, <code>tso4</code>, - <code>tso6</code>, <code>ecn</code> and <code>ufo</code> - attributes with possible values <code>on</code> - and <code>off</code> can be used to turn off host offloading options. - By default, the supported offloads are enabled by QEMU. - Since 1.2.9 (QEMU only) - The <code>mrg_rxbuf</code> attribute can be used to control - mergeable rx buffers on the host side. Possible values are - <code>on</code> (default) and <code>off</code>. - Since 1.2.13 (QEMU only) - </dd> - <dt><code>guest</code></dt> - <dd> - The <code>csum</code>, <code>tso4</code>, - <code>tso6</code>, <code>ecn</code> and <code>ufo</code> - attributes with possible values <code>on</code> - and <code>off</code> can be used to turn off guest offloading options. - By default, the supported offloads are enabled by QEMU. - Since 1.2.9 (QEMU only) - </dd> - </dl> - - <h5><a id="elementsBackendOptions">Setting network backend-specific options</a></h5> - -<pre> -... -<devices> - <interface type='network'> - <source network='default'/> - <target dev='vnet1'/> - <model type='virtio'/> - <backend tap='/dev/net/tun' vhost='/dev/vhost-net'/> - <driver name='vhost' txmode='iothread' ioeventfd='on' event_idx='off' queues='5'/> - <tune> - <sndbuf>1600</sndbuf> - </tune> - </interface> -</devices> -...</pre> - - - For tuning the backend of the network, the <code>backend</code> element - can be used. The <code>vhost</code> attribute can override the default vhost - device path (<code>/dev/vhost-net</code>) for devices with <code>virtio</code> model. - The <code>tap</code> attribute overrides the tun/tap device path (default: - <code>/dev/net/tun</code>) for network and bridge interfaces. This does not work - in session mode. Since 1.2.9 - - - For tap devices there is also <code>sndbuf</code> element which can - adjust the size of send buffer in the host. Since - 0.8.8 - - <h5><a id="elementsNICSTargetOverride">Overriding the target element</a></h5> - -<pre> -... -<devices> - <interface type='network'> - <source network='default'/> - <target dev='vnet1'/> - </interface> -</devices> -...</pre> - - - If no target is specified, certain hypervisors will - automatically generate a name for the created tun device. This - name can be manually specified, however the name should not - start with either 'vnet', 'vif', 'macvtap', or 'macvlan', - which are prefixes reserved by libvirt and certain hypervisors. - Manually specified targets using these prefixes may be ignored. - - - - Note that for LXC containers, this defines the name of the interface - on the host side. Since 1.2.7, to define - the name of the device on the guest side, the <code>guest</code> - element should be used, as in the following snippet: - - -<pre> -... -<devices> - <interface type='network'> - <source network='default'/> - <guest dev='myeth'/> - </interface> -</devices> -...</pre> - - <h5><a id="elementsNICSBoot">Specifying boot order</a></h5> - -<pre> -... -<devices> - <interface type='network'> - <source network='default'/> - <target dev='vnet1'/> - <boot order='1'/> - </interface> -</devices> -...</pre> - - - For hypervisors which support this, you can set a specific NIC to - be used for network boot. The <code>order</code> attribute determines - the order in which devices will be tried during boot sequence. The - per-device <code>boot</code> elements cannot be used together with - general boot elements in - <a href="#elementsOSBIOS">BIOS bootloader</a> section. - Since 0.8.8 - - - <h5><a id="elementsNICSROM">Interface ROM BIOS configuration</a></h5> - -<pre> -... -<devices> - <interface type='network'> - <source network='default'/> - <target dev='vnet1'/> - <rom bar='on' file='/etc/fake/boot.bin'/> - </interface> -</devices> -...</pre> - - - For hypervisors which support this, you can change how a PCI Network - device's ROM is presented to the guest. The <code>bar</code> - attribute can be set to "on" or "off", and determines whether - or not the device's ROM will be visible in the guest's memory - map. (In PCI documentation, the "rombar" setting controls the - presence of the Base Address Register for the ROM). If no rom - bar is specified, the qemu default will be used (older - versions of qemu used a default of "off", while newer qemus - have a default of "on"). - The optional <code>file</code> attribute is used to point to a - binary file to be presented to the guest as the device's ROM - BIOS. This can be useful to provide an alternative boot ROM for a - network device. - Since 0.9.10 (QEMU and KVM only). - - <h5><a id="elementDomain">Setting up a network backend in a driver domain</a></h5> -<pre> -... -<devices> - ... - <interface type='bridge'> - <source bridge='br0'/> - <backenddomain name='netvm'/> - </interface> - ... -</devices> -...</pre> - - - The optional <code>backenddomain</code> element allows specifying a - backend domain (aka driver domain) for the interface. Use the - <code>name</code> attribute to specify the backend domain name. You - can use it to create a direct network link between domains (so data - will not go through host system). Use with type 'ethernet' to create - plain network link, or with type 'bridge' to connect to a bridge inside - the backend domain. - Since 1.2.13 (Xen only) - - - <h5><a id="elementQoS">Quality of service</a></h5> - -<pre> -... -<devices> - <interface type='network'> - <source network='default'/> - <target dev='vnet0'/> - <bandwidth> - <inbound average='1000' peak='5000' floor='200' burst='1024'/> - <outbound average='128' peak='256' burst='256'/> - </bandwidth> - </interface> -</devices> -...</pre> - - - This part of interface XML provides setting quality of service. Incoming - and outgoing traffic can be shaped independently. - The <code>bandwidth</code> element and its child elements are described - in the <a href="formatnetwork.html#elementQoS">QoS</a> section of - the Network XML. - - - <h5><a id="elementVlanTag">Setting VLAN tag (on supported network types only)</a></h5> - -<pre> -... -<devices> - <interface type='bridge'> - <vlan> - <tag id='42'/> - </vlan> - <source bridge='ovsbr0'/> - <virtualport type='openvswitch'> - <parameters interfaceid='09b11c53-8b5c-4eeb-8f00-d84eaa0aaa4f'/> - </virtualport> - </interface> - <interface type='bridge'> - <vlan trunk='yes'> - <tag id='42'/> - <tag id='123' nativeMode='untagged'/> - </vlan> - ... - </interface> -</devices> -...</pre> - - - If (and only if) the network connection used by the guest - supports VLAN tagging transparent to the guest, an - optional <code><vlan></code> element can specify one or - more VLAN tags to apply to the guest's network - traffic Since 0.10.0. Network - connections that support guest-transparent VLAN tagging include - 1) type='bridge' interfaces connected to an Open vSwitch bridge - Since 0.10.0, 2) SRIOV Virtual - Functions (VF) used via type='hostdev' (direct device - assignment) Since 0.10.0, and 3) - SRIOV VFs used via type='direct' with mode='passthrough' - (macvtap "passthru" mode) Since - 1.3.5. All other connection types, including standard - linux bridges and libvirt's own virtual networks, do not - support it. 802.1Qbh (vn-link) and 802.1Qbg (VEPA) switches - provide their own way (outside of libvirt) to tag guest traffic - onto a specific VLAN. Each tag is given in a - separate <code><tag></code> subelement - of <code><vlan></code> (for example: <code><tag - id='42'/></code>). For VLAN trunking of multiple tags (which - is supported only on Open vSwitch connections), - multiple <code><tag></code> subelements can be specified, - which implies that the user wants to do VLAN trunking on the - interface for all the specified tags. In the case that VLAN - trunking of a single tag is desired, the optional - attribute <code>trunk='yes'</code> can be added to the toplevel - <code><vlan></code> element to differentiate trunking of a - single tag from normal tagging. - - - For network connections using Open vSwitch it is also possible - to configure 'native-tagged' and 'native-untagged' VLAN modes - Since 1.1.0. This is done with the - optional <code>nativeMode</code> attribute on - the <code><tag></code> subelement: <code>nativeMode</code> - may be set to 'tagged' or 'untagged'. The <code>id</code> - attribute of the <code><tag></code> subelement - containing <code>nativeMode</code> sets which VLAN is considered - to be the "native" VLAN for this interface, and - the <code>nativeMode</code> attribute determines whether or not - traffic for that VLAN will be tagged. - - - <h5><a id="elementPort">Isolating guests's network traffic from each other</a></h5> - -<pre> -... -<devices> - <interface type='network'> - <source network='default'/> - <port isolated='yes'/> - </interface> -</devices> -...</pre> - - - Since 6.1.0. The <code>port</code> - element property <code>isolated</code>, when set - to <code>yes</code> (default setting is <code>no</code>) is used - to isolate this interface's network traffic from that of other - guest interfaces connected to the same network that also - have <code><port isolated='yes'/></code>. This setting is - only supported for emulated interface devices that use a - standard tap device to connect to the network via a Linux host - bridge. This property can be inherited from a libvirt network, - so if all guests that will be connected to the network should be - isolated, it is better to put the setting in the network - configuration. (NB: this only prevents guests that - have <code>isolated='yes'</code> from communicating with each - other; if there is a guest on the same bridge that doesn't - have <code>isolated='yes'</code>, even the isolated guests will - be able to communicate with it.) - - - <h5><a id="elementLink">Modifying virtual link state</a></h5> -<pre> -... -<devices> - <interface type='network'> - <source network='default'/> - <target dev='vnet0'/> - <link state='down'/> - </interface> -</devices> -...</pre> - - - This element provides means of setting state of the virtual network link. - Possible values for attribute <code>state</code> are <code>up</code> and - <code>down</code>. If <code>down</code> is specified as the value, the interface - behaves as if it had the network cable disconnected. Default behavior if this - element is unspecified is to have the link state <code>up</code>. - Since 0.9.5 - - - <h5><a id="mtu">MTU configuration</a></h5> -<pre> -... -<devices> - <interface type='network'> - <source network='default'/> - <target dev='vnet0'/> - <mtu size='1500'/> - </interface> -</devices> -...</pre> - - - This element provides means of setting MTU of the virtual network link. - Currently there is just one attribute <code>size</code> which accepts a - non-negative integer which specifies the MTU size for the interface. - Since 3.1.0 - - - <h5><a id="coalesce">Coalesce settings</a></h5> -<pre> -... -<devices> - <interface type='network'> - <source network='default'/> - <target dev='vnet0'/> - <coalesce> - <rx> - <frames max='7'/> - </rx> - </coalesce> - </interface> -</devices> -...</pre> - - - This element provides means of setting coalesce settings for - some interface devices (currently only type <code>network</code> - and <code>bridge</code>. Currently there is just one attribute, - <code>max</code>, to tweak, in element <code>frames</code> for - the <code>rx</code> group, which accepts a non-negative integer - that specifies the maximum number of packets that will be - received before an interrupt. - Since 3.3.0 - - - <h5><a id="ipconfig">IP configuration</a></h5> -<pre> -... -<devices> - <interface type='network'> - <source network='default'/> - <target dev='vnet0'/> - <ip address='192.168.122.5' prefix='24'/> - <ip address='192.168.122.5' prefix='24' peer='10.0.0.10'/> - <route family='ipv4' address='192.168.122.0' prefix='24' gateway='192.168.122.1'/> - <route family='ipv4' address='192.168.122.8' gateway='192.168.122.1'/> - </interface> - ... - <hostdev mode='capabilities' type='net'> - <source> - <interface>eth0</interface> - </source> - <ip address='192.168.122.6' prefix='24'/> - <route family='ipv4' address='192.168.122.0' prefix='24' gateway='192.168.122.1'/> - <route family='ipv4' address='192.168.122.8' gateway='192.168.122.1'/> - </hostdev> - ... -</devices> -... -</pre> - - - Since 1.2.12 network devices and - hostdev devices with network capabilities can optionally be provided - one or more IP addresses to set on the network device in the - guest. Note that some hypervisors or network device types will - simply ignore them or only use the first one. - The <code>family</code> attribute can be set to - either <code>ipv4</code> or <code>ipv6</code>, and the - <code>address</code> attribute contains the IP address. The - optional <code>prefix</code> is the number of 1 bits in the - netmask, and will be automatically set if not specified - for - IPv4 the default prefix is determined according to the network - "class" (A, B, or C - see RFC870), and for IPv6 the default - prefix is 64. The optional <code>peer</code> attribute holds the - IP address of the other end of a point-to-point network - device (since 2.1.0). - - - - Since 1.2.12 route elements can also be - added to define IP routes to add in the guest. The attributes of - this element are described in the documentation for - the <code>route</code> element - in <a href="formatnetwork.html#elementsStaticroute">network - definitions</a>. This is used by the LXC driver. - - -<pre> -... -<devices> - <interface type='ethernet'> - <source/> - <ip address='192.168.123.1' prefix='24'/> - <ip address='10.0.0.10' prefix='24' peer='192.168.122.5'/> - <route family='ipv4' address='192.168.42.0' prefix='24' gateway='192.168.123.4'/> - <source/> - ... - </interface> - ... -</devices> -... -</pre> - - - Since 2.1.0 network devices of type - "ethernet" can optionally be provided one or more IP addresses - and one or more routes to set on the host side of the - network device. These are configured as subelements of - the <code><source></code> element of the interface, and - have the same attributes as the similarly named elements used to - configure the guest side of the interface (described above). - - - <h5><a id="elementVhostuser">vhost-user interface</a></h5> - - - Since 1.2.7 the vhost-user enables the - communication between a QEMU virtual machine and other userspace process - using the Virtio transport protocol. A char dev (e.g. Unix socket) is used - for the control plane, while the data plane is based on shared memory. - - -<pre> -... -<devices> - <interface type='vhostuser'> - <mac address='52:54:00:3b:83:1a'/> - <source type='unix' path='/tmp/vhost1.sock' mode='server'/> - <model type='virtio'/> - </interface> - <interface type='vhostuser'> - <mac address='52:54:00:3b:83:1b'/> - <source type='unix' path='/tmp/vhost2.sock' mode='client'> - <reconnect enabled='yes' timeout='10'/> - </source> - <model type='virtio'/> - <driver queues='5'/> - </interface> -</devices> -...</pre> - - - The <code><source></code> element has to be specified - along with the type of char device. - Currently, only type='unix' is supported, where the path (the - directory path of the socket) and mode attributes are required. - Both <code>mode='server'</code> and <code>mode='client'</code> - are supported. - vhost-user requires the virtio model type, thus the - <code><model></code> element is mandatory. - Since 4.1.0 the element has an - optional child element <code>reconnect</code> which - configures reconnect timeout if the connection is lost. It - has two attributes <code>enabled</code> (which accepts - <code>yes</code> and <code>no</code>) and - <code>timeout</code> which specifies the amount of seconds - after which hypervisor tries to reconnect. - - - <h5><a id="elementNwfilter">Traffic filtering with NWFilter</a></h5> - - - Since 0.8.0 an <code>nwfilter</code> profile - can be assigned to a domain interface, which allows configuring - traffic filter rules for the virtual machine. - - See the <a href="formatnwfilter.html">nwfilter</a> documentation for more - complete details. - - -<pre> -... -<devices> - <interface ...> - ... - <filterref filter='clean-traffic'/> - </interface> - <interface ...> - ... - <filterref filter='myfilter'> - <parameter name='IP' value='104.207.129.11'/> - <parameter name='IP6_ADDR' value='2001:19f0:300:2102::'/> - <parameter name='IP6_MASK' value='64'/> - ... - </filterref> - </interface> -</devices> -...</pre> - - - The <code>filter</code> attribute specifies the name of the nwfilter - to use. Optional <code><parameter></code> elements may be - specified for passing additional info to the nwfilter via the - <code>name</code> and <code>value</code> attributes. See - the <a href="formatnwfilter.html#nwfconceptsvars">nwfilter</a> - docs for info on parameters. - - - - <h4><a id="elementsInput">Input devices</a></h4> - - - Input devices allow interaction with the graphical framebuffer - in the guest virtual machine. When enabling the framebuffer, an - input device is automatically provided. It may be possible to - add additional devices explicitly, for example, - to provide a graphics tablet for absolute cursor movement. - - -<pre> -... -<devices> - <input type='mouse' bus='usb'/> - <input type='keyboard' bus='usb'/> - <input type='mouse' bus='virtio'/> - <input type='keyboard' bus='virtio'/> - <input type='tablet' bus='virtio'/> - <input type='passthrough' bus='virtio'> - <source evdev='/dev/input/event1'/> - </input> -</devices> -...</pre> - - <dl> - <dt><code>input</code></dt> - <dd>The <code>input</code> element has one mandatory attribute, - the <code>type</code> whose value can be 'mouse', 'tablet', - (since 1.2.2) 'keyboard' or - (since 1.3.0) 'passthrough'. - The tablet provides absolute cursor movement, - while the mouse uses relative movement. The optional - <code>bus</code> attribute can be used to refine the exact device type. - It takes values "xen" (paravirtualized), "ps2" and "usb" or - (since 1.3.0) "virtio".</dd> - </dl> - - - The <code>input</code> element has an optional - sub-element <code><address></code> which can tie the - device to a particular PCI - slot, <a href="#elementsAddress">documented above</a>. - On S390, <code>address</code> can be used to provide a CCW address for - an input device (since 4.2.0). - - For type <code>passthrough</code>, the mandatory sub-element <code>source</code> - must have an <code>evdev</code> attribute containing the absolute path to the - event device passed through to guests. (KVM only) - - Since 5.2.0, the <code>input</code> element - accepts a <code>model</code> attribute which has the values 'virtio', - 'virtio-transitional' and 'virtio-non-transitional'. See - <a href="#elementsVirtioTransitional">Virtio transitional devices</a> - for more details. - - - - The subelement <code>driver</code> can be used to tune the virtio - options of the device: - <a href="#elementsVirtio">Virtio-specific options</a> can also be - set. (Since 3.5.0) - - - <h4><a id="elementsHub">Hub devices</a></h4> - - - A hub is a device that expands a single port into several so - that there are more ports available to connect devices to a host - system. - - -<pre> -... -<devices> - <hub type='usb'/> -</devices> -...</pre> - - <dl> - <dt><code>hub</code></dt> - <dd>The <code>hub</code> element has one mandatory attribute, - the <code>type</code> whose value can only be 'usb'.</dd> - </dl> - - - The <code>hub</code> element has an optional - sub-element <code><address></code> - with <code>type='usb'</code>which can tie the device to a - particular controller, <a href="#elementsAddress">documented - above</a>. - - - <h4><a id="elementsGraphics">Graphical framebuffers</a></h4> - - - A graphics device allows for graphical interaction with the - guest OS. A guest will typically have either a framebuffer - or a text console configured to allow interaction with the - admin. - - -<pre> -... -<devices> - <graphics type='sdl' display=':0.0'/> - <graphics type='vnc' port='5904' sharePolicy='allow-exclusive'> - <listen type='address' address='1.2.3.4'/> - </graphics> - <graphics type='rdp' autoport='yes' multiUser='yes' /> - <graphics type='desktop' fullscreen='yes'/> - <graphics type='spice'> - <listen type='network' network='rednet'/> - </graphics> -</devices> -...</pre> - - <dl> - <dt><code>graphics</code></dt> - <dd> - - The <code>graphics</code> element has a mandatory <code>type</code> - attribute which takes the value <code>sdl</code>, <code>vnc</code>, - <code>spice</code>, <code>rdp</code>, <code>desktop</code> or - <code>egl-headless</code>: - - <dl> - <dt><code>sdl</code></dt> - <dd> - - This displays a window on the host desktop, it can take 3 optional - arguments: a <code>display</code> attribute for the display to use, - an <code>xauth</code> attribute for the authentication identifier, - and an optional <code>fullscreen</code> attribute accepting values - <code>yes</code> or <code>no</code>. - - - - You can use a <code>gl</code> with the <code>enable="yes"</code> - property to enable OpenGL support in SDL. Likewise you can - explicitly disable OpenGL support with <code>enable="no"</code>. - - </dd> - <dt><code>vnc</code></dt> - <dd> - - Starts a VNC server. The <code>port</code> attribute specifies - the TCP port number (with -1 as legacy syntax indicating that it - should be auto-allocated). The <code>autoport</code> attribute is - the new preferred syntax for indicating auto-allocation of the TCP - port to use. The <code>passwd</code> attribute provides a VNC - password in clear text. If the <code>passwd</code> attribute is - set to an empty string, then VNC access is disabled. The - <code>keymap</code> attribute specifies the keymap to use. It is - possible to set a limit on the validity of the password by giving - a timestamp <code>passwdValidTo='2010-04-09T15:51:00'</code> - assumed to be in UTC. The <code>connected</code> attribute allows - control of connected client during password changes. VNC accepts - <code>keep</code> value only since 0.9.3. - NB, this may not be supported by all hypervisors. - - - The optional <code>sharePolicy</code> attribute specifies vnc - server display sharing policy. <code>allow-exclusive</code> allows - clients to ask for exclusive access by dropping other connections. - Connecting multiple clients in parallel requires all clients asking - for a shared session (vncviewer: -Shared switch). This is - the default value. <code>force-shared</code> disables exclusive - client access, every connection has to specify -Shared switch for - vncviewer. <code>ignore</code> welcomes every connection - unconditionally since 1.0.6. - - - Rather than using listen/port, QEMU supports a <code>socket</code> - attribute for listening on a unix domain socket path - Since 0.8.8. - - - For VNC WebSocket functionality, <code>websocket</code> attribute - may be used to specify port to listen on (with -1 meaning - auto-allocation and <code>autoport</code> having no effect due to - security reasons) Since 1.0.6. - - - Although VNC doesn't support OpenGL natively, it can be paired - with graphics type <code>egl-headless</code> (see below) which - will instruct QEMU to open and use drm nodes for OpenGL rendering. - - </dd> - <dt><code>spice</code> Since 0.8.6</dt> - <dd> - - Starts a SPICE server. The <code>port</code> attribute specifies - the TCP port number (with -1 as legacy syntax indicating that it - should be auto-allocated), while <code>tlsPort</code> gives - an alternative secure port number. The <code>autoport</code> - attribute is the new preferred syntax for indicating - auto-allocation of needed port numbers. The <code>passwd</code> - attribute provides a SPICE password in clear text. If the - <code>passwd</code> attribute is set to an empty string, then - SPICE access is disabled. The <code>keymap</code> attribute - specifies the keymap to use. It is possible to set a limit on - the validity of the password by giving a timestamp - <code>passwdValidTo='2010-04-09T15:51:00'</code> assumed to be - in UTC. - - - The <code>connected</code> attribute allows control of connected - client during password changes. SPICE accepts <code>keep</code> to - keep client connected, <code>disconnect</code> to disconnect client - and <code>fail</code> to fail changing password . NB, this may not - be supported by all hypervisors. - Since 0.9.3 - - - The <code>defaultMode</code> attribute sets the default channel - security policy, valid values are <code>secure</code>, - <code>insecure</code> and the default <code>any</code> (which is - secure if possible, but falls back to insecure rather than erroring - out if no secure path is available). - Since 0.9.12 - - - When SPICE has both a normal and TLS secured TCP port configured, - it can be desirable to restrict what channels can be run on each - port. This is achieved by adding one or more <code><channel> - </code> elements inside the main <code><graphics></code> - element and setting the <code>mode</code> attribute to either - <code>secure</code> or <code>insecure</code>. Setting the mode - attribute overrides the default value as set by - the <code>defaultMode</code> attribute. (Note that specifying - <code>any</code> as mode discards the entry as the channel would - inherit the default mode anyways.) Valid channel names include - <code>main</code>, <code>display</code>, <code>inputs</code>, - <code>cursor</code>, <code>playback</code>, <code>record</code> - (all since 0.8.6); - <code>smartcard</code> (since 0.8.8); - and <code>usbredir</code> (since 0.9.12). - - <pre> -<graphics type='spice' port='-1' tlsPort='-1' autoport='yes'> - <channel name='main' mode='secure'/> - <channel name='record' mode='insecure'/> - <image compression='auto_glz'/> - <streaming mode='filter'/> - <clipboard copypaste='no'/> - <mouse mode='client'/> - <filetransfer enable='no'/> - <gl enable='yes' rendernode='/dev/dri/by-path/pci-0000:00:02.0-render'/> -</graphics></pre> - - Spice supports variable compression settings for audio, images and - streaming. These settings are accessible via the <code>compression - </code> attribute in all following elements: <code>image</code> to - set image compression (accepts <code>auto_glz</code>, - <code>auto_lz</code>, <code>quic</code>, <code>glz</code>, - <code>lz</code>, <code>off</code>), <code>jpeg</code> for JPEG - compression for images over wan (accepts <code>auto</code>, - <code>never</code>, <code>always</code>), <code>zlib</code> for - configuring wan image compression (accepts <code>auto</code>, - <code>never</code>, <code>always</code>) and <code>playback</code> - for enabling audio stream compression (accepts <code>on</code> or - <code>off</code>). Since 0.9.1 - - - Streaming mode is set by the <code>streaming</code> element, - settings its <code>mode</code> attribute to one of - <code>filter</code>, <code>all</code> or <code>off</code>. - Since 0.9.2 - - - Copy & Paste functionality (via Spice agent) is set by the - <code>clipboard</code> element. It is enabled by default, and can - be disabled by setting the <code>copypaste</code> property to - <code>no</code>. Since 0.9.3 - - - Mouse mode is set by the <code>mouse</code> element, setting its - <code>mode</code> attribute to one of <code>server</code> or - <code>client</code>. If no mode is specified, the qemu default will - be used (client mode). Since 0.9.11 - - - File transfer functionality (via Spice agent) is set using the - <code>filetransfer</code> element. It is enabled by default, and - can be disabled by setting the <code>enable</code> property to - <code>no</code>. Since 1.2.2 - - - Spice may provide accelerated server-side rendering with OpenGL. - You can enable or disable OpenGL support explicitly with - the <code>gl</code> element, by setting the <code>enable</code> - property. (QEMU only, since 1.3.3). - Note that this only works locally, since this requires usage of - UNIX sockets, i.e. using <code>listen</code> types 'socket' or - 'none'. For accelerated OpenGL with remote support, consider - pairing this element with type <code>egl-headless</code> - (see below). However, this will deliver weaker performance - compared to native Spice OpenGL support. - - - By default, QEMU will pick the first available GPU DRM render node. - You may specify a DRM render node path to use instead. (QEMU only, - since 3.1.0). - - </dd> - <dt><code>rdp</code></dt> - <dd> - - Starts a RDP server. The <code>port</code> attribute specifies the - TCP port number (with -1 as legacy syntax indicating that it should - be auto-allocated). The <code>autoport</code> attribute is the new - preferred syntax for indicating auto-allocation of the TCP port to - use. In the VirtualBox driver, the <code>autoport</code> will make - the hypervisor pick available port from 3389-3689 range when the VM - is started. The chosen port will be reflected in the <code>port</code> - attribute. The <code>multiUser</code> attribute is a boolean deciding - whether multiple simultaneous connections to the VM are permitted. - The <code>replaceUser</code> attribute is a boolean deciding whether - the existing connection must be dropped and a new connection must - be established by the VRDP server, when a new client connects in - single connection mode. - - </dd> - <dt><code>desktop</code></dt> - <dd> - - This value is reserved for VirtualBox domains for the moment. It - displays a window on the host desktop, similarly to "sdl", but - using the VirtualBox viewer. Just like "sdl", it accepts - the optional attributes <code>display</code> and - <code>fullscreen</code>. - - </dd> - <dt><code>egl-headless</code>Since 4.6.0</dt> - <dd> - - This display type provides support for an OpenGL accelerated - display accessible both locally and remotely (for comparison, - Spice's native OpenGL support only works locally using UNIX - sockets at the moment, but has better performance). Since this - display type doesn't provide any window or graphical console like - the other types, for practical reasons it should be paired with - either <code>vnc</code> or <code>spice</code> graphics types. - This display type is only supported by QEMU domains - (needs QEMU 2.10 or newer). - 5.0.0 this element accepts a - <code><gl/></code> sub-element with an optional attribute - <code>rendernode</code> which can be used to specify an absolute - path to a host's DRI device to be used for OpenGL rendering. - - <pre> -<graphics type='spice' autoport='yes'/> -<graphics type='egl-headless'> - <gl rendernode='/dev/dri/renderD128'/> -</graphics> - </pre> - </dd> - </dl> - </dd> - </dl> - - - Graphics device uses a <code><listen></code> to set up where - the device should listen for clients. It has a mandatory attribute - <code>type</code> which specifies the listen type. Only <code>vnc</code>, - <code>spice</code> and <code>rdp</code> supports <code><listen> - </code> element. Since 0.9.4. - Available types are: - - <dl> - <dt><code>address</code></dt> - <dd> - - Tells a graphics device to use an address specified in the - <code>address</code> attribute, which will contain either an IP address - or hostname (which will be resolved to an IP address via a DNS query) - to listen on. - - - It is possible to omit the <code>address</code> attribute in order to - use an address from config files Since 1.3.5. - - - The <code>address</code> attribute is duplicated as <code>listen</code> - attribute in <code>graphics</code> element for backward compatibility. - If both are provided they must be equal. - - </dd> - <dt><code>network</code></dt> - <dd> - - This is used to specify an existing network in the <code>network</code> - attribute from libvirt's list of configured networks. The named network - configuration will be examined to determine an appropriate listen - address and the address will be stored in live XML in <code>address - </code> attribute. For example, if the network has an IPv4 address in - its configuration (e.g. if it has a forward type of <code>route</code>, - <code>nat</code>, or no forward type (isolated)), the first IPv4 - address listed in the network's configuration will be used. - If the network is describing a host bridge, the first IPv4 address - associated with that bridge device will be used, and if the network is - describing one of the 'direct' (macvtap) modes, the first IPv4 address - of the first forward dev will be used. - - </dd> - <dt><code>socket</code> since 2.0.0 (QEMU only)</dt> - <dd> - - This listen type tells a graphics server to listen on unix socket. - Attribute <code>socket</code> contains a path to unix socket. If this - attribute is omitted libvirt will generate this path for you. - Supported by graphics type <code>vnc</code> and <code>spice</code>. - - - For <code>vnc</code> graphics be backward compatible - the <code>socket</code> attribute of first <code>listen</code> element - is duplicated as <code>socket</code> attribute in <code>graphics</code> - element. If <code>graphics</code> element contains a <code>socket</code> - attribute all <code>listen</code> elements are ignored. - - </dd> - <dt><code>none</code> since 2.0.0 (QEMU only)</dt> - <dd> - - This listen type doesn't have any other attribute. Libvirt supports - passing a file descriptor through our APIs virDomainOpenGraphics() and - virDomainOpenGraphicsFD(). No other listen types are allowed if this - one is used and the graphics device doesn't listen anywhere. You need - to use one of the two APIs to pass a FD to QEMU in order to connect to - this graphics device. Supported by graphics type <code>vnc</code> and - <code>spice</code>. - - </dd> - </dl> - - <h4><a id="elementsVideo">Video devices</a></h4> - - A video device. - - -<pre> -... -<devices> - <video> - <model type='vga' vram='16384' heads='1'> - <acceleration accel3d='yes' accel2d='yes'/> - </model> - <driver name='qemu'/> - </video> -</devices> -...</pre> - - <dl> - <dt><code>video</code></dt> - <dd> - - The <code>video</code> element is the container for describing - video devices. For backwards compatibility, if no <code>video</code> - is set but there is a <code>graphics</code> in domain xml, then - libvirt will add a default <code>video</code> according to the guest - type. - - - For a guest of type "kvm", the default <code>video</code> is: - <code>type</code> with value "cirrus", <code>vram</code> with value - "16384" and <code>heads</code> with value "1". By default, the first - video device in domain xml is the primary one, but the optional - attribute <code>primary</code> (since 1.0.2) - with value 'yes' can be used to mark the primary in cases of multiple - video device. The non-primary must be type of "qxl" or - (since 2.4.0) "virtio". - - </dd> - - <dt><code>model</code></dt> - <dd> - - The <code>model</code> element has a mandatory <code>type</code> - attribute which takes the value "vga", "cirrus", "vmvga", "xen", - "vbox", "qxl" (since 0.8.6), - "virtio" (since 1.3.0), - "gop" (since 3.2.0), - "bochs" (since 5.6.0), "ramfb" - (since 5.9.0), or "none" - (since 4.6.0, depending on the hypervisor - features available. - The purpose of the type <code>none</code> is to instruct libvirt not - to add a default video device in the guest (see the paragraph above). - This legacy behaviour can be inconvenient in cases where GPU mediated - devices are meant to be the only rendering device within a guest and - so specifying another <code>video</code> device along with type - <code>none</code>. - Refer to <a id="elementsHostDev">Host device assignment</a> to see - how to add a mediated device into a guest. - - - You can provide the amount of video memory in kibibytes (blocks of - 1024 bytes) using <code>vram</code>. This is supported only for guest - type of "vz", "qemu", "vbox", "vmx" and "xen". If no - value is provided the default is used. If the size is not a power of - two it will be rounded to closest one. - - - The number of screen can be set using <code>heads</code>. This is - supported only for guests type of "vz", "kvm", "vbox" and "vmx". - - - For guest type of "kvm" or "qemu" and model type "qxl" there are - optional attributes. Attribute <code>ram</code> ( - since 1.0.2) specifies the size of the primary bar, while the - attribute <code>vram</code> specifies the secondary bar size. - If <code>ram</code> or <code>vram</code> are not supplied a default - value is used. The <code>ram</code> should also be rounded to power of - two as <code>vram</code>. There is also optional attribute - <code>vgamem</code> (since 1.2.11) to set - the size of VGA framebuffer for fallback mode of QXL device. - Attribute <code>vram64</code> (since 1.3.3) - extends secondary bar and makes it addressable as 64bit memory. - - Since 5.9.0, the <code>model</code> - element may also have an optional <code>resolution</code> sub-element. - The <code>resolution</code> element has attributes <code>x</code> and - <code>y</code> to set the minimum resolution for the video device. This - sub-element is valid for model types "vga", "qxl", "bochs", and - "virtio". - - </dd> - - <dt><code>acceleration</code></dt> - <dd> - Configure if video acceleration should be enabled. - <dl> - <dt><code>accel2d</code></dt> - <dd>Enable 2D acceleration (for vbox driver only, - since 0.7.1)</dd> - - <dt><code>accel3d</code></dt> - <dd>Enable 3D acceleration (for vbox driver - since 0.7.1, qemu driver - since 1.3.0)</dd> - - <dt><code>rendernode</code></dt> - <dd>Absolute path to a host's DRI device to be used for - rendering (for 'vhostuser' driver only, since 5.8.0). If none is specified, - libvirt will pick one available.</dd> - </dl> - </dd> - - <dt><code>address</code></dt> - <dd> - The optional <code>address</code> sub-element can be used to - tie the video device to a particular PCI slot. - On S390, <code>address</code> can be used to provide the - CCW address for the video device ( - since 4.2.0). - </dd> - - <dt><code>driver</code></dt> - <dd> - The subelement <code>driver</code> can be used to tune the device: - <dl> - <dt><code>name</code></dt> - <dd> - Specify the backend driver to use, either "qemu" or - "vhostuser" depending on the hypervisor features available - (since 5.8.0). "qemu" is the - default QEMU backend. "vhostuser" will use a separate - vhost-user process backend (for <code>virtio</code> - device). - </dd> - <dt>virtio options</dt> - <dd> - <a href="#elementsVirtio">Virtio-specific options</a> can also be - set (Since 3.5.0) - </dd> - <dt>VGA configuration</dt> - <dd> - Control how the video devices exposed to the guest using the - <code>vgaconf</code> attribute which takes the value "io", "on" or "off". - At present, it's only applicable to the bhyve's "gop" video model type - (Since 3.5.0) - </dd> - </dl> - </dd> - </dl> - - <h4><a id="elementsConsole">Consoles, serial, parallel & channel devices</a></h4> - - - A character device provides a way to interact with the virtual machine. - Paravirtualized consoles, serial ports, parallel ports and channels are - all classed as character devices and so represented using the same syntax. - - -<pre> -... -<devices> - <parallel type='pty'> - <source path='/dev/pts/2'/> - <target port='0'/> - </parallel> - <serial type='pty'> - <source path='/dev/pts/3'/> - <target port='0'/> - </serial> - <serial type='file'> - <source path='/tmp/file' append='on'> - <seclabel model='dac' relabel='no'/> - </source> - <target port='0'/> - </serial> - <console type='pty'> - <source path='/dev/pts/4'/> - <target port='0'/> - </console> - <channel type='unix'> - <source mode='bind' path='/tmp/guestfwd'/> - <target type='guestfwd' address='10.0.2.1' port='4600'/> - </channel> -</devices> -...</pre> - - - In each of these directives, the top-level element name (parallel, serial, - console, channel) describes how the device is presented to the guest. The - guest interface is configured by the <code>target</code> element. - - - - The interface presented to the host is given in the <code>type</code> - attribute of the top-level element. The host interface is - configured by the <code>source</code> element. - - - - The <code>source</code> element may contain an optional - <code>seclabel</code> to override the way that labelling - is done on the socket path. If this element is not present, - the <a href="#seclabel">security label is inherited from - the per-domain setting</a>. - - - - If the interface <code>type</code> presented to the host is "file", - then the <code>source</code> element may contain an optional attribute - <code>append</code> that specifies whether or not the information in - the file should be preserved on domain restart. Allowed values are - "on" and "off" (default). Since 1.3.1. - - - - Regardless of the <code>type</code>, character devices can - have an optional log file associated with them. This is - expressed via a <code>log</code> sub-element, with a - <code>file</code> attribute. There can also be an <code>append</code> - attribute which takes the same values described above. - Since 1.3.3. - - - <pre> -... -<log file="/var/log/libvirt/qemu/guestname-serial0.log" append="off"/> -...</pre> - - - Each character device element has an optional - sub-element <code><address></code> which can tie the - device to a - particular <a href="#elementsControllers">controller</a> or PCI - slot. - - - - For character device with type <code>unix</code> or <code>tcp</code> - the <code>source</code> has an optional element <code>reconnect</code> - which configures reconnect timeout if the connection is lost. - There are two attributes, <code>enabled</code> where possible - values are "yes" and "no" and <code>timeout</code> which is in - seconds. The <code>reconnect</code> attribute is valid only - for <code>connect</code> mode. - Since 3.7.0 (QEMU driver only). - - - <h5><a id="elementsCharGuestInterface">Guest interface</a></h5> - - - A character device presents itself to the guest as one of the following - types. - - - <h6><a id="elementCharParallel">Parallel port</a></h6> - -<pre> -... -<devices> - <parallel type='pty'> - <source path='/dev/pts/2'/> - <target port='0'/> - </parallel> -</devices> -...</pre> - - - <code>target</code> can have a <code>port</code> attribute, which - specifies the port number. Ports are numbered starting from 0. There are - usually 0, 1 or 2 parallel ports. - - - <h6><a id="elementCharSerial">Serial port</a></h6> - -<pre> -... -<devices> -  - <serial type='pty'> - <source path='/dev/pts/3'/> - <target port='0'/> - </serial> -</devices> -...</pre> - -<pre> -... -<devices> -  - <serial type='pty'> - <target type='usb-serial' port='0'> - <model name='usb-serial'/> - </target> - <address type='usb' bus='0' port='1'/> - </serial> -</devices> -...</pre> - - - The <code>target</code> element can have an optional <code>port</code> - attribute, which specifies the port number (starting from 0), and an - optional <code>type</code> attribute: valid values are, - since 1.0.2, <code>isa-serial</code> (usable - with x86 guests), <code>usb-serial</code> (usable whenever USB support - is available) and <code>pci-serial</code> (usable whenever PCI support - is available); since 3.10.0, - <code>spapr-vio-serial</code> (usable with ppc64/pseries guests), - <code>system-serial</code> (usable with aarch64/virt and, - since 4.7.0, riscv/virt guests) and - <code>sclp-serial</code> (usable with s390 and s390x guests) are - available as well. - - - - Since 3.10.0, the <code>target</code> - element can have an optional <code>model</code> subelement; - valid values for its <code>name</code> attribute are: - <code>isa-serial</code> (usable with the <code>isa-serial</code> target - type); <code>usb-serial</code> (usable with the <code>usb-serial</code> - target type); <code>pci-serial</code> - (usable with the <code>pci-serial</code> target type); - <code>spapr-vty</code> (usable with the <code>spapr-vio-serial</code> - target type); <code>pl011</code> and, - since 4.7.0, <code>16550a</code> (usable - with the <code>system-serial</code> target type); - <code>sclpconsole</code> and <code>sclplmconsole</code> (usable with - the <code>sclp-serial</code> target type). Providing a target model is - usually unnecessary: libvirt will automatically pick one that's suitable - for the chosen target type, and overriding that value is generally not - recommended. - - - - If any of the attributes is not specified by the user, libvirt will - choose a value suitable for most users. - - - - Most target types support configuring the guest-visible device - address as <a href="#elementsAddress">documented above</a>; more - specifically, acceptable address types are <code>isa</code> (for - <code>isa-serial</code>), <code>usb</code> (for <code>usb-serial</code>), - <code>pci</code> (for <code>pci-serial</code>) and <code>spapr-vio</code> - (for <code>spapr-vio-serial</code>). The <code>system-serial</code> - and <code>sclp-serial</code> target types don't support specifying an - address. - - - - For the relationship between serial ports and consoles, - <a href="#elementCharSerialAndConsole">see below</a>. - - - <h6><a id="elementCharConsole">Console</a></h6> - -<pre> -... -<devices> -  - <console type='pty'> - <source path='/dev/pts/2'/> - <target type='serial' port='0'/> - </console> -</devices> -...</pre> - -<pre> -... -<devices> -  - <console type='pty'> - <source path='/dev/pts/5'/> - <target type='virtio' port='0'/> - </console> -</devices> -...</pre> - - - The <code>console</code> element is used to represent interactive - serial consoles. Depending on the type of guest in use and the specifics - of the configuration, the <code>console</code> element might represent - the same device as an existing <code>serial</code> element or a separate - device. - - - - A <code>target</code> subelement is supported and works the same - way as with the <code>serial</code> element - (<a href="#elementCharSerial">see above</a> for details). - Valid values for the <code>type</code> attribute are: - <code>serial</code> (described below); - <code>virtio</code> (usable whenever VirtIO support is available); - <code>xen</code>, <code>lxc</code> and <code>openvz</code> - (available when the corresponding hypervisor is in use). - <code>sclp</code> and <code>sclplm</code> (usable for s390 and - s390x QEMU guests) are supported for compatibility reasons but should - not be used for new guests: use the <code>sclpconsole</code> and - <code>sclplmconsole</code> target models, respectively, with the - <code>serial</code> element instead. - - - - Of the target types listed above, <code>serial</code> is special in - that it doesn't represents a separate device, but rather the same - device as the first <code>serial</code> element. Due to this, there can - only be a single <code>console</code> element with target type - <code>serial</code> per guest. - - - - Virtio consoles are usually accessible as <code>/dev/hvc[0-7]</code> - from inside the guest; for more information, see - <a href="http://fedoraproject.org/wiki/Features/VirtioSerial">http://fedoraproject.org/wiki/Features/VirtioSerial</a>. - Since 0.8.3 - - - - For the relationship between serial ports and consoles, - <a href="#elementCharSerialAndConsole">see below</a>. - - - <h6><a id="elementCharSerialAndConsole">Relationship between serial ports and consoles</a></h6> - - - Due to hystorical reasons, the <code>serial</code> and - <code>console</code> elements have partially overlapping scopes. - - - - In general, both elements are used to configure one or more serial - consoles to be used for interacting with the guest. The main difference - between the two is that <code>serial</code> is used for emulated, - usually native, serial consoles, whereas <code>console</code> is used - for paravirtualized ones. - - - - Both emulated and paravirtualized serial consoles have advantages and - disadvantages: - - - <ul> - <li> - emulated serial consoles are usually initialized much earlier than - paravirtualized ones, so they can be used to control the bootloader - and display both firmware and early boot messages; - </li> - <li> - on several platforms, there can only be a single emulated serial - console per guest but paravirtualized consoles don't suffer from the - same limitation. - </li> - </ul> - - - A configuration such as: - - -<pre> -... -<devices> - <console type='pty'> - <target type='serial'/> - </console> - <console type='pty'> - <target type='virtio'/> - </console> -</devices> -...</pre> - - - will work on any platform and will result in one emulated serial console - for early boot logging / interactive / recovery use, and one - paravirtualized serial console to be used eg. as a side channel. Most - people will be fine with having just the first <code>console</code> - element in their configuration, but if a specific configuration is - desired then both elements should be specified. - - - - Note that, due to the compatibility concerns mentioned earlier, all the - following configurations: - - -<pre> -... -<devices> - <serial type='pty'/> -</devices> -...</pre> - -<pre> -... -<devices> - <console type='pty'/> -</devices> -...</pre> - -<pre> -... -<devices> - <serial type='pty'/> - <console type='pty'/> -</devices> -...</pre> - - - will be treated the same and will result in a single emulated serial - console being available to the guest. - - - <h6><a id="elementCharChannel">Channel</a></h6> - - - This represents a private communication channel between the host and the - guest. - - -<pre> -... -<devices> - <channel type='unix'> - <source mode='bind' path='/tmp/guestfwd'/> - <target type='guestfwd' address='10.0.2.1' port='4600'/> - </channel> - -  - <channel type='pty'> - <target type='virtio' name='arbitrary.virtio.serial.port.name'/> - </channel> - <channel type='unix'> - <source mode='bind' path='/var/lib/libvirt/qemu/f16x86_64.agent'/> - <target type='virtio' name='org.qemu.guest_agent.0' state='connected'/> - </channel> - <channel type='spicevmc'> - <target type='virtio' name='com.redhat.spice.0'/> - </channel> -</devices> -...</pre> - - - This can be implemented in a variety of ways. The specific type of - channel is given in the <code>type</code> attribute of the - <code>target</code> element. Different channel types have different - <code>target</code> attributes. - - - <dl> - <dt><code>guestfwd</code></dt> - <dd>TCP traffic sent by the guest to a given IP address and port is - forwarded to the channel device on the host. The <code>target</code> - element must have <code>address</code> and <code>port</code> attributes. - Since 0.7.3</dd> - - <dt><code>virtio</code></dt> - <dd>Paravirtualized virtio channel. Channel is exposed in the guest under - /dev/vport*, and if the optional element <code>name</code> is specified, - /dev/virtio-ports/$name (for more info, please see - <a href="http://fedoraproject.org/wiki/Features/VirtioSerial">http://fedoraproject.org/wiki/Features/VirtioSerial</a>). The - optional element <code>address</code> can tie the channel to a - particular <code>type='virtio-serial'</code> - controller, <a href="#elementsAddress">documented above</a>. - With qemu, if <code>name</code> is "org.qemu.guest_agent.0", - then libvirt can interact with a guest agent installed in the - guest, for actions such as guest shutdown or file system quiescing. - Since 0.7.7, guest agent interaction - since 0.9.10 Moreover, since 1.0.6 - it is possible to have source path auto generated for virtio unix channels. - This is very useful in case of a qemu guest agent, where users don't - usually care about the source path since it's libvirt who talks to - the guest agent. In case users want to utilize this feature, they should - leave <code><source></code> element out. Since - 1.2.11 the active XML for a virtio channel may contain an optional - <code>state</code> attribute that reflects whether a process in the - guest is active on the channel. This is an output-only attribute. - Possible values for the <code>state</code> attribute are - <code>connected</code> and <code>disconnected</code>. - </dd> - <dt><code>xen</code></dt> - <dd> Paravirtualized Xen channel. Channel is exposed in the guest as a - Xen console but identified with a name. Setup and consumption of a Xen - channel depends on software and configuration in the guest - (for more info, please see <a href="http://xenbits.xen.org/docs/unstable/misc/channel.txt">http://xenbits.xen.org/docs/unstable/misc/channel.txt</a>). - Channel source path semantics are the same as the virtio target type. - The <code>state</code> attribute is not supported since Xen channels - lack the necessary probing mechanism. - Since 2.3.0 - </dd> - <dt><code>spicevmc</code></dt> - <dd>Paravirtualized SPICE channel. The domain must also have a - SPICE server as a <a href="#elementsGraphics">graphics - device</a>, at which point the host piggy-backs messages - across the <code>main</code> channel. The <code>target</code> - element must be present, with - attribute <code>type='virtio'</code>; an optional - attribute <code>name</code> controls how the guest will have - access to the channel, and defaults - to <code>name='com.redhat.spice.0'</code>. The - optional <code>address</code> element can tie the channel to a - particular <code>type='virtio-serial'</code> controller. - Since 0.8.8</dd> - </dl> - - <h5><a id="elementsCharHostInterface">Host interface</a></h5> - - - A character device presents itself to the host as one of the following - types. - - - <h6><a id="elementsCharSTDIO">Domain logfile</a></h6> - - - This disables all input on the character device, and sends output - into the virtual machine's logfile - - -<pre> -... -<devices> - <console type='stdio'> - <target port='1'/> - </console> -</devices> -...</pre> - - - <h6><a id="elementsCharFle">Device logfile</a></h6> - - - A file is opened and all data sent to the character - device is written to the file. - - -<pre> -... -<devices> - <serial type="file"> - <source path="/var/log/vm/vm-serial.log"/> - <target port="1"/> - </serial> -</devices> -...</pre> - - <h6><a id="elementsCharVC">Virtual console</a></h6> - - - Connects the character device to the graphical framebuffer in - a virtual console. This is typically accessed via a special - hotkey sequence such as "ctrl+alt+3" - - -<pre> -... -<devices> - <serial type='vc'> - <target port="1"/> - </serial> -</devices> -...</pre> - - <h6><a id="elementsCharNull">Null device</a></h6> - - - Connects the character device to the void. No data is ever - provided to the input. All data written is discarded. - - -<pre> -... -<devices> - <serial type='null'> - <target port="1"/> - </serial> -</devices> -...</pre> - - <h6><a id="elementsCharPTY">Pseudo TTY</a></h6> - - - A Pseudo TTY is allocated using /dev/ptmx. A suitable client - such as 'virsh console' can connect to interact with the - serial port locally. - - -<pre> -... -<devices> - <serial type="pty"> - <source path="/dev/pts/3"/> - <target port="1"/> - </serial> -</devices> -...</pre> - - - NB special case if <console type='pty'>, then the TTY - path is also duplicated as an attribute tty='/dev/pts/3' - on the top level <console> tag. This provides compat - with existing syntax for <console> tags. - - - <h6><a id="elementsCharHost">Host device proxy</a></h6> - - - The character device is passed through to the underlying - physical character device. The device types must match, - eg the emulated serial port should only be connected to - a host serial port - don't connect a serial port to a parallel - port. - - -<pre> -... -<devices> - <serial type="dev"> - <source path="/dev/ttyS0"/> - <target port="1"/> - </serial> -</devices> -...</pre> - - <h6><a id="elementsCharPipe">Named pipe</a></h6> - - - The character device writes output to a named pipe. See pipe(7) for - more info. - - -<pre> -... -<devices> - <serial type="pipe"> - <source path="/tmp/mypipe"/> - <target port="1"/> - </serial> -</devices> -...</pre> - - <h6><a id="elementsCharTCP">TCP client/server</a></h6> - - - The character device acts as a TCP client connecting to a - remote server. - - -<pre> -... -<devices> - <serial type="tcp"> - <source mode="connect" host="0.0.0.0" service="2445"/> - <protocol type="raw"/> - <target port="1"/> - </serial> -</devices> - ...</pre> - - - Or as a TCP server waiting for a client connection. - - -<pre> -... -<devices> - <serial type="tcp"> - <source mode="bind" host="127.0.0.1" service="2445"/> - <protocol type="raw"/> - <target port="1"/> - </serial> -</devices> -...</pre> - - - Alternatively you can use <code>telnet</code> instead - of <code>raw</code> TCP in order to utilize the telnet protocol - for the connection. - - - Since 0.8.5, some hypervisors support - use of either <code>telnets</code> (secure telnet) or <code>tls</code> - (via secure sockets layer) as the transport protocol for connections. - - -<pre> -... -<devices> - <serial type="tcp"> - <source mode="connect" host="0.0.0.0" service="2445"/> - <protocol type="telnet"/> - <target port="1"/> - </serial> - ... - <serial type="tcp"> - <source mode="bind" host="127.0.0.1" service="2445"/> - <protocol type="telnet"/> - <target port="1"/> - </serial> -</devices> -...</pre> - - - Since 2.4.0, the optional attribute - <code>tls</code> can be used to control whether a chardev - TCP communication channel would utilize a hypervisor configured - TLS X.509 certificate environment in order to encrypt the data - channel. For the QEMU hypervisor, usage of a TLS environment can - be controlled on the host by the <code>chardev_tls</code> and - <code>chardev_tls_x509_cert_dir</code> or - <code>default_tls_x509_cert_dir</code> settings in the file - /etc/libvirt/qemu.conf. If <code>chardev_tls</code> is enabled, - then unless the <code>tls</code> attribute is set to "no", libvirt - will use the host configured TLS environment. - If <code>chardev_tls</code> is disabled, but the <code>tls</code> - attribute is set to "yes", then libvirt will attempt to use the - host TLS environment if either the <code>chardev_tls_x509_cert_dir</code> - or <code>default_tls_x509_cert_dir</code> TLS directory structure exists. - -<pre> -... -<devices> - <serial type="tcp"> - <source mode='connect' host="127.0.0.1" service="5555" tls="yes"/> - <protocol type="raw"/> - <target port="0"/> - </serial> -</devices> -...</pre> - - <h6><a id="elementsCharUDP">UDP network console</a></h6> - - - The character device acts as a UDP netconsole service, - sending and receiving packets. This is a lossy service. - - -<pre> -... -<devices> - <serial type="udp"> - <source mode="bind" host="0.0.0.0" service="2445"/> - <source mode="connect" host="0.0.0.0" service="2445"/> - <target port="1"/> - </serial> -</devices> -...</pre> - - <h6><a id="elementsCharUNIX">UNIX domain socket client/server</a></h6> - - - The character device acts as a UNIX domain socket server, - accepting connections from local clients. - - -<pre> -... -<devices> - <serial type="unix"> - <source mode="bind" path="/tmp/foo"/> - <target port="1"/> - </serial> -</devices> -...</pre> - - <h6><a id="elementsCharSpiceport">Spice channel</a></h6> - - - The character device is accessible through spice connection - under a channel name specified in the <code>channel</code> - attribute. Since 1.2.2 - - - Note: depending on the hypervisor, spiceports might (or might not) - be enabled on domains with or without <a href="#elementsGraphics">spice - graphics</a>. - - -<pre> -... -<devices> - <serial type="spiceport"> - <source channel="org.qemu.console.serial.0"/> - <target port="1"/> - </serial> -</devices> -...</pre> - - <h6><a id="elementsNmdm">Nmdm device</a></h6> - - - The nmdm device driver, available on FreeBSD, provides two - tty devices connected together by a virtual null modem cable. - Since 1.2.4 - - -<pre> -... -<devices> - <serial type="nmdm"> - <source master="/dev/nmdm0A" slave="/dev/nmdm0B"/> - </serial> -</devices> -...</pre> - - - The <code>source</code> element has these attributes: - - - <dl> - <dt><code>master</code></dt> - <dd>Master device of the pair, that is passed to the hypervisor. - Device is specified by a fully qualified path.</dd> - - <dt><code>slave</code></dt> - <dd>Slave device of the pair, that is passed to the clients for connection - to the guest console. Device is specified by a fully qualified path.</dd> - </dl> - - <h4><a id="elementsSound">Sound devices</a></h4> - - - A virtual sound card can be attached to the host via the - <code>sound</code> element. Since 0.4.3 - - -<pre> -... -<devices> - <sound model='es1370'/> -</devices> -...</pre> - - <dl> - <dt><code>sound</code></dt> - <dd> - The <code>sound</code> element has one mandatory attribute, - <code>model</code>, which specifies what real sound device is emulated. - Valid values are specific to the underlying hypervisor, though typical - choices are 'es1370', 'sb16', 'ac97', 'ich6' and 'usb'. - ( - 'ac97' only since 0.6.0, 'ich6' only since 0.8.8, - 'usb' only since 1.2.7) - </dd> - </dl> - - - Since 0.9.13, a sound element - with <code>ich6</code> model can have optional - sub-elements <code><codec></code> to attach various audio - codecs to the audio device. If not specified, a default codec - will be attached to allow playback and recording. - - - Valid values are: - - - <ul> - <li>'duplex' - advertise a line-in and a line-out </li> - <li>'micro' - advertise a speaker and a microphone </li> - <li>'output' - advertise a line-out - Since 4.4.0</li> - </ul> - - -<pre> -... -<devices> - <sound model='ich6'> - <codec type='micro'/> - </sound> -</devices> -...</pre> - - - Each <code>sound</code> element has an optional - sub-element <code><address></code> which can tie the - device to a particular PCI - slot, <a href="#elementsAddress">documented above</a>. - - - <h4><a id="elementsWatchdog">Watchdog device</a></h4> - - - A virtual hardware watchdog device can be added to the guest via - the <code>watchdog</code> element. - Since 0.7.3, QEMU and KVM only - - - - The watchdog device requires an additional driver and management - daemon in the guest. Just enabling the watchdog in the libvirt - configuration does not do anything useful on its own. - - - - Currently libvirt does not support notification when the - watchdog fires. This feature is planned for a future version of - libvirt. - - -<pre> -... -<devices> - <watchdog model='i6300esb'/> -</devices> -...</pre> - -<pre> - ... - <devices> - <watchdog model='i6300esb' action='poweroff'/> - </devices> -</domain></pre> - - <dl> - <dt><code>model</code></dt> - <dd> - - The required <code>model</code> attribute specifies what real - watchdog device is emulated. Valid values are specific to the - underlying hypervisor. - - - QEMU and KVM support: - - <ul> - <li>'i6300esb' - the recommended device, - emulating a PCI Intel 6300ESB </li> - <li>'ib700' - emulating an ISA iBase IB700 </li> - <li>'diag288' - emulating an S390 DIAG288 device - Since 1.2.17</li> - </ul> - </dd> - <dt><code>action</code></dt> - <dd> - - The optional <code>action</code> attribute describes what - action to take when the watchdog expires. Valid values are - specific to the underlying hypervisor. - - - QEMU and KVM support: - - <ul> - <li>'reset' - default, forcefully reset the guest</li> - <li>'shutdown' - gracefully shutdown the guest - (not recommended) </li> - <li>'poweroff' - forcefully power off the guest</li> - <li>'pause' - pause the guest</li> - <li>'none' - do nothing</li> - <li>'dump' - automatically dump the guest - Since 0.8.7</li> - <li>'inject-nmi' - inject a non-maskable interrupt - into the guest - Since 1.2.17</li> - </ul> - - Note 1: the 'shutdown' action requires that the guest - is responsive to ACPI signals. In the sort of situations - where the watchdog has expired, guests are usually unable - to respond to ACPI signals. Therefore using 'shutdown' - is not recommended. - - - Note 2: the directory to save dump files can be configured - by <code>auto_dump_path</code> in file /etc/libvirt/qemu.conf. - - </dd> - </dl> - - <h4><a id="elementsMemBalloon">Memory balloon device</a></h4> - - - A virtual memory balloon device is added to all Xen and KVM/QEMU - guests. It will be seen as <code>memballoon</code> element. - It will be automatically added when appropriate, so there is no - need to explicitly add this element in the guest XML unless a - specific PCI slot needs to be assigned. - Since 0.8.3, Xen, QEMU and KVM only - Additionally, since 0.8.4, if the - memballoon device needs to be explicitly disabled, - <code>model='none'</code> may be used. - - - - Example: automatically added device with KVM - -<pre> -... -<devices> - <memballoon model='virtio'/> -</devices> -...</pre> - - - Example: manually added device with static PCI slot 2 requested - -<pre> - ... - <devices> - <memballoon model='virtio'> - <address type='pci' domain='0x0000' bus='0x00' slot='0x02' function='0x0'/> - <stats period='10'/> - <driver iommu='on' ats='on'/> - </memballoon> - </devices> -</domain></pre> - - <dl> - <dt><code>model</code></dt> - <dd> - - The required <code>model</code> attribute specifies what type - of balloon device is provided. Valid values are specific to - the virtualization platform - - <ul> - <li>'virtio' - default with QEMU/KVM</li> - <li>'virtio-transitional' Since 5.2.0</li> - <li>'virtio-non-transitional' Since 5.2.0</li> - <li>'xen' - default with Xen</li> - </ul> - See <a href="#elementsVirtioTransitional">Virtio transitional devices</a> - for more details. - </dd> - <dt><code>autodeflate</code></dt> - <dd> - - The optional <code>autodeflate</code> attribute allows to - enable/disable (values "on"/"off", respectively) the ability of the - QEMU virtio memory balloon to release some memory at the last moment - before a guest's process get killed by Out of Memory killer. - Since 1.3.1, QEMU and KVM only - - </dd> - <dt><code>period</code></dt> - <dd> - - The optional <code>period</code> allows the QEMU virtio memory balloon - driver to provide statistics through the <code>virsh dommemstat - [domain]</code> command. By default, collection is not enabled. In - order to enable, use the <code>virsh dommemstat [domain] --period - [number]</code> command or <code>virsh edit</code> command to add the - option to the XML definition. The <code>virsh dommemstat</code> will - accept the options <code>--live</code>, <code>--current</code>, - or <code>--config</code>. If an option is not provided, the change - for a running domain will only be made to the active guest. If the - QEMU driver is not at the right revision, the attempt to set the - period will fail. Large values (e.g. many years) might be ignored. - Since 1.1.1, requires QEMU 1.5 - - </dd> - <dt><code>driver</code></dt> - <dd> - For model <code>virtio</code> memballoon, - <a href="#elementsVirtio">Virtio-specific options</a> can also be - set. (Since 3.5.0) - </dd> - </dl> - <h4><a id="elementsRng">Random number generator device</a></h4> - - - The virtual random number generator device allows the host to pass - through entropy to guest operating systems. - Since 1.0.3 - - - - Example: usage of the RNG device: - -<pre> -... -<devices> - <rng model='virtio'> - <rate period="2000" bytes="1234"/> - <backend model='random'>/dev/random</backend> -  - <backend model='egd' type='udp'> - <source mode='bind' service='1234'/> - <source mode='connect' host='1.2.3.4' service='1234'/> - </backend> -  - <backend model='builtin'/> - </rng> -</devices> -... -</pre> - <dl> - <dt><code>model</code></dt> - <dd> - - The required <code>model</code> attribute specifies what type - of RNG device is provided. Valid values are specific to - the virtualization platform: - - <ul> - <li>'virtio' - supported by qemu and virtio-rng kernel module</li> - <li>'virtio-transitional' Since 5.2.0</li> - <li>'virtio-non-transitional' Since 5.2.0</li> - </ul> - See <a href="#elementsVirtioTransitional">Virtio transitional devices</a> - for more details. - </dd> - <dt><code>rate</code></dt> - <dd> - - The optional <code>rate</code> element allows limiting the rate at - which entropy can be consumed from the source. The mandatory - attribute <code>bytes</code> specifies how many bytes are permitted - to be consumed per period. An optional <code>period</code> attribute - specifies the duration of a period in milliseconds; if omitted, the - period is taken as 1000 milliseconds (1 second). - Since 1.0.4 - - </dd> - <dt><code>backend</code></dt> - <dd> - - The <code>backend</code> element specifies the source of entropy - to be used for the domain. The source model is configured using the - <code>model</code> attribute. Supported source models are: - - <dl> - <dt><code>random</code></dt> - <dd> - - This backend type expects a non-blocking character device - as input. The file name is specified as contents of the - <code>backend</code> element. Since - 1.3.4 any path is accepted. Before that - <code>/dev/random</code> and <code>/dev/hwrng</code> were - the only accepted paths. When no file name is specified, - the hypervisor default is used. For QEMU, the default is - <code>/dev/random</code>. However, the recommended source - of entropy is <code>/dev/urandom</code> (as it doesn't - have the limitations of <code>/dev/random</code>). - - </dd> - <dt><code>egd</code></dt> - <dd> - - This backend connects to a source using the EGD protocol. - The source is specified as a character device. Refer to - <a href='#elementsCharHostInterface'>character device host interface</a> - for more information. - - </dd> - <dt><code>builtin</code></dt> - <dd> - - This backend uses qemu builtin random generator, which uses - <code>getrandom()</code> syscall as the source of entropy. - (Since 6.1.0 and QEMU 4.2) - - </dd> - </dl> - </dd> - <dt><code>driver</code></dt> - <dd> - The subelement <code>driver</code> can be used to tune the device: - <dl> - <dt>virtio options</dt> - <dd> - <a href="#elementsVirtio">Virtio-specific options</a> can also be - set. (Since 3.5.0) - </dd> - </dl> - </dd> - - </dl> - - <h4><a id="elementsTpm">TPM device</a></h4> - - - The TPM device enables a QEMU guest to have access to TPM - functionality. The TPM device may either be a TPM 1.2 or - a TPM 2.0. - - - The TPM passthrough device type provides access to the host's TPM - for one QEMU guest. No other software may be using the TPM device, - typically /dev/tpm0, at the time the QEMU guest is started. - 'passthrough' since 1.0.5 - - - - Example: usage of the TPM passthrough device - -<pre> -... -<devices> - <tpm model='tpm-tis'> - <backend type='passthrough'> - <device path='/dev/tpm0'/> - </backend> - </tpm> -</devices> -... -</pre> - - - The emulator device type gives access to a TPM emulator providing - TPM functionality for each VM. QEMU talks to it over a Unix socket. With - the emulator device type each guest gets its own private TPM. - 'emulator' since 4.5.0 - The state of the TPM emulator can be encrypted by providing an - <code>encryption</code> element. - 'encryption' since 5.6.0 - - - Example: usage of the TPM Emulator - -<pre> - ... - <devices> - <tpm model='tpm-tis'> - <backend type='emulator' version='2.0'> - <encryption secret='6dd3e4a5-1d76-44ce-961f-f119f5aad935'/> - </backend> - </tpm> - </devices> - ... -</pre> - <dl> - <dt><code>model</code></dt> - <dd> - - The <code>model</code> attribute specifies what device - model QEMU provides to the guest. If no model name is provided, - <code>tpm-tis</code> will automatically be chosen for non-PPC64 - architectures. - Since 4.4.0, another available choice - is the <code>tpm-crb</code>, which should only be used when the - backend device is a TPM 2.0. Since 6.1.0, - pSeries guests on PPC64 are supported and the default is - <code>tpm-spapr</code>. - - Since 6.5.0, a new model called - <code>spapr-tpm-proxy</code> was added for pSeries guests. This model - only works with the <code>passthrough</code> backend. It creates a - TPM Proxy device that communicates with an existing TPM Resource Manager - in the host, for example <code>/dev/tpmrm0</code>, enabling the guest to - run in secure virtual machine mode with the help of an Ultravisor. Adding - a TPM Proxy to a pSeries guest brings no security benefits unless the guest - is running on a PPC64 host that has an Ultravisor and a TPM Resource Manager. - Only one TPM Proxy device is allowed per guest, but a TPM Proxy device can - be added together with - other TPM devices. - - </dd> - <dt><code>backend</code></dt> - <dd> - - The <code>backend</code> element specifies the type of - TPM device. The following types are supported: - - <dl> - <dt><code>passthrough</code></dt> - <dd> - - Use the host's TPM or TPM Resource Manager device. - - - This backend type requires exclusive access to a TPM device on - the host. An example for such a device is /dev/tpm0. The fully - qualified file name is specified by path attribute of the - <code>source</code> element. If no file name is specified then - /dev/tpm0 is automatically used. - - Since 6.5.0, when choosing the - <code>spapr-tpm-proxy</code> model, the file name specified is - expected to be a TPM Resource Manager device, e.g. - <code>/dev/tpmrm0</code>. - - </dd> - </dl> - <dl> - <dt><code>emulator</code></dt> - <dd> - - For this backend type the 'swtpm' TPM Emulator must be installed on the - host. Libvirt will automatically start an independent TPM emulator - for each QEMU guest requesting access to it. - - </dd> - </dl> - </dd> - <dt><code>version</code></dt> - <dd> - - The <code>version</code> attribute indicates the version - of the TPM. By default a TPM 1.2 is created. This attribute - only works with the <code>emulator</code> backend. The following - versions are supported: - - <ul> - <li>'1.2' : creates a TPM 1.2</li> - <li>'2.0' : creates a TPM 2.0</li> - </ul> - </dd> - <dt><code>encryption</code></dt> - <dd> - - The <code>encryption</code> element allows the state of a TPM emulator - to be encrypted. The <code>secret</code> must reference a secret object - that holds the passphrase from which the encryption key will be derived. - - </dd> - </dl> - - <h4><a id="elementsNVRAM">NVRAM device</a></h4> - - nvram device is always added to pSeries guest on PPC64, and its address - is allowed to be changed. Element <code>nvram</code> (only valid for - pSeries guest, since 1.0.5) is provided to - enable the address setting. - - - Example: usage of NVRAM configuration - -<pre> -... -<devices> - <nvram> - <address type='spapr-vio' reg='0x00003000'/> - </nvram> -</devices> -... -</pre> - <dl> - <dt><code>spapr-vio</code></dt> - <dd> - - VIO device address type, only valid for PPC64. - - </dd> - <dt><code>reg</code></dt> - <dd> - - Device address - - </dd> - </dl> - - <h4><a id="elementsPanic">panic device</a></h4> - - panic device enables libvirt to receive panic notification from a QEMU - guest. - Since 1.2.1, QEMU and KVM only - - - This feature is always enabled for: - - <ul> - <li>pSeries guests, since it's implemented by the guest firmware</li> - <li>S390 guests, since it's an integral part of the S390 architecture</li> - </ul> - - For the guest types listed above, libvirt automatically adds a - <code>panic</code> element to the domain XML. - - - Example: usage of panic configuration - -<pre> -... -<devices> - <panic model='hyperv'/> - <panic model='isa'> - <address type='isa' iobase='0x505'/> - </panic> -</devices> -... -</pre> - <dl> - <dt><code>model</code></dt> - <dd> - - The optional <code>model</code> attribute specifies what type - of panic device is provided. The panic model used when this attribute - is missing depends on the hypervisor and guest arch. - - <ul> - <li>'isa' - for ISA pvpanic device</li> - <li>'pseries' - default and valid only for pSeries guests.</li> - <li>'hyperv' - for Hyper-V crash CPU feature. - Since 1.3.0, QEMU and KVM only</li> - <li>'s390' - default for S390 guests. - Since 1.3.5</li> - </ul> - </dd> - <dt><code>address</code></dt> - <dd> - - address of panic. The default ioport is 0x505. Most users - don't need to specify an address, and doing so is forbidden - altogether for s390, pseries and hyperv models. - - </dd> - </dl> - - <h4><a id="elementsShmem">Shared memory device</a></h4> - - - A shared memory device allows to share a memory region between - different virtual machines and the host. - Since 1.2.10, QEMU and KVM only - - -<pre> -... -<devices> - <shmem name='my_shmem0' role='peer'> - <model type='ivshmem-plain'/> - <size unit='M'>4</size> - </shmem> - <shmem name='shmem_server'> - <model type='ivshmem-doorbell'/> - <size unit='M'>2</size> - <server path='/tmp/socket-shmem'/> - <msi vectors='32' ioeventfd='on'/> - </shmem> -</devices> -... -</pre> - - <dl> - <dt><code>shmem</code></dt> - <dd> - The <code>shmem</code> element has one mandatory attribute, - <code>name</code> to identify the shared memory. This attribute cannot - be directory specific to <code>.</code> or <code>..</code> as well as - it cannot involve path separator <code>/</code>. - The optional <code>role</code> (since 6.6.0) - attribute specifies the shared memory is migratable or not. The value can - be either "master" or "peer", the former will mean that upon migration, - the data in the shared memory is migrated with the domain. There should - be only one "master" per shared memory object. Migration with "peer" role - is disabled. If migration of such domain is required, the shmem device - needs to be unplugged before migration and plugged in at the destination - upon successful migration. If the role not specified, the hypervisor - default is used. This attribute is currently available only for - <code>model</code> type <code>ivshmem-plain</code> and - <code>ivshmem-doorbell</code>. - </dd> - <dt><code>model</code></dt> - <dd> - Attribute <code>type</code> of the optional element <code>model</code> - specifies the model of the underlying device providing the - <code>shmem</code> device. The models currently supported are - <code>ivshmem</code> (supports both server and server-less shmem, but is - deprecated by newer QEMU in favour of the -plain and -doorbell variants), - <code>ivshmem-plain</code> (only for server-less shmem) and - <code>ivshmem-doorbell</code> (only for shmem with the server). - </dd> - <dt><code>size</code></dt> - <dd> - The optional <code>size</code> element specifies the size of the shared - memory. This must be power of 2 and greater than or equal to 1 MiB. - </dd> - <dt><code>server</code></dt> - <dd> - The optional <code>server</code> element can be used to configure a server - socket the device is supposed to connect to. The optional - <code>path</code> attribute specifies the absolute path to the unix socket - and defaults to <code>/var/lib/libvirt/shmem/$shmem-$name-sock</code>. - </dd> - <dt><code>msi</code></dt> - <dd> - The optional <code>msi</code> element enables/disables (values "on"/"off", - respectively) MSI interrupts. This option can currently be used only - together with the <code>server</code> element. The <code>vectors</code> - attribute can be used to specify the number of interrupt - vectors. The <code>ioeventd</code> attribute enables/disables (values - "on"/"off", respectively) ioeventfd. - </dd> - </dl> - - <h4><a id="elementsMemory">Memory devices</a></h4> - - - In addition to the initial memory assigned to the guest, memory devices - allow additional memory to be assigned to the guest in the form of - memory modules. - - A memory device can be hot-plugged or hot-unplugged depending on the - guests' memory resource needs. - - Some hypervisors may require NUMA configured for the guest. - - - - Example: usage of the memory devices - -<pre> -... -<devices> - <memory model='dimm' access='private' discard='yes'> - <target> - <size unit='KiB'>524287</size> - <node>0</node> - </target> - </memory> - <memory model='dimm'> - <source> - <pagesize unit='KiB'>4096</pagesize> - <nodemask>1-3</nodemask> - </source> - <target> - <size unit='KiB'>524287</size> - <node>1</node> - </target> - </memory> - <memory model='nvdimm'> - <uuid> - <source> - <path>/tmp/nvdimm</path> - </source> - <target> - <size unit='KiB'>524288</size> - <node>1</node> - <label> - <size unit='KiB'>128</size> - </label> - <readonly/> - </target> - </memory> - <memory model='nvdimm' access='shared'> - <uuid> - <source> - <path>/dev/dax0.0</path> - <alignsize unit='KiB'>2048</alignsize> - <pmem/> - </source> - <target> - <size unit='KiB'>524288</size> - <node>1</node> - <label> - <size unit='KiB'>128</size> - </label> - </target> - </memory> -</devices> -... -</pre> - <dl> - <dt><code>model</code></dt> - <dd> - - Provide <code>dimm</code> to add a virtual DIMM module to the guest. - Since 1.2.14 - Provide <code>nvdimm</code> model adds a Non-Volatile DIMM - module. Since 3.2.0 - - </dd> - - <dt><code>access</code></dt> - <dd> - - An optional attribute <code>access</code> - (since 3.2.0) that provides - capability to fine tune mapping of the memory on per - module basis. Values are the same as - <a href="#elementsMemoryBacking">Memory Backing</a>: - <code>shared</code> and <code>private</code>. - For <code>nvdimm</code> model, if using real NVDIMM DAX device as - backend, <code>shared</code> is required. - - </dd> - - <dt><code>discard</code></dt> - <dd> - - An optional attribute <code>discard</code> - (since 4.4.0) that provides - capability to fine tune discard of data on per module - basis. Accepted values are <code>yes</code> and - <code>no</code>. The feature is described here: - <a href="#elementsMemoryBacking">Memory Backing</a>. - This attribute is allowed only for - <code>model='dimm'</code>. - - </dd> - - <dt><code>uuid</code></dt> - <dd> - - For pSeries guests, an uuid can be set to identify the - nvdimm module. If absent, libvirt will generate an uuid. - automatically. This attribute is allowed only for - <code>model='nvdimm'</code> for pSeries guests. - Since 6.2.0 - - </dd> - - <dt><code>source</code></dt> - <dd> - - For model <code>dimm</code> this element is optional and allows to - fine tune the source of the memory used for the given memory device. - If the element is not provided defaults configured via - <code>numatune</code> are used. If <code>dimm</code> is provided, - then the following optional elements can be provided as well: - - - <dl> - <dt><code>pagesize</code></dt> - <dd> - - This element can be used to override the default - host page size used for backing the memory device. - The configured value must correspond to a page size - supported by the host. - - </dd> - - <dt><code>nodemask</code></dt> - <dd> - - This element can be used to override the default - set of NUMA nodes where the memory would be - allocated. - - </dd> - </dl> - - - For model <code>nvdimm</code> this element is mandatory. The - mandatory child element <code>path</code> represents a path in - the host that backs the nvdimm module in the guest. The following - optional elements may be used: - - - <dl> - <dt><code>alignsize</code></dt> - <dd> - - The <code>alignsize</code> element defines the page size - alignment used to mmap the address range for the backend - <code>path</code>. If not supplied the host page size is used. - For example, to mmap a real NVDIMM device a 2M-aligned page may - be required, and host page size is 4KB, then we need to set this - element to 2MB. - Since 5.0.0 - - </dd> - - <dt><code>pmem</code></dt> - <dd> - - If persistent memory is supported and enabled by the hypervisor - in order to guarantee the persistence of writes to the vNVDIMM - backend, then use the <code>pmem</code> element in order to - utilize the feature. - Since 5.0.0 - - </dd> - </dl> - </dd> - - <dt><code>target</code></dt> - <dd> - - The mandatory <code>target</code> element configures the placement and - sizing of the added memory from the perspective of the guest. - - - The mandatory <code>size</code> subelement configures the size of the - added memory as a scaled integer. - - - The <code>node</code> subelement configures the guest NUMA node to - attach the memory to. The element shall be used only if the guest has - NUMA nodes configured. - - - The following optional elements may be used: - - - <dl> - <dt><code>label</code></dt> - <dd> - - For NVDIMM type devices one can use <code>label</code> and its - subelement <code>size</code> to configure the size of - namespaces label storage within the NVDIMM module. The - <code>size</code> element has usual meaning described - <a href="#elementsMemoryAllocation">here</a>. - <code>label</code> is mandatory for pSeries guests and optional - for all other architectures. - For QEMU domains the following restrictions apply: - - <ol> - <li>the minimum label size is 128KiB,</li> - <li>the remaining size (total-size - label-size), also called guest - area, will be aligned to 4KiB as default. For pSeries guests, the - guest area will be aligned down to 256MiB, and the minimum size - of the guest area must be at least 256MiB.</li> - </ol> - </dd> - - <dt><code>readonly</code></dt> - <dd> - - The <code>readonly</code> element is used to mark the vNVDIMM - as read-only. Only the real NVDIMM device backend can guarantee - the guest write persistence, so other backend types should use - the <code>readonly</code> element. - Since 5.0.0 - - </dd> - </dl> - </dd> - </dl> - - <h4><a id="elementsIommu">IOMMU devices</a></h4> - - - The <code>iommu</code> element can be used to add an IOMMU device. - Since 2.1.0 - - - - Example: - -<pre> -... -<devices> - <iommu model='intel'> - <driver intremap='on'/> - </iommu> -</devices> -... -</pre> - <dl> - <dt><code>model</code></dt> - <dd> - - Supported values are <code>intel</code> (for Q35 guests) and, - since 5.5.0, <code>smmuv3</code> (for - ARM virt guests). - - </dd> - <dt><code>driver</code></dt> - <dd> - - The <code>driver</code> subelement can be used to configure - additional options, some of which might only be available for - certain IOMMU models: - - <dl> - <dt><code>intremap</code></dt> - <dd> - - The <code>intremap</code> attribute with possible values - <code>on</code> and <code>off</code> can be used to - turn on interrupt remapping, a part of the VT-d functionality. - Currently this requires split I/O APIC - (<code><ioapic driver='qemu'/></code>). - Since 3.4.0 (QEMU/KVM only) - - </dd> - <dt><code>caching_mode</code></dt> - <dd> - - The <code>caching_mode</code> attribute with possible values - <code>on</code> and <code>off</code> can be used to - turn on the VT-d caching mode (useful for assigned devices). - Since 3.4.0 (QEMU/KVM only) - - </dd> - <dt><code>eim</code></dt> - <dd> - - The <code>eim</code> attribute (with possible values - <code>on</code> and <code>off</code>) can be used to - configure Extended Interrupt Mode. A q35 domain with - split I/O APIC (as described in - <a href="#elementsFeatures">hypervisor features</a>), - and both interrupt remapping and EIM turned on for - the IOMMU, will be able to use more than 255 vCPUs. - Since 3.4.0 (QEMU/KVM only) - - </dd> - <dt><code>iotlb</code></dt> - <dd> - - The <code>iotlb</code> attribute with possible values - <code>on</code> and <code>off</code> can be used to - turn on the IOTLB used to cache address translation - requests from devices. - Since 3.5.0 (QEMU/KVM only) - - </dd> - <dt><code>aw_bits</code></dt> - <dd> - - The <code>aw_bits</code> attribute can be used to set - the address width to allow mapping larger iova addresses - in the guest. - Since 6.5.0 (QEMU/KVM only) - - </dd> - </dl> - </dd> - </dl> - - <h3><a id="vsock">Vsock</a></h3> - - A vsock host/guest interface. The <code>model</code> attribute - defaults to <code>virtio</code>. Since 5.2.0 - <code>model</code> can also be 'virtio-transitional' and - 'virtio-non-transitional', see - <a href="#elementsVirtioTransitional">Virtio transitional devices</a> - for more details. - The optional attribute <code>address</code> of the <code>cid</code> - element specifies the CID assigned to the guest. If the attribute - <code>auto</code> is set to <code>yes</code>, libvirt - will assign a free CID automatically on domain startup. - Since 4.4.0 - -<pre> -... -<devices> - <vsock model='virtio'> - <cid auto='no' address='3'/> - </vsock> -</devices> -...</pre> - - - <h3><a id="seclabel">Security label</a></h3> - - - The <code>seclabel</code> element allows control over the - operation of the security drivers. There are three basic - modes of operation, 'dynamic' where libvirt automatically - generates a unique security label, 'static' where the - application/administrator chooses the labels, or 'none' - where confinement is disabled. With dynamic - label generation, libvirt will always automatically - relabel any resources associated with the virtual machine. - With static label assignment, by default, the administrator - or application must ensure labels are set correctly on any - resources, however, automatic relabeling can be enabled - if desired. 'dynamic' since 0.6.1, 'static' - since 0.6.2, and 'none' since 0.9.10. - - - - If more than one security driver is used by libvirt, multiple - <code>seclabel</code> tags can be used, one for each driver and - the security driver referenced by each tag can be defined using - the attribute <code>model</code> - - - - Valid input XML configurations for the top-level security label - are: - - - <pre> -<seclabel type='dynamic' model='selinux'/> - -<seclabel type='dynamic' model='selinux'> - <baselabel>system_u:system_r:my_svirt_t:s0</baselabel> -</seclabel> - -<seclabel type='static' model='selinux' relabel='no'> - <label>system_u:system_r:svirt_t:s0:c392,c662</label> -</seclabel> - -<seclabel type='static' model='selinux' relabel='yes'> - <label>system_u:system_r:svirt_t:s0:c392,c662</label> -</seclabel> - -<seclabel type='none'/> - </pre> - - - If no 'type' attribute is provided in the input XML, then - the security driver default setting will be used, which - may be either 'none' or 'dynamic'. If a 'baselabel' is set - but no 'type' is set, then the type is presumed to be 'dynamic' - - - - When viewing the XML for a running guest with automatic - resource relabeling active, an additional XML element, - <code>imagelabel</code>, will be included. This is an - output-only element, so will be ignored in user supplied - XML documents - - <dl> - <dt><code>type</code></dt> - <dd>Either <code>static</code>, <code>dynamic</code> or <code>none</code> - to determine whether libvirt automatically generates a unique security - label or not. - </dd> - <dt><code>model</code></dt> - <dd>A valid security model name, matching the currently - activated security model. Model <code>dac</code> is not available - when guest is run by unprivileged user. - </dd> - <dt><code>relabel</code></dt> - <dd>Either <code>yes</code> or <code>no</code>. This must always - be <code>yes</code> if dynamic label assignment is used. With - static label assignment it will default to <code>no</code>. - </dd> - <dt><code>label</code></dt> - <dd>If static labelling is used, this must specify the full - security label to assign to the virtual domain. The format - of the content depends on the security driver in use: - <ul> - <li>SELinux: a SELinux context.</li> - <li>AppArmor: an AppArmor profile.</li> - <li> - DAC: owner and group separated by colon. They can be - defined both as user/group names or uid/gid. The driver will first - try to parse these values as names, but a leading plus sign can - used to force the driver to parse them as uid or gid. - </li> - </ul> - </dd> - <dt><code>baselabel</code></dt> - <dd>If dynamic labelling is used, this can optionally be - used to specify the base security label that will be used to generate - the actual label. The format of the content depends on the security - driver in use. - - The SELinux driver uses only the <code>type</code> field of the - baselabel in the generated label. Other fields are inherited from - the parent process when using SELinux baselabels. - - (The example above demonstrates the use of <code>my_svirt_t</code> - as the value for the <code>type</code> field.) - </dd> - <dt><code>imagelabel</code></dt> - <dd>This is an output only element, which shows the - security label used on resources associated with the virtual domain. - The format of the content depends on the security driver in use - </dd> - </dl> - - When relabeling is in effect, it is also possible to fine-tune - the labeling done for specific source file names, by either - disabling the labeling (useful if the file lives on NFS or other - file system that lacks security labeling) or requesting an - alternate label (useful when a management application creates a - special label to allow sharing of some, but not all, resources - between domains), since 0.9.9. When - a <code>seclabel</code> element is attached to a specific path - rather than the top-level domain assignment, only the - attribute <code>relabel</code> or the - sub-element <code>label</code> are supported. Additionally, - since 1.1.2, an output-only - element <code>labelskip</code> will be present for active - domains on disks where labeling was skipped due to the image - being on a file system that lacks security labeling. - - - <h3><a id="keywrap">Key Wrap</a></h3> - - The content of the optional <code>keywrap</code> element specifies - whether the guest will be allowed to perform the S390 cryptographic key - management operations. A clear key can be protected by encrypting it - under a unique wrapping key that is generated for each guest VM running - on the host. Two variations of wrapping keys are generated: one version - for encrypting protected keys using the DEA/TDEA algorithm, and another - version for keys encrypted using the AES algorithm. If a - <code>keywrap</code> element is not included, the guest will be granted - access to both AES and DEA/TDEA key wrapping by default. - - <pre> -<domain> - ... - <keywrap> - <cipher name='aes' state='off'/> - </keywrap> - ... -</domain> -</pre> - - At least one <code>cipher</code> element must be nested within the - <code>keywrap</code> element. - - <dl> - <dt><code>cipher</code></dt> - <dd>The <code>name</code> attribute identifies the algorithm - for encrypting a protected key. The values supported for this attribute - are <code>aes</code> for encryption under the AES wrapping key, or - <code>dea</code> for encryption under the DEA/TDEA wrapping key. The - <code>state</code> attribute indicates whether the cryptographic key - management operations should be turned on for the specified encryption - algorithm. The value can be set to <code>on</code> or <code>off</code>. - </dd> - </dl> - - Note: DEA/TDEA is synonymous with DES/TDES. - - <h3><a id="launchSecurity">Launch Security</a></h3> - - - The contents of the <code><launchSecurity type='sev'></code> element - is used to provide the guest owners input used for creating an encrypted - VM using the AMD SEV feature (Secure Encrypted Virtualization). - - SEV is an extension to the AMD-V architecture which supports running - encrypted virtual machine (VMs) under the control of KVM. Encrypted - VMs have their pages (code and data) secured such that only the guest - itself has access to the unencrypted version. Each encrypted VM is - associated with a unique encryption key; if its data is accessed to a - different entity using a different key the encrypted guests data will - be incorrectly decrypted, leading to unintelligible data. - - For more information see various input parameters and its format see the - <a href="https://support.amd.com/TechDocs/55766_SEV-KM_API_Specification.pdf">SEV API spec</a> - Since 4.4.0 - - <pre> -<domain> - ... - <launchSecurity type='sev'> - <policy>0x0001</policy> - <cbitpos>47</cbitpos> - <reducedPhysBits>1</reducedPhysBits> - <dhCert>RBBBSDDD=FDDCCCDDDG</dhCert> - <session>AAACCCDD=FFFCCCDSDS</session> - </launchSecurity> - ... -</domain> -</pre> - - <dl> - <dt><code>cbitpos</code></dt> - <dd>The required <code>cbitpos</code> element provides the C-bit (aka encryption bit) - location in guest page table entry. The value of <code>cbitpos</code> is - hypervisor dependent and can be obtained through the <code>sev</code> element - from the domain capabilities. - </dd> - <dt><code>reducedPhysBits</code></dt> - <dd>The required <code>reducedPhysBits</code> element provides the physical - address bit reducation. Similar to <code>cbitpos</code> the value of <code> - reduced-phys-bit</code> is hypervisor dependent and can be obtained - through the <code>sev</code> element from the domain capabilities. - </dd> - <dt><code>policy</code></dt> - <dd>The required <code>policy</code> element provides the guest policy - which must be maintained by the SEV firmware. This policy is enforced by - the firmware and restricts what configuration and operational commands - can be performed on this guest by the hypervisor. The guest policy - provided during guest launch is bound to the guest and cannot be changed - throughout the lifetime of the guest. The policy is also transmitted - during snapshot and migration flows and enforced on the destination platform. - - The guest policy is a 4 unsigned byte with the fields shown in Table: - - <table class="top_table"> - <tr> - <th> Bit(s) </th> - <th> Description </th> - </tr> - <tr> - <td> 0 </td> - <td> Debugging of the guest is disallowed when set </td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td> 1 </td> - <td> Sharing keys with other guests is disallowed when set </td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td> 2 </td> - <td> SEV-ES is required when set</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td> 3 </td> - <td> Sending the guest to another platform is disallowed when set</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td> 4 </td> - <td> The guest must not be transmitted to another platform that is - not in the domain when set. </td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td> 5 </td> - <td> The guest must not be transmitted to another platform that is - not SEV capable when set. </td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td> 6:15 </td> - <td> reserved </td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td> 16:32 </td> - <td> The guest must not be transmitted to another platform with a - lower firmware version. </td> - </tr> - </table> - - </dd> - <dt><code>dhCert</code></dt> - <dd>The optional <code>dhCert</code> element provides the guest owners - base64 encoded Diffie-Hellman (DH) key. The key is used to negotiate a - master secret key between the SEV firmware and guest owner. This master - secret key is then used to establish a trusted channel between SEV - firmware and guest owner. - </dd> - <dt><code>session</code></dt> - <dd>The optional <code>session</code> element provides the guest owners - base64 encoded session blob defined in the SEV API spec. - - See SEV spec LAUNCH_START section for the session blob format. - </dd> - </dl> - - <h2><a id="examples">Example configs</a></h2> - - - Example configurations for each driver are provide on the - driver specific pages listed below - - - <ul> - <li><a href="drvxen.html#xmlconfig">Xen examples</a></li> - <li><a href="drvqemu.html#xmlconfig">QEMU/KVM examples</a></li> - </ul> - </body> -</html> diff --git a/docs/formatdomain.rst b/docs/formatdomain.rst new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..a9c4f46843 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/formatdomain.rst @@ -0,0 +1,7453 @@ +.. role:: since +.. role:: anchor(raw) + :format: html + +================= +Domain XML format +================= + +.. contents:: + +This section describes the XML format used to represent domains, there are +variations on the format based on the kind of domains run and the options used +to launch them. For hypervisor specific details consult the `driver +docs <drivers.html>`__ + +:anchor:`<a id="elements"/>` + +Element and attribute overview +============================== + +The root element required for all virtual machines is named ``domain``. It has +two attributes, the ``type`` specifies the hypervisor used for running the +domain. The allowed values are driver specific, but include "xen", "kvm", "qemu" +and "lxc". The second attribute is ``id`` which is a unique integer identifier +for the running guest machine. Inactive machines have no id value. + +:anchor:`<a id="elementsMetadata"/>` + +General metadata +---------------- + +:: + + <domain type='kvm' id='1'> + <name>MyGuest</name> + <uuid>4dea22b3-1d52-d8f3-2516-782e98ab3fa0</uuid> + <genid>43dc0cf8-809b-4adb-9bea-a9abb5f3d90e</genid> + <title>A short description - title - of the domain</title> + <description>Some human readable description</description> + <metadata> + <app1:foo xmlns:app1="http://app1.org/app1/">..</app1:foo> + <app2:bar xmlns:app2="http://app1.org/app2/">..</app2:bar> + </metadata> + ... + +``name`` + The content of the ``name`` element provides a short name for the virtual + machine. This name should consist only of alpha-numeric characters and is + required to be unique within the scope of a single host. It is often used to + form the filename for storing the persistent configuration file. + :since:`Since 0.0.1` +``uuid`` + The content of the ``uuid`` element provides a globally unique identifier for + the virtual machine. The format must be RFC 4122 compliant, eg + ``3e3fce45-4f53-4fa7-bb32-11f34168b82b``. If omitted when defining/creating a + new machine, a random UUID is generated. It is also possible to provide the + UUID via a `sysinfo <#elementsSysinfo>`__ specification. :since:`Since 0.0.1, + sysinfo since 0.8.7` +``genid`` + :since:`Since 4.4.0` , the ``genid`` element can be used to add a Virtual + Machine Generation ID which exposes a 128-bit, cryptographically random, + integer value identifier, referred to as a Globally Unique Identifier (GUID) + using the same format as the ``uuid``. The value is used to help notify the + guest operating system when the virtual machine is re-executing something + that has already executed before, such as: + + - VM starts executing a snapshot + - VM is recovered from backup + - VM is failover in a disaster recovery environment + - VM is imported, copied, or cloned + + The guest operating system notices the change and is then able to react as + appropriate by marking its copies of distributed databases as dirty, + re-initializing its random number generator, etc. + + The libvirt XML parser will accept both a provided GUID value or just + <genid/> in which case a GUID will be generated and saved in the XML. For the + transitions such as above, libvirt will change the GUID before re-executing. + +``title`` + The optional element ``title`` provides space for a short description of the + domain. The title should not contain any newlines. :since:`Since 0.9.10` . +``description`` + The content of the ``description`` element provides a human readable + description of the virtual machine. This data is not used by libvirt in any + way, it can contain any information the user wants. :since:`Since 0.7.2` +``metadata`` + The ``metadata`` node can be used by applications to store custom metadata in + the form of XML nodes/trees. Applications must use custom namespaces on their + XML nodes/trees, with only one top-level element per namespace (if the + application needs structure, they should have sub-elements to their namespace + element). :since:`Since 0.9.10` + +:anchor:`<a id="elementsOS"/>` + +Operating system booting +------------------------ + +There are a number of different ways to boot virtual machines each with their +own pros and cons. + +:anchor:`<a id="elementsOSBIOS"/>` + +BIOS bootloader +~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ + +Booting via the BIOS is available for hypervisors supporting full +virtualization. In this case the BIOS has a boot order priority (floppy, +harddisk, cdrom, network) determining where to obtain/find the boot image. + +:: + + ... + <os firmware='efi'> + <type>hvm</type> + <loader readonly='yes' secure='no' type='rom'>/usr/lib/xen/boot/hvmloader</loader> + <nvram template='/usr/share/OVMF/OVMF_VARS.fd'>/var/lib/libvirt/nvram/guest_VARS.fd</nvram> + <boot dev='hd'/> + <boot dev='cdrom'/> + <bootmenu enable='yes' timeout='3000'/> + <smbios mode='sysinfo'/> + <bios useserial='yes' rebootTimeout='0'/> + </os> + ... + +``firmware`` + The ``firmware`` attribute allows management applications to automatically + fill ``<loader/>`` and ``<nvram/>`` elements and possibly enable some + features required by selected firmware. Accepted values are ``bios`` and + ``efi``. + The selection process scans for files describing installed firmware images in + specified location and uses the most specific one which fulfils domain + requirements. The locations in order of preference (from generic to most + specific one) are: + + - ``/usr/share/qemu/firmware`` + - ``/etc/qemu/firmware`` + - ``$XDG_CONFIG_HOME/qemu/firmware`` + + For more information refer to firmware metadata specification as described in + ``docs/interop/firmware.json`` in QEMU repository. Regular users do not need + to bother. :since:`Since 5.2.0 (QEMU and KVM only)` + For VMware guests, this is set to ``efi`` when the guest uses UEFI, and it is + not set when using BIOS. :since:`Since 5.3.0 (VMware ESX and + Workstation/Player)` +``type`` + The content of the ``type`` element specifies the type of operating system to + be booted in the virtual machine. ``hvm`` indicates that the OS is one + designed to run on bare metal, so requires full virtualization. ``linux`` + (badly named!) refers to an OS that supports the Xen 3 hypervisor guest ABI. + There are also two optional attributes, ``arch`` specifying the CPU + architecture to virtualization, and ``machine`` referring to the machine + type. The `Capabilities XML <formatcaps.html>`__ provides details on allowed + values for these. If ``arch`` is omitted then for most hypervisor drivers, + the host native arch will be chosen. For the ``test``, ``ESX`` and ``VMWare`` + hypervisor drivers, however, the ``i686`` arch will always be chosen even on + an ``x86_64`` host. :since:`Since 0.0.1` +``loader`` + The optional ``loader`` tag refers to a firmware blob, which is specified by + absolute path, used to assist the domain creation process. It is used by Xen + fully virtualized domains as well as setting the QEMU BIOS file path for + QEMU/KVM domains. :since:`Xen since 0.1.0, QEMU/KVM since 0.9.12` Then, + :since:`since 1.2.8` it's possible for the element to have two optional + attributes: ``readonly`` (accepted values are ``yes`` and ``no``) to reflect + the fact that the image should be writable or read-only. The second attribute + ``type`` accepts values ``rom`` and ``pflash``. It tells the hypervisor where + in the guest memory the file should be mapped. For instance, if the loader + path points to an UEFI image, ``type`` should be ``pflash``. Moreover, some + firmwares may implement the Secure boot feature. Attribute ``secure`` can be + used then to control it. :since:`Since 2.1.0` +``nvram`` + Some UEFI firmwares may want to use a non-volatile memory to store some + variables. In the host, this is represented as a file and the absolute path + to the file is stored in this element. Moreover, when the domain is started + up libvirt copies so called master NVRAM store file defined in ``qemu.conf``. + If needed, the ``template`` attribute can be used to per domain override map + of master NVRAM stores from the config file. Note, that for transient domains + if the NVRAM file has been created by libvirt it is left behind and it is + management application's responsibility to save and remove file (if needed to + be persistent). :since:`Since 1.2.8` +``boot`` + The ``dev`` attribute takes one of the values "fd", "hd", "cdrom" or + "network" and is used to specify the next boot device to consider. The + ``boot`` element can be repeated multiple times to setup a priority list of + boot devices to try in turn. Multiple devices of the same type are sorted + according to their targets while preserving the order of buses. After + defining the domain, its XML configuration returned by libvirt (through + virDomainGetXMLDesc) lists devices in the sorted order. Once sorted, the + first device is marked as bootable. Thus, e.g., a domain configured to boot + from "hd" with vdb, hda, vda, and hdc disks assigned to it will boot from vda + (the sorted list is vda, vdb, hda, hdc). Similar domain with hdc, vda, vdb, + and hda disks will boot from hda (sorted disks are: hda, hdc, vda, vdb). It + can be tricky to configure in the desired way, which is why per-device boot + elements (see `disks <#elementsDisks>`__, `network + interfaces <#elementsNICS>`__, and `USB and PCI devices <#elementsHostDev>`__ + sections below) were introduced and they are the preferred way providing full + control over booting order. The ``boot`` element and per-device boot elements + are mutually exclusive. :since:`Since 0.1.3, per-device boot since 0.8.8` +``smbios`` + How to populate SMBIOS information visible in the guest. The ``mode`` + attribute must be specified, and is either "emulate" (let the hypervisor + generate all values), "host" (copy all of Block 0 and Block 1, except for the + UUID, from the host's SMBIOS values; the + `virConnectGetSysinfo <html/libvirt-libvirt-host.html#virConnectGetSysinfo>`__ + call can be used to see what values are copied), or "sysinfo" (use the values + in the `sysinfo <#elementsSysinfo>`__ element). If not specified, the + hypervisor default is used. :since:` Since 0.8.7` + +Up till here the BIOS/UEFI configuration knobs are generic enough to be +implemented by majority (if not all) firmwares out there. However, from now on +not every single setting makes sense to all firmwares. For instance, +``rebootTimeout`` doesn't make sense for UEFI, ``useserial`` might not be usable +with a BIOS firmware that doesn't produce any output onto serial line, etc. +Moreover, firmwares don't usually export their capabilities for libvirt (or +users) to check. And the set of their capabilities can change with every new +release. Hence users are advised to try the settings they use before relying on +them in production. + +``bootmenu`` + Whether or not to enable an interactive boot menu prompt on guest startup. + The ``enable`` attribute can be either "yes" or "no". If not specified, the + hypervisor default is used. :since:` Since 0.8.3` Additional attribute + ``timeout`` takes the number of milliseconds the boot menu should wait until + it times out. Allowed values are numbers in range [0, 65535] inclusive and it + is ignored unless ``enable`` is set to "yes". :since:`Since 1.2.8` +``bios`` + This element has attribute ``useserial`` with possible values ``yes`` or + ``no``. It enables or disables Serial Graphics Adapter which allows users to + see BIOS messages on a serial port. Therefore, one needs to have `serial + port <#elementCharSerial>`__ defined. :since:`Since 0.9.4` . :since:`Since + 0.10.2 (QEMU only)` there is another attribute, ``rebootTimeout`` that + controls whether and after how long the guest should start booting again in + case the boot fails (according to BIOS). The value is in milliseconds with + maximum of ``65535`` and special value ``-1`` disables the reboot. + +:anchor:`<a id="elementsOSBootloader"/>` + +Host bootloader +~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ + +Hypervisors employing paravirtualization do not usually emulate a BIOS, and +instead the host is responsible to kicking off the operating system boot. This +may use a pseudo-bootloader in the host to provide an interface to choose a +kernel for the guest. An example is ``pygrub`` with Xen. The Bhyve hypervisor +also uses a host bootloader, either ``bhyveload`` or ``grub-bhyve``. + +:: + + ... + <bootloader>/usr/bin/pygrub</bootloader> + <bootloader_args>--append single</bootloader_args> + ... + +``bootloader`` + The content of the ``bootloader`` element provides a fully qualified path to + the bootloader executable in the host OS. This bootloader will be run to + choose which kernel to boot. The required output of the bootloader is + dependent on the hypervisor in use. :since:`Since 0.1.0` +``bootloader_args`` + The optional ``bootloader_args`` element allows command line arguments to be + passed to the bootloader. :since:`Since 0.2.3` + +:anchor:`<a id="elementsOSKernel"/>` + +Direct kernel boot +~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ + +When installing a new guest OS it is often useful to boot directly from a kernel +and initrd stored in the host OS, allowing command line arguments to be passed +directly to the installer. This capability is usually available for both para +and full virtualized guests. + +:: + + ... + <os> + <type>hvm</type> + <loader>/usr/lib/xen/boot/hvmloader</loader> + <kernel>/root/f8-i386-vmlinuz</kernel> + <initrd>/root/f8-i386-initrd</initrd> + <cmdline>console=ttyS0 ks=http://example.com/f8-i386/os/</cmdline> + <dtb>/root/ppc.dtb</dtb> + <acpi> + <table type='slic'>/path/to/slic.dat</table> + </acpi> + </os> + ... + +``type`` + This element has the same semantics as described earlier in the `BIOS boot + section <#elementsOSBIOS>`__ +``loader`` + This element has the same semantics as described earlier in the `BIOS boot + section <#elementsOSBIOS>`__ +``kernel`` + The contents of this element specify the fully-qualified path to the kernel + image in the host OS. +``initrd`` + The contents of this element specify the fully-qualified path to the + (optional) ramdisk image in the host OS. +``cmdline`` + The contents of this element specify arguments to be passed to the kernel (or + installer) at boot time. This is often used to specify an alternate primary + console (eg serial port), or the installation media source / kickstart file +``dtb`` + The contents of this element specify the fully-qualified path to the + (optional) device tree binary (dtb) image in the host OS. :since:`Since + 1.0.4` +``acpi`` + The ``table`` element contains a fully-qualified path to the ACPI table. The + ``type`` attribute contains the ACPI table type (currently only ``slic`` is + supported) :since:`Since 1.3.5 (QEMU)` :since:`Since 5.9.0 (Xen)` + +:anchor:`<a id="elementsOSContainer"/>` + +Container boot +~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ + +When booting a domain using container based virtualization, instead of a kernel +/ boot image, a path to the init binary is required, using the ``init`` element. +By default this will be launched with no arguments. To specify the initial argv, +use the ``initarg`` element, repeated as many time as is required. The +``cmdline`` element, if set will be used to provide an equivalent to +``/proc/cmdline`` but will not affect init argv. + +To set environment variables, use the ``initenv`` element, one for each +variable. + +To set a custom work directory for the init, use the ``initdir`` element. + +To run the init command as a given user or group, use the ``inituser`` or +``initgroup`` elements respectively. Both elements can be provided either a user +(resp. group) id or a name. Prefixing the user or group id with a ``+`` will +force it to be considered like a numeric value. Without this, it will be first +tried as a user or group name. + +:: + + <os> + <type arch='x86_64'>exe</type> + <init>/bin/systemd</init> + <initarg>--unit</initarg> + <initarg>emergency.service</initarg> + <initenv name='MYENV'>some value</initenv> + <initdir>/my/custom/cwd</initdir> + <inituser>tester</inituser> + <initgroup>1000</initgroup> + </os> + +If you want to enable user namespace, set the ``idmap`` element. The ``uid`` and +``gid`` elements have three attributes: + +``start`` + First user ID in container. It must be '0'. +``target`` + The first user ID in container will be mapped to this target user ID in host. +``count`` + How many users in container are allowed to map to host's user. + +:: + + <idmap> + <uid start='0' target='1000' count='10'/> + <gid start='0' target='1000' count='10'/> + </idmap> + +:anchor:`<a id="elementsSysinfo"/>` + +SMBIOS System Information +------------------------- + +Some hypervisors allow control over what system information is presented to the +guest (for example, SMBIOS fields can be populated by a hypervisor and inspected +via the ``dmidecode`` command in the guest). The optional ``sysinfo`` element +covers all such categories of information. :since:`Since 0.8.7` + +:: + + ... + <os> + <smbios mode='sysinfo'/> + ... + </os> + <sysinfo type='smbios'> + <bios> + <entry name='vendor'>LENOVO</entry> + </bios> + <system> + <entry name='manufacturer'>Fedora</entry> + <entry name='product'>Virt-Manager</entry> + <entry name='version'>0.9.4</entry> + </system> + <baseBoard> + <entry name='manufacturer'>LENOVO</entry> + <entry name='product'>20BE0061MC</entry> + <entry name='version'>0B98401 Pro</entry> + <entry name='serial'>W1KS427111E</entry> + </baseBoard> + <chassis> + <entry name='manufacturer'>Dell Inc.</entry> + <entry name='version'>2.12</entry> + <entry name='serial'>65X0XF2</entry> + <entry name='asset'>40000101</entry> + <entry name='sku'>Type3Sku1</entry> + </chassis> + <oemStrings> + <entry>myappname:some arbitrary data</entry> + <entry>otherappname:more arbitrary data</entry> + </oemStrings> + </sysinfo> + <sysinfo type='fwcfg'> + <entry name='opt/com.example/name'>example value</entry> + <entry name='opt/com.coreos/config' file='/tmp/provision.ign'/> + </sysinfo> + ... + +The ``sysinfo`` element has a mandatory attribute ``type`` that determine the +layout of sub-elements, with supported values of: + +``smbios`` + Sub-elements call out specific SMBIOS values, which will affect the guest if + used in conjunction with the ``smbios`` sub-element of the + `os <#elementsOS>`__ element. Each sub-element of ``sysinfo`` names a SMBIOS + block, and within those elements can be a list of ``entry`` elements that + describe a field within the block. The following blocks and entries are + recognized: + + ``bios`` + This is block 0 of SMBIOS, with entry names drawn from: + + ``vendor`` + BIOS Vendor's Name + ``version`` + BIOS Version + ``date`` + BIOS release date. If supplied, is in either mm/dd/yy or mm/dd/yyyy + format. If the year portion of the string is two digits, the year is + assumed to be 19yy. + ``release`` + System BIOS Major and Minor release number values concatenated together + as one string separated by a period, for example, 10.22. + + ``system`` + This is block 1 of SMBIOS, with entry names drawn from: + + ``manufacturer`` + Manufacturer of BIOS + ``product`` + Product Name + ``version`` + Version of the product + ``serial`` + Serial number + ``uuid`` + Universal Unique ID number. If this entry is provided alongside a + top-level `uuid <#elementsMetadata>`__ element, then the two values + must match. + ``sku`` + SKU number to identify a particular configuration. + ``family`` + Identify the family a particular computer belongs to. + + ``baseBoard`` + This is block 2 of SMBIOS. This element can be repeated multiple times to + describe all the base boards; however, not all hypervisors necessarily + support the repetition. The element can have the following children: + + ``manufacturer`` + Manufacturer of BIOS + ``product`` + Product Name + ``version`` + Version of the product + ``serial`` + Serial number + ``asset`` + Asset tag + ``location`` + Location in chassis + + NB: Incorrectly supplied entries for the ``bios``, ``system`` or + ``baseBoard`` blocks will be ignored without error. Other than ``uuid`` + validation and ``date`` format checking, all values are passed as strings + to the hypervisor driver. + ``chassis`` + :since:`Since 4.1.0,` this is block 3 of SMBIOS, with entry names drawn + from: + + ``manufacturer`` + Manufacturer of Chassis + ``version`` + Version of the Chassis + ``serial`` + Serial number + ``asset`` + Asset tag + ``sku`` + SKU number + + ``oemStrings`` + This is block 11 of SMBIOS. This element should appear once and can have + multiple ``entry`` child elements, each providing arbitrary string data. + There are no restrictions on what data can be provided in the entries, + however, if the data is intended to be consumed by an application in the + guest, it is recommended to use the application name as a prefix in the + string. ( :since:`Since 4.1.0` ) + +``fwcfg`` + Some hypervisors provide unified way to tweak how firmware configures itself, + or may contain tables to be installed for the guest OS, for instance boot + order, ACPI, SMBIOS, etc. It even allows users to define their own config + blobs. In case of QEMU, these then appear under domain's sysfs, under + ``/sys/firmware/qemu_fw_cfg``. Note, that these values apply regardless the + <smbios/> mode under <os/>. :since:`Since 6.5.0` + + :: + + <smbios type='fwcfg'> + <entry name='opt/com.example/name'>example value</entry> + <entry name='opt/com.coreos/config' file='/tmp/provision.ign'/> + </smbios> + + The ``smbios`` element can have multiple ``entry`` child elements. Each + element then has mandatory ``name`` attribute, which defines the name of the + blob and must begin with ``"opt/"`` and to avoid clashing with other names is + advised to be in form ``"opt/$RFQDN/$name"`` where ``$RFQDN`` is a reverse + fully qualified domain name you control. Then, the element can either contain + the value (to set the blob value directly), or ``file`` attribute (to set the + blob value from the file). + +:anchor:`<a id="elementsCPUAllocation"/>` + +CPU Allocation +-------------- + +:: + + <domain> + ... + <vcpu placement='static' cpuset="1-4,^3,6" current="1">2</vcpu> + <vcpus> + <vcpu id='0' enabled='yes' hotpluggable='no' order='1'/> + <vcpu id='1' enabled='no' hotpluggable='yes'/> + </vcpus> + ... + </domain> + +``vcpu`` + The content of this element defines the maximum number of virtual CPUs + allocated for the guest OS, which must be between 1 and the maximum supported + by the hypervisor. + + ``cpuset`` + The optional attribute ``cpuset`` is a comma-separated list of physical + CPU numbers that domain process and virtual CPUs can be pinned to by + default. (NB: The pinning policy of domain process and virtual CPUs can be + specified separately by ``cputune``. If the attribute ``emulatorpin`` of + ``cputune`` is specified, the ``cpuset`` specified by ``vcpu`` here will + be ignored. Similarly, for virtual CPUs which have the ``vcpupin`` + specified, the ``cpuset`` specified by ``cpuset`` here will be ignored. + For virtual CPUs which don't have ``vcpupin`` specified, each will be + pinned to the physical CPUs specified by ``cpuset`` here). Each element in + that list is either a single CPU number, a range of CPU numbers, or a + caret followed by a CPU number to be excluded from a previous range. + :since:`Since 0.4.4` + ``current`` + The optional attribute ``current`` can be used to specify whether fewer + than the maximum number of virtual CPUs should be enabled. :since:`Since + 0.8.5` + ``placement`` + The optional attribute ``placement`` can be used to indicate the CPU + placement mode for domain process. The value can be either "static" or + "auto", but defaults to ``placement`` of ``numatune`` or "static" if + ``cpuset`` is specified. Using "auto" indicates the domain process will be + pinned to the advisory nodeset from querying numad and the value of + attribute ``cpuset`` will be ignored if it's specified. If both ``cpuset`` + and ``placement`` are not specified or if ``placement`` is "static", but + no ``cpuset`` is specified, the domain process will be pinned to all the + available physical CPUs. :since:`Since 0.9.11 (QEMU and KVM only)` + +``vcpus`` + The vcpus element allows to control state of individual vCPUs. The ``id`` + attribute specifies the vCPU id as used by libvirt in other places such as + vCPU pinning, scheduler information and NUMA assignment. Note that the vCPU + ID as seen in the guest may differ from libvirt ID in certain cases. Valid + IDs are from 0 to the maximum vCPU count as set by the ``vcpu`` element minus + 1. The ``enabled`` attribute allows to control the state of the vCPU. Valid + values are ``yes`` and ``no``. ``hotpluggable`` controls whether given vCPU + can be hotplugged and hotunplugged in cases when the CPU is enabled at boot. + Note that all disabled vCPUs must be hotpluggable. Valid values are ``yes`` + and ``no``. ``order`` allows to specify the order to add the online vCPUs. + For hypervisors/platforms that require to insert multiple vCPUs at once the + order may be duplicated across all vCPUs that need to be enabled at once. + Specifying order is not necessary, vCPUs are then added in an arbitrary + order. If order info is used, it must be used for all online vCPUs. + Hypervisors may clear or update ordering information during certain + operations to assure valid configuration. Note that hypervisors may create + hotpluggable vCPUs differently from boot vCPUs thus special initialization + may be necessary. Hypervisors may require that vCPUs enabled on boot which + are not hotpluggable are clustered at the beginning starting with ID 0. It + may be also required that vCPU 0 is always present and non-hotpluggable. Note + that providing state for individual CPUs may be necessary to enable support + of addressable vCPU hotplug and this feature may not be supported by all + hypervisors. For QEMU the following conditions are required. vCPU 0 needs to + be enabled and non-hotpluggable. On PPC64 along with it vCPUs that are in the + same core need to be enabled as well. All non-hotpluggable CPUs present at + boot need to be grouped after vCPU 0. :since:`Since 2.2.0 (QEMU only)` + +:anchor:`<a id="elementsIOThreadsAllocation"/>` + +IOThreads Allocation +-------------------- + +IOThreads are dedicated event loop threads for supported disk devices to perform +block I/O requests in order to improve scalability especially on an SMP +host/guest with many LUNs. :since:`Since 1.2.8 (QEMU only)` + +:: + + <domain> + ... + <iothreads>4</iothreads> + ... + </domain> + +:: + + <domain> + ... + <iothreadids> + <iothread id="2"/> + <iothread id="4"/> + <iothread id="6"/> + <iothread id="8"/> + </iothreadids> + ... + </domain> + +``iothreads`` + The content of this optional element defines the number of IOThreads to be + assigned to the domain for use by supported target storage devices. There + should be only 1 or 2 IOThreads per host CPU. There may be more than one + supported device assigned to each IOThread. :since:`Since 1.2.8` +``iothreadids`` + The optional ``iothreadids`` element provides the capability to specifically + define the IOThread ID's for the domain. By default, IOThread ID's are + sequentially numbered starting from 1 through the number of ``iothreads`` + defined for the domain. The ``id`` attribute is used to define the IOThread + ID. The ``id`` attribute must be a positive integer greater than 0. If there + are less ``iothreadids`` defined than ``iothreads`` defined for the domain, + then libvirt will sequentially fill ``iothreadids`` starting at 1 avoiding + any predefined ``id``. If there are more ``iothreadids`` defined than + ``iothreads`` defined for the domain, then the ``iothreads`` value will be + adjusted accordingly. :since:`Since 1.2.15` + +:anchor:`<a id="elementsCPUTuning"/>` + +CPU Tuning +---------- + +:: + + <domain> + ... + <cputune> + <vcpupin vcpu="0" cpuset="1-4,^2"/> + <vcpupin vcpu="1" cpuset="0,1"/> + <vcpupin vcpu="2" cpuset="2,3"/> + <vcpupin vcpu="3" cpuset="0,4"/> + <emulatorpin cpuset="1-3"/> + <iothreadpin iothread="1" cpuset="5,6"/> + <iothreadpin iothread="2" cpuset="7,8"/> + <shares>2048</shares> + <period>1000000</period> + <quota>-1</quota> + <global_period>1000000</global_period> + <global_quota>-1</global_quota> + <emulator_period>1000000</emulator_period> + <emulator_quota>-1</emulator_quota> + <iothread_period>1000000</iothread_period> + <iothread_quota>-1</iothread_quota> + <vcpusched vcpus='0-4,^3' scheduler='fifo' priority='1'/> + <iothreadsched iothreads='2' scheduler='batch'/> + <cachetune vcpus='0-3'> + <cache id='0' level='3' type='both' size='3' unit='MiB'/> + <cache id='1' level='3' type='both' size='3' unit='MiB'/> + <monitor level='3' vcpus='1'/> + <monitor level='3' vcpus='0-3'/> + </cachetune> + <cachetune vcpus='4-5'> + <monitor level='3' vcpus='4'/> + <monitor level='3' vcpus='5'/> + </cachetune> + <memorytune vcpus='0-3'> + <node id='0' bandwidth='60'/> + </memorytune> + + </cputune> + ... + </domain> + +``cputune`` + The optional ``cputune`` element provides details regarding the CPU tunable + parameters for the domain. Note: for the qemu driver, the optional + ``vcpupin`` and ``emulatorpin`` pinning settings are honored after the + emulator is launched and NUMA constraints considered. This means that it is + expected that other physical CPUs of the host will be used during this time + by the domain, which will be reflected by the output of ``virsh cpu-stats``. + :since:`Since 0.9.0` +``vcpupin`` + The optional ``vcpupin`` element specifies which of host's physical CPUs the + domain vCPU will be pinned to. If this is omitted, and attribute ``cpuset`` + of element ``vcpu`` is not specified, the vCPU is pinned to all the physical + CPUs by default. It contains two required attributes, the attribute ``vcpu`` + specifies vCPU id, and the attribute ``cpuset`` is same as attribute + ``cpuset`` of element ``vcpu``. (NB: Only qemu driver support) :since:`Since + 0.9.0` +``emulatorpin`` + The optional ``emulatorpin`` element specifies which of host physical CPUs + the "emulator", a subset of a domain not including vCPU or iothreads will be + pinned to. If this is omitted, and attribute ``cpuset`` of element ``vcpu`` + is not specified, "emulator" is pinned to all the physical CPUs by default. + It contains one required attribute ``cpuset`` specifying which physical CPUs + to pin to. +``iothreadpin`` + The optional ``iothreadpin`` element specifies which of host physical CPUs + the IOThreads will be pinned to. If this is omitted and attribute ``cpuset`` + of element ``vcpu`` is not specified, the IOThreads are pinned to all the + physical CPUs by default. There are two required attributes, the attribute + ``iothread`` specifies the IOThread ID and the attribute ``cpuset`` + specifying which physical CPUs to pin to. See the ``iothreadids`` + `description <#elementsIOThreadsAllocation>`__ for valid ``iothread`` values. + :since:`Since 1.2.9` +``shares`` + The optional ``shares`` element specifies the proportional weighted share for + the domain. If this is omitted, it defaults to the OS provided defaults. NB, + There is no unit for the value, it's a relative measure based on the setting + of other VM, e.g. A VM configured with value 2048 will get twice as much CPU + time as a VM configured with value 1024. :since:`Since 0.9.0` +``period`` + The optional ``period`` element specifies the enforcement interval (unit: + microseconds). Within ``period``, each vCPU of the domain will not be allowed + to consume more than ``quota`` worth of runtime. The value should be in range + [1000, 1000000]. A period with value 0 means no value. :since:`Only QEMU + driver support since 0.9.4, LXC since 0.9.10` +``quota`` + The optional ``quota`` element specifies the maximum allowed bandwidth (unit: + microseconds). A domain with ``quota`` as any negative value indicates that + the domain has infinite bandwidth for vCPU threads, which means that it is + not bandwidth controlled. The value should be in range [1000, + 18446744073709551] or less than 0. A quota with value 0 means no value. You + can use this feature to ensure that all vCPUs run at the same speed. + :since:`Only QEMU driver support since 0.9.4, LXC since 0.9.10` +``global_period`` + The optional ``global_period`` element specifies the enforcement CFS + scheduler interval (unit: microseconds) for the whole domain in contrast with + ``period`` which enforces the interval per vCPU. The value should be in range + 1000, 1000000]. A ``global_period`` with value 0 means no value. :since:`Only + QEMU driver support since 1.3.3` +``global_quota`` + The optional ``global_quota`` element specifies the maximum allowed bandwidth + (unit: microseconds) within a period for the whole domain. A domain with + ``global_quota`` as any negative value indicates that the domain has infinite + bandwidth, which means that it is not bandwidth controlled. The value should + be in range [1000, 18446744073709551] or less than 0. A ``global_quota`` with + value 0 means no value. :since:`Only QEMU driver support since 1.3.3` +``emulator_period`` + The optional ``emulator_period`` element specifies the enforcement interval + (unit: microseconds). Within ``emulator_period``, emulator threads (those + excluding vCPUs) of the domain will not be allowed to consume more than + ``emulator_quota`` worth of runtime. The value should be in range [1000, + 1000000]. A period with value 0 means no value. :since:`Only QEMU driver + support since 0.10.0` +``emulator_quota`` + The optional ``emulator_quota`` element specifies the maximum allowed + bandwidth (unit: microseconds) for domain's emulator threads (those excluding + vCPUs). A domain with ``emulator_quota`` as any negative value indicates that + the domain has infinite bandwidth for emulator threads (those excluding + vCPUs), which means that it is not bandwidth controlled. The value should be + in range [1000, 18446744073709551] or less than 0. A quota with value 0 means + no value. :since:`Only QEMU driver support since 0.10.0` +``iothread_period`` + The optional ``iothread_period`` element specifies the enforcement interval + (unit: microseconds) for IOThreads. Within ``iothread_period``, each IOThread + of the domain will not be allowed to consume more than ``iothread_quota`` + worth of runtime. The value should be in range [1000, 1000000]. An + iothread_period with value 0 means no value. :since:`Only QEMU driver support + since 2.1.0` +``iothread_quota`` + The optional ``iothread_quota`` element specifies the maximum allowed + bandwidth (unit: microseconds) for IOThreads. A domain with + ``iothread_quota`` as any negative value indicates that the domain IOThreads + have infinite bandwidth, which means that it is not bandwidth controlled. The + value should be in range [1000, 18446744073709551] or less than 0. An + ``iothread_quota`` with value 0 means no value. You can use this feature to + ensure that all IOThreads run at the same speed. :since:`Only QEMU driver + support since 2.1.0` +``vcpusched``, ``iothreadsched`` and ``emulatorsched`` + The optional ``vcpusched``, ``iothreadsched`` and ``emulatorsched`` elements + specify the scheduler type (values ``batch``, ``idle``, ``fifo``, ``rr``) for + particular vCPU, IOThread and emulator threads respecively. For ``vcpusched`` + and ``iothreadsched`` the attributes ``vcpus`` and ``iothreads`` select which + vCPUs/IOThreads this setting applies to, leaving them out sets the default. + The element ``emulatorsched`` does not have that attribute. Valid ``vcpus`` + values start at 0 through one less than the number of vCPU's defined for the + domain. Valid ``iothreads`` values are described in the ``iothreadids`` + `description <#elementsIOThreadsAllocation>`__. If no ``iothreadids`` are + defined, then libvirt numbers IOThreads from 1 to the number of ``iothreads`` + available for the domain. For real-time schedulers (``fifo``, ``rr``), + priority must be specified as well (and is ignored for non-real-time ones). + The value range for the priority depends on the host kernel (usually 1-99). + :since:`Since 1.2.13` ``emulatorsched`` :since:`since 5.3.0` +``cachetune`` :since:`Since 4.1.0` + Optional ``cachetune`` element can control allocations for CPU caches using + the resctrl on the host. Whether or not is this supported can be gathered + from capabilities where some limitations like minimum size and required + granularity are reported as well. The required attribute ``vcpus`` specifies + to which vCPUs this allocation applies. A vCPU can only be member of one + ``cachetune`` element allocation. The vCPUs specified by cachetune can be + identical with those in memorytune, however they are not allowed to overlap. + Supported subelements are: + + ``cache`` + This optional element controls the allocation of CPU cache and has the + following attributes: + + ``level`` + Host cache level from which to allocate. + ``id`` + Host cache id from which to allocate. + ``type`` + Type of allocation. Can be ``code`` for code (instructions), ``data`` + for data or ``both`` for both code and data (unified). Currently the + allocation can be done only with the same type as the host supports, + meaning you cannot request ``both`` for host with CDP (code/data + prioritization) enabled. + ``size`` + The size of the region to allocate. The value by default is in bytes, + but the ``unit`` attribute can be used to scale the value. + ``unit`` (optional) + If specified it is the unit such as KiB, MiB, GiB, or TiB (described in + the ``memory`` element for `Memory + Allocation <#elementsMemoryAllocation>`__) in which ``size`` is + specified, defaults to bytes. + + ``monitor`` :since:`Since 4.10.0` + The optional element ``monitor`` creates the cache monitor(s) for current + cache allocation and has the following required attributes: + + ``level`` + Host cache level the monitor belongs to. + ``vcpus`` + vCPU list the monitor applies to. A monitor's vCPU list can only be the + member(s) of the vCPU list of the associated allocation. The default + monitor has the same vCPU list as the associated allocation. For + non-default monitors, overlapping vCPUs are not permitted. + +``memorytune`` :since:`Since 4.7.0` + Optional ``memorytune`` element can control allocations for memory bandwidth + using the resctrl on the host. Whether or not is this supported can be + gathered from capabilities where some limitations like minimum bandwidth and + required granularity are reported as well. The required attribute ``vcpus`` + specifies to which vCPUs this allocation applies. A vCPU can only be member + of one ``memorytune`` element allocation. The ``vcpus`` specified by + ``memorytune`` can be identical to those specified by ``cachetune``. However + they are not allowed to overlap each other. Supported subelements are: + + ``node`` + This element controls the allocation of CPU memory bandwidth and has the + following attributes: + + ``id`` + Host node id from which to allocate memory bandwidth. + ``bandwidth`` + The memory bandwidth to allocate from this node. The value by default + is in percentage. + +:anchor:`<a id="elementsMemoryAllocation"/>` + +Memory Allocation +----------------- + +:: + + <domain> + ... + <maxMemory slots='16' unit='KiB'>1524288</maxMemory> + <memory unit='KiB'>524288</memory> + <currentMemory unit='KiB'>524288</currentMemory> + ... + </domain> + +``memory`` + The maximum allocation of memory for the guest at boot time. The memory + allocation includes possible additional memory devices specified at start or + hotplugged later. The units for this value are determined by the optional + attribute ``unit``, which defaults to "KiB" (kibibytes, 2\ :sup:`10` or + blocks of 1024 bytes). Valid units are "b" or "bytes" for bytes, "KB" for + kilobytes (10:sup:`3` or 1,000 bytes), "k" or "KiB" for kibibytes (1024 + bytes), "MB" for megabytes (10:sup:`6` or 1,000,000 bytes), "M" or "MiB" for + mebibytes (2:sup:`20` or 1,048,576 bytes), "GB" for gigabytes (10:sup:`9` or + 1,000,000,000 bytes), "G" or "GiB" for gibibytes (2:sup:`30` or 1,073,741,824 + bytes), "TB" for terabytes (10:sup:`12` or 1,000,000,000,000 bytes), or "T" + or "TiB" for tebibytes (2:sup:`40` or 1,099,511,627,776 bytes). However, the + value will be rounded up to the nearest kibibyte by libvirt, and may be + further rounded to the granularity supported by the hypervisor. Some + hypervisors also enforce a minimum, such as 4000KiB. In case + `NUMA <#elementsCPU>`__ is configured for the guest the ``memory`` element + can be omitted. In the case of crash, optional attribute ``dumpCore`` can be + used to control whether the guest memory should be included in the generated + coredump or not (values "on", "off"). :since:```unit`` since 0.9.11` , + :since:```dumpCore`` since 0.10.2 (QEMU only)` +``maxMemory`` + The run time maximum memory allocation of the guest. The initial memory + specified by either the ``<memory>`` element or the NUMA cell size + configuration can be increased by hot-plugging of memory to the limit + specified by this element. The ``unit`` attribute behaves the same as for + ``<memory>``. The ``slots`` attribute specifies the number of slots available + for adding memory to the guest. The bounds are hypervisor specific. Note that + due to alignment of the memory chunks added via memory hotplug the full size + allocation specified by this element may be impossible to achieve. + :since:`Since 1.2.14 supported by the QEMU driver.` +``currentMemory`` + The actual allocation of memory for the guest. This value can be less than + the maximum allocation, to allow for ballooning up the guests memory on the + fly. If this is omitted, it defaults to the same value as the ``memory`` + element. The ``unit`` attribute behaves the same as for ``memory``. + +:anchor:`<a id="elementsMemoryBacking"/>` + +Memory Backing +-------------- + +:: + + <domain> + ... + <memoryBacking> + <hugepages> + <page size="1" unit="G" nodeset="0-3,5"/> + <page size="2" unit="M" nodeset="4"/> + </hugepages> + <nosharepages/> + <locked/> + <source type="file|anonymous|memfd"/> + <access mode="shared|private"/> + <allocation mode="immediate|ondemand"/> + <discard/> + </memoryBacking> + ... + </domain> + +The optional ``memoryBacking`` element may contain several elements that +influence how virtual memory pages are backed by host pages. + +``hugepages`` + This tells the hypervisor that the guest should have its memory allocated + using hugepages instead of the normal native page size. :since:`Since 1.2.5` + it's possible to set hugepages more specifically per numa node. The ``page`` + element is introduced. It has one compulsory attribute ``size`` which + specifies which hugepages should be used (especially useful on systems + supporting hugepages of different sizes). The default unit for the ``size`` + attribute is kilobytes (multiplier of 1024). If you want to use different + unit, use optional ``unit`` attribute. For systems with NUMA, the optional + ``nodeset`` attribute may come handy as it ties given guest's NUMA nodes to + certain hugepage sizes. From the example snippet, one gigabyte hugepages are + used for every NUMA node except node number four. For the correct syntax see + `this <#elementsNUMATuning>`__. +``nosharepages`` + Instructs hypervisor to disable shared pages (memory merge, KSM) for this + domain. :since:`Since 1.0.6` +``locked`` + When set and supported by the hypervisor, memory pages belonging to the + domain will be locked in host's memory and the host will not be allowed to + swap them out, which might be required for some workloads such as real-time. + For QEMU/KVM guests, the memory used by the QEMU process itself will be + locked too: unlike guest memory, this is an amount libvirt has no way of + figuring out in advance, so it has to remove the limit on locked memory + altogether. Thus, enabling this option opens up to a potential security risk: + the host will be unable to reclaim the locked memory back from the guest when + it's running out of memory, which means a malicious guest allocating large + amounts of locked memory could cause a denial-of-service attack on the host. + Because of this, using this option is discouraged unless your workload + demands it; even then, it's highly recommended to set a ``hard_limit`` (see + `memory tuning <#elementsMemoryTuning>`__) on memory allocation suitable for + the specific environment at the same time to mitigate the risks described + above. :since:`Since 1.0.6` +``source`` + Using the ``type`` attribute, it's possible to provide "file" to utilize file + memorybacking or keep the default "anonymous". :since:`Since 4.10.0` , you + may choose "memfd" backing. (QEMU/KVM only) +``access`` + Using the ``mode`` attribute, specify if the memory is to be "shared" or + "private". This can be overridden per numa node by ``memAccess``. +``allocation`` + Using the ``mode`` attribute, specify when to allocate the memory by + supplying either "immediate" or "ondemand". +``discard`` + When set and supported by hypervisor the memory content is discarded just + before guest shuts down (or when DIMM module is unplugged). Please note that + this is just an optimization and is not guaranteed to work in all cases (e.g. + when hypervisor crashes). :since:`Since 4.4.0` (QEMU/KVM only) + +:anchor:`<a id="elementsMemoryTuning"/>` + +Memory Tuning +------------- + +:: + + <domain> + ... + <memtune> + <hard_limit unit='G'>1</hard_limit> + <soft_limit unit='M'>128</soft_limit> + <swap_hard_limit unit='G'>2</swap_hard_limit> + <min_guarantee unit='bytes'>67108864</min_guarantee> + </memtune> + ... + </domain> + +``memtune`` + The optional ``memtune`` element provides details regarding the memory + tunable parameters for the domain. If this is omitted, it defaults to the OS + provided defaults. For QEMU/KVM, the parameters are applied to the QEMU + process as a whole. Thus, when counting them, one needs to add up guest RAM, + guest video RAM, and some memory overhead of QEMU itself. The last piece is + hard to determine so one needs guess and try. For each tunable, it is + possible to designate which unit the number is in on input, using the same + values as for ``<memory>``. For backwards compatibility, output is always in + KiB. :since:```unit`` since 0.9.11` Possible values for all \*_limit + parameters are in range from 0 to VIR_DOMAIN_MEMORY_PARAM_UNLIMITED. +``hard_limit`` + The optional ``hard_limit`` element is the maximum memory the guest can use. + The units for this value are kibibytes (i.e. blocks of 1024 bytes). Users of + QEMU and KVM are strongly advised not to set this limit as domain may get + killed by the kernel if the guess is too low, and determining the memory + needed for a process to run is an `undecidable + problem <http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Undecidable_problem>`__; that said, if + you already set ``locked`` in `memory backing <#elementsMemoryBacking>`__ + because your workload demands it, you'll have to take into account the + specifics of your deployment and figure out a value for ``hard_limit`` that + is large enough to support the memory requirements of your guest, but small + enough to protect your host against a malicious guest locking all memory. +``soft_limit`` + The optional ``soft_limit`` element is the memory limit to enforce during + memory contention. The units for this value are kibibytes (i.e. blocks of + 1024 bytes) +``swap_hard_limit`` + The optional ``swap_hard_limit`` element is the maximum memory plus swap the + guest can use. The units for this value are kibibytes (i.e. blocks of 1024 + bytes). This has to be more than hard_limit value provided +``min_guarantee`` + The optional ``min_guarantee`` element is the guaranteed minimum memory + allocation for the guest. The units for this value are kibibytes (i.e. blocks + of 1024 bytes). This element is only supported by VMware ESX and OpenVZ + drivers. + +:anchor:`<a id="elementsNUMATuning"/>` + +NUMA Node Tuning +---------------- + +:: + + <domain> + ... + <numatune> + <memory mode="strict" nodeset="1-4,^3"/> + <memnode cellid="0" mode="strict" nodeset="1"/> + <memnode cellid="2" mode="preferred" nodeset="2"/> + </numatune> + ... + </domain> + +``numatune`` + The optional ``numatune`` element provides details of how to tune the + performance of a NUMA host via controlling NUMA policy for domain process. + NB, only supported by QEMU driver. :since:`Since 0.9.3` +``memory`` + The optional ``memory`` element specifies how to allocate memory for the + domain process on a NUMA host. It contains several optional attributes. + Attribute ``mode`` is either 'interleave', 'strict', or 'preferred', defaults + to 'strict'. Attribute ``nodeset`` specifies the NUMA nodes, using the same + syntax as attribute ``cpuset`` of element ``vcpu``. Attribute ``placement`` ( + :since:`since 0.9.12` ) can be used to indicate the memory placement mode for + domain process, its value can be either "static" or "auto", defaults to + ``placement`` of ``vcpu``, or "static" if ``nodeset`` is specified. "auto" + indicates the domain process will only allocate memory from the advisory + nodeset returned from querying numad, and the value of attribute ``nodeset`` + will be ignored if it's specified. If ``placement`` of ``vcpu`` is 'auto', + and ``numatune`` is not specified, a default ``numatune`` with ``placement`` + 'auto' and ``mode`` 'strict' will be added implicitly. :since:`Since 0.9.3` +``memnode`` + Optional ``memnode`` elements can specify memory allocation policies per each + guest NUMA node. For those nodes having no corresponding ``memnode`` element, + the default from element ``memory`` will be used. Attribute ``cellid`` + addresses guest NUMA node for which the settings are applied. Attributes + ``mode`` and ``nodeset`` have the same meaning and syntax as in ``memory`` + element. This setting is not compatible with automatic placement. + :since:`QEMU Since 1.2.7` + +:anchor:`<a id="elementsBlockTuning"/>` + +Block I/O Tuning +---------------- + +:: + + <domain> + ... + <blkiotune> + <weight>800</weight> + <device> + <path>/dev/sda</path> + <weight>1000</weight> + </device> + <device> + <path>/dev/sdb</path> + <weight>500</weight> + <read_bytes_sec>10000</read_bytes_sec> + <write_bytes_sec>10000</write_bytes_sec> + <read_iops_sec>20000</read_iops_sec> + <write_iops_sec>20000</write_iops_sec> + </device> + </blkiotune> + ... + </domain> + +``blkiotune`` + The optional ``blkiotune`` element provides the ability to tune Blkio cgroup + tunable parameters for the domain. If this is omitted, it defaults to the OS + provided defaults. :since:`Since 0.8.8` +``weight`` + The optional ``weight`` element is the overall I/O weight of the guest. The + value should be in the range [100, 1000]. After kernel 2.6.39, the value + could be in the range [10, 1000]. +``device`` + The domain may have multiple ``device`` elements that further tune the + weights for each host block device in use by the domain. Note that multiple + `guest disks <#elementsDisks>`__ can share a single host block device, if + they are backed by files within the same host file system, which is why this + tuning parameter is at the global domain level rather than associated with + each guest disk device (contrast this to the `<iotune> <#elementsDisks>`__ + element which can apply to an individual ``<disk>``). Each ``device`` element + has two mandatory sub-elements, ``path`` describing the absolute path of the + device, and ``weight`` giving the relative weight of that device, in the + range [100, 1000]. After kernel 2.6.39, the value could be in the range [10, + 1000]. :since:`Since 0.9.8` + Additionally, the following optional sub-elements can be used: + + ``read_bytes_sec`` + Read throughput limit in bytes per second. :since:`Since 1.2.2` + ``write_bytes_sec`` + Write throughput limit in bytes per second. :since:`Since 1.2.2` + ``read_iops_sec`` + Read I/O operations per second limit. :since:`Since 1.2.2` + ``write_iops_sec`` + Write I/O operations per second limit. :since:`Since 1.2.2` + +:anchor:`<a id="resPartition"/>` + +Resource partitioning +--------------------- + +Hypervisors may allow for virtual machines to be placed into resource +partitions, potentially with nesting of said partitions. The ``resource`` +element groups together configuration related to resource partitioning. It +currently supports a child element ``partition`` whose content defines the +absolute path of the resource partition in which to place the domain. If no +partition is listed, then the domain will be placed in a default partition. It +is the responsibility of the app/admin to ensure that the partition exists prior +to starting the guest. Only the (hypervisor specific) default partition can be +assumed to exist by default. + +:: + + ... + <resource> + <partition>/virtualmachines/production</partition> + </resource> + ... + +Resource partitions are currently supported by the QEMU and LXC drivers, which +map partition paths to cgroups directories, in all mounted controllers. +:since:`Since 1.0.5` + +:anchor:`<a id="elementsCPU"/>` + +CPU model and topology +---------------------- + +Requirements for CPU model, its features and topology can be specified using the +following collection of elements. :since:`Since 0.7.5` + +:: + + ... + <cpu match='exact'> + <model fallback='allow'>core2duo</model> + <vendor>Intel</vendor> + <topology sockets='1' dies='1' cores='2' threads='1'/> + <cache level='3' mode='emulate'/> + <feature policy='disable' name='lahf_lm'/> + </cpu> + ... + +:: + + <cpu mode='host-model'> + <model fallback='forbid'/> + <topology sockets='1' dies='1' cores='2' threads='1'/> + </cpu> + ... + +:: + + <cpu mode='host-passthrough' migratable='off'> + <cache mode='passthrough'/> + <feature policy='disable' name='lahf_lm'/> + ... + +In case no restrictions need to be put on CPU model and its features, a simpler +``cpu`` element can be used. :since:`Since 0.7.6` + +:: + + ... + <cpu> + <topology sockets='1' dies='1' cores='2' threads='1'/> + </cpu> + ... + +``cpu`` + The ``cpu`` element is the main container for describing guest CPU + requirements. Its ``match`` attribute specifies how strictly the virtual CPU + provided to the guest matches these requirements. :since:`Since 0.7.6` the + ``match`` attribute can be omitted if ``topology`` is the only element within + ``cpu``. Possible values for the ``match`` attribute are: + + ``minimum`` + The specified CPU model and features describes the minimum requested CPU. + A better CPU will be provided to the guest if it is possible with the + requested hypervisor on the current host. This is a constrained + ``host-model`` mode; the domain will not be created if the provided + virtual CPU does not meet the requirements. + ``exact`` + The virtual CPU provided to the guest should exactly match the + specification. If such CPU is not supported, libvirt will refuse to start + the domain. + ``strict`` + The domain will not be created unless the host CPU exactly matches the + specification. This is not very useful in practice and should only be used + if there is a real reason. + + :since:`Since 0.8.5` the ``match`` attribute can be omitted and will default + to ``exact``. Sometimes the hypervisor is not able to create a virtual CPU + exactly matching the specification passed by libvirt. :since:`Since 3.2.0` , + an optional ``check`` attribute can be used to request a specific way of + checking whether the virtual CPU matches the specification. It is usually + safe to omit this attribute when starting a domain and stick with the default + value. Once the domain starts, libvirt will automatically change the + ``check`` attribute to the best supported value to ensure the virtual CPU + does not change when the domain is migrated to another host. The following + values can be used: + + ``none`` + Libvirt does no checking and it is up to the hypervisor to refuse to start + the domain if it cannot provide the requested CPU. With QEMU this means no + checking is done at all since the default behavior of QEMU is to emit + warnings, but start the domain anyway. + ``partial`` + Libvirt will check the guest CPU specification before starting a domain, + but the rest is left on the hypervisor. It can still provide a different + virtual CPU. + ``full`` + The virtual CPU created by the hypervisor will be checked against the CPU + specification and the domain will not be started unless the two CPUs + match. + + :since:`Since 0.9.10` , an optional ``mode`` attribute may be used to make it + easier to configure a guest CPU to be as close to host CPU as possible. + Possible values for the ``mode`` attribute are: + + ``custom`` + In this mode, the ``cpu`` element describes the CPU that should be + presented to the guest. This is the default when no ``mode`` attribute is + specified. This mode makes it so that a persistent guest will see the same + hardware no matter what host the guest is booted on. + ``host-model`` + The ``host-model`` mode is essentially a shortcut to copying host CPU + definition from capabilities XML into domain XML. Since the CPU definition + is copied just before starting a domain, exactly the same XML can be used + on different hosts while still providing the best guest CPU each host + supports. The ``match`` attribute can't be used in this mode. Specifying + CPU model is not supported either, but ``model``'s ``fallback`` attribute + may still be used. Using the ``feature`` element, specific flags may be + enabled or disabled specifically in addition to the host model. This may + be used to fine tune features that can be emulated. :since:`(Since 1.1.1)` + . Libvirt does not model every aspect of each CPU so the guest CPU will + not match the host CPU exactly. On the other hand, the ABI provided to the + guest is reproducible. During migration, complete CPU model definition is + transferred to the destination host so the migrated guest will see exactly + the same CPU model for the running instance of the guest, even if the + destination host contains more capable CPUs or newer kernel; but shutting + down and restarting the guest may present different hardware to the guest + according to the capabilities of the new host. Prior to libvirt 3.2.0 and + QEMU 2.9.0 detection of the host CPU model via QEMU is not supported. Thus + the CPU configuration created using ``host-model`` may not work as + expected. :since:`Since 3.2.0 and QEMU 2.9.0` this mode works the way it + was designed and it is indicated by the ``fallback`` attribute set to + ``forbid`` in the host-model CPU definition advertised in `domain + capabilities XML <formatdomaincaps.html#elementsCPU>`__. When ``fallback`` + attribute is set to ``allow`` in the domain capabilities XML, it is + recommended to use ``custom`` mode with just the CPU model from the host + capabilities XML. :since:`Since 1.2.11` PowerISA allows processors to run + VMs in binary compatibility mode supporting an older version of ISA. + Libvirt on PowerPC architecture uses the ``host-model`` to signify a guest + mode CPU running in binary compatibility mode. Example: When a user needs + a power7 VM to run in compatibility mode on a Power8 host, this can be + described in XML as follows : + + :: + + <cpu mode='host-model'> + <model>power7</model> + </cpu> + ... + + ``host-passthrough`` + With this mode, the CPU visible to the guest should be exactly the same as + the host CPU even in the aspects that libvirt does not understand. Though + the downside of this mode is that the guest environment cannot be + reproduced on different hardware. Thus, if you hit any bugs, you are on + your own. Further details of that CPU can be changed using ``feature`` + elements. Migration of a guest using host-passthrough is dangerous if the + source and destination hosts are not identical in both hardware, QEMU + version, microcode version and configuration. If such a migration is + attempted then the guest may hang or crash upon resuming execution on the + destination host. Depending on hypervisor version the virtual CPU may or + may not contain features which may block migration even to an identical + host. :since:`Since 6.5.0` optional ``migratable`` attribute may be used + to explicitly request such features to be removed from (``on``) or kept in + (``off``) the virtual CPU. This attribute does not make migration to + another host safer: even with ``migratable='on'`` migration will be + dangerous unless both hosts are identical as described above. + + Both ``host-model`` and ``host-passthrough`` modes make sense when a domain + can run directly on the host CPUs (for example, domains with type ``kvm``). + The actual host CPU is irrelevant for domains with emulated virtual CPUs + (such as domains with type ``qemu``). However, for backward compatibility + ``host-model`` may be implemented even for domains running on emulated CPUs + in which case the best CPU the hypervisor is able to emulate may be used + rather then trying to mimic the host CPU model. +``model`` + The content of the ``model`` element specifies CPU model requested by the + guest. The list of available CPU models and their definition can be found in + ``cpu_map.xml`` file installed in libvirt's data directory. If a hypervisor + is not able to use the exact CPU model, libvirt automatically falls back to a + closest model supported by the hypervisor while maintaining the list of CPU + features. :since:`Since 0.9.10` , an optional ``fallback`` attribute can be + used to forbid this behavior, in which case an attempt to start a domain + requesting an unsupported CPU model will fail. Supported values for + ``fallback`` attribute are: ``allow`` (this is the default), and ``forbid``. + The optional ``vendor_id`` attribute ( :since:`Since 0.10.0` ) can be used to + set the vendor id seen by the guest. It must be exactly 12 characters long. + If not set the vendor id of the host is used. Typical possible values are + "AuthenticAMD" and "GenuineIntel". +``vendor`` + :since:`Since 0.8.3` the content of the ``vendor`` element specifies CPU + vendor requested by the guest. If this element is missing, the guest can be + run on a CPU matching given features regardless on its vendor. The list of + supported vendors can be found in ``cpu_map.xml``. +``topology`` + The ``topology`` element specifies requested topology of virtual CPU provided + to the guest. Four attributes, ``sockets``, ``dies``, ``cores``, and + ``threads``, accept non-zero positive integer values. They refer to the + number of CPU sockets per NUMA node, number of dies per socket, number of + cores per die, and number of threads per core, respectively. The ``dies`` + attribute is optional and will default to 1 if omitted, while the other + attributes are all mandatory. Hypervisors may require that the maximum number + of vCPUs specified by the ``cpus`` element equals to the number of vcpus + resulting from the topology. +``feature`` + The ``cpu`` element can contain zero or more ``elements`` used to fine-tune + features provided by the selected CPU model. The list of known feature names + can be found in the same file as CPU models. The meaning of each ``feature`` + element depends on its ``policy`` attribute, which has to be set to one of + the following values: + + ``force`` + The virtual CPU will claim the feature is supported regardless of it being + supported by host CPU. + ``require`` + Guest creation will fail unless the feature is supported by the host CPU + or the hypervisor is able to emulate it. + ``optional`` + The feature will be supported by virtual CPU if and only if it is + supported by host CPU. + ``disable`` + The feature will not be supported by virtual CPU. + ``forbid`` + Guest creation will fail if the feature is supported by host CPU. + + :since:`Since 0.8.5` the ``policy`` attribute can be omitted and will default + to ``require``. + + Individual CPU feature names are specified as part of the ``name`` attribute. + For example, to explicitly specify the 'pcid' feature with Intel IvyBridge + CPU model: + + :: + + ... + <cpu match='exact'> + <model fallback='forbid'>IvyBridge</model> + <vendor>Intel</vendor> + <feature policy='require' name='pcid'/> + </cpu> + ... + +``cache`` + :since:`Since 3.3.0` the ``cache`` element describes the virtual CPU cache. + If the element is missing, the hypervisor will use a sensible default. + + ``level`` + This optional attribute specifies which cache level is described by the + element. Missing attribute means the element describes all CPU cache + levels at once. Mixing ``cache`` elements with the ``level`` attribute set + and those without the attribute is forbidden. + ``mode`` + The following values are supported: + + ``emulate`` + The hypervisor will provide a fake CPU cache data. + ``passthrough`` + The real CPU cache data reported by the host CPU will be passed through + to the virtual CPU. + ``disable`` + The virtual CPU will report no CPU cache of the specified level (or no + cache at all if the ``level`` attribute is missing). + +Guest NUMA topology can be specified using the ``numa`` element. :since:`Since +0.9.8` + +:: + + ... + <cpu> + ... + <numa> + <cell id='0' cpus='0-3' memory='512000' unit='KiB' discard='yes'/> + <cell id='1' cpus='4-7' memory='512000' unit='KiB' memAccess='shared'/> + </numa> + ... + </cpu> + ... + +Each ``cell`` element specifies a NUMA cell or a NUMA node. ``cpus`` specifies +the CPU or range of CPUs that are part of the node. :since:`Since 6.5.0` For the +qemu driver, if the emulator binary supports disjointed ``cpus`` ranges in each +``cell``, the sum of all CPUs declared in each ``cell`` will be matched with the +maximum number of virtual CPUs declared in the ``vcpu`` element. This is done by +filling any remaining CPUs into the first NUMA ``cell``. Users are encouraged to +supply a complete NUMA topology, where the sum of the NUMA CPUs matches the +maximum virtual CPUs number declared in ``vcpus``, to make the domain consistent +across qemu and libvirt versions. ``memory`` specifies the node memory in +kibibytes (i.e. blocks of 1024 bytes). :since:`Since 6.6.0` the ``cpus`` +attribute is optional and if omitted a CPU-less NUMA node is created. +:since:`Since 1.2.11` one can use an additional +`unit <#elementsMemoryAllocation>`__ attribute to define units in which +``memory`` is specified. :since:`Since 1.2.7` all cells should have ``id`` +attribute in case referring to some cell is necessary in the code, otherwise the +cells are assigned ``id``\ s in the increasing order starting from 0. Mixing +cells with and without the ``id`` attribute is not recommended as it may result +in unwanted behaviour. :since:`Since 1.2.9` the optional attribute ``memAccess`` +can control whether the memory is to be mapped as "shared" or "private". This is +valid only for hugepages-backed memory and nvdimm modules. Each ``cell`` element +can have an optional ``discard`` attribute which fine tunes the discard feature +for given numa node as described under `Memory +Backing <#elementsMemoryBacking>`__. Accepted values are ``yes`` and ``no``. +:since:`Since 4.4.0` + +This guest NUMA specification is currently available only for QEMU/KVM and Xen. + +A NUMA hardware architecture supports the notion of distances between NUMA +cells. :since:`Since 3.10.0` it is possible to define the distance between NUMA +cells using the ``distances`` element within a NUMA ``cell`` description. The +``sibling`` sub-element is used to specify the distance value between sibling +NUMA cells. For more details, see the chapter explaining the system's SLIT +(System Locality Information Table) within the ACPI (Advanced Configuration and +Power Interface) specification. + +:: + + ... + <cpu> + ... + <numa> + <cell id='0' cpus='0,4-7' memory='512000' unit='KiB'> + <distances> + <sibling id='0' value='10'/> + <sibling id='1' value='21'/> + <sibling id='2' value='31'/> + <sibling id='3' value='41'/> + </distances> + </cell> + <cell id='1' cpus='1,8-10,12-15' memory='512000' unit='KiB' memAccess='shared'> + <distances> + <sibling id='0' value='21'/> + <sibling id='1' value='10'/> + <sibling id='2' value='21'/> + <sibling id='3' value='31'/> + </distances> + </cell> + <cell id='2' cpus='2,11' memory='512000' unit='KiB' memAccess='shared'> + <distances> + <sibling id='0' value='31'/> + <sibling id='1' value='21'/> + <sibling id='2' value='10'/> + <sibling id='3' value='21'/> + </distances> + </cell> + <cell id='3' cpus='3' memory='512000' unit='KiB'> + <distances> + <sibling id='0' value='41'/> + <sibling id='1' value='31'/> + <sibling id='2' value='21'/> + <sibling id='3' value='10'/> + </distances> + </cell> + </numa> + ... + </cpu> + ... + +Describing distances between NUMA cells is currently only supported by Xen and +QEMU. If no ``distances`` are given to describe the SLIT data between different +cells, it will default to a scheme using 10 for local and 20 for remote +distances. + +:anchor:`<a id="hmat"/>` + +ACPI Heterogeneous Memory Attribute Table +~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ + +:: + + ... + <cpu> + ... + <numa> + <cell id='0' cpus='0-3' memory='512000' unit='KiB' discard='yes'/> + <cell id='1' cpus='4-7' memory='512000' unit='KiB' memAccess='shared'/> + <cell id='3' cpus='0-3' memory='2097152' unit='KiB'> + <cache level='1' associativity='direct' policy='writeback'> + <size value='10' unit='KiB'/> + <line value='8' unit='B'/> + </cache> + </cell> + <interconnects> + <latency initiator='0' target='0' type='access' value='5'/> + <latency initiator='0' target='0' cache='1' type='access' value='10'/> + <bandwidth initiator='0' target='0' type='access' value='204800' unit='KiB'/> + </interconnects> + </numa> + ... + </cpu> + ... + +:since:`Since 6.6.0` the ``cell`` element can have a ``cache`` child element +which describes memory side cache for memory proximity domains. The ``cache`` +element has a ``level`` attribute describing the cache level and thus the +element can be repeated multiple times to describe different levels of the +cache. + +The ``cache`` element then has following mandatory attributes: + +``level`` + Level of the cache this description refers to. +``associativity`` + Describes cache associativity (accepted values are ``none``, ``direct`` and + ``full``). +``policy`` + Describes cache write associativity (accepted values are ``none``, + ``writeback`` and ``writethrough``). + +The ``cache`` element has two mandatory child elements then: ``size`` and +``line`` which describe cache size and cache line size. Both elements accept two +attributes: ``value`` and ``unit`` which set the value of corresponding cache +attribute. + +The NUMA description has an optional ``interconnects`` element that describes +the normalized memory read/write latency, read/write bandwidth between Initiator +Proximity Domains (Processor or I/O) and Target Proximity Domains (Memory). + +The ``interconnects`` element can have zero or more ``latency`` child elements +to describe latency between two memory nodes and zero or more ``bandwidth`` +child elements to describe bandwidth between two memory nodes. Both these have +the following mandatory attributes: + +``initiator`` + Refers to the source NUMA node +``target`` + Refers to the target NUMA node +``type`` + The type of the access. Accepted values: ``access``, ``read``, ``write`` +``value`` + The actual value. For latency this is delay in nanoseconds, for bandwidth + this value is in kibibytes per second. Use additional ``unit`` attribute to + change the units. + +To describe latency from one NUMA node to a cache of another NUMA node the +``latency`` element has optional ``cache`` attribute which in combination with +``target`` attribute creates full reference to distant NUMA node's cache level. +For instance, ``target='0' cache='1'`` refers to the first level cache of NUMA +node 0. + +:anchor:`<a id="elementsEvents"/>` + +Events configuration +-------------------- + +It is sometimes necessary to override the default actions taken on various +events. Not all hypervisors support all events and actions. The actions may be +taken as a result of calls to libvirt APIs +`virDomainReboot <html/libvirt-libvirt-domain.html#virDomainReboot>`__ , +`virDomainShutdown <html/libvirt-libvirt-domain.html#virDomainShutdown>`__ , or +`virDomainShutdownFlags <html/libvirt-libvirt-domain.html#virDomainShutdownFlags>`__ +. Using ``virsh reboot`` or ``virsh shutdown`` would also trigger the event. + +:: + + ... + <on_poweroff>destroy</on_poweroff> + <on_reboot>restart</on_reboot> + <on_crash>restart</on_crash> + <on_lockfailure>poweroff</on_lockfailure> + ... + +The following collections of elements allow the actions to be specified when a +guest OS triggers a lifecycle operation. A common use case is to force a reboot +to be treated as a poweroff when doing the initial OS installation. This allows +the VM to be re-configured for the first post-install bootup. + +``on_poweroff`` + The content of this element specifies the action to take when the guest + requests a poweroff. +``on_reboot`` + The content of this element specifies the action to take when the guest + requests a reboot. +``on_crash`` + The content of this element specifies the action to take when the guest + crashes. + +Each of these states allow for the same four possible actions. + +``destroy`` + The domain will be terminated completely and all resources released. +``restart`` + The domain will be terminated and then restarted with the same configuration. +``preserve`` + The domain will be terminated and its resource preserved to allow analysis. +``rename-restart`` + The domain will be terminated and then restarted with a new name. + +QEMU/KVM supports the ``on_poweroff`` and ``on_reboot`` events handling the +``destroy`` and ``restart`` actions. The ``preserve`` action for an +``on_reboot`` event is treated as a ``destroy`` and the ``rename-restart`` +action for an ``on_poweroff`` event is treated as a ``restart`` event. + +The ``on_crash`` event supports these additional actions :since:`since 0.8.4` . + +``coredump-destroy`` + The crashed domain's core will be dumped, and then the domain will be + terminated completely and all resources released +``coredump-restart`` + The crashed domain's core will be dumped, and then the domain will be + restarted with the same configuration + +:since:`Since 3.9.0` , the lifecycle events can be configured via the +`virDomainSetLifecycleAction <html/libvirt-libvirt-domain.html#virDomainSetLifecycleAction>`__ +API. + +The ``on_lockfailure`` element ( :since:`since 1.0.0` ) may be used to configure +what action should be taken when a lock manager loses resource locks. The +following actions are recognized by libvirt, although not all of them need to be +supported by individual lock managers. When no action is specified, each lock +manager will take its default action. + +``poweroff`` + The domain will be forcefully powered off. +``restart`` + The domain will be powered off and started up again to reacquire its locks. +``pause`` + The domain will be paused so that it can be manually resumed when lock issues + are solved. +``ignore`` + Keep the domain running as if nothing happened. + +:anchor:`<a id="elementsPowerManagement"/>` + +Power Management +---------------- + +:since:`Since 0.10.2` it is possible to forcibly enable or disable BIOS +advertisements to the guest OS. (NB: Only qemu driver support) + +:: + + ... + <pm> + <suspend-to-disk enabled='no'/> + <suspend-to-mem enabled='yes'/> + </pm> + ... + +``pm`` + These elements enable ('yes') or disable ('no') BIOS support for S3 + (suspend-to-mem) and S4 (suspend-to-disk) ACPI sleep states. If nothing is + specified, then the hypervisor will be left with its default value. + Note: This setting cannot prevent the guest OS from performing a suspend as + the guest OS itself can choose to circumvent the unavailability of the sleep + states (e.g. S4 by turning off completely). + +:anchor:`<a id="elementsFeatures"/>` + +Hypervisor features +------------------- + +Hypervisors may allow certain CPU / machine features to be toggled on/off. + +:: + + ... + <features> + <pae/> + <acpi/> + <apic/> + <hap/> + <privnet/> + <hyperv> + <relaxed state='on'/> + <vapic state='on'/> + <spinlocks state='on' retries='4096'/> + <vpindex state='on'/> + <runtime state='on'/> + <synic state='on'/> + <stimer state='on'> + <direct state='on'/> + </stimer> + <reset state='on'/> + <vendor_id state='on' value='KVM Hv'/> + <frequencies state='on'/> + <reenlightenment state='on'/> + <tlbflush state='on'/> + <ipi state='on'/> + <evmcs state='on'/> + </hyperv> + <kvm> + <hidden state='on'/> + <hint-dedicated state='on'/> + </kvm> + <xen> + <e820_host state='on'/> + <passthrough state='on' mode='share_pt'/> + </xen> + <pvspinlock state='on'/> + <gic version='2'/> + <ioapic driver='qemu'/> + <hpt resizing='required'> + <maxpagesize unit='MiB'>16</maxpagesize> + </hpt> + <vmcoreinfo state='on'/> + <smm state='on'> + <tseg unit='MiB'>48</tseg> + </smm> + <htm state='on'/> + <ccf-assist state='on'/> + <msrs unknown='ignore'/> + <cfpc value='workaround'/> + <sbbc value='workaround'/> + <ibs value='fixed-na'/> + </features> + ... + +All features are listed within the ``features`` element, omitting a togglable +feature tag turns it off. The available features can be found by asking for the +`capabilities XML <formatcaps.html>`__ and `domain capabilities +XML <formatdomaincaps.html>`__, but a common set for fully virtualized domains +are: + +``pae`` + Physical address extension mode allows 32-bit guests to address more than 4 + GB of memory. +``acpi`` + ACPI is useful for power management, for example, with KVM guests it is + required for graceful shutdown to work. +``apic`` + APIC allows the use of programmable IRQ management. :since:`Since 0.10.2 + (QEMU only)` there is an optional attribute ``eoi`` with values ``on`` and + ``off`` which toggles the availability of EOI (End of Interrupt) for the + guest. +``hap`` + Depending on the ``state`` attribute (values ``on``, ``off``) enable or + disable use of Hardware Assisted Paging. The default is ``on`` if the + hypervisor detects availability of Hardware Assisted Paging. +``viridian`` + Enable Viridian hypervisor extensions for paravirtualizing guest operating + systems +``privnet`` + Always create a private network namespace. This is automatically set if any + interface devices are defined. This feature is only relevant for container + based virtualization drivers, such as LXC. +``hyperv`` + Enable various features improving behavior of guests running Microsoft + Windows. + + =============== ====================================================================== ============================================ ======================================================= + Feature Description Value Since + =============== ====================================================================== ============================================ ======================================================= + relaxed Relax constraints on timers on, off :since:`1.0.0 (QEMU 2.0)` + vapic Enable virtual APIC on, off :since:`1.1.0 (QEMU 2.0)` + spinlocks Enable spinlock support on, off; retries - at least 4095 :since:`1.1.0 (QEMU 2.0)` + vpindex Virtual processor index on, off :since:`1.3.3 (QEMU 2.5)` + runtime Processor time spent on running guest code and on behalf of guest code on, off :since:`1.3.3 (QEMU 2.5)` + synic Enable Synthetic Interrupt Controller (SynIC) on, off :since:`1.3.3 (QEMU 2.6)` + stimer Enable SynIC timers, optionally with Direct Mode support on, off; direct - on,off :since:`1.3.3 (QEMU 2.6), direct mode 5.7.0 (QEMU 4.1)` + reset Enable hypervisor reset on, off :since:`1.3.3 (QEMU 2.5)` + vendor_id Set hypervisor vendor id on, off; value - string, up to 12 characters :since:`1.3.3 (QEMU 2.5)` + frequencies Expose frequency MSRs on, off :since:`4.7.0 (QEMU 2.12)` + reenlightenment Enable re-enlightenment notification on migration on, off :since:`4.7.0 (QEMU 3.0)` + tlbflush Enable PV TLB flush support on, off :since:`4.7.0 (QEMU 3.0)` + ipi Enable PV IPI support on, off :since:`4.10.0 (QEMU 3.1)` + evmcs Enable Enlightened VMCS on, off :since:`4.10.0 (QEMU 3.1)` + =============== ====================================================================== ============================================ ======================================================= + +``pvspinlock`` + Notify the guest that the host supports paravirtual spinlocks for example by + exposing the pvticketlocks mechanism. This feature can be explicitly disabled + by using ``state='off'`` attribute. +``kvm`` + Various features to change the behavior of the KVM hypervisor. + + ============== ====================================================================== ======= ============================ + Feature Description Value Since + ============== ====================================================================== ======= ============================ + hidden Hide the KVM hypervisor from standard MSR based discovery on, off :since:`1.2.8 (QEMU 2.1.0)` + hint-dedicated Allows a guest to enable optimizations when running on dedicated vCPUs on, off :since:`5.7.0 (QEMU 2.12.0)` + ============== ====================================================================== ======= ============================ + +``xen`` + Various features to change the behavior of the Xen hypervisor. + + =========== ============================================== =================================================== ============== + Feature Description Value Since + =========== ============================================== =================================================== ============== + e820_host Expose the host e820 to the guest (PV only) on, off :since:`6.3.0` + passthrough Enable IOMMU mappings allowing PCI passthrough on, off; mode - optional string sync_pt or share_pt :since:`6.3.0` + =========== ============================================== =================================================== ============== + +``pmu`` + Depending on the ``state`` attribute (values ``on``, ``off``, default ``on``) + enable or disable the performance monitoring unit for the guest. + :since:`Since 1.2.12` +``vmport`` + Depending on the ``state`` attribute (values ``on``, ``off``, default ``on``) + enable or disable the emulation of VMware IO port, for vmmouse etc. + :since:`Since 1.2.16` +``gic`` + Enable for architectures using a General Interrupt Controller instead of APIC + in order to handle interrupts. For example, the 'aarch64' architecture uses + ``gic`` instead of ``apic``. The optional attribute ``version`` specifies the + GIC version; however, it may not be supported by all hypervisors. Accepted + values are ``2``, ``3`` and ``host``. :since:`Since 1.2.16` +``smm`` + Depending on the ``state`` attribute (values ``on``, ``off``, default ``on``) + enable or disable System Management Mode. :since:`Since 2.1.0` + + Optional sub-element ``tseg`` can be used to specify the amount of memory + dedicated to SMM's extended TSEG. That offers a fourth option size apart from + the existing ones (1 MiB, 2 MiB and 8 MiB) that the guest OS (or rather + loader) can choose from. The size can be specified as a value of that + element, optional attribute ``unit`` can be used to specify the unit of the + aforementioned value (defaults to 'MiB'). If set to 0 the extended size is + not advertised and only the default ones (see above) are available. + + **If the VM is booting you should leave this option alone, unless you are + very certain you know what you are doing.** + + This value is configurable due to the fact that the calculation cannot be + done right with the guarantee that it will work correctly. In QEMU, the + user-configurable extended TSEG feature was unavailable up to and including + ``pc-q35-2.9``. Starting with ``pc-q35-2.10`` the feature is available, with + default size 16 MiB. That should suffice for up to roughly 272 vCPUs, 5 GiB + guest RAM in total, no hotplug memory range, and 32 GiB of 64-bit PCI MMIO + aperture. Or for 48 vCPUs, with 1TB of guest RAM, no hotplug DIMM range, and + 32GB of 64-bit PCI MMIO aperture. The values may also vary based on the + loader the VM is using. + + Additional size might be needed for significantly higher vCPU counts or + increased address space (that can be memory, maxMemory, 64-bit PCI MMIO + aperture size; roughly 8 MiB of TSEG per 1 TiB of address space) which can + also be rounded up. + + Due to the nature of this setting being similar to "how much RAM should the + guest have" users are advised to either consult the documentation of the + guest OS or loader (if there is any), or test this by trial-and-error + changing the value until the VM boots successfully. Yet another guiding value + for users might be the fact that 48 MiB should be enough for pretty large + guests (240 vCPUs and 4TB guest RAM), but it is on purpose not set as default + as 48 MiB of unavailable RAM might be too much for small guests (e.g. with + 512 MiB of RAM). + + See `Memory Allocation <#elementsMemoryAllocation>`__ for more details about + the ``unit`` attribute. :since:`Since 4.5.0` (QEMU only) + +``ioapic`` + Tune the I/O APIC. Possible values for the ``driver`` attribute are: ``kvm`` + (default for KVM domains) and ``qemu`` which puts I/O APIC in userspace which + is also known as a split I/O APIC mode. :since:`Since 3.4.0` (QEMU/KVM only) +``hpt`` + Configure the HPT (Hash Page Table) of a pSeries guest. Possible values for + the ``resizing`` attribute are ``enabled``, which causes HPT resizing to be + enabled if both the guest and the host support it; ``disabled``, which causes + HPT resizing to be disabled regardless of guest and host support; and + ``required``, which prevents the guest from starting unless both the guest + and the host support HPT resizing. If the attribute is not defined, the + hypervisor default will be used. :since:`Since 3.10.0` (QEMU/KVM only). + + The optional ``maxpagesize`` subelement can be used to limit the usable page + size for HPT guests. Common values are 64 KiB, 16 MiB and 16 GiB; when not + specified, the hypervisor default will be used. :since:`Since 4.5.0` + (QEMU/KVM only). + +``vmcoreinfo`` + Enable QEMU vmcoreinfo device to let the guest kernel save debug details. + :since:`Since 4.4.0` (QEMU only) +``htm`` + Configure HTM (Hardware Transational Memory) availability for pSeries guests. + Possible values for the ``state`` attribute are ``on`` and ``off``. If the + attribute is not defined, the hypervisor default will be used. :since:`Since + 4.6.0` (QEMU/KVM only) +``nested-hv`` + Configure nested HV availability for pSeries guests. This needs to be enabled + from the host (L0) in order to be effective; having HV support in the (L1) + guest is very desiderable if it's planned to run nested (L2) guests inside + it, because it will result in those nested guests having much better + performance than they would when using KVM PR or TCG. Possible values for the + ``state`` attribute are ``on`` and ``off``. If the attribute is not defined, + the hypervisor default will be used. :since:`Since 4.10.0` (QEMU/KVM only) +``msrs`` + Some guests might require ignoring unknown Model Specific Registers (MSRs) + reads and writes. It's possible to switch this by setting ``unknown`` + attribute of ``msrs`` to ``ignore``. If the attribute is not defined, or set + to ``fault``, unknown reads and writes will not be ignored. :since:`Since + 5.1.0` (bhyve only) +``ccf-assist`` + Configure ccf-assist (Count Cache Flush Assist) availability for pSeries + guests. Possible values for the ``state`` attribute are ``on`` and ``off``. + If the attribute is not defined, the hypervisor default will be used. + :since:`Since 5.9.0` (QEMU/KVM only) +``cfpc`` + Configure cfpc (Cache Flush on Privilege Change) availability for pSeries + guests. Possible values for the ``value`` attribute are ``broken`` (no + protection), ``workaround`` (software workaround available) and ``fixed`` + (fixed in hardware). If the attribute is not defined, the hypervisor default + will be used. :since:`Since 6.3.0` (QEMU/KVM only) +``sbbc`` + Configure sbbc (Speculation Barrier Bounds Checking) availability for pSeries + guests. Possible values for the ``value`` attribute are ``broken`` (no + protection), ``workaround`` (software workaround available) and ``fixed`` + (fixed in hardware). If the attribute is not defined, the hypervisor default + will be used. :since:`Since 6.3.0` (QEMU/KVM only) +``ibs`` + Configure ibs (Indirect Branch Speculation) availability for pSeries guests. + Possible values for the ``value`` attribute are ``broken`` (no protection), + ``workaround`` (count cache flush), ``fixed-ibs`` (fixed by serializing + indirect branches), ``fixed-ccd`` (fixed by disabling the cache count) and + ``fixed-na (fixed in hardware - no longer applicable)``. If the + attribute is not defined, the hypervisor default will be used. :since:`Since + 6.3.0` (QEMU/KVM only) + +:anchor:`<a id="elementsTime"/>` + +Time keeping +------------ + +The guest clock is typically initialized from the host clock. Most operating +systems expect the hardware clock to be kept in UTC, and this is the default. +Windows, however, expects it to be in so called 'localtime'. + +:: + + ... + <clock offset='localtime'> + <timer name='rtc' tickpolicy='catchup' track='guest'> + <catchup threshold='123' slew='120' limit='10000'/> + </timer> + <timer name='pit' tickpolicy='delay'/> + </clock> + ... + +``clock`` + The ``offset`` attribute takes four possible values, allowing fine grained + control over how the guest clock is synchronized to the host. NB, not all + hypervisors support all modes. + + ``utc`` + The guest clock will always be synchronized to UTC when booted. + :since:`Since 0.9.11` 'utc' mode can be converted to 'variable' mode, + which can be controlled by using the ``adjustment`` attribute. If the + value is 'reset', the conversion is never done (not all hypervisors can + synchronize to UTC on each boot; use of 'reset' will cause an error on + those hypervisors). A numeric value forces the conversion to 'variable' + mode using the value as the initial adjustment. The default ``adjustment`` + is hypervisor specific. + ``localtime`` + The guest clock will be synchronized to the host's configured timezone + when booted, if any. :since:`Since 0.9.11,` the ``adjustment`` attribute + behaves the same as in 'utc' mode. + ``timezone`` + The guest clock will be synchronized to the requested timezone using the + ``timezone`` attribute. :since:`Since 0.7.7` + ``variable`` + The guest clock will have an arbitrary offset applied relative to UTC or + localtime, depending on the ``basis`` attribute. The delta relative to UTC + (or localtime) is specified in seconds, using the ``adjustment`` + attribute. The guest is free to adjust the RTC over time and expect that + it will be honored at next reboot. This is in contrast to 'utc' and + 'localtime' mode (with the optional attribute adjustment='reset'), where + the RTC adjustments are lost at each reboot. :since:`Since 0.7.7` + :since:`Since 0.9.11` the ``basis`` attribute can be either 'utc' + (default) or 'localtime'. + + A ``clock`` may have zero or more ``timer`` sub-elements. :since:`Since + 0.8.0` + +``timer`` + Each timer element requires a ``name`` attribute, and has other optional + attributes that depend on the ``name`` specified. Various hypervisors support + different combinations of attributes. + + ``name`` + The ``name`` attribute selects which timer is being modified, and can be + one of "platform" (currently unsupported), "hpet" (xen, qemu, lxc), + "kvmclock" (qemu), "pit" (qemu), "rtc" (qemu, lxc), "tsc" (xen, qemu - + :since:`since 3.2.0` ), "hypervclock" (qemu - :since:`since 1.2.2` ) or + "armvtimer" (qemu - :since:`since 6.1.0` ). The ``hypervclock`` timer adds + support for the reference time counter and the reference page for iTSC + feature for guests running the Microsoft Windows operating system. + ``track`` + The ``track`` attribute specifies what the timer tracks, and can be + "boot", "guest", or "wall". Only valid for ``name="rtc"`` or + ``name="platform"``. + ``tickpolicy`` + The ``tickpolicy`` attribute determines what happens when QEMU misses a + deadline for injecting a tick to the guest. This can happen, for example, + because the guest was paused. + + ``delay`` + Continue to deliver ticks at the normal rate. The guest OS will not + notice anything is amiss, as from its point of view time will have + continued to flow normally. The time in the guest should now be behind + the time in the host by exactly the amount of time during which ticks + have been missed. + ``catchup`` + Deliver ticks at a higher rate to catch up with the missed ticks. The + guest OS will not notice anything is amiss, as from its point of view + time will have continued to flow normally. Once the timer has managed + to catch up with all the missing ticks, the time in the guest and in + the host should match. + ``merge`` + Merge the missed tick(s) into one tick and inject. The guest time may + be delayed, depending on how the OS reacts to the merging of ticks + ``discard`` + Throw away the missed ticks and continue with future injection + normally. The guest OS will see the timer jump ahead by a potentially + quite significant amount all at once, as if the intervening chunk of + time had simply not existed; needless to say, such a sudden jump can + easily confuse a guest OS which is not specifically prepared to deal + with it. Assuming the guest OS can deal correctly with the time jump, + the time in the guest and in the host should now match. + + If the policy is "catchup", there can be further details in the + ``catchup`` sub-element. + + ``catchup`` + The ``catchup`` element has three optional attributes, each a positive + integer. The attributes are ``threshold``, ``slew``, and ``limit``. + + Note that hypervisors are not required to support all policies across all + time sources + + ``frequency`` + The ``frequency`` attribute is an unsigned integer specifying the + frequency at which ``name="tsc"`` runs. + ``mode`` + The ``mode`` attribute controls how the ``name="tsc"`` timer is managed, + and can be "auto", "native", "emulate", "paravirt", or "smpsafe". Other + timers are always emulated. + ``present`` + The ``present`` attribute can be "yes" or "no" to specify whether a + particular timer is available to the guest. + +:anchor:`<a id="elementsPerf"/>` + +Performance monitoring events +----------------------------- + +Some platforms allow monitoring of performance of the virtual machine and the +code executed inside. To enable the performance monitoring events you can either +specify them in the ``perf`` element or enable them via +``virDomainSetPerfEvents`` API. The performance values are then retrieved using +the virConnectGetAllDomainStats API. :since:`Since 2.0.0` + +:: + + ... + <perf> + <event name='cmt' enabled='yes'/> + <event name='mbmt' enabled='no'/> + <event name='mbml' enabled='yes'/> + <event name='cpu_cycles' enabled='no'/> + <event name='instructions' enabled='yes'/> + <event name='cache_references' enabled='no'/> + <event name='cache_misses' enabled='no'/> + <event name='branch_instructions' enabled='no'/> + <event name='branch_misses' enabled='no'/> + <event name='bus_cycles' enabled='no'/> + <event name='stalled_cycles_frontend' enabled='no'/> + <event name='stalled_cycles_backend' enabled='no'/> + <event name='ref_cpu_cycles' enabled='no'/> + <event name='cpu_clock' enabled='no'/> + <event name='task_clock' enabled='no'/> + <event name='page_faults' enabled='no'/> + <event name='context_switches' enabled='no'/> + <event name='cpu_migrations' enabled='no'/> + <event name='page_faults_min' enabled='no'/> + <event name='page_faults_maj' enabled='no'/> + <event name='alignment_faults' enabled='no'/> + <event name='emulation_faults' enabled='no'/> + </perf> + ... + +=========================== ======================================================================================================================================================================================= ================================ +event name Description stats parameter name +=========================== ======================================================================================================================================================================================= ================================ +``cmt`` usage of l3 cache in bytes by applications running on the platform ``perf.cmt`` +``mbmt`` total system bandwidth from one level of cache ``perf.mbmt`` +``mbml`` bandwidth of memory traffic for a memory controller ``perf.mbml`` +``cpu_cycles`` the count of CPU cycles (total/elapsed) ``perf.cpu_cycles`` +``instructions`` the count of instructions by applications running on the platform ``perf.instructions`` +``cache_references`` the count of cache hits by applications running on the platform ``perf.cache_references`` +``cache_misses`` the count of cache misses by applications running on the platform ``perf.cache_misses`` +``branch_instructions`` the count of branch instructions by applications running on the platform ``perf.branch_instructions`` +``branch_misses`` the count of branch misses by applications running on the platform ``perf.branch_misses`` +``bus_cycles`` the count of bus cycles by applications running on the platform ``perf.bus_cycles`` +``stalled_cycles_frontend`` the count of stalled CPU cycles in the frontend of the instruction processor pipeline by applications running on the platform ``perf.stalled_cycles_frontend`` +``stalled_cycles_backend`` the count of stalled CPU cycles in the backend of the instruction processor pipeline by applications running on the platform ``perf.stalled_cycles_backend`` +``ref_cpu_cycles`` the count of total CPU cycles not affected by CPU frequency scaling by applications running on the platform ``perf.ref_cpu_cycles`` +``cpu_clock`` the count of CPU clock time, as measured by a monotonic high-resolution per-CPU timer, by applications running on the platform ``perf.cpu_clock`` +``task_clock`` the count of task clock time, as measured by a monotonic high-resolution CPU timer, specific to the task that is run by applications running on the platform ``perf.task_clock`` +``page_faults`` the count of page faults by applications running on the platform. This includes minor, major, invalid and other types of page faults ``perf.page_faults`` +``context_switches`` the count of context switches by applications running on the platform ``perf.context_switches`` +``cpu_migrations`` the count of CPU migrations, that is, where the process moved from one logical processor to another, by applications running on the platform ``perf.cpu_migrations`` +``page_faults_min`` the count of minor page faults, that is, where the page was present in the page cache, and therefore the fault avoided loading it from storage, by applications running on the platform ``perf.page_faults_min`` +``page_faults_maj`` the count of major page faults, that is, where the page was not present in the page cache, and therefore had to be fetched from storage, by applications running on the platform ``perf.page_faults_maj`` +``alignment_faults`` the count of alignment faults, that is when the load or store is not aligned properly, by applications running on the platform ``perf.alignment_faults`` +``emulation_faults`` the count of emulation faults, that is when the kernel traps on unimplemented instrucions and emulates them for user space, by applications running on the platform ``perf.emulation_faults`` +=========================== ======================================================================================================================================================================================= ================================ + +:anchor:`<a id="elementsDevices"/>` + +Devices +------- + +The final set of XML elements are all used to describe devices provided to the +guest domain. All devices occur as children of the main ``devices`` element. +:since:`Since 0.1.3` + +:: + + ... + <devices> + <emulator>/usr/lib/xen/bin/qemu-dm</emulator> + </devices> + ... + +``emulator`` + The contents of the ``emulator`` element specify the fully qualified path to + the device model emulator binary. The `capabilities XML <formatcaps.html>`__ + specifies the recommended default emulator to use for each particular domain + type / architecture combination. + +To help users identifying devices they care about, every device can have direct +child ``alias`` element which then has ``name`` attribute where users can store +identifier for the device. The identifier has to have "ua-" prefix and must be +unique within the domain. Additionally, the identifier must consist only of the +following characters: ``[a-zA-Z0-9_-]``. :since:`Since 3.9.0` + +:: + + <devices> + <disk type='file'> + <alias name='ua-myDisk'/> + </disk> + <interface type='network' trustGuestRxFilters='yes'> + <alias name='ua-myNIC'/> + </interface> + ... + </devices> + +:anchor:`<a id="elementsDisks"/>` + +Hard drives, floppy disks, CDROMs +~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ + +Any device that looks like a disk, be it a floppy, harddisk, cdrom, or +paravirtualized driver is specified via the ``disk`` element. + +:: + + ... + <devices> + <disk type='file' snapshot='external'> + <driver name="tap" type="aio" cache="default"/> + <source file='/var/lib/xen/images/fv0' startupPolicy='optional'> + <seclabel relabel='no'/> + </source> + <target dev='hda' bus='ide'/> + <iotune> + <total_bytes_sec>10000000</total_bytes_sec> + <read_iops_sec>400000</read_iops_sec> + <write_iops_sec>100000</write_iops_sec> + </iotune> + <boot order='2'/> + <encryption type='...'> + ... + </encryption> + <shareable/> + <serial> + ... + </serial> + </disk> + ... + <disk type='network'> + <driver name="qemu" type="raw" io="threads" ioeventfd="on" event_idx="off"/> + <source protocol="sheepdog" name="image_name"> + <host name="hostname" port="7000"/> + </source> + <target dev="hdb" bus="ide"/> + <boot order='1'/> + <transient/> + <address type='drive' controller='0' bus='1' unit='0'/> + </disk> + <disk type='network'> + <driver name="qemu" type="raw"/> + <source protocol="rbd" name="image_name2"> + <host name="hostname" port="7000"/> + <snapshot name="snapname"/> + <config file="/path/to/file"/> + <auth username='myuser'> + <secret type='ceph' usage='mypassid'/> + </auth> + </source> + <target dev="hdc" bus="ide"/> + </disk> + <disk type='block' device='cdrom'> + <driver name='qemu' type='raw'/> + <target dev='hdd' bus='ide' tray='open'/> + <readonly/> + </disk> + <disk type='network' device='cdrom'> + <driver name='qemu' type='raw'/> + <source protocol="http" name="url_path" query="foo=bar&baz=flurb> + <host name="hostname" port="80"/> + <cookies> + <cookie name="test">somevalue</cookie> + </cookies> + <readahead size='65536'/> + <timeout seconds='6'/> + </source> + <target dev='hde' bus='ide' tray='open'/> + <readonly/> + </disk> + <disk type='network' device='cdrom'> + <driver name='qemu' type='raw'/> + <source protocol="https" name="url_path"> + <host name="hostname" port="443"/> + <ssl verify="no"/> + </source> + <target dev='hdf' bus='ide' tray='open'/> + <readonly/> + </disk> + <disk type='network' device='cdrom'> + <driver name='qemu' type='raw'/> + <source protocol="ftp" name="url_path"> + <host name="hostname" port="21"/> + </source> + <target dev='hdg' bus='ide' tray='open'/> + <readonly/> + </disk> + <disk type='network' device='cdrom'> + <driver name='qemu' type='raw'/> + <source protocol="ftps" name="url_path"> + <host name="hostname" port="990"/> + </source> + <target dev='hdh' bus='ide' tray='open'/> + <readonly/> + </disk> + <disk type='network' device='cdrom'> + <driver name='qemu' type='raw'/> + <source protocol="tftp" name="url_path"> + <host name="hostname" port="69"/> + </source> + <target dev='hdi' bus='ide' tray='open'/> + <readonly/> + </disk> + <disk type='block' device='lun'> + <driver name='qemu' type='raw'/> + <source dev='/dev/sda'> + <slices> + <slice type='storage' offset='12345' size='123'/> + </slices> + <reservations managed='no'> + <source type='unix' path='/path/to/qemu-pr-helper' mode='client'/> + </reservations> + </source> + <target dev='sda' bus='scsi'/> + <address type='drive' controller='0' bus='0' target='3' unit='0'/> + </disk> + <disk type='block' device='disk'> + <driver name='qemu' type='raw'/> + <source dev='/dev/sda'/> + <geometry cyls='16383' heads='16' secs='63' trans='lba'/> + <blockio logical_block_size='512' physical_block_size='4096'/> + <target dev='hdj' bus='ide'/> + </disk> + <disk type='volume' device='disk'> + <driver name='qemu' type='raw'/> + <source pool='blk-pool0' volume='blk-pool0-vol0'/> + <target dev='hdk' bus='ide'/> + </disk> + <disk type='network' device='disk'> + <driver name='qemu' type='raw'/> + <source protocol='iscsi' name='iqn.2013-07.com.example:iscsi-nopool/2'> + <host name='example.com' port='3260'/> + <auth username='myuser'> + <secret type='iscsi' usage='libvirtiscsi'/> + </auth> + </source> + <target dev='vda' bus='virtio'/> + </disk> + <disk type='network' device='lun'> + <driver name='qemu' type='raw'/> + <source protocol='iscsi' name='iqn.2013-07.com.example:iscsi-nopool/1'> + <host name='example.com' port='3260'/> + <auth username='myuser'> + <secret type='iscsi' usage='libvirtiscsi'/> + </auth> + </source> + <target dev='sdb' bus='scsi'/> + </disk> + <disk type='network' device='lun'> + <driver name='qemu' type='raw'/> + <source protocol='iscsi' name='iqn.2013-07.com.example:iscsi-nopool/0'> + <host name='example.com' port='3260'/> + <initiator> + <iqn name='iqn.2013-07.com.example:client'/> + </initiator> + </source> + <target dev='sdb' bus='scsi'/> + </disk> + <disk type='volume' device='disk'> + <driver name='qemu' type='raw'/> + <source pool='iscsi-pool' volume='unit:0:0:1' mode='host'/> + <target dev='vdb' bus='virtio'/> + </disk> + <disk type='volume' device='disk'> + <driver name='qemu' type='raw'/> + <source pool='iscsi-pool' volume='unit:0:0:2' mode='direct'/> + <target dev='vdc' bus='virtio'/> + </disk> + <disk type='file' device='disk'> + <driver name='qemu' type='qcow2' queues='4'/> + <source file='/var/lib/libvirt/images/domain.qcow'/> + <backingStore type='file'> + <format type='qcow2'/> + <source file='/var/lib/libvirt/images/snapshot.qcow'/> + <backingStore type='block'> + <format type='raw'/> + <source dev='/dev/mapper/base'/> + <backingStore/> + </backingStore> + </backingStore> + <target dev='vdd' bus='virtio'/> + </disk> + <disk type='nvme' device='disk'> + <driver name='qemu' type='raw'/> + <source type='pci' managed='yes' namespace='1'> + <address domain='0x0000' bus='0x01' slot='0x00' function='0x0'/> + </source> + <target dev='vde' bus='virtio'/> + </disk> + </devices> + ... + +``disk`` + The ``disk`` element is the main container for describing disks and supports + the following attributes: + + ``type`` + Valid values are "file", "block", "dir" ( :since:`since 0.7.5` ), + "network" ( :since:`since 0.8.7` ), or "volume" ( :since:`since 1.0.5` ), + or "nvme" ( :since:`since 6.0.0` ) and refer to the underlying source for + the disk. :since:`Since 0.0.3` + ``device`` + Indicates how the disk is to be exposed to the guest OS. Possible values + for this attribute are "floppy", "disk", "cdrom", and "lun", defaulting to + "disk". + + Using "lun" ( :since:`since 0.9.10` ) is only valid when the ``type`` is + "block" or "network" for ``protocol='iscsi'`` or when the ``type`` is + "volume" when using an iSCSI source ``pool`` for ``mode`` "host" or as an + `NPIV <http://wiki.libvirt.org/page/NPIV_in_libvirt>`__ virtual Host Bus + Adapter (vHBA) using a Fibre Channel storage pool. Configured in this + manner, the LUN behaves identically to "disk", except that generic SCSI + commands from the guest are accepted and passed through to the physical + device. Also note that device='lun' will only be recognized for actual raw + devices, but never for individual partitions or LVM partitions (in those + cases, the kernel will reject the generic SCSI commands, making it + identical to device='disk'). :since:`Since 0.1.4` + + ``model`` + Indicates the emulated device model of the disk. Typically this is + indicated solely by the ``bus`` property but for ``bus`` "virtio" the + model can be specified further with "virtio-transitional", + "virtio-non-transitional", or "virtio". See `Virtio transitional + devices <#elementsVirtioTransitional>`__ for more details. :since:`Since + 5.2.0` + ``rawio`` + Indicates whether the disk needs rawio capability. Valid settings are + "yes" or "no" (default is "no"). If any one disk in a domain has + rawio='yes', rawio capability will be enabled for all disks in the domain + (because, in the case of QEMU, this capability can only be set on a + per-process basis). This attribute is only valid when device is "lun". NB, + ``rawio`` intends to confine the capability per-device, however, current + QEMU implementation gives the domain process broader capability than that + (per-process basis, affects all the domain disks). To confine the + capability as much as possible for QEMU driver as this stage, ``sgio`` is + recommended, it's more secure than ``rawio``. :since:`Since 0.9.10` + ``sgio`` + If supported by the hypervisor and OS, indicates whether unprivileged + SG_IO commands are filtered for the disk. Valid settings are "filtered" or + "unfiltered" where the default is "filtered". Only available when the + ``device`` is 'lun'. :since:`Since 1.0.2` + ``snapshot`` + Indicates the default behavior of the disk during disk snapshots: + "``internal``" requires a file format such as qcow2 that can store both + the snapshot and the data changes since the snapshot; "``external``" will + separate the snapshot from the live data; and "``no``" means the disk will + not participate in snapshots. Read-only disks default to "``no``", while + the default for other disks depends on the hypervisor's capabilities. Some + hypervisors allow a per-snapshot choice as well, during `domain snapshot + creation <formatsnapshot.html>`__. Not all snapshot modes are supported; + for example, enabling snapshots with a transient disk generally does not + make sense. :since:`Since 0.9.5` + +``source`` + Representation of the disk ``source`` depends on the disk ``type`` attribute + value as follows: + + ``file`` + The ``file`` attribute specifies the fully-qualified path to the file + holding the disk. :since:`Since 0.0.3` + ``block`` + The ``dev`` attribute specifies the fully-qualified path to the host + device to serve as the disk. :since:`Since 0.0.3` + ``dir`` + The ``dir`` attribute specifies the fully-qualified path to the directory + to use as the disk. :since:`Since 0.7.5` + ``network`` + The ``protocol`` attribute specifies the protocol to access to the + requested image. Possible values are "nbd", "iscsi", "rbd", "sheepdog", + "gluster", "vxhs", "http", "https", "ftp", ftps", or "tftp". + + For any ``protocol`` other than ``nbd`` an additional attribute ``name`` + is mandatory to specify which volume/image will be used. + + For "nbd", the ``name`` attribute is optional. TLS transport for NBD can + be enabled by setting the ``tls`` attribute to ``yes``. For the QEMU + hypervisor, usage of a TLS environment can also be globally controlled on + the host by the ``nbd_tls`` and ``nbd_tls_x509_cert_dir`` in + /etc/libvirt/qemu.conf. ('tls' :since:`Since 4.5.0` ) + + For protocols ``http`` and ``https`` an optional attribute ``query`` + specifies the query string. ( :since:`Since 6.2.0` ) + + For "iscsi" ( :since:`since 1.0.4` ), the ``name`` attribute may include a + logical unit number, separated from the target's name by a slash (e.g., + ``iqn.2013-07.com.example:iscsi-pool/1``). If not specified, the default + LUN is zero. + + For "vxhs" ( :since:`since 3.8.0` ), the ``name`` is the UUID of the + volume, assigned by the HyperScale server. Additionally, an optional + attribute ``tls`` (QEMU only) can be used to control whether a VxHS block + device would utilize a hypervisor configured TLS X.509 certificate + environment in order to encrypt the data channel. For the QEMU hypervisor, + usage of a TLS environment can also be globally controlled on the host by + the ``vxhs_tls`` and ``vxhs_tls_x509_cert_dir`` or + ``default_tls_x509_cert_dir`` settings in the file /etc/libvirt/qemu.conf. + If ``vxhs_tls`` is enabled, then unless the domain ``tls`` attribute is + set to "no", libvirt will use the host configured TLS environment. If the + ``tls`` attribute is set to "yes", then regardless of the qemu.conf + setting, TLS authentication will be attempted. + + :since:`Since 0.8.7` + + ``volume`` + The underlying disk source is represented by attributes ``pool`` and + ``volume``. Attribute ``pool`` specifies the name of the `storage + pool <formatstorage.html>`__ (managed by libvirt) where the disk source + resides. Attribute ``volume`` specifies the name of storage volume + (managed by libvirt) used as the disk source. The value for the ``volume`` + attribute will be the output from the "Name" column of a + ``virsh vol-list [pool-name]`` command. + + Use the attribute ``mode`` ( :since:`since 1.1.1` ) to indicate how to + represent the LUN as the disk source. Valid values are "direct" and + "host". If ``mode`` is not specified, the default is to use "host". Using + "direct" as the ``mode`` value indicates to use the `storage + pool's <formatstorage.html>`__ ``source`` element ``host`` attribute as + the disk source to generate the libiscsi URI (e.g. + 'file=iscsi://example.com:3260/iqn.2013-07.com.example:iscsi-pool/1'). + Using "host" as the ``mode`` value indicates to use the LUN's path as it + shows up on host (e.g. + 'file=/dev/disk/by-path/ip-example.com:3260-iscsi-iqn.2013-07.com.example:iscsi-pool-lun-1'). + Using a LUN from an iSCSI source pool provides the same features as a + ``disk`` configured using ``type`` 'block' or 'network' and ``device`` of + 'lun' with respect to how the LUN is presented to and may be used by the + guest. :since:`Since 1.0.5` + + ``nvme`` + To specify disk source for NVMe disk the ``source`` element has the + following attributes: + + ``type`` + The type of address specified in ``address`` sub-element. Currently, + only ``pci`` value is accepted. + ``managed`` + This attribute instructs libvirt to detach NVMe controller + automatically on domain startup (``yes``) or expect the controller to + be detached by system administrator (``no``). + ``namespace`` + The namespace ID which should be assigned to the domain. According to + NVMe standard, namespace numbers start from 1, including. + + The difference between ``<disk type='nvme'>`` and ``<hostdev/>`` is that + the latter is plain host device assignment with all its limitations (e.g. + no live migration), while the former makes hypervisor to run the NVMe disk + through hypervisor's block layer thus enabling all features provided by + the layer (e.g. snapshots, domain migration, etc.). Moreover, since the + NVMe disk is unbinded from its PCI driver, the host kernel storage stack + is not involved (compared to passing say ``/dev/nvme0n1`` via + ``<disk type='block'>`` and therefore lower latencies can be achieved. + + With "file", "block", and "volume", one or more optional sub-elements + ``seclabel``, `described below <#seclabel>`__ (and :since:`since 0.9.9` ), + can be used to override the domain security labeling policy for just that + source file. (NB, for "volume" type disk, ``seclabel`` is only valid when the + specified storage volume is of 'file' or 'block' type). + + The ``source`` element may also have the ``index`` attribute with same + semantics the `index <#elementsDiskBackingStoreIndex>`__ attribute of + ``backingStore`` + + The ``source`` element may contain the following sub elements: + + ``host`` + When the disk ``type`` is "network", the ``source`` may have zero or more + ``host`` sub-elements used to specify the hosts to connect. The ``host`` + element supports 4 attributes, viz. "name", "port", "transport" and + "socket", which specify the hostname, the port number, transport type and + path to socket, respectively. The meaning of this element and the number + of the elements depend on the protocol attribute. + + ======== ======================================================= ============================================================ ================ + Protocol Meaning Number of hosts Default port + ======== ======================================================= ============================================================ ================ + nbd a server running nbd-server only one 10809 + iscsi an iSCSI server only one 3260 + rbd monitor servers of RBD one or more librados default + sheepdog one of the sheepdog servers (default is localhost:7000) zero or one 7000 + gluster a server running glusterd daemon one or more ( :since:`Since 2.1.0` ), just one prior to that 24007 + vxhs a server running Veritas HyperScale daemon only one 9999 + ======== ======================================================= ============================================================ ================ + + gluster supports "tcp", "rdma", "unix" as valid values for the transport + attribute. nbd supports "tcp" and "unix". Others only support "tcp". If + nothing is specified, "tcp" is assumed. If the transport is "unix", the + socket attribute specifies the path to an AF_UNIX socket. + + ``snapshot`` + The ``name`` attribute of ``snapshot`` element can optionally specify an + internal snapshot name to be used as the source for storage protocols. + Supported for 'rbd' :since:`since 1.2.11 (QEMU only).` + ``config`` + The ``file`` attribute for the ``config`` element provides a fully + qualified path to a configuration file to be provided as a parameter to + the client of a networked storage protocol. Supported for 'rbd' + :since:`since 1.2.11 (QEMU only).` + ``auth`` + :since:`Since libvirt 3.9.0` , the ``auth`` element is supported for a + disk ``type`` "network" that is using a ``source`` element with the + ``protocol`` attributes "rbd" or "iscsi". If present, the ``auth`` element + provides the authentication credentials needed to access the source. It + includes a mandatory attribute ``username``, which identifies the username + to use during authentication, as well as a sub-element ``secret`` with + mandatory attribute ``type``, to tie back to a `libvirt secret + object <formatsecret.html>`__ that holds the actual password or other + credentials (the domain XML intentionally does not expose the password, + only the reference to the object that does manage the password). Known + secret types are "ceph" for Ceph RBD network sources and "iscsi" for CHAP + authentication of iSCSI targets. Both will require either a ``uuid`` + attribute with the UUID of the secret object or a ``usage`` attribute + matching the key that was specified in the secret object. + ``encryption`` + :since:`Since libvirt 3.9.0` , the ``encryption`` can be a sub-element of + the ``source`` element for encrypted storage sources. If present, + specifies how the storage source is encrypted See the `Storage + Encryption <formatstorageencryption.html>`__ page for more information. + Note that the 'qcow' format of encryption is broken and thus is no longer + supported for use with disk images. ( :since:`Since libvirt 4.5.0` ) + ``reservations`` + :since:`Since libvirt 4.4.0` , the ``reservations`` can be a sub-element + of the ``source`` element for storage sources (QEMU driver only). If + present it enables persistent reservations for SCSI based disks. The + element has one mandatory attribute ``managed`` with accepted values + ``yes`` and ``no``. If ``managed`` is enabled libvirt prepares and manages + any resources needed. When the persistent reservations are unmanaged, then + the hypervisor acts as a client and the path to the server socket must be + provided in the child element ``source``, which currently accepts only the + following attributes: ``type`` with one value ``unix``, ``path`` path to + the socket, and finally ``mode`` which accepts one value ``client`` + specifying the role of hypervisor. It's recommended to allow libvirt + manage the persistent reservations. + ``initiator`` + :since:`Since libvirt 4.7.0` , the ``initiator`` element is supported for + a disk ``type`` "network" that is using a ``source`` element with the + ``protocol`` attribute "iscsi". If present, the ``initiator`` element + provides the initiator IQN needed to access the source via mandatory + attribute ``name``. + ``address`` + For disk of type ``nvme`` this element specifies the PCI address of the + host NVMe controller. :since:`Since 6.0.0` + ``slices`` + The ``slices`` element using its ``slice`` sub-elements allows configuring + offset and size of either the location of the image format + (``slice type='storage'``) inside the storage source or the guest data + inside the image format container (future expansion). The ``offset`` and + ``size`` values are in bytes. :since:`Since 6.1.0` + ``ssl`` + For ``https`` and ``ftps`` accessed storage it's possible to tweak the SSL + transport parameters with this element. The ``verify`` attribute allows to + turn on or off SSL certificate validation. Supported values are ``yes`` + and ``no``. :since:`Since 6.2.0` + ``cookies`` + For ``http`` and ``https`` accessed storage it's possible to pass one or + more cookies. The cookie name and value must conform to the HTTP + specification. :since:`Since 6.2.0` + ``readahead`` + Specifies the size of the readahead buffer for protocols which support it. + (all 'curl' based drivers in qemu). The size is in bytes. Note that '0' is + considered as if the value is not provided. :since:`Since 6.2.0` + ``timeout`` + Specifies the connection timeout for protocols which support it. Note that + '0' is considered as if the value is not provided. :since:`Since 6.2.0` + + For a "file" or "volume" disk type which represents a cdrom or floppy (the + ``device`` attribute), it is possible to define policy what to do with the + disk if the source file is not accessible. (NB, ``startupPolicy`` is not + valid for "volume" disk unless the specified storage volume is of "file" + type). This is done by the ``startupPolicy`` attribute ( :since:`since 0.9.7` + ), accepting these values: + + ========= ===================================================================== + mandatory fail if missing for any reason (the default) + requisite fail if missing on boot up, drop if missing on migrate/restore/revert + optional drop if missing at any start attempt + ========= ===================================================================== + + :since:`Since 1.1.2` the ``startupPolicy`` is extended to support hard disks + besides cdrom and floppy. On guest cold bootup, if a certain disk is not + accessible or its disk chain is broken, with startupPolicy 'optional' the + guest will drop this disk. This feature doesn't support migration currently. + +``backingStore`` + This element describes the backing store used by the disk specified by + sibling ``source`` element. :since:`Since 1.2.4.` If the hypervisor driver + does not support the + `backingStoreInput <formatdomaincaps.html#featureBackingStoreInput>`__ ( + :since:`Since 5.10.0` ) domain feature the ``backingStore`` is ignored on + input and only used for output to describe the detected backing chains of + running domains. If ``backingStoreInput`` is supported the ``backingStore`` + is used as the backing image of ``source`` or other ``backingStore`` + overriding any backing image information recorded in the image metadata. An + empty ``backingStore`` element means the sibling source is self-contained and + is not based on any backing store. For the detected backing chain information + to be accurate, the backing format must be correctly specified in the + metadata of each file of the chain (files created by libvirt satisfy this + property, but using existing external files for snapshot or block copy + operations requires the end user to pre-create the file correctly). The + following attributes are supported in ``backingStore``: + + ``type`` + The ``type`` attribute represents the type of disk used by the backing + store, see disk type attribute above for more details and possible values. + ``index`` + This attribute is only valid in output (and ignored on input) and it can + be used to refer to a specific part of the disk chain when doing block + operations (such as via the ``virDomainBlockRebase`` API). For example, + ``vda[2]`` refers to the backing store with ``index='2'`` of the disk with + ``vda`` target. + + Moreover, ``backingStore`` supports the following sub-elements: + + ``format`` + The ``format`` element contains ``type`` attribute which specifies the + internal format of the backing store, such as ``raw`` or ``qcow2``. + ``source`` + This element has the same structure as the ``source`` element in ``disk``. + It specifies which file, device, or network location contains the data of + the described backing store. + ``backingStore`` + If the backing store is not self-contained, the next element in the chain + is described by nested ``backingStore`` element. + +``mirror`` + This element is present if the hypervisor has started a long-running block + job operation, where the mirror location in the ``source`` sub-element will + eventually have the same contents as the source, and with the file format in + the sub-element ``format`` (which might differ from the format of the + source). The details of the ``source`` sub-element are determined by the + ``type`` attribute of the mirror, similar to what is done for the overall + ``disk`` device element. The ``job`` attribute mentions which API started the + operation ("copy" for the ``virDomainBlockRebase`` API, or "active-commit" + for the ``virDomainBlockCommit`` API), :since:`since 1.2.7` . The attribute + ``ready``, if present, tracks progress of the job: ``yes`` if the disk is + known to be ready to pivot, or, :since:`since 1.2.7` , ``abort`` or ``pivot`` + if the job is in the process of completing. If ``ready`` is not present, the + disk is probably still copying. For now, this element only valid in output; + it is ignored on input. The ``source`` sub-element exists for all two-phase + jobs :since:`since 1.2.6` . Older libvirt supported only block copy to a + file, :since:`since 0.9.12` ; for compatibility with older clients, such jobs + include redundant information in the attributes ``file`` and ``format`` in + the ``mirror`` element. +``target`` + The ``target`` element controls the bus / device under which the disk is + exposed to the guest OS. The ``dev`` attribute indicates the "logical" device + name. The actual device name specified is not guaranteed to map to the device + name in the guest OS. Treat it as a device ordering hint. The optional + ``bus`` attribute specifies the type of disk device to emulate; possible + values are driver specific, with typical values being "ide", "scsi", + "virtio", "xen", "usb", "sata", or "sd" :since:`"sd" since 1.1.2` . If + omitted, the bus type is inferred from the style of the device name (e.g. a + device named 'sda' will typically be exported using a SCSI bus). The optional + attribute ``tray`` indicates the tray status of the removable disks (i.e. + CDROM or Floppy disk), the value can be either "open" or "closed", defaults + to "closed". NB, the value of ``tray`` could be updated while the domain is + running. The optional attribute ``removable`` sets the removable flag for USB + disks, and its value can be either "on" or "off", defaulting to "off". + :since:`Since 0.0.3; ``bus`` attribute since 0.4.3; ``tray`` attribute since + 0.9.11; "usb" attribute value since after 0.4.4; "sata" attribute value since + 0.9.7; "removable" attribute value since 1.1.3` +``iotune`` + The optional ``iotune`` element provides the ability to provide additional + per-device I/O tuning, with values that can vary for each device (contrast + this to the `<blkiotune> <#elementsBlockTuning>`__ element, which applies + globally to the domain). Currently, the only tuning available is Block I/O + throttling for qemu. This element has optional sub-elements; any sub-element + not specified or given with a value of 0 implies no limit. :since:`Since + 0.9.8` + + ``total_bytes_sec`` + The optional ``total_bytes_sec`` element is the total throughput limit in + bytes per second. This cannot appear with ``read_bytes_sec`` or + ``write_bytes_sec``. + ``read_bytes_sec`` + The optional ``read_bytes_sec`` element is the read throughput limit in + bytes per second. + ``write_bytes_sec`` + The optional ``write_bytes_sec`` element is the write throughput limit in + bytes per second. + ``total_iops_sec`` + The optional ``total_iops_sec`` element is the total I/O operations per + second. This cannot appear with ``read_iops_sec`` or ``write_iops_sec``. + ``read_iops_sec`` + The optional ``read_iops_sec`` element is the read I/O operations per + second. + ``write_iops_sec`` + The optional ``write_iops_sec`` element is the write I/O operations per + second. + ``total_bytes_sec_max`` + The optional ``total_bytes_sec_max`` element is the maximum total + throughput limit in bytes per second. This cannot appear with + ``read_bytes_sec_max`` or ``write_bytes_sec_max``. + ``read_bytes_sec_max`` + The optional ``read_bytes_sec_max`` element is the maximum read throughput + limit in bytes per second. + ``write_bytes_sec_max`` + The optional ``write_bytes_sec_max`` element is the maximum write + throughput limit in bytes per second. + ``total_iops_sec_max`` + The optional ``total_iops_sec_max`` element is the maximum total I/O + operations per second. This cannot appear with ``read_iops_sec_max`` or + ``write_iops_sec_max``. + ``read_iops_sec_max`` + The optional ``read_iops_sec_max`` element is the maximum read I/O + operations per second. + ``write_iops_sec_max`` + The optional ``write_iops_sec_max`` element is the maximum write I/O + operations per second. + ``size_iops_sec`` + The optional ``size_iops_sec`` element is the size of I/O operations per + second. + + :since:`Throughput limits since 1.2.11 and QEMU 1.7` + + ``group_name`` + The optional ``group_name`` provides the cability to share I/O throttling + quota between multiple drives. This prevents end-users from circumventing + a hosting provider's throttling policy by splitting 1 large drive in N + small drives and getting N times the normal throttling quota. Any name may + be used. + + :since:`group_name since 3.0.0 and QEMU 2.4` + + ``total_bytes_sec_max_length`` + The optional ``total_bytes_sec_max_length`` element is the maximum + duration in seconds for the ``total_bytes_sec_max`` burst period. Only + valid when the ``total_bytes_sec_max`` is set. + ``read_bytes_sec_max_length`` + The optional ``read_bytes_sec_max_length`` element is the maximum duration + in seconds for the ``read_bytes_sec_max`` burst period. Only valid when + the ``read_bytes_sec_max`` is set. + ``write_bytes_sec_max`` + The optional ``write_bytes_sec_max_length`` element is the maximum + duration in seconds for the ``write_bytes_sec_max`` burst period. Only + valid when the ``write_bytes_sec_max`` is set. + ``total_iops_sec_max_length`` + The optional ``total_iops_sec_max_length`` element is the maximum duration + in seconds for the ``total_iops_sec_max`` burst period. Only valid when + the ``total_iops_sec_max`` is set. + ``read_iops_sec_max_length`` + The optional ``read_iops_sec_max_length`` element is the maximum duration + in seconds for the ``read_iops_sec_max`` burst period. Only valid when the + ``read_iops_sec_max`` is set. + ``write_iops_sec_max`` + The optional ``write_iops_sec_max_length`` element is the maximum duration + in seconds for the ``write_iops_sec_max`` burst period. Only valid when + the ``write_iops_sec_max`` is set. + + :since:`Throughput length since 2.4.0 and QEMU 2.6` + +``driver`` + The optional driver element allows specifying further details related to the + hypervisor driver used to provide the disk. :since:`Since 0.1.8` + + - If the hypervisor supports multiple backend drivers, then the ``name`` + attribute selects the primary backend driver name, while the optional + ``type`` attribute provides the sub-type. For example, xen supports a name + of "tap", "tap2", "phy", or "file", with a type of "aio", while qemu only + supports a name of "qemu", but multiple types including "raw", "bochs", + "qcow2", and "qed". + - The optional ``cache`` attribute controls the cache mechanism, possible + values are "default", "none", "writethrough", "writeback", "directsync" + (like "writethrough", but it bypasses the host page cache) and "unsafe" + (host may cache all disk io, and sync requests from guest are ignored). + :since:` Since 0.6.0, "directsync" since 0.9.5, "unsafe" since 0.9.7 ` + - The optional ``error_policy`` attribute controls how the hypervisor will + behave on a disk read or write error, possible values are "stop", + "report", "ignore", and "enospace". :since:`Since 0.8.0, "report" since + 0.9.7` The default is left to the discretion of the hypervisor. There is + also an optional ``rerror_policy`` that controls behavior for read errors + only. :since:`Since 0.9.7` . If no rerror_policy is given, error_policy is + used for both read and write errors. If rerror_policy is given, it + overrides the ``error_policy`` for read errors. Also note that "enospace" + is not a valid policy for read errors, so if ``error_policy`` is set to + "enospace" and no ``rerror_policy`` is given, the read error policy will + be left at its default. + - The optional ``io`` attribute controls specific policies on I/O; qemu + guests support "threads" and "native" :since:`Since 0.8.8` , io_uring + :since:`Since 6.3.0 (QEMU 5.0)` . + - The optional ``ioeventfd`` attribute allows users to set `domain I/O + asynchronous handling <https://patchwork.kernel.org/patch/43390/>`__ for + disk device. The default is left to the discretion of the hypervisor. + Accepted values are "on" and "off". Enabling this allows qemu to execute + VM while a separate thread handles I/O. Typically guests experiencing high + system CPU utilization during I/O will benefit from this. On the other + hand, on overloaded host it could increase guest I/O latency. + :since:`Since 0.9.3 (QEMU and KVM only)` **In general you should leave + this option alone, unless you are very certain you know what you are + doing.** + - The optional ``event_idx`` attribute controls some aspects of device event + processing. The value can be either 'on' or 'off' - if it is on, it will + reduce the number of interrupts and exits for the guest. The default is + determined by QEMU; usually if the feature is supported, default is on. In + case there is a situation where this behavior is suboptimal, this + attribute provides a way to force the feature off. :since:`Since 0.9.5 + (QEMU and KVM only)` **In general you should leave this option alone, + unless you are very certain you know what you are doing.** + - The optional ``copy_on_read`` attribute controls whether to copy read + backing file into the image file. The value can be either "on" or "off". + Copy-on-read avoids accessing the same backing file sectors repeatedly and + is useful when the backing file is over a slow network. By default + copy-on-read is off. :since:`Since 0.9.10 (QEMU and KVM only)` + - The optional ``discard`` attribute controls whether discard requests (also + known as "trim" or "unmap") are ignored or passed to the filesystem. The + value can be either "unmap" (allow the discard request to be passed) or + "ignore" (ignore the discard request). :since:`Since 1.0.6 (QEMU and KVM + only)` + - The optional ``detect_zeroes`` attribute controls whether to detect zero + write requests. The value can be "off", "on" or "unmap". First two values + turn the detection off and on, respectively. The third value ("unmap") + turns the detection on and additionally tries to discard such areas from + the image based on the value of ``discard`` above (it will act as "on" if + ``discard`` is set to "ignore"). NB enabling the detection is a compute + intensive operation, but can save file space and/or time on slow media. + :since:`Since 2.0.0` + - The optional ``iothread`` attribute assigns the disk to an IOThread as + defined by the range for the domain + `iothreads <#elementsIOThreadsAllocation>`__ value. Multiple disks may be + assigned to the same IOThread and are numbered from 1 to the domain + iothreads value. Available for a disk device ``target`` configured to use + "virtio" ``bus`` and "pci" or "ccw" ``address`` types. :since:`Since 1.2.8 + (QEMU 2.1)` + - The optional ``queues`` attribute specifies the number of virt queues for + virtio-blk. ( :since:`Since 3.9.0` ) + - For virtio disks, `Virtio-specific options <#elementsVirtio>`__ can also + be set. ( :since:`Since 3.5.0` ) + +``backenddomain`` + The optional ``backenddomain`` element allows specifying a backend domain + (aka driver domain) hosting the disk. Use the ``name`` attribute to specify + the backend domain name. :since:`Since 1.2.13 (Xen only)` +``boot`` + Specifies that the disk is bootable. The ``order`` attribute determines the + order in which devices will be tried during boot sequence. On the S390 + architecture only the first boot device is used. The optional ``loadparm`` + attribute is an 8 character string which can be queried by guests on S390 via + sclp or diag 308. Linux guests on S390 can use ``loadparm`` to select a boot + entry. :since:`Since 3.5.0` The per-device ``boot`` elements cannot be used + together with general boot elements in `BIOS bootloader <#elementsOSBIOS>`__ + section. :since:`Since 0.8.8` +``encryption`` + Starting with :since:`libvirt 3.9.0` the ``encryption`` element is preferred + to be a sub-element of the ``source`` element. If present, specifies how the + volume is encrypted using "qcow". See the `Storage + Encryption <formatstorageencryption.html>`__ page for more information. +``readonly`` + If present, this indicates the device cannot be modified by the guest. For + now, this is the default for disks with attribute ``device='cdrom'``. +``shareable`` + If present, this indicates the device is expected to be shared between + domains (assuming the hypervisor and OS support this), which means that + caching should be deactivated for that device. +``transient`` + If present, this indicates that changes to the device contents should be + reverted automatically when the guest exits. With some hypervisors, marking a + disk transient prevents the domain from participating in migration or + snapshots. Only suppported in vmx hypervisor. :since:`Since 0.9.5` +``serial`` + If present, this specify serial number of virtual hard drive. For example, it + may look like ``<serial>WD-WMAP9A966149</serial>``. Not supported for + scsi-block devices, that is those using disk ``type`` 'block' using + ``device`` 'lun' on ``bus`` 'scsi'. :since:`Since 0.7.1` +``wwn`` + If present, this element specifies the WWN (World Wide Name) of a virtual + hard disk or CD-ROM drive. It must be composed of 16 hexadecimal digits. + :since:`Since 0.10.1` +``vendor`` + If present, this element specifies the vendor of a virtual hard disk or + CD-ROM device. It must not be longer than 8 printable characters. + :since:`Since 1.0.1` +``product`` + If present, this element specifies the product of a virtual hard disk or + CD-ROM device. It must not be longer than 16 printable characters. + :since:`Since 1.0.1` +``address`` + If present, the ``address`` element ties the disk to a given slot of a + controller (the actual ``<controller>`` device can often be inferred by + libvirt, although it can be `explicitly specified <#elementsControllers>`__). + The ``type`` attribute is mandatory, and is typically "pci" or "drive". For a + "pci" controller, additional attributes for ``bus``, ``slot``, and + ``function`` must be present, as well as optional ``domain`` and + ``multifunction``. Multifunction defaults to 'off'; any other value requires + QEMU 0.1.3 and :since:`libvirt 0.9.7` . For a "drive" controller, additional + attributes ``controller``, ``bus``, ``target`` ( :since:`libvirt 0.9.11` ), + and ``unit`` are available, each defaulting to 0. +``auth`` + Starting with :since:`libvirt 3.9.0` the ``auth`` element is preferred to be + a sub-element of the ``source`` element. The element is still read and + managed as a ``disk`` sub-element. It is invalid to use ``auth`` as both a + sub-element of ``disk`` and ``source``. The ``auth`` element was introduced + as a ``disk`` sub-element in :since:`libvirt 0.9.7.` +``geometry`` + The optional ``geometry`` element provides the ability to override geometry + settings. This mostly useful for S390 DASD-disks or older DOS-disks. + :since:`0.10.0` + + ``cyls`` + The ``cyls`` attribute is the number of cylinders. + ``heads`` + The ``heads`` attribute is the number of heads. + ``secs`` + The ``secs`` attribute is the number of sectors per track. + ``trans`` + The optional ``trans`` attribute is the BIOS-Translation-Modus (none, lba + or auto) + +``blockio`` + If present, the ``blockio`` element allows to override any of the block + device properties listed below. :since:`Since 0.10.2 (QEMU and KVM)` + + ``logical_block_size`` + The logical block size the disk will report to the guest OS. For Linux + this would be the value returned by the BLKSSZGET ioctl and describes the + smallest units for disk I/O. + ``physical_block_size`` + The physical block size the disk will report to the guest OS. For Linux + this would be the value returned by the BLKPBSZGET ioctl and describes the + disk's hardware sector size which can be relevant for the alignment of + disk data. + +:anchor:`<a id="elementsFilesystems"/>` + +Filesystems +~~~~~~~~~~~ + +A directory on the host that can be accessed directly from the guest. +:since:`since 0.3.3, since 0.8.5 for QEMU/KVM` + +:: + + ... + <devices> + <filesystem type='template'> + <source name='my-vm-template'/> + <target dir='/'/> + </filesystem> + <filesystem type='mount' accessmode='passthrough' multidevs='remap'> + <driver type='path' wrpolicy='immediate'/> + <source dir='/export/to/guest'/> + <target dir='/import/from/host'/> + <readonly/> + </filesystem> + <filesystem type='file' accessmode='passthrough'> + <driver type='loop' format='raw'/> + <driver type='path' wrpolicy='immediate'/> + <source file='/export/to/guest.img'/> + <target dir='/import/from/host'/> + <readonly/> + </filesystem> + <filesystem type='mount' accessmode='passthrough'> + <driver type='virtiofs' queue='1024'/> + <binary path='/usr/libexec/virtiofsd' xattr='on'> + <cache mode='always'/> + <lock posix='on' flock='on'/> + </binary> + <source dir='/path'/> + <target dir='mount_tag'/> + </filesystem> + ... + </devices> + ... + +``filesystem`` + The filesystem attribute ``type`` specifies the type of the ``source``. The + possible values are: + + ``mount`` + A host directory to mount in the guest. Used by LXC, OpenVZ :since:`(since + 0.6.2)` and QEMU/KVM :since:`(since 0.8.5)` . This is the default ``type`` + if one is not specified. This mode also has an optional sub-element + ``driver``, with an attribute ``type='path'`` or ``type='handle'`` + :since:`(since 0.9.7)` . The driver block has an optional attribute + ``wrpolicy`` that further controls interaction with the host page cache; + omitting the attribute gives default behavior, while the value + ``immediate`` means that a host writeback is immediately triggered for all + pages touched during a guest file write operation :since:`(since 0.9.10)` + . :since:`Since 6.2.0` , ``type='virtiofs'`` is also supported. Using + virtiofs requires setting up shared memory, see the guide: + `Virtio-FS <kbase/virtiofs.html>`__ + ``template`` + OpenVZ filesystem template. Only used by OpenVZ driver. + ``file`` + A host file will be treated as an image and mounted in the guest. The + filesystem format will be autodetected. Only used by LXC driver. + ``block`` + A host block device to mount in the guest. The filesystem format will be + autodetected. Only used by LXC driver :since:`(since 0.9.5)` . + ``ram`` + An in-memory filesystem, using memory from the host OS. The source element + has a single attribute ``usage`` which gives the memory usage limit in + KiB, unless units are specified by the ``units`` attribute. Only used by + LXC driver. :since:` (since 0.9.13)` + ``bind`` + A directory inside the guest will be bound to another directory inside the + guest. Only used by LXC driver :since:` (since 0.9.13)` + + The filesystem element has an optional attribute ``accessmode`` which + specifies the security mode for accessing the source :since:`(since 0.8.5)` . + Currently this only works with ``type='mount'`` for the QEMU/KVM driver. For + driver type ``virtiofs``, only ``passthrough`` is supported. For other driver + types, the possible values are: + + ``passthrough`` + The ``source`` is accessed with the permissions of the user inside the + guest. This is the default ``accessmode`` if one is not specified. `More + info <http://lists.gnu.org/archive/html/qemu-devel/2010-05/msg02673.html>`__ + ``mapped`` + The ``source`` is accessed with the permissions of the hypervisor (QEMU + process). `More + info <http://lists.gnu.org/archive/html/qemu-devel/2010-05/msg02673.html>`__ + ``squash`` + Similar to 'passthrough', the exception is that failure of privileged + operations like 'chown' are ignored. This makes a passthrough-like mode + usable for people who run the hypervisor as non-root. `More + info <http://lists.gnu.org/archive/html/qemu-devel/2010-09/msg00121.html>`__ + + :since:`Since 5.2.0` , the filesystem element has an optional attribute + ``model`` with supported values "virtio-transitional", + "virtio-non-transitional", or "virtio". See `Virtio transitional + devices <#elementsVirtioTransitional>`__ for more details. + + The filesystem element has an optional attribute ``multidevs`` which + specifies how to deal with a filesystem export containing more than one + device, in order to avoid file ID collisions on guest when using 9pfs ( + :since:`since 6.3.0, requires QEMU 4.2` ). This attribute is not available + for virtiofs. The possible values are: + + ``default`` + Use QEMU's default setting (which currently is ``warn``). + ``remap`` + This setting allows guest to access multiple devices per export without + encountering misbehaviours. Inode numbers from host are automatically + remapped on guest to actively prevent file ID collisions if guest accesses + one export containing multiple devices. + ``forbid`` + Only allow to access one device per export by guest. Attempts to access + additional devices on the same export will cause the individual filesystem + access by guest to fail with an error and being logged (once) as error on + host side. + ``warn`` + This setting resembles the behaviour of 9pfs prior to QEMU 4.2, that is no + action is performed to prevent any potential file ID collisions if an + export contains multiple devices, with the only exception: a warning is + logged (once) on host side now. This setting may lead to misbehaviours on + guest side if more than one device is exported per export, due to the + potential file ID collisions this may cause on guest side in that case. + +``driver`` + The optional driver element allows specifying further details related to the + hypervisor driver used to provide the filesystem. :since:`Since 1.0.6` + + - If the hypervisor supports multiple backend drivers, then the ``type`` + attribute selects the primary backend driver name, while the ``format`` + attribute provides the format type. For example, LXC supports a type of + "loop", with a format of "raw" or "nbd" with any format. QEMU supports a + type of "path" or "handle", but no formats. Virtuozzo driver supports a + type of "ploop" with a format of "ploop". + - For virtio-backed devices, `Virtio-specific options <#elementsVirtio>`__ + can also be set. ( :since:`Since 3.5.0` ) + - For ``virtiofs``, the ``queue`` attribute can be used to specify the queue + size (i.e. how many requests can the queue fit). ( :since:`Since 6.2.0` ) + +``binary`` + The optional ``binary`` element can tune the options for virtiofsd. All of + the following attributes and elements are optional. The attribute ``path`` + can be used to override the path to the daemon. Attribute ``xattr`` enables + the use of filesystem extended attributes. Caching can be tuned via the + ``cache`` element, possible ``mode`` values being ``none`` and ``always``. + Locking can be controlled via the ``lock`` element - attributes ``posix`` and + ``flock`` both accepting values ``on`` or ``off``. ( :since:`Since 6.2.0` ) +``source`` + The resource on the host that is being accessed in the guest. The ``name`` + attribute must be used with ``type='template'``, and the ``dir`` attribute + must be used with ``type='mount'``. The ``usage`` attribute is used with + ``type='ram'`` to set the memory limit in KiB, unless units are specified by + the ``units`` attribute. +``target`` + Where the ``source`` can be accessed in the guest. For most drivers this is + an automatic mount point, but for QEMU/KVM this is merely an arbitrary string + tag that is exported to the guest as a hint for where to mount. +``readonly`` + Enables exporting filesystem as a readonly mount for guest, by default + read-write access is given (currently only works for QEMU/KVM driver). +``space_hard_limit`` + Maximum space available to this guest's filesystem. :since:`Since 0.9.13` +``space_soft_limit`` + Maximum space available to this guest's filesystem. The container is + permitted to exceed its soft limits for a grace period of time. Afterwards + the hard limit is enforced. :since:`Since 0.9.13` + +:anchor:`<a id="elementsAddress"/>` + +Device Addresses +~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ + +Many devices have an optional ``<address>`` sub-element to describe where the +device is placed on the virtual bus presented to the guest. If an address (or +any optional attribute within an address) is omitted on input, libvirt will +generate an appropriate address; but an explicit address is required if more +control over layout is required. See below for device examples including an +address element. + +Every address has a mandatory attribute ``type`` that describes which bus the +device is on. The choice of which address to use for a given device is +constrained in part by the device and the architecture of the guest. For +example, a ``<disk>`` device uses ``type='drive'``, while a ``<console>`` device +would use ``type='pci'`` on i686 or x86_64 guests, or ``type='spapr-vio'`` on +PowerPC64 pseries guests. Each address type has further optional attributes that +control where on the bus the device will be placed: + +``pci`` + PCI addresses have the following additional attributes: ``domain`` (a 2-byte + hex integer, not currently used by qemu), ``bus`` (a hex value between 0 and + 0xff, inclusive), ``slot`` (a hex value between 0x0 and 0x1f, inclusive), and + ``function`` (a value between 0 and 7, inclusive). Also available is the + ``multifunction`` attribute, which controls turning on the multifunction bit + for a particular slot/function in the PCI control register ( :since:`since + 0.9.7, requires QEMU 0.13` ). ``multifunction`` defaults to 'off', but should + be set to 'on' for function 0 of a slot that will have multiple functions + used. ( :since:`Since 4.10.0` ), PCI address extensions depending on the + architecture are supported. For example, PCI addresses for S390 guests will + have a ``zpci`` child element, with two attributes: ``uid`` (a hex value + between 0x0001 and 0xffff, inclusive), and ``fid`` (a hex value between + 0x00000000 and 0xffffffff, inclusive) used by PCI devices on S390 for + User-defined Identifiers and Function Identifiers. + :since:`Since 1.3.5` , some hypervisor drivers may accept an + ``<address type='pci'/>`` element with no other attributes as an explicit + request to assign a PCI address for the device rather than some other type of + address that may also be appropriate for that same device (e.g. virtio-mmio). + The relationship between the PCI addresses configured in the domain XML and + those seen by the guest OS can sometime seem confusing: a separate document + describes `how PCI addresses work <pci-addresses.html>`__ in more detail. +``drive`` + Drive addresses have the following additional attributes: ``controller`` (a + 2-digit controller number), ``bus`` (a 2-digit bus number), ``target`` (a + 2-digit target number), and ``unit`` (a 2-digit unit number on the bus). +``virtio-serial`` + Each virtio-serial address has the following additional attributes: + ``controller`` (a 2-digit controller number), ``bus`` (a 2-digit bus number), + and ``slot`` (a 2-digit slot within the bus). +``ccid`` + A CCID address, for smart-cards, has the following additional attributes: + ``bus`` (a 2-digit bus number), and ``slot`` attribute (a 2-digit slot within + the bus). :since:`Since 0.8.8.` +``usb`` + USB addresses have the following additional attributes: ``bus`` (a hex value + between 0 and 0xfff, inclusive), and ``port`` (a dotted notation of up to + four octets, such as 1.2 or 2.1.3.1). +``spapr-vio`` + On PowerPC pseries guests, devices can be assigned to the SPAPR-VIO bus. It + has a flat 32-bit address space; by convention, devices are generally + assigned at a non-zero multiple of 0x00001000, but other addresses are valid + and permitted by libvirt. Each address has the following additional + attribute: ``reg`` (the hex value address of the starting register). + :since:`Since 0.9.9.` +``ccw`` + S390 guests with a ``machine`` value of s390-ccw-virtio use the native CCW + bus for I/O devices. CCW bus addresses have the following additional + attributes: ``cssid`` (a hex value between 0 and 0xfe, inclusive), ``ssid`` + (a value between 0 and 3, inclusive) and ``devno`` (a hex value between 0 and + 0xffff, inclusive). Partially specified bus addresses are not allowed. If + omitted, libvirt will assign a free bus address with cssid=0xfe and ssid=0. + Virtio-ccw devices must have their cssid set to 0xfe. :since:`Since 1.0.4` +``virtio-mmio`` + This places the device on the virtio-mmio transport, which is currently only + available for some ``armv7l`` and ``aarch64`` virtual machines. virtio-mmio + addresses do not have any additional attributes. :since:`Since 1.1.3` + If the guest architecture is ``aarch64`` and the machine type is ``virt``, + libvirt will automatically assign PCI addresses to devices; however, the + presence of a single device with virtio-mmio address in the guest + configuration will cause libvirt to assign virtio-mmio addresses to all + further devices. :since:`Since 3.0.0` +``isa`` + ISA addresses have the following additional attributes: ``iobase`` and + ``irq``. :since:`Since 1.2.1` +``unassigned`` + For PCI hostdevs, ``<address type='unassigned'/>`` allows the admin to + include a PCI hostdev in the domain XML definition, without making it + available for the guest. This allows for configurations in which Libvirt + manages the device as a regular PCI hostdev, regardless of whether the guest + will have access to it. ``<address type='unassigned'/>`` is an invalid + address type for all other device types. :since:`Since 6.0.0` + +:anchor:`<a id="elementsVirtio"/>` + +Virtio-related options +~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ + +QEMU's virtio devices have some attributes related to the virtio transport under +the ``driver`` element: The ``iommu`` attribute enables the use of emulated +IOMMU by the device. The attribute ``ats`` controls the Address Translation +Service support for PCIe devices. This is needed to make use of IOTLB support +(see `IOMMU device <#elementsIommu>`__). Possible values are ``on`` or ``off``. +:since:`Since 3.5.0` + +The attribute ``packed`` controls if QEMU should try to use packed virtqueues. +Compared to regular split queues, packed queues consist of only a single +descriptor ring replacing available and used ring, index and descriptor buffer. +This can result in better cache utilization and performance. If packed +virtqueues are actually used depends on the feature negotiation between QEMU, +vhost backends and guest drivers. Possible values are ``on`` or ``off``. +:since:`Since 6.3.0 (QEMU and KVM only)` + +:anchor:`<a id="elementsVirtioTransitional"/>` + +Virtio transitional devices +~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ + +:since:`Since 5.2.0` , some of QEMU's virtio devices, when used with PCI/PCIe +machine types, accept the following ``model`` values: + +``virtio-transitional`` + This device can work both with virtio 0.9 and virtio 1.0 guest drivers, so + it's the best choice when compatibility with older guest operating systems is + desired. libvirt will plug the device into a conventional PCI slot. +``virtio-non-transitional`` + This device can only work with virtio 1.0 guest drivers, and it's the + recommended option unless compatibility with older guest operating systems is + necessary. libvirt will plug the device into either a PCI Express slot or a + conventional PCI slot based on the machine type, resulting in a more + optimized PCI topology. +``virtio`` + This device will work like a ``virtio-non-transitional`` device when plugged + into a PCI Express slot, and like a ``virtio-transitional`` device otherwise; + libvirt will pick one or the other based on the machine type. This is the + best choice when compatibility with libvirt versions older than 5.2.0 is + necessary, but it's otherwise not recommended to use it. + +While the information outlined above applies to most virtio devices, there are a +few exceptions: + +- for SCSI controllers, ``virtio-scsi`` must be used instead of ``virtio`` for + backwards compatibility reasons; +- some devices, such as GPUs and input devices (keyboard, tablet and mouse), + are only defined in the virtio 1.0 spec and as such don't have a transitional + variant: the only accepted model is ``virtio``, which will result in a + non-transitional device. + +For more details see the `qemu patch +posting <https://lists.gnu.org/archive/html/qemu-devel/2018-12/msg00923.html>`__ +and the `virtio-1.0 +spec <http://docs.oasis-open.org/virtio/virtio/v1.0/virtio-v1.0.html>`__. + +:anchor:`<a id="elementsControllers"/>` + +Controllers +~~~~~~~~~~~ + +Depending on the guest architecture, some device buses can appear more than +once, with a group of virtual devices tied to a virtual controller. Normally, +libvirt can automatically infer such controllers without requiring explicit XML +markup, but sometimes it is necessary to provide an explicit controller element, +notably when planning the `PCI topology <pci-hotplug.html>`__ for guests where +device hotplug is expected. + +:: + + ... + <devices> + <controller type='ide' index='0'/> + <controller type='virtio-serial' index='0' ports='16' vectors='4'/> + <controller type='virtio-serial' index='1'> + <address type='pci' domain='0x0000' bus='0x00' slot='0x0a' function='0x0'/> + </controller> + <controller type='scsi' index='0' model='virtio-scsi'> + <driver iothread='4'/> + <address type='pci' domain='0x0000' bus='0x00' slot='0x0b' function='0x0'/> + </controller> + <controller type='xenbus' maxGrantFrames='64' maxEventChannels='2047'/> + ... + </devices> + ... + +Each controller has a mandatory attribute ``type``, which must be one of 'ide', +'fdc', 'scsi', 'sata', 'usb', 'ccid', 'virtio-serial' or 'pci', and a mandatory +attribute ``index`` which is the decimal integer describing in which order the +bus controller is encountered (for use in ``controller`` attributes of +``<address>`` elements). :since:`Since 1.3.5` the index is optional; if not +specified, it will be auto-assigned to be the lowest unused index for the given +controller type. Some controller types have additional attributes that control +specific features, such as: + +``virtio-serial`` + The ``virtio-serial`` controller has two additional optional attributes + ``ports`` and ``vectors``, which control how many devices can be connected + through the controller. :since:`Since 5.2.0` , it supports an optional + attribute ``model`` which can be 'virtio', 'virtio-transitional', or + 'virtio-non-transitional'. See `Virtio transitional + devices <#elementsVirtioTransitional>`__ for more details. +``scsi`` + A ``scsi`` controller has an optional attribute ``model``, which is one of + 'auto', 'buslogic', 'ibmvscsi', 'lsilogic', 'lsisas1068', 'lsisas1078', + 'virtio-scsi', 'vmpvscsi', 'virtio-transitional', 'virtio-non-transitional'. + See `Virtio transitional devices <#elementsVirtioTransitional>`__ for more + details. +``usb`` + A ``usb`` controller has an optional attribute ``model``, which is one of + "piix3-uhci", "piix4-uhci", "ehci", "ich9-ehci1", "ich9-uhci1", "ich9-uhci2", + "ich9-uhci3", "vt82c686b-uhci", "pci-ohci", "nec-xhci", "qusb1" (xen pvusb + with qemu backend, version 1.1), "qusb2" (xen pvusb with qemu backend, + version 2.0) or "qemu-xhci". Additionally, :since:`since 0.10.0` , if the USB + bus needs to be explicitly disabled for the guest, ``model='none'`` may be + used. :since:`Since 1.0.5` , no default USB controller will be built on s390. + :since:`Since 1.3.5` , USB controllers accept a ``ports`` attribute to + configure how many devices can be connected to the controller. +``ide`` + :since:`Since 3.10.0` for the vbox driver, the ``ide`` controller has an + optional attribute ``model``, which is one of "piix3", "piix4" or "ich6". +``xenbus`` + :since:`Since 5.2.0` , the ``xenbus`` controller has an optional attribute + ``maxGrantFrames``, which specifies the maximum number of grant frames the + controller makes available for connected devices. :since:`Since 6.3.0` , the + xenbus controller supports the optional ``maxEventChannels`` attribute, which + specifies maximum number of event channels (PV interrupts) that can be used + by the guest. + +Note: The PowerPC64 "spapr-vio" addresses do not have an associated controller. + +For controllers that are themselves devices on a PCI or USB bus, an optional +sub-element ``<address>`` can specify the exact relationship of the controller +to its master bus, with semantics `given above <#elementsAddress>`__. + +An optional sub-element ``driver`` can specify the driver specific options: + +``queues`` + The optional ``queues`` attribute specifies the number of queues for the + controller. For best performance, it's recommended to specify a value + matching the number of vCPUs. :since:`Since 1.0.5 (QEMU and KVM only)` +``cmd_per_lun`` + The optional ``cmd_per_lun`` attribute specifies the maximum number of + commands that can be queued on devices controlled by the host. :since:`Since + 1.2.7 (QEMU and KVM only)` +``max_sectors`` + The optional ``max_sectors`` attribute specifies the maximum amount of data + in bytes that will be transferred to or from the device in a single command. + The transfer length is measured in sectors, where a sector is 512 bytes. + :since:`Since 1.2.7 (QEMU and KVM only)` +``ioeventfd`` + The optional ``ioeventfd`` attribute specifies whether the controller should + use `I/O asynchronous handling <https://patchwork.kernel.org/patch/43390/>`__ + or not. Accepted values are "on" and "off". :since:`Since 1.2.18` +``iothread`` + Supported for controller type ``scsi`` using model ``virtio-scsi`` for + ``address`` types ``pci`` and ``ccw`` :since:`since 1.3.5 (QEMU 2.4)` . The + optional ``iothread`` attribute assigns the controller to an IOThread as + defined by the range for the domain + `iothreads <#elementsIOThreadsAllocation>`__ value. Each SCSI ``disk`` + assigned to use the specified ``controller`` will utilize the same IOThread. + If a specific IOThread is desired for a specific SCSI ``disk``, then multiple + controllers must be defined each having a specific ``iothread`` value. The + ``iothread`` value must be within the range 1 to the domain iothreads value. +virtio options + For virtio controllers, `Virtio-specific options <#elementsVirtio>`__ can + also be set. ( :since:`Since 3.5.0` ) + +USB companion controllers have an optional sub-element ``<master>`` to specify +the exact relationship of the companion to its master controller. A companion +controller is on the same bus as its master, so the companion ``index`` value +should be equal. Not all controller models can be used as companion controllers +and libvirt might provide some sensible defaults (settings of +``master startport`` and ``function`` of an address) for some particular models. +Preferred companion controllers are ``ich-uhci[123]``. + +:: + + ... + <devices> + <controller type='usb' index='0' model='ich9-ehci1'> + <address type='pci' domain='0' bus='0' slot='4' function='7'/> + </controller> + <controller type='usb' index='0' model='ich9-uhci1'> + <master startport='0'/> + <address type='pci' domain='0' bus='0' slot='4' function='0' multifunction='on'/> + </controller> + ... + </devices> + ... + +PCI controllers have an optional ``model`` attribute; possible values for this +attribute are + +- ``pci-root``, ``pci-bridge`` ( :since:`since 1.0.5` ) +- ``pcie-root``, ``dmi-to-pci-bridge`` ( :since:`since 1.1.2` ) +- ``pcie-root-port``, ``pcie-switch-upstream-port``, + ``pcie-switch-downstream-port`` ( :since:`since 1.2.19` ) +- ``pci-expander-bus``, ``pcie-expander-bus`` ( :since:`since 1.3.4` ) +- ``pcie-to-pci-bridge`` ( :since:`since 4.3.0` ) + +The root controllers (``pci-root`` and ``pcie-root``) have an optional +``pcihole64`` element specifying how big (in kilobytes, or in the unit specified +by ``pcihole64``'s ``unit`` attribute) the 64-bit PCI hole should be. Some +guests (like Windows XP or Windows Server 2003) might crash when QEMU and +Seabios are recent enough to support 64-bit PCI holes, unless this is disabled +(set to 0). :since:`Since 1.1.2 (QEMU only)` + +PCI controllers also have an optional subelement ``<model>`` with an attribute +``name``. The name attribute holds the name of the specific device that qemu is +emulating (e.g. "i82801b11-bridge") rather than simply the class of device +("pcie-to-pci-bridge", "pci-bridge"), which is set in the controller element's +model **attribute**. In almost all cases, you should not manually add a +``<model>`` subelement to a controller, nor should you modify one that is +automatically generated by libvirt. :since:`Since 1.2.19 (QEMU only).` + +PCI controllers also have an optional subelement ``<target>`` with the +attributes and subelements listed below. These are configurable items that 1) +are visible to the guest OS so must be preserved for guest ABI compatibility, +and 2) are usually left to default values or derived automatically by libvirt. +In almost all cases, you should not manually add a ``<target>`` subelement to a +controller, nor should you modify the values in the those that are automatically +generated by libvirt. :since:`Since 1.2.19 (QEMU only).` + +``chassisNr`` + PCI controllers that have attribute model="pci-bridge", can also have a + ``chassisNr`` attribute in the ``<target>`` subelement, which is used to + control QEMU's "chassis_nr" option for the pci-bridge device (normally + libvirt automatically sets this to the same value as the index attribute of + the pci controller). If set, chassisNr must be between 1 and 255. +``chassis`` + pcie-root-port and pcie-switch-downstream-port controllers can also have a + ``chassis`` attribute in the ``<target>`` subelement, which is used to set + the controller's "chassis" configuration value, which is visible to the + virtual machine. If set, chassis must be between 0 and 255. +``port`` + pcie-root-port and pcie-switch-downstream-port controllers can also have a + ``port`` attribute in the ``<target>`` subelement, which is used to set the + controller's "port" configuration value, which is visible to the virtual + machine. If set, port must be between 0 and 255. +``hotplug`` + pcie-root-port and pcie-switch-downstream-port controllers can also have a + ``hotplug`` attribute in the ``<target>`` subelement, which is used to + disable hotplug/unplug of devices on a particular controller. The default + setting of ``hotplug`` is ``on``; it should be set to ``off`` to disable + hotplug/unplug of devices on a particular controller. :since:`Since 6.3.0` +``busNr`` + pci-expander-bus and pcie-expander-bus controllers can have an optional + ``busNr`` attribute (1-254). This will be the bus number of the new bus; All + bus numbers between that specified and 255 will be available only for + assignment to PCI/PCIe controllers plugged into the hierarchy starting with + this expander bus, and bus numbers less than the specified value will be + available to the next lower expander-bus (or the root-bus if there are no + lower expander buses). If you do not specify a busNumber, libvirt will find + the lowest existing busNumber in all other expander buses (or use 256 if + there are no others) and auto-assign the busNr of that found bus - 2, which + provides one bus number for the pci-expander-bus and one for the pci-bridge + that is automatically attached to it (if you plan on adding more pci-bridges + to the hierarchy of the bus, you should manually set busNr to a lower value). + + A similar algorithm is used for automatically determining the busNr attribute + for pcie-expander-bus, but since the pcie-expander-bus doesn't have any + built-in pci-bridge, the 2nd bus-number is just being reserved for the + pcie-root-port that must necessarily be connected to the bus in order to + actually plug in an endpoint device. If you intend to plug multiple devices + into a pcie-expander-bus, you must connect a pcie-switch-upstream-port to the + pcie-root-port that is plugged into the pcie-expander-bus, and multiple + pcie-switch-downstream-ports to the pcie-switch-upstream-port, and of course + for this to work properly, you will need to decrease the pcie-expander-bus' + busNr accordingly so that there are enough unused bus numbers above it to + accommodate giving out one bus number for the upstream-port and one for each + downstream-port (in addition to the pcie-root-port and the pcie-expander-bus + itself). + +``node`` + Some PCI controllers (``pci-expander-bus`` for the pc machine type, + ``pcie-expander-bus`` for the q35 machine type and, :since:`since 3.6.0` , + ``pci-root`` for the pseries machine type) can have an optional ``<node>`` + subelement within the ``<target>`` subelement, which is used to set the NUMA + node reported to the guest OS for that bus - the guest OS will then know that + all devices on that bus are a part of the specified NUMA node (it is up to + the user of the libvirt API to attach host devices to the correct + pci-expander-bus when assigning them to the domain). +``index`` + pci-root controllers for pSeries guests use this attribute to record the + order they will show up in the guest. :since:`Since 3.6.0` + +For machine types which provide an implicit PCI bus, the pci-root controller +with index=0 is auto-added and required to use PCI devices. pci-root has no +address. PCI bridges are auto-added if there are too many devices to fit on the +one bus provided by pci-root, or a PCI bus number greater than zero was +specified. PCI bridges can also be specified manually, but their addresses +should only refer to PCI buses provided by already specified PCI controllers. +Leaving gaps in the PCI controller indexes might lead to an invalid +configuration. + +:: + + ... + <devices> + <controller type='pci' index='0' model='pci-root'/> + <controller type='pci' index='1' model='pci-bridge'> + <address type='pci' domain='0' bus='0' slot='5' function='0' multifunction='off'/> + </controller> + </devices> + ... + +For machine types which provide an implicit PCI Express (PCIe) bus (for example, +the machine types based on the Q35 chipset), the pcie-root controller with +index=0 is auto-added to the domain's configuration. pcie-root has also no +address, provides 31 slots (numbered 1-31) that can be used to attach PCIe or +PCI devices (although libvirt will never auto-assign a PCI device to a PCIe +slot, it will allow manual specification of such an assignment). Devices +connected to pcie-root cannot be hotplugged. If traditional PCI devices are +present in the guest configuration, a ``pcie-to-pci-bridge`` controller will +automatically be added: this controller, which plugs into a ``pcie-root-port``, +provides 31 usable PCI slots (1-31) with hotplug support ( :since:`since 4.3.0` +). If the QEMU binary doesn't support the corresponding device, then a +``dmi-to-pci-bridge`` controller will be added instead, usually at the defacto +standard location of slot=0x1e. A dmi-to-pci-bridge controller plugs into a PCIe +slot (as provided by pcie-root), and itself provides 31 standard PCI slots +(which also do not support device hotplug). In order to have hot-pluggable PCI +slots in the guest system, a pci-bridge controller will also be automatically +created and connected to one of the slots of the auto-created dmi-to-pci-bridge +controller; all guest PCI devices with addresses that are auto-determined by +libvirt will be placed on this pci-bridge device. ( :since:`since 1.1.2` ). + +Domains with an implicit pcie-root can also add controllers with +``model='pcie-root-port'``, ``model='pcie-switch-upstream-port'``, and +``model='pcie-switch-downstream-port'``. pcie-root-port is a simple type of +bridge device that can connect only to one of the 31 slots on the pcie-root bus +on its upstream side, and makes a single (PCIe, hotpluggable) port available on +the downstream side (at slot='0'). pcie-root-port can be used to provide a +single slot to later hotplug a PCIe device (but is not itself hotpluggable - it +must be in the configuration when the domain is started). ( :since:`since +1.2.19` ) + +pcie-switch-upstream-port is a more flexible (but also more complex) device that +can only plug into a pcie-root-port or pcie-switch-downstream-port on the +upstream side (and only before the domain is started - it is not hot-pluggable), +and provides 32 ports on the downstream side (slot='0' - slot='31') that accept +only pcie-switch-downstream-port devices; each pcie-switch-downstream-port +device can only plug into a pcie-switch-upstream-port on its upstream side +(again, not hot-pluggable), and on its downstream side provides a single +hotpluggable pcie port that can accept any standard pci or pcie device (or +another pcie-switch-upstream-port), i.e. identical in function to a +pcie-root-port. ( :since:`since 1.2.19` ) + +:: + + ... + <devices> + <controller type='pci' index='0' model='pcie-root'/> + <controller type='pci' index='1' model='pcie-root-port'> + <address type='pci' domain='0x0000' bus='0x00' slot='0x01' function='0x0'/> + </controller> + <controller type='pci' index='2' model='pcie-to-pci-bridge'> + <address type='pci' domain='0x0000' bus='0x01' slot='0x00' function='0x0'/> + </controller> + </devices> + ... + +:anchor:`<a id="elementsLease"/>` + +Device leases +~~~~~~~~~~~~~ + +When using a lock manager, it may be desirable to record device leases against a +VM. The lock manager will ensure the VM won't start unless the leases can be +acquired. + +:: + + ... + <devices> + ... + <lease> + <lockspace>somearea</lockspace> + <key>somekey</key> + <target path='/some/lease/path' offset='1024'/> + </lease> + ... + </devices> + ... + +``lockspace`` + This is an arbitrary string, identifying the lockspace within which the key + is held. Lock managers may impose extra restrictions on the format, or length + of the lockspace name. +``key`` + This is an arbitrary string, uniquely identifying the lease to be acquired. + Lock managers may impose extra restrictions on the format, or length of the + key. +``target`` + This is the fully qualified path of the file associated with the lockspace. + The offset specifies where the lease is stored within the file. If the lock + manager does not require an offset, just pass 0. + +:anchor:`<a id="elementsHostDev"/>` + +Host device assignment +~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ + +:anchor:`<a id="elementsHostDevSubsys"/>` + +USB / PCI / SCSI devices +^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^ + +USB, PCI and SCSI devices attached to the host can be passed through to the +guest using the ``hostdev`` element. :since:`since after 0.4.4 for USB, 0.6.0 +for PCI (KVM only) and 1.0.6 for SCSI (KVM only)` : + +:: + + ... + <devices> + <hostdev mode='subsystem' type='usb'> + <source startupPolicy='optional'> + <vendor id='0x1234'/> + <product id='0xbeef'/> + </source> + <boot order='2'/> + </hostdev> + </devices> + ... + +or: + +:: + + ... + <devices> + <hostdev mode='subsystem' type='pci' managed='yes'> + <source> + <address domain='0x0000' bus='0x06' slot='0x02' function='0x0'/> + </source> + <boot order='1'/> + <rom bar='on' file='/etc/fake/boot.bin'/> + </hostdev> + </devices> + ... + +or: + +:: + + ... + <devices> + <hostdev mode='subsystem' type='scsi' sgio='filtered' rawio='yes'> + <source> + <adapter name='scsi_host0'/> + <address bus='0' target='0' unit='0'/> + </source> + <readonly/> + <address type='drive' controller='0' bus='0' target='0' unit='0'/> + </hostdev> + </devices> + ... + +or: + +:: + + ... + <devices> + <hostdev mode='subsystem' type='scsi'> + <source protocol='iscsi' name='iqn.2014-08.com.example:iscsi-nopool/1'> + <host name='example.com' port='3260'/> + <auth username='myuser'> + <secret type='iscsi' usage='libvirtiscsi'/> + </auth> + </source> + <address type='drive' controller='0' bus='0' target='0' unit='0'/> + </hostdev> + </devices> + ... + +or: + +:: + + ... + <devices> + <hostdev mode='subsystem' type='scsi_host'> + <source protocol='vhost' wwpn='naa.50014057667280d8'/> + </hostdev> + </devices> + ... + +or: + +:: + + ... + <devices> + <hostdev mode='subsystem' type='mdev' model='vfio-pci'> + <source> + <address uuid='c2177883-f1bb-47f0-914d-32a22e3a8804'/> + </source> + </hostdev> + <hostdev mode='subsystem' type='mdev' model='vfio-ccw'> + <source> + <address uuid='9063cba3-ecef-47b6-abcf-3fef4fdcad85'/> + </source> + <address type='ccw' cssid='0xfe' ssid='0x0' devno='0x0001'/> + </hostdev> + </devices> + ... + +``hostdev`` + The ``hostdev`` element is the main container for describing host devices. + For each device, the ``mode`` is always "subsystem" and the ``type`` is one + of the following values with additional attributes noted. + + ``usb`` + USB devices are detached from the host on guest startup and reattached + after the guest exits or the device is hot-unplugged. + ``pci`` + For PCI devices, when ``managed`` is "yes" it is detached from the host + before being passed on to the guest and reattached to the host after the + guest exits. If ``managed`` is omitted or "no", the user is responsible to + call ``virNodeDeviceDetachFlags`` (or ``virsh nodedev-detach`` before + starting the guest or hot-plugging the device and + ``virNodeDeviceReAttach`` (or ``virsh nodedev-reattach``) after hot-unplug + or stopping the guest. + ``scsi`` + For SCSI devices, user is responsible to make sure the device is not used + by host. If supported by the hypervisor and OS, the optional ``sgio`` ( + :since:`since 1.0.6` ) attribute indicates whether unprivileged SG_IO + commands are filtered for the disk. Valid settings are "filtered" or + "unfiltered", where the default is "filtered". The optional ``rawio`` ( + :since:`since 1.2.9` ) attribute indicates whether the lun needs the rawio + capability. Valid settings are "yes" or "no". See the rawio description + within the `disk <#elementsDisks>`__ section. If a disk lun in the domain + already has the rawio capability, then this setting not required. + ``scsi_host`` + :since:`since 2.5.0` For SCSI devices, user is responsible to make sure + the device is not used by host. This ``type`` passes all LUNs presented by + a single HBA to the guest. :since:`Since 5.2.0,` the ``model`` attribute + can be specified further with "virtio-transitional", + "virtio-non-transitional", or "virtio". See `Virtio transitional + devices <#elementsVirtioTransitional>`__ for more details. + ``mdev`` + For mediated devices ( :since:`Since 3.2.0` ) the ``model`` attribute + specifies the device API which determines how the host's vfio driver will + expose the device to the guest. Currently, ``model='vfio-pci'``, + ``model='vfio-ccw'`` ( :since:`Since 4.4.0` ) and ``model='vfio-ap'`` ( + :since:`Since 4.9.0` ) is supported. `MDEV <drvnodedev.html#MDEV>`__ + section provides more information about mediated devices as well as how to + create mediated devices on the host. :since:`Since 4.6.0 (QEMU 2.12)` an + optional ``display`` attribute may be used to enable or disable support + for an accelerated remote desktop backed by a mediated device (such as + NVIDIA vGPU or Intel GVT-g) as an alternative to emulated `video + devices <#elementsVideo>`__. This attribute is limited to + ``model='vfio-pci'`` only. Supported values are either ``on`` or ``off`` + (default is 'off'). It is required to use a `graphical + framebuffer <#elementsGraphics>`__ in order to use this attribute, + currently only supported with VNC, Spice and egl-headless graphics + devices. :since:`Since version 5.10.0` , there is an optional ``ramfb`` + attribute for devices with ``model='vfio-pci'``. Supported values are + either ``on`` or ``off`` (default is 'off'). When enabled, this attribute + provides a memory framebuffer device to the guest. This framebuffer will + be used as a boot display when a vgpu device is the primary display. + + Note: There are also some implications on the usage of guest's address + type depending on the ``model`` attribute, see the ``address`` element + below. + + Note: The ``managed`` attribute is only used with ``type='pci'`` and is + ignored by all the other device types, thus setting ``managed`` explicitly + with other than a PCI device has the same effect as omitting it. Similarly, + ``model`` attribute is only supported by mediated devices and ignored by all + other device types. + +``source`` + The source element describes the device as seen from the host using the + following mechanism to describe: + + ``usb`` + The USB device can either be addressed by vendor / product id using the + ``vendor`` and ``product`` elements or by the device's address on the host + using the ``address`` element. + + :since:`Since 1.0.0` , the ``source`` element of USB devices may contain + ``startupPolicy`` attribute which can be used to define policy what to do + if the specified host USB device is not found. The attribute accepts the + following values: + + ========= ===================================================================== + mandatory fail if missing for any reason (the default) + requisite fail if missing on boot up, drop if missing on migrate/restore/revert + optional drop if missing at any start attempt + ========= ===================================================================== + + ``pci`` + PCI devices can only be described by their ``address``. + ``scsi`` + SCSI devices are described by both the ``adapter`` and ``address`` + elements. The ``address`` element includes a ``bus`` attribute (a 2-digit + bus number), a ``target`` attribute (a 10-digit target number), and a + ``unit`` attribute (a 20-digit unit number on the bus). Not all + hypervisors support larger ``target`` and ``unit`` values. It is up to + each hypervisor to determine the maximum value supported for the adapter. + + :since:`Since 1.2.8` , the ``source`` element of a SCSI device may contain + the ``protocol`` attribute. When the attribute is set to "iscsi", the host + device XML follows the network `disk <#elementsDisks>`__ device using the + same ``name`` attribute and optionally using the ``auth`` element to + provide the authentication credentials to the iSCSI server. + + ``scsi_host`` + :since:`Since 2.5.0` , multiple LUNs behind a single SCSI HBA are + described by a ``protocol`` attribute set to "vhost" and a ``wwpn`` + attribute that is the vhost_scsi wwpn (16 hexadecimal digits with a prefix + of "naa.") established in the host configfs. + ``mdev`` + Mediated devices ( :since:`Since 3.2.0` ) are described by the ``address`` + element. The ``address`` element contains a single mandatory attribute + ``uuid``. + +``vendor``, ``product`` + The ``vendor`` and ``product`` elements each have an ``id`` attribute that + specifies the USB vendor and product id. The ids can be given in decimal, + hexadecimal (starting with 0x) or octal (starting with 0) form. +``boot`` + Specifies that the device is bootable. The ``order`` attribute determines the + order in which devices will be tried during boot sequence. The per-device + ``boot`` elements cannot be used together with general boot elements in `BIOS + bootloader <#elementsOSBIOS>`__ section. :since:`Since 0.8.8` for PCI + devices, :since:`Since 1.0.1` for USB devices. +``rom`` + The ``rom`` element is used to change how a PCI device's ROM is presented to + the guest. The optional ``bar`` attribute can be set to "on" or "off", and + determines whether or not the device's ROM will be visible in the guest's + memory map. (In PCI documentation, the "rombar" setting controls the presence + of the Base Address Register for the ROM). If no rom bar is specified, the + qemu default will be used (older versions of qemu used a default of "off", + while newer qemus have a default of "on"). :since:`Since 0.9.7 (QEMU and KVM + only)` . The optional ``file`` attribute contains an absolute path to a + binary file to be presented to the guest as the device's ROM BIOS. This can + be useful, for example, to provide a PXE boot ROM for a virtual function of + an sr-iov capable ethernet device (which has no boot ROMs for the VFs). + :since:`Since 0.9.10 (QEMU and KVM only)` . The optional ``enabled`` + attribute can be set to ``no`` to disable PCI ROM loading completely for the + device; if PCI ROM loading is disabled through this attribute, attempts to + tweak the loading process further using the ``bar`` or ``file`` attributes + will be rejected. :since:`Since 4.3.0 (QEMU and KVM only)` . +``address`` + The ``address`` element for USB devices has a ``bus`` and ``device`` + attribute to specify the USB bus and device number the device appears at on + the host. The values of these attributes can be given in decimal, hexadecimal + (starting with 0x) or octal (starting with 0) form. For PCI devices the + element carries 4 attributes allowing to designate the device as can be found + with the ``lspci`` or with ``virsh nodedev-list``. For SCSI devices a 'drive' + address type must be used. For mediated devices, which are software-only + devices defining an allocation of resources on the physical parent device, + the address type used must conform to the ``model`` attribute of element + ``hostdev``, e.g. any address type other than PCI for ``vfio-pci`` device API + or any address type other than CCW for ``vfio-ccw`` device API will result in + an error. `See above <#elementsAddress>`__ for more details on the address + element. +``driver`` + PCI devices can have an optional ``driver`` subelement that specifies which + backend driver to use for PCI device assignment. Use the ``name`` attribute + to select either "vfio" (for the new VFIO device assignment backend, which is + compatible with UEFI SecureBoot) or "kvm" (the legacy device assignment + handled directly by the KVM kernel module) :since:`Since 1.0.5 (QEMU and KVM + only, requires kernel 3.6 or newer)` . When specified, device assignment will + fail if the requested method of device assignment isn't available on the + host. When not specified, the default is "vfio" on systems where the VFIO + driver is available and loaded, and "kvm" on older systems, or those where + the VFIO driver hasn't been loaded :since:`Since 1.1.3` (prior to that the + default was always "kvm"). +``readonly`` + Indicates that the device is readonly, only supported by SCSI host device + now. :since:`Since 1.0.6 (QEMU and KVM only)` +``shareable`` + If present, this indicates the device is expected to be shared between + domains (assuming the hypervisor and OS support this). Only supported by SCSI + host device. :since:`Since 1.0.6` + + Note: Although ``shareable`` was introduced :since:`in 1.0.6` , it did not + work as as expected until :since:`1.2.2` . + +:anchor:`<a id="elementsHostDevCaps"/>` + +Block / character devices +^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^ + +Block / character devices from the host can be passed through to the guest using +the ``hostdev`` element. This is only possible with container based +virtualization. Devices are specified by a fully qualified path. :since:`since +after 1.0.1 for LXC` : + +:: + + ... + <hostdev mode='capabilities' type='storage'> + <source> + <block>/dev/sdf1</block> + </source> + </hostdev> + ... + +:: + + ... + <hostdev mode='capabilities' type='misc'> + <source> + <char>/dev/input/event3</char> + </source> + </hostdev> + ... + +:: + + ... + <hostdev mode='capabilities' type='net'> + <source> + <interface>eth0</interface> + </source> + </hostdev> + ... + +``hostdev`` + The ``hostdev`` element is the main container for describing host devices. + For block/character device passthrough ``mode`` is always "capabilities" and + ``type`` is "storage" for a block device, "misc" for a character device and + "net" for a host network interface. +``source`` + The source element describes the device as seen from the host. For block + devices, the path to the block device in the host OS is provided in the + nested "block" element, while for character devices the "char" element is + used. For network interfaces, the name of the interface is provided in the + "interface" element. + +:anchor:`<a id="elementsRedir"/>` + +Redirected devices +~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ + +USB device redirection through a character device is supported :since:`since +after 0.9.5 (KVM only)` : + +:: + + ... + <devices> + <redirdev bus='usb' type='tcp'> + <source mode='connect' host='localhost' service='4000'/> + <boot order='1'/> + </redirdev> + <redirfilter> + <usbdev class='0x08' vendor='0x1234' product='0xbeef' version='2.56' allow='yes'/> + <usbdev allow='no'/> + </redirfilter> + </devices> + ... + +``redirdev`` + The ``redirdev`` element is the main container for describing redirected + devices. ``bus`` must be "usb" for a USB device. An additional attribute + ``type`` is required, matching one of the supported `serial + device <#elementsConsole>`__ types, to describe the host side of the tunnel; + ``type='tcp'`` or ``type='spicevmc'`` (which uses the usbredir channel of a + `SPICE graphics device <#elementsGraphics>`__) are typical. The redirdev + element has an optional sub-element ``<address>`` which can tie the device to + a particular controller. Further sub-elements, such as ``<source>``, may be + required according to the given type, although a ``<target>`` sub-element is + not required (since the consumer of the character device is the hypervisor + itself, rather than a device visible in the guest). +``boot`` + Specifies that the device is bootable. The ``order`` attribute determines the + order in which devices will be tried during boot sequence. The per-device + ``boot`` elements cannot be used together with general boot elements in `BIOS + bootloader <#elementsOSBIOS>`__ section. ( :since:`Since 1.0.1` ) +``redirfilter`` + The\ ``redirfilter``\ element is used for creating the filter rule to filter + out certain devices from redirection. It uses sub-element ``<usbdev>`` to + define each filter rule. ``class`` attribute is the USB Class code, for + example, 0x08 represents mass storage devices. The USB device can be + addressed by vendor / product id using the ``vendor`` and ``product`` + attributes. ``version`` is the device revision from the bcdDevice field (not + the version of the USB protocol). These four attributes are optional and + ``-1`` can be used to allow any value for them. ``allow`` attribute is + mandatory, 'yes' means allow, 'no' for deny. + +:anchor:`<a id="elementsSmartcard"/>` + +Smartcard devices +~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ + +A virtual smartcard device can be supplied to the guest via the ``smartcard`` +element. A USB smartcard reader device on the host cannot be used on a guest +with simple device passthrough, since it will then not be available on the host, +possibly locking the host computer when it is "removed". Therefore, some +hypervisors provide a specialized virtual device that can present a smartcard +interface to the guest, with several modes for describing how credentials are +obtained from the host or even a from a channel created to a third-party +smartcard provider. :since:`Since 0.8.8` + +:: + + ... + <devices> + <smartcard mode='host'/> + <smartcard mode='host-certificates'> + <certificate>cert1</certificate> + <certificate>cert2</certificate> + <certificate>cert3</certificate> + <database>/etc/pki/nssdb/</database> + </smartcard> + <smartcard mode='passthrough' type='tcp'> + <source mode='bind' host='127.0.0.1' service='2001'/> + <protocol type='raw'/> + <address type='ccid' controller='0' slot='0'/> + </smartcard> + <smartcard mode='passthrough' type='spicevmc'/> + </devices> + ... + +The ``<smartcard>`` element has a mandatory attribute ``mode``. The following +modes are supported; in each mode, the guest sees a device on its USB bus that +behaves like a physical USB CCID (Chip/Smart Card Interface Device) card. + +``host`` + The simplest operation, where the hypervisor relays all requests from the + guest into direct access to the host's smartcard via NSS. No other attributes + or sub-elements are required. See below about the use of an optional + ``<address>`` sub-element. +``host-certificates`` + Rather than requiring a smartcard to be plugged into the host, it is possible + to provide three NSS certificate names residing in a database on the host. + These certificates can be generated via the command + ``certutil -d /etc/pki/nssdb -x -t CT,CT,CT -S -s CN=cert1 -n cert1``, + and the resulting three certificate names must be supplied as the content of + each of three ``<certificate>`` sub-elements. An additional sub-element + ``<database>`` can specify the absolute path to an alternate directory + (matching the ``-d`` option of the ``certutil`` command when creating the + certificates); if not present, it defaults to /etc/pki/nssdb. +``passthrough`` + Rather than having the hypervisor directly communicate with the host, it is + possible to tunnel all requests through a secondary character device to a + third-party provider (which may in turn be talking to a smartcard or using + three certificate files). In this mode of operation, an additional attribute + ``type`` is required, matching one of the supported `serial + device <#elementsConsole>`__ types, to describe the host side of the tunnel; + ``type='tcp'`` or ``type='spicevmc'`` (which uses the smartcard channel of a + `SPICE graphics device <#elementsGraphics>`__) are typical. Further + sub-elements, such as ``<source>``, may be required according to the given + type, although a ``<target>`` sub-element is not required (since the consumer + of the character device is the hypervisor itself, rather than a device + visible in the guest). + +Each mode supports an optional sub-element ``<address>``, which fine-tunes the +correlation between the smartcard and a ccid bus controller, `documented +above <#elementsAddress>`__. For now, qemu only supports at most one smartcard, +with an address of bus=0 slot=0. + +:anchor:`<a id="elementsNICS"/>` + +Network interfaces +~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ + +:: + + ... + <devices> + <interface type='direct' trustGuestRxFilters='yes'> + <source dev='eth0'/> + <mac address='52:54:00:5d:c7:9e'/> + <boot order='1'/> + <rom bar='off'/> + </interface> + </devices> + ... + +There are several possibilities for specifying a network interface visible to +the guest. Each subsection below provides more details about common setup +options. + +:since:`Since 1.2.10` ), the ``interface`` element property +``trustGuestRxFilters`` provides the capability for the host to detect and trust +reports from the guest regarding changes to the interface mac address and +receive filters by setting the attribute to ``yes``. The default setting for the +attribute is ``no`` for security reasons and support depends on the guest +network device model as well as the type of connection on the host - currently +it is only supported for the virtio device model and for macvtap connections on +the host. + +Each ``<interface>`` element has an optional ``<address>`` sub-element that can +tie the interface to a particular pci slot, with attribute ``type='pci'`` as +`documented above <#elementsAddress>`__. + +:since:`Since 6.6.0` , one can force libvirt to keep the provided MAC address +when it's in the reserved VMware range by adding a ``type="static"`` attribute +to the ``<mac/>`` element. Note that this attribute is useless if the provided +MAC address is outside of the reserved VMWare ranges. + +:anchor:`<a id="elementsNICSVirtual"/>` + +Virtual network +^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^ + +**This is the recommended config for general guest connectivity on hosts with +dynamic / wireless networking configs (or multi-host environments where the host +hardware details are described separately in a ``<network>`` definition +:since:`Since 0.9.4` ).** + +Provides a connection whose details are described by the named network +definition. Depending on the virtual network's "forward mode" configuration, the +network may be totally isolated (no ``<forward>`` element given), NAT'ing to an +explicit network device or to the default route (``<forward mode='nat'>``), +routed with no NAT (``<forward mode='route'/>``), or connected directly to one +of the host's network interfaces (via macvtap) or bridge devices +((``<forward mode='bridge|private|vepa|passthrough'/>`` :since:`Since +0.9.4` ) + +For networks with a forward mode of bridge, private, vepa, and passthrough, it +is assumed that the host has any necessary DNS and DHCP services already setup +outside the scope of libvirt. In the case of isolated, nat, and routed networks, +DHCP and DNS are provided on the virtual network by libvirt, and the IP range +can be determined by examining the virtual network config with +'``virsh net-dumpxml [networkname]``'. There is one virtual network called +'default' setup out of the box which does NAT'ing to the default route and has +an IP range of ``192.168.122.0/255.255.255.0``. Each guest will have an +associated tun device created with a name of vnetN, which can also be overridden +with the <target> element (see `overriding the target +element <#elementsNICSTargetOverride>`__). + +When the source of an interface is a network, a ``portgroup`` can be specified +along with the name of the network; one network may have multiple portgroups +defined, with each portgroup containing slightly different configuration +information for different classes of network connections. :since:`Since 0.9.4` . + +When a guest is running an interface of type ``network`` may include a +``portid`` attribute. This provides the UUID of an associated virNetworkPortPtr +object that records the association between the domain interface and the +network. This attribute is read-only since port objects are create and deleted +automatically during startup and shutdown. :since:`Since 5.1.0` + +Also, similar to ``direct`` network connections (described below), a connection +of type ``network`` may specify a ``virtualport`` element, with configuration +data to be forwarded to a vepa (802.1Qbg) or 802.1Qbh compliant switch ( +:since:`Since 0.8.2` ), or to an Open vSwitch virtual switch ( :since:`Since +0.9.11` ). + +Since the actual type of switch may vary depending on the configuration in the +``<network>`` on the host, it is acceptable to omit the virtualport ``type`` +attribute, and specify attributes from multiple different virtualport types (and +also to leave out certain attributes); at domain startup time, a complete +``<virtualport>`` element will be constructed by merging together the type and +attributes defined in the network and the portgroup referenced by the interface. +The newly-constructed virtualport is a combination of them. The attributes from +lower virtualport can't make change on the ones defined in higher virtualport. +Interface takes the highest priority, portgroup is lowest priority. ( +:since:`Since 0.10.0` ). For example, in order to work properly with both an +802.1Qbh switch and an Open vSwitch switch, you may choose to specify no type, +but both a ``profileid`` (in case the switch is 802.1Qbh) and an ``interfaceid`` +(in case the switch is Open vSwitch) (you may also omit the other attributes, +such as managerid, typeid, or profileid, to be filled in from the network's +``<virtualport>``). If you want to limit a guest to connecting only to certain +types of switches, you can specify the virtualport type, but still omit some/all +of the parameters - in this case if the host's network has a different type of +virtualport, connection of the interface will fail. + +:: + + ... + <devices> + <interface type='network'> + <source network='default'/> + </interface> + ... + <interface type='network'> + <source network='default' portgroup='engineering'/> + <target dev='vnet7'/> + <mac address="00:11:22:33:44:55"/> + <virtualport> + <parameters instanceid='09b11c53-8b5c-4eeb-8f00-d84eaa0aaa4f'/> + </virtualport> + </interface> + </devices> + ... + +:anchor:`<a id="elementsNICSBridge"/>` + +Bridge to LAN +^^^^^^^^^^^^^ + +**This is the recommended config for general guest connectivity on hosts with +static wired networking configs.** + +Provides a bridge from the VM directly to the LAN. This assumes there is a +bridge device on the host which has one or more of the hosts physical NICs +attached. The guest VM will have an associated tun device created with a name of +vnetN, which can also be overridden with the <target> element (see `overriding +the target element <#elementsNICSTargetOverride>`__). The tun device will be +attached to the bridge. The IP range / network configuration is whatever is used +on the LAN. This provides the guest VM full incoming & outgoing net access just +like a physical machine. + +On Linux systems, the bridge device is normally a standard Linux host bridge. On +hosts that support Open vSwitch, it is also possible to connect to an Open +vSwitch bridge device by adding a ``<virtualport type='openvswitch'/>`` to the +interface definition. ( :since:`Since 0.9.11` ). The Open vSwitch type +virtualport accepts two parameters in its ``<parameters>`` element - an +``interfaceid`` which is a standard uuid used to uniquely identify this +particular interface to Open vSwitch (if you do not specify one, a random +interfaceid will be generated for you when you first define the interface), and +an optional ``profileid`` which is sent to Open vSwitch as the interfaces +"port-profile". + +:: + + ... + <devices> + ... + <interface type='bridge'> + <source bridge='br0'/> + </interface> + <interface type='bridge'> + <source bridge='br1'/> + <target dev='vnet7'/> + <mac address="00:11:22:33:44:55"/> + </interface> + <interface type='bridge'> + <source bridge='ovsbr'/> + <virtualport type='openvswitch'> + <parameters profileid='menial' interfaceid='09b11c53-8b5c-4eeb-8f00-d84eaa0aaa4f'/> + </virtualport> + </interface> + ... + </devices> + ... + +On hosts that support Open vSwitch on the kernel side and have the Midonet Host +Agent configured, it is also possible to connect to the 'midonet' bridge device +by adding a ``<virtualport type='midonet'/>`` to the interface definition. ( +:since:`Since 1.2.13` ). The Midonet virtualport type requires an +``interfaceid`` attribute in its ``<parameters>`` element. This interface id is +the UUID that specifies which port in the virtual network topology will be bound +to the interface. + +:: + + ... + <devices> + ... + <interface type='bridge'> + <source bridge='br0'/> + </interface> + <interface type='bridge'> + <source bridge='br1'/> + <target dev='vnet7'/> + <mac address="00:11:22:33:44:55"/> + </interface> + <interface type='bridge'> + <source bridge='midonet'/> + <virtualport type='midonet'> + <parameters interfaceid='0b2d64da-3d0e-431e-afdd-804415d6ebbb'/> + </virtualport> + </interface> + ... + </devices> + ... + +:anchor:`<a id="elementsNICSSlirp"/>` + +Userspace SLIRP stack +^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^ + +Provides a virtual LAN with NAT to the outside world. The virtual network has +DHCP & DNS services and will give the guest VM addresses starting from +``10.0.2.15``. The default router will be ``10.0.2.2`` and the DNS server will +be ``10.0.2.3``. This networking is the only option for unprivileged users who +need their VMs to have outgoing access. :since:`Since 3.8.0` it is possible to +override the default network address by including an ``ip`` element specifying +an IPv4 address in its one mandatory attribute, ``address``. Optionally, a +second ``ip`` element with a ``family`` attribute set to "ipv6" can be specified +to add an IPv6 address to the interface. ``address``. Optionally, address +``prefix`` can be specified. + +:: + + ... + <devices> + <interface type='user'/> + ... + <interface type='user'> + <mac address="00:11:22:33:44:55"/> + <ip family='ipv4' address='172.17.2.0' prefix='24'/> + <ip family='ipv6' address='2001:db8:ac10:fd01::' prefix='64'/> + </interface> + </devices> + ... + +:anchor:`<a id="elementsNICSEthernet"/>` + +Generic ethernet connection +^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^ + +Provides a means to use a new or existing tap device (or veth device pair, +depening on the needs of the hypervisor driver) that is partially or wholly +setup external to libvirt (either prior to the guest starting, or while the +guest is being started via an optional script specified in the config). + +The name of the tap device can optionally be specified with the ``dev`` +attribute of the ``<target>`` element. If no target dev is specified, libvirt +will create a new standard tap device with a name of the pattern "vnetN", where +"N" is replaced with a number. If a target dev is specified and that device +doesn't exist, then a new standard tap device will be created with the exact dev +name given. If the specified target dev does exist, then that existing device +will be used. Usually some basic setup of the device is done by libvirt, +including setting a MAC address, and the IFF_UP flag, but if the ``dev`` is a +pre-existing device, and the ``managed`` attribute of the ``target`` element is +also set to "no" (the default value is "yes"), even this basic setup will not be +performed - libvirt will simply pass the device on to the hypervisor with no +setup at all. :since:`Since 5.7.0` Using managed='no' with a pre-created tap +device is useful because it permits a virtual machine managed by an unprivileged +libvirtd to have emulated network devices based on tap devices. + +After creating/opening the tap device, an optional shell script (given in the +``path`` attribute of the ``<script>`` element) will be run. :since:`Since +0.2.1` Also, after detaching/closing the tap device, an optional shell script +(given in the ``path`` attribute of the ``<downscript>`` element) will be run. +:since:`Since 5.1.0` These can be used to do whatever extra host network +integration is required. + +:: + + ... + <devices> + <interface type='ethernet'> + <script path='/etc/qemu-ifup-mynet'/> + <downscript path='/etc/qemu-ifdown-mynet'/> + </interface> + ... + <interface type='ethernet'> + <target dev='mytap1' managed='no'/> + <model type='virtio'/> + </interface> + </devices> + ... + +:anchor:`<a id="elementsNICSDirect"/>` + +Direct attachment to physical interface +^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^ + +| Provides direct attachment of the virtual machine's NIC to the given physical + interface of the host. :since:`Since 0.7.7 (QEMU and KVM only)` +| This setup requires the Linux macvtap driver to be available. :since:`(Since + Linux 2.6.34.)` One of the modes 'vepa' ( `'Virtual Ethernet Port + Aggregator' <http://www.ieee802.org/1/files/public/docs2009/new-evb-congdon-vepa-modul...>`__), + 'bridge' or 'private' can be chosen for the operation mode of the macvtap + device, 'vepa' being the default mode. The individual modes cause the delivery + of packets to behave as follows: + +If the model type is set to ``virtio`` and interface's ``trustGuestRxFilters`` +attribute is set to ``yes``, changes made to the interface mac address, +unicast/multicast receive filters, and vlan settings in the guest will be +monitored and propagated to the associated macvtap device on the host ( +:since:`Since 1.2.10` ). If ``trustGuestRxFilters`` is not set, or is not +supported for the device model in use, an attempted change to the mac address +originating from the guest side will result in a non-working network connection. + +``vepa`` + All VMs' packets are sent to the external bridge. Packets whose destination + is a VM on the same host as where the packet originates from are sent back to + the host by the VEPA capable bridge (today's bridges are typically not VEPA + capable). +``bridge`` + Packets whose destination is on the same host as where they originate from + are directly delivered to the target macvtap device. Both origin and + destination devices need to be in bridge mode for direct delivery. If either + one of them is in ``vepa`` mode, a VEPA capable bridge is required. +``private`` + All packets are sent to the external bridge and will only be delivered to a + target VM on the same host if they are sent through an external router or + gateway and that device sends them back to the host. This procedure is + followed if either the source or destination device is in ``private`` mode. +``passthrough`` + This feature attaches a virtual function of a SRIOV capable NIC directly to a + VM without losing the migration capability. All packets are sent to the VF/IF + of the configured network device. Depending on the capabilities of the device + additional prerequisites or limitations may apply; for example, on Linux this + requires kernel 2.6.38 or newer. :since:`Since 0.9.2` + +:: + + ... + <devices> + ... + <interface type='direct' trustGuestRxFilters='no'> + <source dev='eth0' mode='vepa'/> + </interface> + </devices> + ... + +The network access of direct attached virtual machines can be managed by the +hardware switch to which the physical interface of the host machine is connected +to. + +The interface can have additional parameters as shown below, if the switch is +conforming to the IEEE 802.1Qbg standard. The parameters of the virtualport +element are documented in more detail in the IEEE 802.1Qbg standard. The values +are network specific and should be provided by the network administrator. In +802.1Qbg terms, the Virtual Station Interface (VSI) represents the virtual +interface of a virtual machine. :since:`Since 0.8.2` + +Please note that IEEE 802.1Qbg requires a non-zero value for the VLAN ID. + +``managerid`` + The VSI Manager ID identifies the database containing the VSI type and + instance definitions. This is an integer value and the value 0 is reserved. +``typeid`` + The VSI Type ID identifies a VSI type characterizing the network access. VSI + types are typically managed by network administrator. This is an integer + value. +``typeidversion`` + The VSI Type Version allows multiple versions of a VSI Type. This is an + integer value. +``instanceid`` + The VSI Instance ID Identifier is generated when a VSI instance (i.e. a + virtual interface of a virtual machine) is created. This is a globally unique + identifier. + +:: + + ... + <devices> + ... + <interface type='direct'> + <source dev='eth0.2' mode='vepa'/> + <virtualport type="802.1Qbg"> + <parameters managerid="11" typeid="1193047" typeidversion="2" instanceid="09b11c53-8b5c-4eeb-8f00-d84eaa0aaa4f"/> + </virtualport> + </interface> + </devices> + ... + +The interface can have additional parameters as shown below if the switch is +conforming to the IEEE 802.1Qbh standard. The values are network specific and +should be provided by the network administrator. :since:`Since 0.8.2` + +``profileid`` + The profile ID contains the name of the port profile that is to be applied to + this interface. This name is resolved by the port profile database into the + network parameters from the port profile, and those network parameters will + be applied to this interface. + +:: + + ... + <devices> + ... + <interface type='direct'> + <source dev='eth0' mode='private'/> + <virtualport type='802.1Qbh'> + <parameters profileid='finance'/> + </virtualport> + </interface> + </devices> + ... + +:anchor:`<a id="elementsNICSHostdev"/>` + +PCI Passthrough +^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^ + +A PCI network device (specified by the <source> element) is directly assigned to +the guest using generic device passthrough, after first optionally setting the +device's MAC address to the configured value, and associating the device with an +802.1Qbh capable switch using an optionally specified <virtualport> element (see +the examples of virtualport given above for type='direct' network devices). Note +that - due to limitations in standard single-port PCI ethernet card driver +design - only SR-IOV (Single Root I/O Virtualization) virtual function (VF) +devices can be assigned in this manner; to assign a standard single-port PCI or +PCIe ethernet card to a guest, use the traditional <hostdev> device definition +and :since:`Since 0.9.11` + +To use VFIO device assignment rather than traditional/legacy KVM device +assignment (VFIO is a new method of device assignment that is compatible with +UEFI Secure Boot), a type='hostdev' interface can have an optional ``driver`` +sub-element with a ``name`` attribute set to "vfio". To use legacy KVM device +assignment you can set ``name`` to "kvm" (or simply omit the ``<driver>`` +element, since "kvm" is currently the default). :since:`Since 1.0.5 (QEMU and +KVM only, requires kernel 3.6 or newer)` + +Note that this "intelligent passthrough" of network devices is very similar to +the functionality of a standard <hostdev> device, the difference being that this +method allows specifying a MAC address and <virtualport> for the passed-through +device. If these capabilities are not required, if you have a standard +single-port PCI, PCIe, or USB network card that doesn't support SR-IOV (and +hence would anyway lose the configured MAC address during reset after being +assigned to the guest domain), or if you are using a version of libvirt older +than 0.9.11, you should use standard <hostdev> to assign the device to the guest +instead of <interface type='hostdev'/>. + +Similar to the functionality of a standard <hostdev> device, when ``managed`` is +"yes", it is detached from the host before being passed on to the guest, and +reattached to the host after the guest exits. If ``managed`` is omitted or "no", +the user is responsible to call ``virNodeDeviceDettach`` (or +``virsh nodedev-detach``) before starting the guest or hot-plugging the device, +and ``virNodeDeviceReAttach`` (or ``virsh nodedev-reattach``) after hot-unplug +or stopping the guest. + +:: + + ... + <devices> + <interface type='hostdev' managed='yes'> + <driver name='vfio'/> + <source> + <address type='pci' domain='0x0000' bus='0x00' slot='0x07' function='0x0'/> + </source> + <mac address='52:54:00:6d:90:02'/> + <virtualport type='802.1Qbh'> + <parameters profileid='finance'/> + </virtualport> + </interface> + </devices> + ... + +:anchor:`<a id="elementsTeaming"/>` + +Teaming a virtio/hostdev NIC pair +^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^ + +:since:`Since 6.1.0 (QEMU and KVM only, requires QEMU 4.2.0 or newer and a guest +virtio-net driver supporting the "failover" feature, such as the one included in +Linux kernel 4.18 and newer) ` The ``<teaming>`` element of two interfaces can +be used to connect them as a team/bond device in the guest (assuming proper +support in the hypervisor and the guest network driver). + +:: + + ... + <devices> + <interface type='network'> + <source network='mybridge'/> + <mac address='00:11:22:33:44:55'/> + <model type='virtio'/> + <teaming type='persistent'/> + <alias name='ua-backup0'/> + </interface> + <interface type='network'> + <source network='hostdev-pool'/> + <mac address='00:11:22:33:44:55'/> + <model type='virtio'/> + <teaming type='transient' persistent='ua-backup0'/> + </interface> + </devices> + ... + +The ``<teaming>`` element required attribute ``type`` will be set to either +``"persistent"`` to indicate a device that should always be present in the +domain, or ``"transient"`` to indicate a device that may periodically be +removed, then later re-added to the domain. When type="transient", there should +be a second attribute to ``<teaming>`` called ``"persistent"`` - this attribute +should be set to the alias name of the other device in the pair (the one that +has ``<teaming type="persistent'/>``). + +In the particular case of QEMU, libvirt's ``<teaming>`` element is used to setup +a virtio-net "failover" device pair. For this setup, the persistent device must +be an interface with ``<model type="virtio"/>``, and the transient device +must be ``<interface type='hostdev'/>`` (or ``<interface type='network'/>`` +where the referenced network defines a pool of SRIOV VFs). The guest will then +have a simple network team/bond device made of the virtio NIC + hostdev NIC +pair. In this configuration, the higher-performing hostdev NIC will normally be +preferred for all network traffic, but when the domain is migrated, QEMU will +automatically unplug the VF from the guest, and then hotplug a similar device +once migration is completed; while migration is taking place, network traffic +will use the virtio NIC. (Of course the emulated virtio NIC and the hostdev NIC +must be connected to the same subnet for bonding to work properly). + +NB1: Since you must know the alias name of the virtio NIC when configuring the +hostdev NIC, it will need to be manually set in the virtio NIC's configuration +(as with all other manually set alias names, this means it must start with +"ua-"). + +NB2: Currently the only implementation of the guest OS virtio-net driver +supporting virtio-net failover requires that the MAC addresses of the virtio and +hostdev NIC must match. Since that may not always be a requirement in the +future, libvirt doesn't enforce this limitation - it is up to the +person/management application that is creating the configuration to assure the +MAC addresses of the two devices match. + +NB3: Since the PCI addresses of the SRIOV VFs on the hosts that are the source +and destination of the migration will almost certainly be different, either +higher level management software will need to modify the ``<source>`` of the +hostdev NIC (``<interface type='hostdev'>``) at the start of migration, or (a +simpler solution) the configuration will need to use a libvirt "hostdev" virtual +network that maintains a pool of such devices, as is implied in the example's +use of the libvirt network named "hostdev-pool" - as long as the hostdev network +pools on both hosts have the same name, libvirt itself will take care of +allocating an appropriate device on both ends of the migration. Similarly the +XML for the virtio interface must also either work correctly unmodified on both +the source and destination of the migration (e.g. by connecting to the same +bridge device on both hosts, or by using the same virtual network), or the +management software must properly modify the interface XML during migration so +that the virtio device remains connected to the same network segment before and +after migration. + +:anchor:`<a id="elementsNICSMulticast"/>` + +Multicast tunnel +^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^ + +A multicast group is setup to represent a virtual network. Any VMs whose network +devices are in the same multicast group can talk to each other even across +hosts. This mode is also available to unprivileged users. There is no default +DNS or DHCP support and no outgoing network access. To provide outgoing network +access, one of the VMs should have a 2nd NIC which is connected to one of the +first 4 network types and do the appropriate routing. The multicast protocol is +compatible with that used by user mode linux guests too. The source address used +must be from the multicast address block. + +:: + + ... + <devices> + <interface type='mcast'> + <mac address='52:54:00:6d:90:01'/> + <source address='230.0.0.1' port='5558'/> + </interface> + </devices> + ... + +:anchor:`<a id="elementsNICSTCP"/>` + +TCP tunnel +^^^^^^^^^^ + +A TCP client/server architecture provides a virtual network. One VM provides the +server end of the network, all other VMS are configured as clients. All network +traffic is routed between the VMs via the server. This mode is also available to +unprivileged users. There is no default DNS or DHCP support and no outgoing +network access. To provide outgoing network access, one of the VMs should have a +2nd NIC which is connected to one of the first 4 network types and do the +appropriate routing. + +:: + + ... + <devices> + <interface type='server'> + <mac address='52:54:00:22:c9:42'/> + <source address='192.168.0.1' port='5558'/> + </interface> + ... + <interface type='client'> + <mac address='52:54:00:8b:c9:51'/> + <source address='192.168.0.1' port='5558'/> + </interface> + </devices> + ... + +:anchor:`<a id="elementsNICSUDP"/>` + +UDP unicast tunnel +^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^ + +A UDP unicast architecture provides a virtual network which enables connections +between QEMU instances using QEMU's UDP infrastructure. The xml "source" address +is the endpoint address to which the UDP socket packets will be sent from the +host running QEMU. The xml "local" address is the address of the interface from +which the UDP socket packets will originate from the QEMU host. :since:`Since +1.2.20` + +:: + + ... + <devices> + <interface type='udp'> + <mac address='52:54:00:22:c9:42'/> + <source address='127.0.0.1' port='11115'> + <local address='127.0.0.1' port='11116'/> + </source> + </interface> + </devices> + ... + +:anchor:`<a id="elementsNICSModel"/>` + +Setting the NIC model +^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^ + +:: + + ... + <devices> + <interface type='network'> + <source network='default'/> + <target dev='vnet1'/> + <model type='ne2k_pci'/> + </interface> + </devices> + ... + +For hypervisors which support this, you can set the model of emulated network +interface card. + +The values for ``type`` aren't defined specifically by libvirt, but by what the +underlying hypervisor supports (if any). For QEMU and KVM you can get a list of +supported models with these commands: + +:: + + qemu -net nic,model=? /dev/null + qemu-kvm -net nic,model=? /dev/null + +Typical values for QEMU and KVM include: ne2k_isa i82551 i82557b i82559er +ne2k_pci pcnet rtl8139 e1000 virtio. :since:`Since 5.2.0` , +``virtio-transitional`` and ``virtio-non-transitional`` values are supported. +See `Virtio transitional devices <#elementsVirtioTransitional>`__ for more +details. + +:anchor:`<a id="elementsDriverBackendOptions"/>` + +Setting NIC driver-specific options +^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^ + +:: + + ... + <devices> + <interface type='network'> + <source network='default'/> + <target dev='vnet1'/> + <model type='virtio'/> + <driver name='vhost' txmode='iothread' ioeventfd='on' event_idx='off' queues='5' rx_queue_size='256' tx_queue_size='256'> + <host csum='off' gso='off' tso4='off' tso6='off' ecn='off' ufo='off' mrg_rxbuf='off'/> + <guest csum='off' tso4='off' tso6='off' ecn='off' ufo='off'/> + </driver> + </interface> + </devices> + ... + +Some NICs may have tunable driver-specific options. These are set as attributes +of the ``driver`` sub-element of the interface definition. Currently the +following attributes are available for the ``"virtio"`` NIC driver: + +``name`` + The optional ``name`` attribute forces which type of backend driver to use. + The value can be either 'qemu' (a user-space backend) or 'vhost' (a kernel + backend, which requires the vhost module to be provided by the kernel); an + attempt to require the vhost driver without kernel support will be rejected. + If this attribute is not present, then the domain defaults to 'vhost' if + present, but silently falls back to 'qemu' without error. :since:`Since 0.8.8 + (QEMU and KVM only)` + For interfaces of type='hostdev' (PCI passthrough devices) the ``name`` + attribute can optionally be set to "vfio" or "kvm". "vfio" tells libvirt to + use VFIO device assignment rather than traditional KVM device assignment + (VFIO is a new method of device assignment that is compatible with UEFI + Secure Boot), and "kvm" tells libvirt to use the legacy device assignment + performed directly by the kvm kernel module (the default is currently "kvm", + but is subject to change). :since:`Since 1.0.5 (QEMU and KVM only, requires + kernel 3.6 or newer)` + For interfaces of type='vhostuser', the ``name`` attribute is ignored. The + backend driver used is always vhost-user. +``txmode`` + The ``txmode`` attribute specifies how to handle transmission of packets when + the transmit buffer is full. The value can be either 'iothread' or 'timer'. + :since:`Since 0.8.8 (QEMU and KVM only)` + If set to 'iothread', packet tx is all done in an iothread in the bottom half + of the driver (this option translates into adding "tx=bh" to the qemu + commandline -device virtio-net-pci option). + If set to 'timer', tx work is done in qemu, and if there is more tx data than + can be sent at the present time, a timer is set before qemu moves on to do + other things; when the timer fires, another attempt is made to send more + data. + The resulting difference, according to the qemu developer who added the + option is: "bh makes tx more asynchronous and reduces latency, but + potentially causes more processor bandwidth contention since the CPU doing + the tx isn't necessarily the CPU where the guest generated the packets." + **In general you should leave this option alone, unless you are very certain + you know what you are doing.** +``ioeventfd`` + This optional attribute allows users to set `domain I/O asynchronous + handling <https://patchwork.kernel.org/patch/43390/>`__ for interface device. + The default is left to the discretion of the hypervisor. Accepted values are + "on" and "off". Enabling this allows qemu to execute VM while a separate + thread handles I/O. Typically guests experiencing high system CPU utilization + during I/O will benefit from this. On the other hand, on overloaded host it + could increase guest I/O latency. :since:`Since 0.9.3 (QEMU and KVM only)` + **In general you should leave this option alone, unless you are very certain + you know what you are doing.** +``event_idx`` + The ``event_idx`` attribute controls some aspects of device event processing. + The value can be either 'on' or 'off' - if it is on, it will reduce the + number of interrupts and exits for the guest. The default is determined by + QEMU; usually if the feature is supported, default is on. In case there is a + situation where this behavior is suboptimal, this attribute provides a way to + force the feature off. :since:`Since 0.9.5 (QEMU and KVM only)` + **In general you should leave this option alone, unless you are very certain + you know what you are doing.** +``queues`` + The optional ``queues`` attribute controls the number of queues to be used + for either `Multiqueue + virtio-net <https://www.linux-kvm.org/page/Multiqueue>`__ or + `vhost-user <#elementVhostuser>`__ network interfaces. Use of multiple packet + processing queues requires the interface having the + ``<model type='virtio'/>`` element. Each queue will potentially be handled by + a different processor, resulting in much higher throughput. + :since:`virtio-net since 1.0.6 (QEMU and KVM only)` :since:`vhost-user since + 1.2.17 (QEMU and KVM only)` +``rx_queue_size`` + The optional ``rx_queue_size`` attribute controls the size of virtio ring for + each queue as described above. The default value is hypervisor dependent and + may change across its releases. Moreover, some hypervisors may pose some + restrictions on actual value. For instance, latest QEMU (as of 2016-09-01) + requires value to be a power of two from [256, 1024] range. :since:`Since + 2.3.0 (QEMU and KVM only)` + **In general you should leave this option alone, unless you are very certain + you know what you are doing.** +``tx_queue_size`` + The optional ``tx_queue_size`` attribute controls the size of virtio ring for + each queue as described above. The default value is hypervisor dependent and + may change across its releases. Moreover, some hypervisors may pose some + restrictions on actual value. For instance, QEMU v2.9 requires value to be a + power of two from [256, 1024] range. In addition to that, this may work only + for a subset of interface types, e.g. aforementioned QEMU enables this option + only for ``vhostuser`` type. :since:`Since 3.7.0 (QEMU and KVM only)` + **In general you should leave this option alone, unless you are very certain + you know what you are doing.** +virtio options + For virtio interfaces, `Virtio-specific options <#elementsVirtio>`__ can also + be set. ( :since:`Since 3.5.0` ) + +Offloading options for the host and guest can be configured using the following +sub-elements: + +``host`` + The ``csum``, ``gso``, ``tso4``, ``tso6``, ``ecn`` and ``ufo`` attributes + with possible values ``on`` and ``off`` can be used to turn off host + offloading options. By default, the supported offloads are enabled by QEMU. + :since:`Since 1.2.9 (QEMU only)` The ``mrg_rxbuf`` attribute can be used to + control mergeable rx buffers on the host side. Possible values are ``on`` + (default) and ``off``. :since:`Since 1.2.13 (QEMU only)` +``guest`` + The ``csum``, ``tso4``, ``tso6``, ``ecn`` and ``ufo`` attributes with + possible values ``on`` and ``off`` can be used to turn off guest offloading + options. By default, the supported offloads are enabled by QEMU. + :since:`Since 1.2.9 (QEMU only)` + +:anchor:`<a id="elementsBackendOptions"/>` + +Setting network backend-specific options +^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^ + +:: + + ... + <devices> + <interface type='network'> + <source network='default'/> + <target dev='vnet1'/> + <model type='virtio'/> + <backend tap='/dev/net/tun' vhost='/dev/vhost-net'/> + <driver name='vhost' txmode='iothread' ioeventfd='on' event_idx='off' queues='5'/> + <tune> + <sndbuf>1600</sndbuf> + </tune> + </interface> + </devices> + ... + +For tuning the backend of the network, the ``backend`` element can be used. The +``vhost`` attribute can override the default vhost device path +(``/dev/vhost-net``) for devices with ``virtio`` model. The ``tap`` attribute +overrides the tun/tap device path (default: ``/dev/net/tun``) for network and +bridge interfaces. This does not work in session mode. :since:`Since 1.2.9` + +For tap devices there is also ``sndbuf`` element which can adjust the size of +send buffer in the host. :since:`Since 0.8.8` + +:anchor:`<a id="elementsNICSTargetOverride"/>` + +Overriding the target element +^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^ + +:: + + ... + <devices> + <interface type='network'> + <source network='default'/> + <target dev='vnet1'/> + </interface> + </devices> + ... + +If no target is specified, certain hypervisors will automatically generate a +name for the created tun device. This name can be manually specified, however +the name *should not start with either 'vnet', 'vif', 'macvtap', or 'macvlan'*, +which are prefixes reserved by libvirt and certain hypervisors. Manually +specified targets using these prefixes may be ignored. + +Note that for LXC containers, this defines the name of the interface on the host +side. :since:`Since 1.2.7` , to define the name of the device on the guest side, +the ``guest`` element should be used, as in the following snippet: + +:: + + ... + <devices> + <interface type='network'> + <source network='default'/> + <guest dev='myeth'/> + </interface> + </devices> + ... + +:anchor:`<a id="elementsNICSBoot"/>` + +Specifying boot order +^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^ + +:: + + ... + <devices> + <interface type='network'> + <source network='default'/> + <target dev='vnet1'/> + <boot order='1'/> + </interface> + </devices> + ... + +For hypervisors which support this, you can set a specific NIC to be used for +network boot. The ``order`` attribute determines the order in which devices will +be tried during boot sequence. The per-device ``boot`` elements cannot be used +together with general boot elements in `BIOS bootloader <#elementsOSBIOS>`__ +section. :since:`Since 0.8.8` + +:anchor:`<a id="elementsNICSROM"/>` + +Interface ROM BIOS configuration +^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^ + +:: + + ... + <devices> + <interface type='network'> + <source network='default'/> + <target dev='vnet1'/> + <rom bar='on' file='/etc/fake/boot.bin'/> + </interface> + </devices> + ... + +For hypervisors which support this, you can change how a PCI Network device's +ROM is presented to the guest. The ``bar`` attribute can be set to "on" or +"off", and determines whether or not the device's ROM will be visible in the +guest's memory map. (In PCI documentation, the "rombar" setting controls the +presence of the Base Address Register for the ROM). If no rom bar is specified, +the qemu default will be used (older versions of qemu used a default of "off", +while newer qemus have a default of "on"). The optional ``file`` attribute is +used to point to a binary file to be presented to the guest as the device's ROM +BIOS. This can be useful to provide an alternative boot ROM for a network +device. :since:`Since 0.9.10 (QEMU and KVM only)` . + +:anchor:`<a id="elementDomain"/>` + +Setting up a network backend in a driver domain +^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^ + +:: + + ... + <devices> + ... + <interface type='bridge'> + <source bridge='br0'/> + <backenddomain name='netvm'/> + </interface> + ... + </devices> + ... + +The optional ``backenddomain`` element allows specifying a backend domain (aka +driver domain) for the interface. Use the ``name`` attribute to specify the +backend domain name. You can use it to create a direct network link between +domains (so data will not go through host system). Use with type 'ethernet' to +create plain network link, or with type 'bridge' to connect to a bridge inside +the backend domain. :since:`Since 1.2.13 (Xen only)` + +:anchor:`<a id="elementQoS"/>` + +Quality of service +^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^ + +:: + + ... + <devices> + <interface type='network'> + <source network='default'/> + <target dev='vnet0'/> + <bandwidth> + <inbound average='1000' peak='5000' floor='200' burst='1024'/> + <outbound average='128' peak='256' burst='256'/> + </bandwidth> + </interface> + </devices> + ... + +This part of interface XML provides setting quality of service. Incoming and +outgoing traffic can be shaped independently. The ``bandwidth`` element and its +child elements are described in the `QoS <formatnetwork.html#elementQoS>`__ +section of the Network XML. + +:anchor:`<a id="elementVlanTag"/>` + +Setting VLAN tag (on supported network types only) +^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^ + +:: + + ... + <devices> + <interface type='bridge'> + <vlan> + <tag id='42'/> + </vlan> + <source bridge='ovsbr0'/> + <virtualport type='openvswitch'> + <parameters interfaceid='09b11c53-8b5c-4eeb-8f00-d84eaa0aaa4f'/> + </virtualport> + </interface> + <interface type='bridge'> + <vlan trunk='yes'> + <tag id='42'/> + <tag id='123' nativeMode='untagged'/> + </vlan> + ... + </interface> + </devices> + ... + +If (and only if) the network connection used by the guest supports VLAN tagging +transparent to the guest, an optional ``<vlan>`` element can specify one or more +VLAN tags to apply to the guest's network traffic :since:`Since 0.10.0` . +Network connections that support guest-transparent VLAN tagging include 1) +type='bridge' interfaces connected to an Open vSwitch bridge :since:`Since +0.10.0` , 2) SRIOV Virtual Functions (VF) used via type='hostdev' (direct device +assignment) :since:`Since 0.10.0` , and 3) SRIOV VFs used via type='direct' with +mode='passthrough' (macvtap "passthru" mode) :since:`Since 1.3.5` . All other +connection types, including standard linux bridges and libvirt's own virtual +networks, **do not** support it. 802.1Qbh (vn-link) and 802.1Qbg (VEPA) switches +provide their own way (outside of libvirt) to tag guest traffic onto a specific +VLAN. Each tag is given in a separate ``<tag>`` subelement of ``<vlan>`` (for +example: ``<tag id='42'/>``). For VLAN trunking of multiple tags (which is +supported only on Open vSwitch connections), multiple ``<tag>`` subelements can +be specified, which implies that the user wants to do VLAN trunking on the +interface for all the specified tags. In the case that VLAN trunking of a single +tag is desired, the optional attribute ``trunk='yes'`` can be added to the +toplevel ``<vlan>`` element to differentiate trunking of a single tag from +normal tagging. + +For network connections using Open vSwitch it is also possible to configure +'native-tagged' and 'native-untagged' VLAN modes :since:`Since 1.1.0.` This is +done with the optional ``nativeMode`` attribute on the ``<tag>`` subelement: +``nativeMode`` may be set to 'tagged' or 'untagged'. The ``id`` attribute of the +``<tag>`` subelement containing ``nativeMode`` sets which VLAN is considered to +be the "native" VLAN for this interface, and the ``nativeMode`` attribute +determines whether or not traffic for that VLAN will be tagged. + +:anchor:`<a id="elementPort"/>` + +Isolating guests's network traffic from each other +^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^ + +:: + + ... + <devices> + <interface type='network'> + <source network='default'/> + <port isolated='yes'/> + </interface> + </devices> + ... + +:since:`Since 6.1.0.` The ``port`` element property ``isolated``, when set to +``yes`` (default setting is ``no``) is used to isolate this interface's network +traffic from that of other guest interfaces connected to the same network that +also have ``<port isolated='yes'/>``. This setting is only supported for +emulated interface devices that use a standard tap device to connect to the +network via a Linux host bridge. This property can be inherited from a libvirt +network, so if all guests that will be connected to the network should be +isolated, it is better to put the setting in the network configuration. (NB: +this only prevents guests that have ``isolated='yes'`` from communicating with +each other; if there is a guest on the same bridge that doesn't have +``isolated='yes'``, even the isolated guests will be able to communicate with +it.) + +:anchor:`<a id="elementLink"/>` + +Modifying virtual link state +^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^ + +:: + + ... + <devices> + <interface type='network'> + <source network='default'/> + <target dev='vnet0'/> + <link state='down'/> + </interface> + </devices> + ... + +This element provides means of setting state of the virtual network link. +Possible values for attribute ``state`` are ``up`` and ``down``. If ``down`` is +specified as the value, the interface behaves as if it had the network cable +disconnected. Default behavior if this element is unspecified is to have the +link state ``up``. :since:`Since 0.9.5` + +:anchor:`<a id="mtu"/>` + +MTU configuration +^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^ + +:: + + ... + <devices> + <interface type='network'> + <source network='default'/> + <target dev='vnet0'/> + <mtu size='1500'/> + </interface> + </devices> + ... + +This element provides means of setting MTU of the virtual network link. +Currently there is just one attribute ``size`` which accepts a non-negative +integer which specifies the MTU size for the interface. :since:`Since 3.1.0` + +:anchor:`<a id="coalesce"/>` + +Coalesce settings +^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^ + +:: + + ... + <devices> + <interface type='network'> + <source network='default'/> + <target dev='vnet0'/> + <coalesce> + <rx> + <frames max='7'/> + </rx> + </coalesce> + </interface> + </devices> + ... + +This element provides means of setting coalesce settings for some interface +devices (currently only type ``network`` and ``bridge``. Currently there is just +one attribute, ``max``, to tweak, in element ``frames`` for the ``rx`` group, +which accepts a non-negative integer that specifies the maximum number of +packets that will be received before an interrupt. :since:`Since 3.3.0` + +:anchor:`<a id="ipconfig"/>` + +IP configuration +^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^ + +:: + + ... + <devices> + <interface type='network'> + <source network='default'/> + <target dev='vnet0'/> + <ip address='192.168.122.5' prefix='24'/> + <ip address='192.168.122.5' prefix='24' peer='10.0.0.10'/> + <route family='ipv4' address='192.168.122.0' prefix='24' gateway='192.168.122.1'/> + <route family='ipv4' address='192.168.122.8' gateway='192.168.122.1'/> + </interface> + ... + <hostdev mode='capabilities' type='net'> + <source> + <interface>eth0</interface> + </source> + <ip address='192.168.122.6' prefix='24'/> + <route family='ipv4' address='192.168.122.0' prefix='24' gateway='192.168.122.1'/> + <route family='ipv4' address='192.168.122.8' gateway='192.168.122.1'/> + </hostdev> + ... + </devices> + ... + +:since:`Since 1.2.12` network devices and hostdev devices with network +capabilities can optionally be provided one or more IP addresses to set on the +network device in the guest. Note that some hypervisors or network device types +will simply ignore them or only use the first one. The ``family`` attribute can +be set to either ``ipv4`` or ``ipv6``, and the ``address`` attribute contains +the IP address. The optional ``prefix`` is the number of 1 bits in the netmask, +and will be automatically set if not specified - for IPv4 the default prefix is +determined according to the network "class" (A, B, or C - see RFC870), and for +IPv6 the default prefix is 64. The optional ``peer`` attribute holds the IP +address of the other end of a point-to-point network device :since:`(since +2.1.0)` . + +:since:`Since 1.2.12` route elements can also be added to define IP routes to +add in the guest. The attributes of this element are described in the +documentation for the ``route`` element in `network +definitions <formatnetwork.html#elementsStaticroute>`__. This is used by the LXC +driver. + +:: + + ... + <devices> + <interface type='ethernet'> + <source/> + <ip address='192.168.123.1' prefix='24'/> + <ip address='10.0.0.10' prefix='24' peer='192.168.122.5'/> + <route family='ipv4' address='192.168.42.0' prefix='24' gateway='192.168.123.4'/> + <source/> + ... + </interface> + ... + </devices> + ... + +:since:`Since 2.1.0` network devices of type "ethernet" can optionally be +provided one or more IP addresses and one or more routes to set on the **host** +side of the network device. These are configured as subelements of the +``<source>`` element of the interface, and have the same attributes as the +similarly named elements used to configure the guest side of the interface +(described above). + +:anchor:`<a id="elementVhostuser"/>` + +vhost-user interface +^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^ + +:since:`Since 1.2.7` the vhost-user enables the communication between a QEMU +virtual machine and other userspace process using the Virtio transport protocol. +A char dev (e.g. Unix socket) is used for the control plane, while the data +plane is based on shared memory. + +:: + + ... + <devices> + <interface type='vhostuser'> + <mac address='52:54:00:3b:83:1a'/> + <source type='unix' path='/tmp/vhost1.sock' mode='server'/> + <model type='virtio'/> + </interface> + <interface type='vhostuser'> + <mac address='52:54:00:3b:83:1b'/> + <source type='unix' path='/tmp/vhost2.sock' mode='client'> + <reconnect enabled='yes' timeout='10'/> + </source> + <model type='virtio'/> + <driver queues='5'/> + </interface> + </devices> + ... + +The ``<source>`` element has to be specified along with the type of char device. +Currently, only type='unix' is supported, where the path (the directory path of +the socket) and mode attributes are required. Both ``mode='server'`` and +``mode='client'`` are supported. vhost-user requires the virtio model type, thus +the ``<model>`` element is mandatory. :since:`Since 4.1.0` the element has an +optional child element ``reconnect`` which configures reconnect timeout if the +connection is lost. It has two attributes ``enabled`` (which accepts ``yes`` and +``no``) and ``timeout`` which specifies the amount of seconds after which +hypervisor tries to reconnect. + +:anchor:`<a id="elementNwfilter"/>` + +Traffic filtering with NWFilter +^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^ + +:since:`Since 0.8.0` an ``nwfilter`` profile can be assigned to a domain +interface, which allows configuring traffic filter rules for the virtual +machine. See the `nwfilter <formatnwfilter.html>`__ documentation for more +complete details. + +:: + + ... + <devices> + <interface ...> + ... + <filterref filter='clean-traffic'/> + </interface> + <interface ...> + ... + <filterref filter='myfilter'> + <parameter name='IP' value='104.207.129.11'/> + <parameter name='IP6_ADDR' value='2001:19f0:300:2102::'/> + <parameter name='IP6_MASK' value='64'/> + ... + </filterref> + </interface> + </devices> + ... + +The ``filter`` attribute specifies the name of the nwfilter to use. Optional +``<parameter>`` elements may be specified for passing additional info to the +nwfilter via the ``name`` and ``value`` attributes. See the +`nwfilter <formatnwfilter.html#nwfconceptsvars>`__ docs for info on parameters. + +:anchor:`<a id="elementsInput"/>` + +Input devices +~~~~~~~~~~~~~ + +Input devices allow interaction with the graphical framebuffer in the guest +virtual machine. When enabling the framebuffer, an input device is automatically +provided. It may be possible to add additional devices explicitly, for example, +to provide a graphics tablet for absolute cursor movement. + +:: + + ... + <devices> + <input type='mouse' bus='usb'/> + <input type='keyboard' bus='usb'/> + <input type='mouse' bus='virtio'/> + <input type='keyboard' bus='virtio'/> + <input type='tablet' bus='virtio'/> + <input type='passthrough' bus='virtio'> + <source evdev='/dev/input/event1'/> + </input> + </devices> + ... + +``input`` + The ``input`` element has one mandatory attribute, the ``type`` whose value + can be 'mouse', 'tablet', ( :since:`since 1.2.2` ) 'keyboard' or ( + :since:`since 1.3.0` ) 'passthrough'. The tablet provides absolute cursor + movement, while the mouse uses relative movement. The optional ``bus`` + attribute can be used to refine the exact device type. It takes values "xen" + (paravirtualized), "ps2" and "usb" or ( :since:`since 1.3.0` ) "virtio". + +The ``input`` element has an optional sub-element ``<address>`` which can tie +the device to a particular PCI slot, `documented above <#elementsAddress>`__. On +S390, ``address`` can be used to provide a CCW address for an input device ( +:since:`since 4.2.0` ). For type ``passthrough``, the mandatory sub-element +``source`` must have an ``evdev`` attribute containing the absolute path to the +event device passed through to guests. (KVM only) :since:`Since 5.2.0` , the +``input`` element accepts a ``model`` attribute which has the values 'virtio', +'virtio-transitional' and 'virtio-non-transitional'. See `Virtio transitional +devices <#elementsVirtioTransitional>`__ for more details. + +The subelement ``driver`` can be used to tune the virtio options of the device: +`Virtio-specific options <#elementsVirtio>`__ can also be set. ( :since:`Since +3.5.0` ) + +:anchor:`<a id="elementsHub"/>` + +Hub devices +~~~~~~~~~~~ + +A hub is a device that expands a single port into several so that there are more +ports available to connect devices to a host system. + +:: + + ... + <devices> + <hub type='usb'/> + </devices> + ... + +``hub`` + The ``hub`` element has one mandatory attribute, the ``type`` whose value can + only be 'usb'. + +The ``hub`` element has an optional sub-element ``<address>`` with +``type='usb'``\ which can tie the device to a particular controller, `documented +above <#elementsAddress>`__. + +:anchor:`<a id="elementsGraphics"/>` + +Graphical framebuffers +~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ + +A graphics device allows for graphical interaction with the guest OS. A guest +will typically have either a framebuffer or a text console configured to allow +interaction with the admin. + +:: + + ... + <devices> + <graphics type='sdl' display=':0.0'/> + <graphics type='vnc' port='5904' sharePolicy='allow-exclusive'> + <listen type='address' address='1.2.3.4'/> + </graphics> + <graphics type='rdp' autoport='yes' multiUser='yes' /> + <graphics type='desktop' fullscreen='yes'/> + <graphics type='spice'> + <listen type='network' network='rednet'/> + </graphics> + </devices> + ... + +``graphics`` + The ``graphics`` element has a mandatory ``type`` attribute which takes the + value ``sdl``, ``vnc``, ``spice``, ``rdp``, ``desktop`` or ``egl-headless``: + + ``sdl`` + This displays a window on the host desktop, it can take 3 optional + arguments: a ``display`` attribute for the display to use, an ``xauth`` + attribute for the authentication identifier, and an optional + ``fullscreen`` attribute accepting values ``yes`` or ``no``. + + You can use a ``gl`` with the ``enable="yes"`` property to enable OpenGL + support in SDL. Likewise you can explicitly disable OpenGL support with + ``enable="no"``. + + ``vnc`` + Starts a VNC server. The ``port`` attribute specifies the TCP port number + (with -1 as legacy syntax indicating that it should be auto-allocated). + The ``autoport`` attribute is the new preferred syntax for indicating + auto-allocation of the TCP port to use. The ``passwd`` attribute provides + a VNC password in clear text. If the ``passwd`` attribute is set to an + empty string, then VNC access is disabled. The ``keymap`` attribute + specifies the keymap to use. It is possible to set a limit on the validity + of the password by giving a timestamp + ``passwdValidTo='2010-04-09T15:51:00'`` assumed to be in UTC. The + ``connected`` attribute allows control of connected client during password + changes. VNC accepts ``keep`` value only :since:`since 0.9.3` . NB, this + may not be supported by all hypervisors. + + The optional ``sharePolicy`` attribute specifies vnc server display + sharing policy. ``allow-exclusive`` allows clients to ask for exclusive + access by dropping other connections. Connecting multiple clients in + parallel requires all clients asking for a shared session (vncviewer: + -Shared switch). This is the default value. ``force-shared`` disables + exclusive client access, every connection has to specify -Shared switch + for vncviewer. ``ignore`` welcomes every connection unconditionally + :since:`since 1.0.6` . + + Rather than using listen/port, QEMU supports a ``socket`` attribute for + listening on a unix domain socket path :since:`Since 0.8.8` . + + For VNC WebSocket functionality, ``websocket`` attribute may be used to + specify port to listen on (with -1 meaning auto-allocation and + ``autoport`` having no effect due to security reasons) :since:`Since + 1.0.6` . + + Although VNC doesn't support OpenGL natively, it can be paired with + graphics type ``egl-headless`` (see below) which will instruct QEMU to + open and use drm nodes for OpenGL rendering. + + ``spice`` :since:`Since 0.8.6` + Starts a SPICE server. The ``port`` attribute specifies the TCP port + number (with -1 as legacy syntax indicating that it should be + auto-allocated), while ``tlsPort`` gives an alternative secure port + number. The ``autoport`` attribute is the new preferred syntax for + indicating auto-allocation of needed port numbers. The ``passwd`` + attribute provides a SPICE password in clear text. If the ``passwd`` + attribute is set to an empty string, then SPICE access is disabled. The + ``keymap`` attribute specifies the keymap to use. It is possible to set a + limit on the validity of the password by giving a timestamp + ``passwdValidTo='2010-04-09T15:51:00'`` assumed to be in UTC. + + The ``connected`` attribute allows control of connected client during + password changes. SPICE accepts ``keep`` to keep client connected, + ``disconnect`` to disconnect client and ``fail`` to fail changing password + . NB, this may not be supported by all hypervisors. :since:`Since 0.9.3` + + The ``defaultMode`` attribute sets the default channel security policy, + valid values are ``secure``, ``insecure`` and the default ``any`` (which + is secure if possible, but falls back to insecure rather than erroring out + if no secure path is available). :since:`Since 0.9.12` + + When SPICE has both a normal and TLS secured TCP port configured, it can + be desirable to restrict what channels can be run on each port. This is + achieved by adding one or more ``<channel>`` elements inside the main + ``<graphics>`` element and setting the ``mode`` attribute to either + ``secure`` or ``insecure``. Setting the mode attribute overrides the + default value as set by the ``defaultMode`` attribute. (Note that + specifying ``any`` as mode discards the entry as the channel would inherit + the default mode anyways.) Valid channel names include ``main``, + ``display``, ``inputs``, ``cursor``, ``playback``, ``record`` (all + :since:` since 0.8.6` ); ``smartcard`` ( :since:`since 0.8.8` ); and + ``usbredir`` ( :since:`since 0.9.12` ). + + :: + + <graphics type='spice' port='-1' tlsPort='-1' autoport='yes'> + <channel name='main' mode='secure'/> + <channel name='record' mode='insecure'/> + <image compression='auto_glz'/> + <streaming mode='filter'/> + <clipboard copypaste='no'/> + <mouse mode='client'/> + <filetransfer enable='no'/> + <gl enable='yes' rendernode='/dev/dri/by-path/pci-0000:00:02.0-render'/> + </graphics> + + Spice supports variable compression settings for audio, images and + streaming. These settings are accessible via the ``compression`` attribute + in all following elements: ``image`` to set image compression (accepts + ``auto_glz``, ``auto_lz``, ``quic``, ``glz``, ``lz``, ``off``), ``jpeg`` + for JPEG compression for images over wan (accepts ``auto``, ``never``, + ``always``), ``zlib`` for configuring wan image compression (accepts + ``auto``, ``never``, ``always``) and ``playback`` for enabling audio + stream compression (accepts ``on`` or ``off``). :since:`Since 0.9.1` + + Streaming mode is set by the ``streaming`` element, settings its ``mode`` + attribute to one of ``filter``, ``all`` or ``off``. :since:`Since 0.9.2` + + Copy & Paste functionality (via Spice agent) is set by the ``clipboard`` + element. It is enabled by default, and can be disabled by setting the + ``copypaste`` property to ``no``. :since:`Since 0.9.3` + + Mouse mode is set by the ``mouse`` element, setting its ``mode`` attribute + to one of ``server`` or ``client``. If no mode is specified, the qemu + default will be used (client mode). :since:`Since 0.9.11` + + File transfer functionality (via Spice agent) is set using the + ``filetransfer`` element. It is enabled by default, and can be disabled by + setting the ``enable`` property to ``no``. :since:`Since 1.2.2` + + Spice may provide accelerated server-side rendering with OpenGL. You can + enable or disable OpenGL support explicitly with the ``gl`` element, by + setting the ``enable`` property. (QEMU only, :since:`since 1.3.3` ). Note + that this only works locally, since this requires usage of UNIX sockets, + i.e. using ``listen`` types 'socket' or 'none'. For accelerated OpenGL + with remote support, consider pairing this element with type + ``egl-headless`` (see below). However, this will deliver weaker + performance compared to native Spice OpenGL support. + + By default, QEMU will pick the first available GPU DRM render node. You + may specify a DRM render node path to use instead. (QEMU only, + :since:`since 3.1.0` ). + + ``rdp`` + Starts a RDP server. The ``port`` attribute specifies the TCP port number + (with -1 as legacy syntax indicating that it should be auto-allocated). + The ``autoport`` attribute is the new preferred syntax for indicating + auto-allocation of the TCP port to use. In the VirtualBox driver, the + ``autoport`` will make the hypervisor pick available port from 3389-3689 + range when the VM is started. The chosen port will be reflected in the + ``port`` attribute. The ``multiUser`` attribute is a boolean deciding + whether multiple simultaneous connections to the VM are permitted. The + ``replaceUser`` attribute is a boolean deciding whether the existing + connection must be dropped and a new connection must be established by the + VRDP server, when a new client connects in single connection mode. + + ``desktop`` + This value is reserved for VirtualBox domains for the moment. It displays + a window on the host desktop, similarly to "sdl", but using the VirtualBox + viewer. Just like "sdl", it accepts the optional attributes ``display`` + and ``fullscreen``. + + ``egl-headless`` :since:`Since 4.6.0` + This display type provides support for an OpenGL accelerated display + accessible both locally and remotely (for comparison, Spice's native + OpenGL support only works locally using UNIX sockets at the moment, but + has better performance). Since this display type doesn't provide any + window or graphical console like the other types, for practical reasons it + should be paired with either ``vnc`` or ``spice`` graphics types. This + display type is only supported by QEMU domains (needs QEMU :since:`2.10` + or newer). :since:`5.0.0` this element accepts a ``<gl/>`` sub-element + with an optional attribute ``rendernode`` which can be used to specify an + absolute path to a host's DRI device to be used for OpenGL rendering. + + :: + + <graphics type='spice' autoport='yes'/> + <graphics type='egl-headless'> + <gl rendernode='/dev/dri/renderD128'/> + </graphics> + +Graphics device uses a ``<listen>`` to set up where the device should listen for +clients. It has a mandatory attribute ``type`` which specifies the listen type. +Only ``vnc``, ``spice`` and ``rdp`` supports ``<listen>`` element. :since:`Since +0.9.4` . Available types are: + +``address`` + Tells a graphics device to use an address specified in the ``address`` + attribute, which will contain either an IP address or hostname (which will be + resolved to an IP address via a DNS query) to listen on. + + It is possible to omit the ``address`` attribute in order to use an address + from config files :since:`Since 1.3.5` . + + The ``address`` attribute is duplicated as ``listen`` attribute in + ``graphics`` element for backward compatibility. If both are provided they + must be equal. + +``network`` + This is used to specify an existing network in the ``network`` attribute from + libvirt's list of configured networks. The named network configuration will + be examined to determine an appropriate listen address and the address will + be stored in live XML in ``address`` attribute. For example, if the network + has an IPv4 address in its configuration (e.g. if it has a forward type of + ``route``, ``nat``, or no forward type (isolated)), the first IPv4 address + listed in the network's configuration will be used. If the network is + describing a host bridge, the first IPv4 address associated with that bridge + device will be used, and if the network is describing one of the 'direct' + (macvtap) modes, the first IPv4 address of the first forward dev will be + used. + +``socket`` :since:`since 2.0.0 (QEMU only)` + This listen type tells a graphics server to listen on unix socket. Attribute + ``socket`` contains a path to unix socket. If this attribute is omitted + libvirt will generate this path for you. Supported by graphics type ``vnc`` + and ``spice``. + + For ``vnc`` graphics be backward compatible the ``socket`` attribute of first + ``listen`` element is duplicated as ``socket`` attribute in ``graphics`` + element. If ``graphics`` element contains a ``socket`` attribute all + ``listen`` elements are ignored. + +``none`` :since:`since 2.0.0 (QEMU only)` + This listen type doesn't have any other attribute. Libvirt supports passing a + file descriptor through our APIs virDomainOpenGraphics() and + virDomainOpenGraphicsFD(). No other listen types are allowed if this one is + used and the graphics device doesn't listen anywhere. You need to use one of + the two APIs to pass a FD to QEMU in order to connect to this graphics + device. Supported by graphics type ``vnc`` and ``spice``. + +:anchor:`<a id="elementsVideo"/>` + +Video devices +~~~~~~~~~~~~~ + +A video device. + +:: + + ... + <devices> + <video> + <model type='vga' vram='16384' heads='1'> + <acceleration accel3d='yes' accel2d='yes'/> + </model> + <driver name='qemu'/> + </video> + </devices> + ... + +``video`` + The ``video`` element is the container for describing video devices. For + backwards compatibility, if no ``video`` is set but there is a ``graphics`` + in domain xml, then libvirt will add a default ``video`` according to the + guest type. + + For a guest of type "kvm", the default ``video`` is: ``type`` with value + "cirrus", ``vram`` with value "16384" and ``heads`` with value "1". By + default, the first video device in domain xml is the primary one, but the + optional attribute ``primary`` ( :since:`since 1.0.2` ) with value 'yes' can + be used to mark the primary in cases of multiple video device. The + non-primary must be type of "qxl" or ( :since:`since 2.4.0` ) "virtio". + +``model`` + The ``model`` element has a mandatory ``type`` attribute which takes the + value "vga", "cirrus", "vmvga", "xen", "vbox", "qxl" ( :since:`since 0.8.6` + ), "virtio" ( :since:`since 1.3.0` ), "gop" ( :since:`since 3.2.0` ), "bochs" + ( :since:`since 5.6.0` ), "ramfb" ( :since:`since 5.9.0` ), or "none" ( + :since:`since 4.6.0` , depending on the hypervisor features available. The + purpose of the type ``none`` is to instruct libvirt not to add a default + video device in the guest (see the paragraph above). This legacy behaviour + can be inconvenient in cases where GPU mediated devices are meant to be the + only rendering device within a guest and so specifying another ``video`` + device along with type ``none``. Refer to Host device assignment to see how + to add a mediated device into a guest. + + You can provide the amount of video memory in kibibytes (blocks of 1024 + bytes) using ``vram``. This is supported only for guest type of "vz", "qemu", + "vbox", "vmx" and "xen". If no value is provided the default is used. If the + size is not a power of two it will be rounded to closest one. + + The number of screen can be set using ``heads``. This is supported only for + guests type of "vz", "kvm", "vbox" and "vmx". + + For guest type of "kvm" or "qemu" and model type "qxl" there are optional + attributes. Attribute ``ram`` ( :since:` since 1.0.2` ) specifies the size of + the primary bar, while the attribute ``vram`` specifies the secondary bar + size. If ``ram`` or ``vram`` are not supplied a default value is used. The + ``ram`` should also be rounded to power of two as ``vram``. There is also + optional attribute ``vgamem`` ( :since:`since 1.2.11` ) to set the size of + VGA framebuffer for fallback mode of QXL device. Attribute ``vram64`` ( + :since:`since 1.3.3` ) extends secondary bar and makes it addressable as + 64bit memory. + + :since:`Since 5.9.0` , the ``model`` element may also have an optional + ``resolution`` sub-element. The ``resolution`` element has attributes ``x`` + and ``y`` to set the minimum resolution for the video device. This + sub-element is valid for model types "vga", "qxl", "bochs", and "virtio". + +``acceleration`` + Configure if video acceleration should be enabled. + + ``accel2d`` + Enable 2D acceleration (for vbox driver only, :since:`since 0.7.1` ) + ``accel3d`` + Enable 3D acceleration (for vbox driver :since:`since 0.7.1` , qemu driver + :since:`since 1.3.0` ) + ``rendernode`` + Absolute path to a host's DRI device to be used for rendering (for + 'vhostuser' driver only, :since:`since 5.8.0` ). If none is specified, + libvirt will pick one available. + +``address`` + The optional ``address`` sub-element can be used to tie the video device to a + particular PCI slot. On S390, ``address`` can be used to provide the CCW + address for the video device ( :since:` since 4.2.0` ). +``driver`` + The subelement ``driver`` can be used to tune the device: + + ``name`` + Specify the backend driver to use, either "qemu" or "vhostuser" depending + on the hypervisor features available ( :since:`since 5.8.0` ). "qemu" is + the default QEMU backend. "vhostuser" will use a separate vhost-user + process backend (for ``virtio`` device). + virtio options + `Virtio-specific options <#elementsVirtio>`__ can also be set ( + :since:`Since 3.5.0` ) + VGA configuration + Control how the video devices exposed to the guest using the ``vgaconf`` + attribute which takes the value "io", "on" or "off". At present, it's only + applicable to the bhyve's "gop" video model type ( :since:`Since 3.5.0` ) + +:anchor:`<a id="elementsConsole"/>` + +Consoles, serial, parallel & channel devices +~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ + +A character device provides a way to interact with the virtual machine. +Paravirtualized consoles, serial ports, parallel ports and channels are all +classed as character devices and so represented using the same syntax. + +:: + + ... + <devices> + <parallel type='pty'> + <source path='/dev/pts/2'/> + <target port='0'/> + </parallel> + <serial type='pty'> + <source path='/dev/pts/3'/> + <target port='0'/> + </serial> + <serial type='file'> + <source path='/tmp/file' append='on'> + <seclabel model='dac' relabel='no'/> + </source> + <target port='0'/> + </serial> + <console type='pty'> + <source path='/dev/pts/4'/> + <target port='0'/> + </console> + <channel type='unix'> + <source mode='bind' path='/tmp/guestfwd'/> + <target type='guestfwd' address='10.0.2.1' port='4600'/> + </channel> + </devices> + ... + +In each of these directives, the top-level element name (parallel, serial, +console, channel) describes how the device is presented to the guest. The guest +interface is configured by the ``target`` element. + +The interface presented to the host is given in the ``type`` attribute of the +top-level element. The host interface is configured by the ``source`` element. + +The ``source`` element may contain an optional ``seclabel`` to override the way +that labelling is done on the socket path. If this element is not present, the +`security label is inherited from the per-domain setting <#seclabel>`__. + +If the interface ``type`` presented to the host is "file", then the ``source`` +element may contain an optional attribute ``append`` that specifies whether or +not the information in the file should be preserved on domain restart. Allowed +values are "on" and "off" (default). :since:`Since 1.3.1` . + +Regardless of the ``type``, character devices can have an optional log file +associated with them. This is expressed via a ``log`` sub-element, with a +``file`` attribute. There can also be an ``append`` attribute which takes the +same values described above. :since:`Since 1.3.3` . + +:: + + ... + <log file="/var/log/libvirt/qemu/guestname-serial0.log" append="off"/> + ... + +Each character device element has an optional sub-element ``<address>`` which +can tie the device to a particular `controller <#elementsControllers>`__ or PCI +slot. + +For character device with type ``unix`` or ``tcp`` the ``source`` has an +optional element ``reconnect`` which configures reconnect timeout if the +connection is lost. There are two attributes, ``enabled`` where possible values +are "yes" and "no" and ``timeout`` which is in seconds. The ``reconnect`` +attribute is valid only for ``connect`` mode. :since:`Since 3.7.0 (QEMU driver +only)` . + +:anchor:`<a id="elementsCharGuestInterface"/>` + +Guest interface +^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^ + +A character device presents itself to the guest as one of the following types. + +:anchor:`<a id="elementCharParallel"/>` + +Parallel port +''''''''''''' + +:: + + ... + <devices> + <parallel type='pty'> + <source path='/dev/pts/2'/> + <target port='0'/> + </parallel> + </devices> + ... + +``target`` can have a ``port`` attribute, which specifies the port number. Ports +are numbered starting from 0. There are usually 0, 1 or 2 parallel ports. + +:anchor:`<a id="elementCharSerial"/>` + +Serial port +''''''''''' + +:: + + ... + <devices> +  + <serial type='pty'> + <source path='/dev/pts/3'/> + <target port='0'/> + </serial> + </devices> + ... + +:: + + ... + <devices> +  + <serial type='pty'> + <target type='usb-serial' port='0'> + <model name='usb-serial'/> + </target> + <address type='usb' bus='0' port='1'/> + </serial> + </devices> + ... + +The ``target`` element can have an optional ``port`` attribute, which specifies +the port number (starting from 0), and an optional ``type`` attribute: valid +values are, :since:`since 1.0.2` , ``isa-serial`` (usable with x86 guests), +``usb-serial`` (usable whenever USB support is available) and ``pci-serial`` +(usable whenever PCI support is available); :since:`since 3.10.0` , +``spapr-vio-serial`` (usable with ppc64/pseries guests), ``system-serial`` +(usable with aarch64/virt and, :since:`since 4.7.0` , riscv/virt guests) and +``sclp-serial`` (usable with s390 and s390x guests) are available as well. + +:since:`Since 3.10.0` , the ``target`` element can have an optional ``model`` +subelement; valid values for its ``name`` attribute are: ``isa-serial`` (usable +with the ``isa-serial`` target type); ``usb-serial`` (usable with the +``usb-serial`` target type); ``pci-serial`` (usable with the ``pci-serial`` +target type); ``spapr-vty`` (usable with the ``spapr-vio-serial`` target type); +``pl011`` and, :since:`since 4.7.0` , ``16550a`` (usable with the +``system-serial`` target type); ``sclpconsole`` and ``sclplmconsole`` (usable +with the ``sclp-serial`` target type). Providing a target model is usually +unnecessary: libvirt will automatically pick one that's suitable for the chosen +target type, and overriding that value is generally not recommended. + +If any of the attributes is not specified by the user, libvirt will choose a +value suitable for most users. + +Most target types support configuring the guest-visible device address as +`documented above <#elementsAddress>`__; more specifically, acceptable address +types are ``isa`` (for ``isa-serial``), ``usb`` (for ``usb-serial``), ``pci`` +(for ``pci-serial``) and ``spapr-vio`` (for ``spapr-vio-serial``). The +``system-serial`` and ``sclp-serial`` target types don't support specifying an +address. + +For the relationship between serial ports and consoles, `see +below <#elementCharSerialAndConsole>`__. + +:anchor:`<a id="elementCharConsole"/>` + +Console +''''''' + +:: + + ... + <devices> +  + <console type='pty'> + <source path='/dev/pts/2'/> + <target type='serial' port='0'/> + </console> + </devices> + ... + +:: + + ... + <devices> +  + <console type='pty'> + <source path='/dev/pts/5'/> + <target type='virtio' port='0'/> + </console> + </devices> + ... + +The ``console`` element is used to represent interactive serial consoles. +Depending on the type of guest in use and the specifics of the configuration, +the ``console`` element might represent the same device as an existing +``serial`` element or a separate device. + +A ``target`` subelement is supported and works the same way as with the +``serial`` element (`see above <#elementCharSerial>`__ for details). Valid +values for the ``type`` attribute are: ``serial`` (described below); ``virtio`` +(usable whenever VirtIO support is available); ``xen``, ``lxc`` and ``openvz`` +(available when the corresponding hypervisor is in use). ``sclp`` and ``sclplm`` +(usable for s390 and s390x QEMU guests) are supported for compatibility reasons +but should not be used for new guests: use the ``sclpconsole`` and +``sclplmconsole`` target models, respectively, with the ``serial`` element +instead. + +Of the target types listed above, ``serial`` is special in that it doesn't +represents a separate device, but rather the same device as the first ``serial`` +element. Due to this, there can only be a single ``console`` element with target +type ``serial`` per guest. + +Virtio consoles are usually accessible as ``/dev/hvc[0-7]`` from inside the +guest; for more information, see +http://fedoraproject.org/wiki/Features/VirtioSerial. :since:`Since 0.8.3` + +For the relationship between serial ports and consoles, `see +below <#elementCharSerialAndConsole>`__. + +:anchor:`<a id="elementCharSerialAndConsole"/>` + +Relationship between serial ports and consoles +'''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''' + +Due to hystorical reasons, the ``serial`` and ``console`` elements have +partially overlapping scopes. + +In general, both elements are used to configure one or more serial consoles to +be used for interacting with the guest. The main difference between the two is +that ``serial`` is used for emulated, usually native, serial consoles, whereas +``console`` is used for paravirtualized ones. + +Both emulated and paravirtualized serial consoles have advantages and +disadvantages: + +- emulated serial consoles are usually initialized much earlier than + paravirtualized ones, so they can be used to control the bootloader and + display both firmware and early boot messages; +- on several platforms, there can only be a single emulated serial console per + guest but paravirtualized consoles don't suffer from the same limitation. + +A configuration such as: + +:: + + ... + <devices> + <console type='pty'> + <target type='serial'/> + </console> + <console type='pty'> + <target type='virtio'/> + </console> + </devices> + ... + +will work on any platform and will result in one emulated serial console for +early boot logging / interactive / recovery use, and one paravirtualized serial +console to be used eg. as a side channel. Most people will be fine with having +just the first ``console`` element in their configuration, but if a specific +configuration is desired then both elements should be specified. + +Note that, due to the compatibility concerns mentioned earlier, all the +following configurations: + +:: + + ... + <devices> + <serial type='pty'/> + </devices> + ... + +:: + + ... + <devices> + <console type='pty'/> + </devices> + ... + +:: + + ... + <devices> + <serial type='pty'/> + <console type='pty'/> + </devices> + ... + +will be treated the same and will result in a single emulated serial console +being available to the guest. + +:anchor:`<a id="elementCharChannel"/>` + +Channel +''''''' + +This represents a private communication channel between the host and the guest. + +:: + + ... + <devices> + <channel type='unix'> + <source mode='bind' path='/tmp/guestfwd'/> + <target type='guestfwd' address='10.0.2.1' port='4600'/> + </channel> + +  + <channel type='pty'> + <target type='virtio' name='arbitrary.virtio.serial.port.name'/> + </channel> + <channel type='unix'> + <source mode='bind' path='/var/lib/libvirt/qemu/f16x86_64.agent'/> + <target type='virtio' name='org.qemu.guest_agent.0' state='connected'/> + </channel> + <channel type='spicevmc'> + <target type='virtio' name='com.redhat.spice.0'/> + </channel> + </devices> + ... + +This can be implemented in a variety of ways. The specific type of channel is +given in the ``type`` attribute of the ``target`` element. Different channel +types have different ``target`` attributes. + +``guestfwd`` + TCP traffic sent by the guest to a given IP address and port is forwarded to + the channel device on the host. The ``target`` element must have ``address`` + and ``port`` attributes. :since:`Since 0.7.3` +``virtio`` + Paravirtualized virtio channel. Channel is exposed in the guest under + /dev/vport*, and if the optional element ``name`` is specified, + /dev/virtio-ports/$name (for more info, please see + http://fedoraproject.org/wiki/Features/VirtioSerial). The optional element + ``address`` can tie the channel to a particular ``type='virtio-serial'`` + controller, `documented above <#elementsAddress>`__. With qemu, if ``name`` + is "org.qemu.guest_agent.0", then libvirt can interact with a guest agent + installed in the guest, for actions such as guest shutdown or file system + quiescing. :since:`Since 0.7.7, guest agent interaction since 0.9.10` + Moreover, :since:`since 1.0.6` it is possible to have source path auto + generated for virtio unix channels. This is very useful in case of a qemu + guest agent, where users don't usually care about the source path since it's + libvirt who talks to the guest agent. In case users want to utilize this + feature, they should leave ``<source>`` element out. :since:`Since 1.2.11` + the active XML for a virtio channel may contain an optional ``state`` + attribute that reflects whether a process in the guest is active on the + channel. This is an output-only attribute. Possible values for the ``state`` + attribute are ``connected`` and ``disconnected``. +``xen`` + Paravirtualized Xen channel. Channel is exposed in the guest as a Xen console + but identified with a name. Setup and consumption of a Xen channel depends on + software and configuration in the guest (for more info, please see + http://xenbits.xen.org/docs/unstable/misc/channel.txt). Channel source path + semantics are the same as the virtio target type. The ``state`` attribute is + not supported since Xen channels lack the necessary probing mechanism. + :since:`Since 2.3.0` +``spicevmc`` + Paravirtualized SPICE channel. The domain must also have a SPICE server as a + `graphics device <#elementsGraphics>`__, at which point the host piggy-backs + messages across the ``main`` channel. The ``target`` element must be present, + with attribute ``type='virtio'``; an optional attribute ``name`` controls how + the guest will have access to the channel, and defaults to + ``name='com.redhat.spice.0'``. The optional ``address`` element can tie the + channel to a particular ``type='virtio-serial'`` controller. :since:`Since + 0.8.8` + +:anchor:`<a id="elementsCharHostInterface"/>` + +Host interface +^^^^^^^^^^^^^^ + +A character device presents itself to the host as one of the following types. + +:anchor:`<a id="elementsCharSTDIO"/>` + +Domain logfile +'''''''''''''' + +This disables all input on the character device, and sends output into the +virtual machine's logfile + +:: + + ... + <devices> + <console type='stdio'> + <target port='1'/> + </console> + </devices> + ... + +:anchor:`<a id="elementsCharFle"/>` + +Device logfile +'''''''''''''' + +A file is opened and all data sent to the character device is written to the +file. + +:: + + ... + <devices> + <serial type="file"> + <source path="/var/log/vm/vm-serial.log"/> + <target port="1"/> + </serial> + </devices> + ... + +:anchor:`<a id="elementsCharVC"/>` + +Virtual console +''''''''''''''' + +Connects the character device to the graphical framebuffer in a virtual console. +This is typically accessed via a special hotkey sequence such as "ctrl+alt+3" + +:: + + ... + <devices> + <serial type='vc'> + <target port="1"/> + </serial> + </devices> + ... + +:anchor:`<a id="elementsCharNull"/>` + +Null device +''''''''''' + +Connects the character device to the void. No data is ever provided to the +input. All data written is discarded. + +:: + + ... + <devices> + <serial type='null'> + <target port="1"/> + </serial> + </devices> + ... + +:anchor:`<a id="elementsCharPTY"/>` + +Pseudo TTY +'''''''''' + +A Pseudo TTY is allocated using /dev/ptmx. A suitable client such as 'virsh +console' can connect to interact with the serial port locally. + +:: + + ... + <devices> + <serial type="pty"> + <source path="/dev/pts/3"/> + <target port="1"/> + </serial> + </devices> + ... + +NB special case if <console type='pty'>, then the TTY path is also duplicated as +an attribute tty='/dev/pts/3' on the top level <console> tag. This provides +compat with existing syntax for <console> tags. + +:anchor:`<a id="elementsCharHost"/>` + +Host device proxy +''''''''''''''''' + +The character device is passed through to the underlying physical character +device. The device types must match, eg the emulated serial port should only be +connected to a host serial port - don't connect a serial port to a parallel +port. + +:: + + ... + <devices> + <serial type="dev"> + <source path="/dev/ttyS0"/> + <target port="1"/> + </serial> + </devices> + ... + +:anchor:`<a id="elementsCharPipe"/>` + +Named pipe +'''''''''' + +The character device writes output to a named pipe. See pipe(7) for more info. + +:: + + ... + <devices> + <serial type="pipe"> + <source path="/tmp/mypipe"/> + <target port="1"/> + </serial> + </devices> + ... + +:anchor:`<a id="elementsCharTCP"/>` + +TCP client/server +''''''''''''''''' + +The character device acts as a TCP client connecting to a remote server. + +:: + + ... + <devices> + <serial type="tcp"> + <source mode="connect" host="0.0.0.0" service="2445"/> + <protocol type="raw"/> + <target port="1"/> + </serial> + </devices> + ... + +Or as a TCP server waiting for a client connection. + +:: + + ... + <devices> + <serial type="tcp"> + <source mode="bind" host="127.0.0.1" service="2445"/> + <protocol type="raw"/> + <target port="1"/> + </serial> + </devices> + ... + +Alternatively you can use ``telnet`` instead of ``raw`` TCP in order to utilize +the telnet protocol for the connection. + +:since:`Since 0.8.5,` some hypervisors support use of either ``telnets`` (secure +telnet) or ``tls`` (via secure sockets layer) as the transport protocol for +connections. + +:: + + ... + <devices> + <serial type="tcp"> + <source mode="connect" host="0.0.0.0" service="2445"/> + <protocol type="telnet"/> + <target port="1"/> + </serial> + ... + <serial type="tcp"> + <source mode="bind" host="127.0.0.1" service="2445"/> + <protocol type="telnet"/> + <target port="1"/> + </serial> + </devices> + ... + +:since:`Since 2.4.0,` the optional attribute ``tls`` can be used to control +whether a chardev TCP communication channel would utilize a hypervisor +configured TLS X.509 certificate environment in order to encrypt the data +channel. For the QEMU hypervisor, usage of a TLS environment can be controlled +on the host by the ``chardev_tls`` and ``chardev_tls_x509_cert_dir`` or +``default_tls_x509_cert_dir`` settings in the file /etc/libvirt/qemu.conf. If +``chardev_tls`` is enabled, then unless the ``tls`` attribute is set to "no", +libvirt will use the host configured TLS environment. If ``chardev_tls`` is +disabled, but the ``tls`` attribute is set to "yes", then libvirt will attempt +to use the host TLS environment if either the ``chardev_tls_x509_cert_dir`` or +``default_tls_x509_cert_dir`` TLS directory structure exists. + +:: + + ... + <devices> + <serial type="tcp"> + <source mode='connect' host="127.0.0.1" service="5555" tls="yes"/> + <protocol type="raw"/> + <target port="0"/> + </serial> + </devices> + ... + +:anchor:`<a id="elementsCharUDP"/>` + +UDP network console +''''''''''''''''''' + +The character device acts as a UDP netconsole service, sending and receiving +packets. This is a lossy service. + +:: + + ... + <devices> + <serial type="udp"> + <source mode="bind" host="0.0.0.0" service="2445"/> + <source mode="connect" host="0.0.0.0" service="2445"/> + <target port="1"/> + </serial> + </devices> + ... + +:anchor:`<a id="elementsCharUNIX"/>` + +UNIX domain socket client/server +'''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''' + +The character device acts as a UNIX domain socket server, accepting connections +from local clients. + +:: + + ... + <devices> + <serial type="unix"> + <source mode="bind" path="/tmp/foo"/> + <target port="1"/> + </serial> + </devices> + ... + +:anchor:`<a id="elementsCharSpiceport"/>` + +Spice channel +''''''''''''' + +The character device is accessible through spice connection under a channel name +specified in the ``channel`` attribute. :since:`Since 1.2.2` + +Note: depending on the hypervisor, spiceports might (or might not) be enabled on +domains with or without `spice graphics <#elementsGraphics>`__. + +:: + + ... + <devices> + <serial type="spiceport"> + <source channel="org.qemu.console.serial.0"/> + <target port="1"/> + </serial> + </devices> + ... + +:anchor:`<a id="elementsNmdm"/>` + +Nmdm device +''''''''''' + +The nmdm device driver, available on FreeBSD, provides two tty devices connected +together by a virtual null modem cable. :since:`Since 1.2.4` + +:: + + ... + <devices> + <serial type="nmdm"> + <source master="/dev/nmdm0A" slave="/dev/nmdm0B"/> + </serial> + </devices> + ... + +The ``source`` element has these attributes: + +``master`` + Master device of the pair, that is passed to the hypervisor. Device is + specified by a fully qualified path. +``slave`` + Slave device of the pair, that is passed to the clients for connection to the + guest console. Device is specified by a fully qualified path. + +:anchor:`<a id="elementsSound"/>` + +Sound devices +~~~~~~~~~~~~~ + +A virtual sound card can be attached to the host via the ``sound`` element. +:since:`Since 0.4.3` + +:: + + ... + <devices> + <sound model='es1370'/> + </devices> + ... + +``sound`` + The ``sound`` element has one mandatory attribute, ``model``, which specifies + what real sound device is emulated. Valid values are specific to the + underlying hypervisor, though typical choices are 'es1370', 'sb16', 'ac97', + 'ich6' and 'usb'. ( :since:` 'ac97' only since 0.6.0, 'ich6' only since + 0.8.8, 'usb' only since 1.2.7` ) + +:since:`Since 0.9.13` , a sound element with ``ich6`` model can have optional +sub-elements ``<codec>`` to attach various audio codecs to the audio device. If +not specified, a default codec will be attached to allow playback and recording. + +Valid values are: + +- 'duplex' - advertise a line-in and a line-out +- 'micro' - advertise a speaker and a microphone +- 'output' - advertise a line-out :since:`Since 4.4.0` + +:: + + ... + <devices> + <sound model='ich6'> + <codec type='micro'/> + </sound> + </devices> + ... + +Each ``sound`` element has an optional sub-element ``<address>`` which can tie +the device to a particular PCI slot, `documented above <#elementsAddress>`__. + +:anchor:`<a id="elementsWatchdog"/>` + +Watchdog device +~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ + +A virtual hardware watchdog device can be added to the guest via the +``watchdog`` element. :since:`Since 0.7.3, QEMU and KVM only` + +The watchdog device requires an additional driver and management daemon in the +guest. Just enabling the watchdog in the libvirt configuration does not do +anything useful on its own. + +Currently libvirt does not support notification when the watchdog fires. This +feature is planned for a future version of libvirt. + +:: + + ... + <devices> + <watchdog model='i6300esb'/> + </devices> + ... + +:: + + ... + <devices> + <watchdog model='i6300esb' action='poweroff'/> + </devices> + </domain> + +``model`` + The required ``model`` attribute specifies what real watchdog device is + emulated. Valid values are specific to the underlying hypervisor. + + QEMU and KVM support: + + - 'i6300esb' - the recommended device, emulating a PCI Intel 6300ESB + - 'ib700' - emulating an ISA iBase IB700 + - 'diag288' - emulating an S390 DIAG288 device :since:`Since 1.2.17` + +``action`` + The optional ``action`` attribute describes what action to take when the + watchdog expires. Valid values are specific to the underlying hypervisor. + + QEMU and KVM support: + + - 'reset' - default, forcefully reset the guest + - 'shutdown' - gracefully shutdown the guest (not recommended) + - 'poweroff' - forcefully power off the guest + - 'pause' - pause the guest + - 'none' - do nothing + - 'dump' - automatically dump the guest :since:`Since 0.8.7` + - 'inject-nmi' - inject a non-maskable interrupt into the guest + :since:`Since 1.2.17` + + Note 1: the 'shutdown' action requires that the guest is responsive to ACPI + signals. In the sort of situations where the watchdog has expired, guests are + usually unable to respond to ACPI signals. Therefore using 'shutdown' is not + recommended. + + Note 2: the directory to save dump files can be configured by + ``auto_dump_path`` in file /etc/libvirt/qemu.conf. + +:anchor:`<a id="elementsMemBalloon"/>` + +Memory balloon device +~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ + +A virtual memory balloon device is added to all Xen and KVM/QEMU guests. It will +be seen as ``memballoon`` element. It will be automatically added when +appropriate, so there is no need to explicitly add this element in the guest XML +unless a specific PCI slot needs to be assigned. :since:`Since 0.8.3, Xen, QEMU +and KVM only` Additionally, :since:`since 0.8.4` , if the memballoon device +needs to be explicitly disabled, ``model='none'`` may be used. + +Example: automatically added device with KVM + +:: + + ... + <devices> + <memballoon model='virtio'/> + </devices> + ... + +Example: manually added device with static PCI slot 2 requested + +:: + + ... + <devices> + <memballoon model='virtio'> + <address type='pci' domain='0x0000' bus='0x00' slot='0x02' function='0x0'/> + <stats period='10'/> + <driver iommu='on' ats='on'/> + </memballoon> + </devices> + </domain> + +``model`` + The required ``model`` attribute specifies what type of balloon device is + provided. Valid values are specific to the virtualization platform + + - 'virtio' - default with QEMU/KVM + - 'virtio-transitional' :since:`Since 5.2.0` + - 'virtio-non-transitional' :since:`Since 5.2.0` + - 'xen' - default with Xen + + See `Virtio transitional devices <#elementsVirtioTransitional>`__ for more + details. + +``autodeflate`` + The optional ``autodeflate`` attribute allows to enable/disable (values + "on"/"off", respectively) the ability of the QEMU virtio memory balloon to + release some memory at the last moment before a guest's process get killed by + Out of Memory killer. :since:`Since 1.3.1, QEMU and KVM only` + +``period`` + The optional ``period`` allows the QEMU virtio memory balloon driver to + provide statistics through the ``virsh dommemstat [domain]`` + command. By default, collection is not enabled. In order to enable, use the + ``virsh dommemstat [domain] --period [number]`` command or + ``virsh edit`` command to add the option to the XML definition. The + ``virsh dommemstat`` will accept the options ``--live``, ``--current``, or + ``--config``. If an option is not provided, the change for a running domain + will only be made to the active guest. If the QEMU driver is not at the right + revision, the attempt to set the period will fail. Large values (e.g. many + years) might be ignored. :since:`Since 1.1.1, requires QEMU 1.5` + +``driver`` + For model ``virtio`` memballoon, `Virtio-specific + options <#elementsVirtio>`__ can also be set. ( :since:`Since 3.5.0` ) + +:anchor:`<a id="elementsRng"/>` + +Random number generator device +~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ + +The virtual random number generator device allows the host to pass through +entropy to guest operating systems. :since:`Since 1.0.3` + +Example: usage of the RNG device: + +:: + + ... + <devices> + <rng model='virtio'> + <rate period="2000" bytes="1234"/> + <backend model='random'>/dev/random</backend> +  + <backend model='egd' type='udp'> + <source mode='bind' service='1234'/> + <source mode='connect' host='1.2.3.4' service='1234'/> + </backend> +  + <backend model='builtin'/> + </rng> + </devices> + ... + +``model`` + The required ``model`` attribute specifies what type of RNG device is + provided. Valid values are specific to the virtualization platform: + + - 'virtio' - supported by qemu and virtio-rng kernel module + - 'virtio-transitional' :since:`Since 5.2.0` + - 'virtio-non-transitional' :since:`Since 5.2.0` + + See `Virtio transitional devices <#elementsVirtioTransitional>`__ for more + details. + +``rate`` + The optional ``rate`` element allows limiting the rate at which entropy can + be consumed from the source. The mandatory attribute ``bytes`` specifies how + many bytes are permitted to be consumed per period. An optional ``period`` + attribute specifies the duration of a period in milliseconds; if omitted, the + period is taken as 1000 milliseconds (1 second). :since:`Since 1.0.4` + +``backend`` + The ``backend`` element specifies the source of entropy to be used for the + domain. The source model is configured using the ``model`` attribute. + Supported source models are: + + ``random`` + This backend type expects a non-blocking character device as input. The + file name is specified as contents of the ``backend`` element. + :since:`Since 1.3.4` any path is accepted. Before that ``/dev/random`` and + ``/dev/hwrng`` were the only accepted paths. When no file name is + specified, the hypervisor default is used. For QEMU, the default is + ``/dev/random``. However, the recommended source of entropy is + ``/dev/urandom`` (as it doesn't have the limitations of ``/dev/random``). + + ``egd`` + This backend connects to a source using the EGD protocol. The source is + specified as a character device. Refer to `character device host + interface <#elementsCharHostInterface>`__ for more information. + + ``builtin`` + This backend uses qemu builtin random generator, which uses + ``getrandom()`` syscall as the source of entropy. ( :since:`Since 6.1.0 + and QEMU 4.2` ) + +``driver`` + The subelement ``driver`` can be used to tune the device: + + virtio options + `Virtio-specific options <#elementsVirtio>`__ can also be set. ( + :since:`Since 3.5.0` ) + +:anchor:`<a id="elementsTpm"/>` + +TPM device +~~~~~~~~~~ + +The TPM device enables a QEMU guest to have access to TPM functionality. The TPM +device may either be a TPM 1.2 or a TPM 2.0. + +The TPM passthrough device type provides access to the host's TPM for one QEMU +guest. No other software may be using the TPM device, typically /dev/tpm0, at +the time the QEMU guest is started. :since:`'passthrough' since 1.0.5` + +Example: usage of the TPM passthrough device + +:: + + ... + <devices> + <tpm model='tpm-tis'> + <backend type='passthrough'> + <device path='/dev/tpm0'/> + </backend> + </tpm> + </devices> + ... + +The emulator device type gives access to a TPM emulator providing TPM +functionality for each VM. QEMU talks to it over a Unix socket. With the +emulator device type each guest gets its own private TPM. :since:`'emulator' +since 4.5.0` The state of the TPM emulator can be encrypted by providing an +``encryption`` element. :since:`'encryption' since 5.6.0` + +Example: usage of the TPM Emulator + +:: + + ... + <devices> + <tpm model='tpm-tis'> + <backend type='emulator' version='2.0'> + <encryption secret='6dd3e4a5-1d76-44ce-961f-f119f5aad935'/> + </backend> + </tpm> + </devices> + ... + +``model`` + The ``model`` attribute specifies what device model QEMU provides to the + guest. If no model name is provided, ``tpm-tis`` will automatically be chosen + for non-PPC64 architectures. :since:`Since 4.4.0` , another available choice + is the ``tpm-crb``, which should only be used when the backend device is a + TPM 2.0. :since:`Since 6.1.0` , pSeries guests on PPC64 are supported and the + default is ``tpm-spapr``. :since:`Since 6.5.0` , a new model called + ``spapr-tpm-proxy`` was added for pSeries guests. This model only works with + the ``passthrough`` backend. It creates a TPM Proxy device that communicates + with an existing TPM Resource Manager in the host, for example + ``/dev/tpmrm0``, enabling the guest to run in secure virtual machine mode + with the help of an Ultravisor. Adding a TPM Proxy to a pSeries guest brings + no security benefits unless the guest is running on a PPC64 host that has an + Ultravisor and a TPM Resource Manager. Only one TPM Proxy device is allowed + per guest, but a TPM Proxy device can be added together with other TPM + devices. + +``backend`` + The ``backend`` element specifies the type of TPM device. The following types + are supported: + + ``passthrough`` + Use the host's TPM or TPM Resource Manager device. + + This backend type requires exclusive access to a TPM device on the host. + An example for such a device is /dev/tpm0. The fully qualified file name + is specified by path attribute of the ``source`` element. If no file name + is specified then /dev/tpm0 is automatically used. :since:`Since 6.5.0` , + when choosing the ``spapr-tpm-proxy`` model, the file name specified is + expected to be a TPM Resource Manager device, e.g. ``/dev/tpmrm0``. + + ``emulator`` + For this backend type the 'swtpm' TPM Emulator must be installed on the + host. Libvirt will automatically start an independent TPM emulator for + each QEMU guest requesting access to it. + +``version`` + The ``version`` attribute indicates the version of the TPM. By default a TPM + 1.2 is created. This attribute only works with the ``emulator`` backend. The + following versions are supported: + + - '1.2' : creates a TPM 1.2 + - '2.0' : creates a TPM 2.0 + +``encryption`` + The ``encryption`` element allows the state of a TPM emulator to be + encrypted. The ``secret`` must reference a secret object that holds the + passphrase from which the encryption key will be derived. + +:anchor:`<a id="elementsNVRAM"/>` + +NVRAM device +~~~~~~~~~~~~ + +nvram device is always added to pSeries guest on PPC64, and its address is +allowed to be changed. Element ``nvram`` (only valid for pSeries guest, +:since:`since 1.0.5` ) is provided to enable the address setting. + +Example: usage of NVRAM configuration + +:: + + ... + <devices> + <nvram> + <address type='spapr-vio' reg='0x00003000'/> + </nvram> + </devices> + ... + +``spapr-vio`` + VIO device address type, only valid for PPC64. + +``reg`` + Device address + +:anchor:`<a id="elementsPanic"/>` + +panic device +~~~~~~~~~~~~ + +panic device enables libvirt to receive panic notification from a QEMU guest. +:since:`Since 1.2.1, QEMU and KVM only` + +This feature is always enabled for: + +- pSeries guests, since it's implemented by the guest firmware +- S390 guests, since it's an integral part of the S390 architecture + +For the guest types listed above, libvirt automatically adds a ``panic`` element +to the domain XML. + +Example: usage of panic configuration + +:: + + ... + <devices> + <panic model='hyperv'/> + <panic model='isa'> + <address type='isa' iobase='0x505'/> + </panic> + </devices> + ... + +``model`` + The optional ``model`` attribute specifies what type of panic device is + provided. The panic model used when this attribute is missing depends on the + hypervisor and guest arch. + + - 'isa' - for ISA pvpanic device + - 'pseries' - default and valid only for pSeries guests. + - 'hyperv' - for Hyper-V crash CPU feature. :since:`Since 1.3.0, QEMU and + KVM only` + - 's390' - default for S390 guests. :since:`Since 1.3.5` + +``address`` + address of panic. The default ioport is 0x505. Most users don't need to + specify an address, and doing so is forbidden altogether for s390, pseries + and hyperv models. + +:anchor:`<a id="elementsShmem"/>` + +Shared memory device +~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ + +A shared memory device allows to share a memory region between different virtual +machines and the host. :since:`Since 1.2.10, QEMU and KVM only` + +:: + + ... + <devices> + <shmem name='my_shmem0' role='peer'> + <model type='ivshmem-plain'/> + <size unit='M'>4</size> + </shmem> + <shmem name='shmem_server'> + <model type='ivshmem-doorbell'/> + <size unit='M'>2</size> + <server path='/tmp/socket-shmem'/> + <msi vectors='32' ioeventfd='on'/> + </shmem> + </devices> + ... + +``shmem`` + The ``shmem`` element has one mandatory attribute, ``name`` to identify the + shared memory. This attribute cannot be directory specific to ``.`` or ``..`` + as well as it cannot involve path separator ``/``. + + The optional ``role`` (:since:`since 6.6.0`) attribute specifies the shared + memory is migratable or not. The value can be either "master" or "peer", the + former will mean that upon migration, the data in the shared memory is + migrated with the domain. There should be only one "master" per shared + memory object. Migration with "peer" role is disabled. If migration of such + domain is required, the shmem device needs to be unplugged before migration + and plugged in at the destination upon successful migration. If the role not + specified, the hypervisor default is used. This attribute is currently + available only for ``model`` type ``ivshmem-plain`` and + ``ivshmem-doorbell``. +``model`` + Attribute ``type`` of the optional element ``model`` specifies the model of + the underlying device providing the ``shmem`` device. The models currently + supported are ``ivshmem`` (supports both server and server-less shmem, but is + deprecated by newer QEMU in favour of the -plain and -doorbell variants), + ``ivshmem-plain`` (only for server-less shmem) and ``ivshmem-doorbell`` (only + for shmem with the server). +``size`` + The optional ``size`` element specifies the size of the shared memory. This + must be power of 2 and greater than or equal to 1 MiB. +``server`` + The optional ``server`` element can be used to configure a server socket the + device is supposed to connect to. The optional ``path`` attribute specifies + the absolute path to the unix socket and defaults to + ``/var/lib/libvirt/shmem/$shmem-$name-sock``. +``msi`` + The optional ``msi`` element enables/disables (values "on"/"off", + respectively) MSI interrupts. This option can currently be used only together + with the ``server`` element. The ``vectors`` attribute can be used to specify + the number of interrupt vectors. The ``ioeventd`` attribute enables/disables + (values "on"/"off", respectively) ioeventfd. + +:anchor:`<a id="elementsMemory"/>` + +Memory devices +~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ + +In addition to the initial memory assigned to the guest, memory devices allow +additional memory to be assigned to the guest in the form of memory modules. A +memory device can be hot-plugged or hot-unplugged depending on the guests' +memory resource needs. Some hypervisors may require NUMA configured for the +guest. + +Example: usage of the memory devices + +:: + + ... + <devices> + <memory model='dimm' access='private' discard='yes'> + <target> + <size unit='KiB'>524287</size> + <node>0</node> + </target> + </memory> + <memory model='dimm'> + <source> + <pagesize unit='KiB'>4096</pagesize> + <nodemask>1-3</nodemask> + </source> + <target> + <size unit='KiB'>524287</size> + <node>1</node> + </target> + </memory> + <memory model='nvdimm'> + <uuid> + <source> + <path>/tmp/nvdimm</path> + </source> + <target> + <size unit='KiB'>524288</size> + <node>1</node> + <label> + <size unit='KiB'>128</size> + </label> + <readonly/> + </target> + </memory> + <memory model='nvdimm' access='shared'> + <uuid> + <source> + <path>/dev/dax0.0</path> + <alignsize unit='KiB'>2048</alignsize> + <pmem/> + </source> + <target> + <size unit='KiB'>524288</size> + <node>1</node> + <label> + <size unit='KiB'>128</size> + </label> + </target> + </memory> + </devices> + ... + +``model`` + Provide ``dimm`` to add a virtual DIMM module to the guest. :since:`Since + 1.2.14` Provide ``nvdimm`` model adds a Non-Volatile DIMM module. + :since:`Since 3.2.0` + +``access`` + An optional attribute ``access`` ( :since:`since 3.2.0` ) that provides + capability to fine tune mapping of the memory on per module basis. Values are + the same as `Memory Backing <#elementsMemoryBacking>`__: ``shared`` and + ``private``. For ``nvdimm`` model, if using real NVDIMM DAX device as + backend, ``shared`` is required. + +``discard`` + An optional attribute ``discard`` ( :since:`since 4.4.0` ) that provides + capability to fine tune discard of data on per module basis. Accepted values + are ``yes`` and ``no``. The feature is described here: `Memory + Backing <#elementsMemoryBacking>`__. This attribute is allowed only for + ``model='dimm'``. + +``uuid`` + For pSeries guests, an uuid can be set to identify the nvdimm module. If + absent, libvirt will generate an uuid. automatically. This attribute is + allowed only for ``model='nvdimm'`` for pSeries guests. :since:`Since 6.2.0` + +``source`` + For model ``dimm`` this element is optional and allows to fine tune the + source of the memory used for the given memory device. If the element is not + provided defaults configured via ``numatune`` are used. If ``dimm`` is + provided, then the following optional elements can be provided as well: + + ``pagesize`` + This element can be used to override the default host page size used for + backing the memory device. The configured value must correspond to a page + size supported by the host. + + ``nodemask`` + This element can be used to override the default set of NUMA nodes where + the memory would be allocated. + + For model ``nvdimm`` this element is mandatory. The mandatory child element + ``path`` represents a path in the host that backs the nvdimm module in the + guest. The following optional elements may be used: + + ``alignsize`` + The ``alignsize`` element defines the page size alignment used to mmap the + address range for the backend ``path``. If not supplied the host page size + is used. For example, to mmap a real NVDIMM device a 2M-aligned page may + be required, and host page size is 4KB, then we need to set this element + to 2MB. :since:`Since 5.0.0` + + ``pmem`` + If persistent memory is supported and enabled by the hypervisor in order + to guarantee the persistence of writes to the vNVDIMM backend, then use + the ``pmem`` element in order to utilize the feature. :since:`Since 5.0.0` + +``target`` + The mandatory ``target`` element configures the placement and sizing of the + added memory from the perspective of the guest. + + The mandatory ``size`` subelement configures the size of the added memory as + a scaled integer. + + The ``node`` subelement configures the guest NUMA node to attach the memory + to. The element shall be used only if the guest has NUMA nodes configured. + + The following optional elements may be used: + + ``label`` + For NVDIMM type devices one can use ``label`` and its subelement ``size`` + to configure the size of namespaces label storage within the NVDIMM + module. The ``size`` element has usual meaning described + `here <#elementsMemoryAllocation>`__. ``label`` is mandatory for pSeries + guests and optional for all other architectures. For QEMU domains the + following restrictions apply: + + #. the minimum label size is 128KiB, + #. the remaining size (total-size - label-size), also called guest area, + will be aligned to 4KiB as default. For pSeries guests, the guest area + will be aligned down to 256MiB, and the minimum size of the guest area + must be at least 256MiB. + + ``readonly`` + The ``readonly`` element is used to mark the vNVDIMM as read-only. Only + the real NVDIMM device backend can guarantee the guest write persistence, + so other backend types should use the ``readonly`` element. :since:`Since + 5.0.0` + +:anchor:`<a id="elementsIommu"/>` + +IOMMU devices +~~~~~~~~~~~~~ + +The ``iommu`` element can be used to add an IOMMU device. :since:`Since 2.1.0` + +Example: + +:: + + ... + <devices> + <iommu model='intel'> + <driver intremap='on'/> + </iommu> + </devices> + ... + +``model`` + Supported values are ``intel`` (for Q35 guests) and, :since:`since 5.5.0` , + ``smmuv3`` (for ARM virt guests). + +``driver`` + The ``driver`` subelement can be used to configure additional options, some + of which might only be available for certain IOMMU models: + + ``intremap`` + The ``intremap`` attribute with possible values ``on`` and ``off`` can be + used to turn on interrupt remapping, a part of the VT-d functionality. + Currently this requires split I/O APIC (``<ioapic driver='qemu'/>``). + :since:`Since 3.4.0` (QEMU/KVM only) + + ``caching_mode`` + The ``caching_mode`` attribute with possible values ``on`` and ``off`` can + be used to turn on the VT-d caching mode (useful for assigned devices). + :since:`Since 3.4.0` (QEMU/KVM only) + + ``eim`` + The ``eim`` attribute (with possible values ``on`` and ``off``) can be + used to configure Extended Interrupt Mode. A q35 domain with split I/O + APIC (as described in `hypervisor features <#elementsFeatures>`__), and + both interrupt remapping and EIM turned on for the IOMMU, will be able to + use more than 255 vCPUs. :since:`Since 3.4.0` (QEMU/KVM only) + + ``iotlb`` + The ``iotlb`` attribute with possible values ``on`` and ``off`` can be + used to turn on the IOTLB used to cache address translation requests from + devices. :since:`Since 3.5.0` (QEMU/KVM only) + + ``aw_bits`` + The ``aw_bits`` attribute can be used to set the address width to allow + mapping larger iova addresses in the guest. :since:`Since 6.5.0` (QEMU/KVM + only) + +:anchor:`<a id="vsock"/>` + +Vsock +----- + +A vsock host/guest interface. The ``model`` attribute defaults to ``virtio``. +:since:`Since 5.2.0` ``model`` can also be 'virtio-transitional' and +'virtio-non-transitional', see `Virtio transitional +devices <#elementsVirtioTransitional>`__ for more details. The optional +attribute ``address`` of the ``cid`` element specifies the CID assigned to the +guest. If the attribute ``auto`` is set to ``yes``, libvirt will assign a free +CID automatically on domain startup. :since:`Since 4.4.0` + +:: + + ... + <devices> + <vsock model='virtio'> + <cid auto='no' address='3'/> + </vsock> + </devices> + ... + +:anchor:`<a id="seclabel"/>` + +Security label +-------------- + +The ``seclabel`` element allows control over the operation of the security +drivers. There are three basic modes of operation, 'dynamic' where libvirt +automatically generates a unique security label, 'static' where the +application/administrator chooses the labels, or 'none' where confinement is +disabled. With dynamic label generation, libvirt will always automatically +relabel any resources associated with the virtual machine. With static label +assignment, by default, the administrator or application must ensure labels are +set correctly on any resources, however, automatic relabeling can be enabled if +desired. :since:`'dynamic' since 0.6.1, 'static' since 0.6.2, and 'none' since +0.9.10.` + +If more than one security driver is used by libvirt, multiple ``seclabel`` tags +can be used, one for each driver and the security driver referenced by each tag +can be defined using the attribute ``model`` + +Valid input XML configurations for the top-level security label are: + +:: + + <seclabel type='dynamic' model='selinux'/> + + <seclabel type='dynamic' model='selinux'> + <baselabel>system_u:system_r:my_svirt_t:s0</baselabel> + </seclabel> + + <seclabel type='static' model='selinux' relabel='no'> + <label>system_u:system_r:svirt_t:s0:c392,c662</label> + </seclabel> + + <seclabel type='static' model='selinux' relabel='yes'> + <label>system_u:system_r:svirt_t:s0:c392,c662</label> + </seclabel> + + <seclabel type='none'/> + +If no 'type' attribute is provided in the input XML, then the security driver +default setting will be used, which may be either 'none' or 'dynamic'. If a +'baselabel' is set but no 'type' is set, then the type is presumed to be +'dynamic' + +When viewing the XML for a running guest with automatic resource relabeling +active, an additional XML element, ``imagelabel``, will be included. This is an +output-only element, so will be ignored in user supplied XML documents + +``type`` + Either ``static``, ``dynamic`` or ``none`` to determine whether libvirt + automatically generates a unique security label or not. +``model`` + A valid security model name, matching the currently activated security model. + Model ``dac`` is not available when guest is run by unprivileged user. +``relabel`` + Either ``yes`` or ``no``. This must always be ``yes`` if dynamic label + assignment is used. With static label assignment it will default to ``no``. +``label`` + If static labelling is used, this must specify the full security label to + assign to the virtual domain. The format of the content depends on the + security driver in use: + + - SELinux: a SELinux context. + - AppArmor: an AppArmor profile. + - DAC: owner and group separated by colon. They can be defined both as + user/group names or uid/gid. The driver will first try to parse these + values as names, but a leading plus sign can used to force the driver to + parse them as uid or gid. + +``baselabel`` + If dynamic labelling is used, this can optionally be used to specify the base + security label that will be used to generate the actual label. The format of + the content depends on the security driver in use. The SELinux driver uses + only the ``type`` field of the baselabel in the generated label. Other fields + are inherited from the parent process when using SELinux baselabels. (The + example above demonstrates the use of ``my_svirt_t`` as the value for the + ``type`` field.) +``imagelabel`` + This is an output only element, which shows the security label used on + resources associated with the virtual domain. The format of the content + depends on the security driver in use + +When relabeling is in effect, it is also possible to fine-tune the labeling done +for specific source file names, by either disabling the labeling (useful if the +file lives on NFS or other file system that lacks security labeling) or +requesting an alternate label (useful when a management application creates a +special label to allow sharing of some, but not all, resources between domains), +:since:`since 0.9.9` . When a ``seclabel`` element is attached to a specific +path rather than the top-level domain assignment, only the attribute ``relabel`` +or the sub-element ``label`` are supported. Additionally, :since:`since 1.1.2` , +an output-only element ``labelskip`` will be present for active domains on disks +where labeling was skipped due to the image being on a file system that lacks +security labeling. + +:anchor:`<a id="keywrap"/>` + +Key Wrap +-------- + +The content of the optional ``keywrap`` element specifies whether the guest will +be allowed to perform the S390 cryptographic key management operations. A clear +key can be protected by encrypting it under a unique wrapping key that is +generated for each guest VM running on the host. Two variations of wrapping keys +are generated: one version for encrypting protected keys using the DEA/TDEA +algorithm, and another version for keys encrypted using the AES algorithm. If a +``keywrap`` element is not included, the guest will be granted access to both +AES and DEA/TDEA key wrapping by default. + +:: + + <domain> + ... + <keywrap> + <cipher name='aes' state='off'/> + </keywrap> + ... + </domain> + +At least one ``cipher`` element must be nested within the ``keywrap`` element. + +``cipher`` + The ``name`` attribute identifies the algorithm for encrypting a protected + key. The values supported for this attribute are ``aes`` for encryption under + the AES wrapping key, or ``dea`` for encryption under the DEA/TDEA wrapping + key. The ``state`` attribute indicates whether the cryptographic key + management operations should be turned on for the specified encryption + algorithm. The value can be set to ``on`` or ``off``. + +Note: DEA/TDEA is synonymous with DES/TDES. + +:anchor:`<a id="launchSecurity"/>` + +Launch Security +--------------- + +The contents of the ``<launchSecurity type='sev'>`` element is used to provide +the guest owners input used for creating an encrypted VM using the AMD SEV +feature (Secure Encrypted Virtualization). SEV is an extension to the AMD-V +architecture which supports running encrypted virtual machine (VMs) under the +control of KVM. Encrypted VMs have their pages (code and data) secured such that +only the guest itself has access to the unencrypted version. Each encrypted VM +is associated with a unique encryption key; if its data is accessed to a +different entity using a different key the encrypted guests data will be +incorrectly decrypted, leading to unintelligible data. For more information see +various input parameters and its format see the `SEV API +spec <https://support.amd.com/TechDocs/55766_SEV-KM_API_Specification.pdf>`__ +:since:`Since 4.4.0` + +:: + + <domain> + ... + <launchSecurity type='sev'> + <policy>0x0001</policy> + <cbitpos>47</cbitpos> + <reducedPhysBits>1</reducedPhysBits> + <dhCert>RBBBSDDD=FDDCCCDDDG</dhCert> + <session>AAACCCDD=FFFCCCDSDS</session> + </launchSecurity> + ... + </domain> + +``cbitpos`` + The required ``cbitpos`` element provides the C-bit (aka encryption bit) + location in guest page table entry. The value of ``cbitpos`` is hypervisor + dependent and can be obtained through the ``sev`` element from the domain + capabilities. +``reducedPhysBits`` + The required ``reducedPhysBits`` element provides the physical address bit + reducation. Similar to ``cbitpos`` the value of ``reduced-phys-bit`` is + hypervisor dependent and can be obtained through the ``sev`` element from the + domain capabilities. +``policy`` + The required ``policy`` element provides the guest policy which must be + maintained by the SEV firmware. This policy is enforced by the firmware and + restricts what configuration and operational commands can be performed on + this guest by the hypervisor. The guest policy provided during guest launch + is bound to the guest and cannot be changed throughout the lifetime of the + guest. The policy is also transmitted during snapshot and migration flows and + enforced on the destination platform. The guest policy is a 4 unsigned byte + with the fields shown in Table: + + ====== ========================================================================================= + Bit(s) Description + ====== ========================================================================================= + 0 Debugging of the guest is disallowed when set + 1 Sharing keys with other guests is disallowed when set + 2 SEV-ES is required when set + 3 Sending the guest to another platform is disallowed when set + 4 The guest must not be transmitted to another platform that is not in the domain when set. + 5 The guest must not be transmitted to another platform that is not SEV capable when set. + 6:15 reserved + 16:32 The guest must not be transmitted to another platform with a lower firmware version. + ====== ========================================================================================= + +``dhCert`` + The optional ``dhCert`` element provides the guest owners base64 encoded + Diffie-Hellman (DH) key. The key is used to negotiate a master secret key + between the SEV firmware and guest owner. This master secret key is then used + to establish a trusted channel between SEV firmware and guest owner. +``session`` + The optional ``session`` element provides the guest owners base64 encoded + session blob defined in the SEV API spec. See SEV spec LAUNCH_START section + for the session blob format. + +:anchor:`<a id="examples"/>` + +Example configs +=============== + +Example configurations for each driver are provide on the driver specific pages +listed below + +- `Xen examples <drvxen.html#xmlconfig>`__ +- `QEMU/KVM examples <drvqemu.html#xmlconfig>`__ diff --git a/docs/meson.build b/docs/meson.build index 59d5f7bd4e..7397d6409b 100644 --- a/docs/meson.build +++ b/docs/meson.build @@ -70,7 +70,6 @@ docs_html_in_files = [ 'firewall', 'formatcaps', 'formatdomaincaps', - 'formatdomain', 'format', 'formatnetwork', 'formatnetworkport', @@ -117,6 +116,7 @@ docs_rst_files = [ 'developer-tooling', 'formatbackup', 'formatcheckpoint', + 'formatdomain', 'hacking', 'kbase', 'libvirt-go', -- 2.26.2

4 years, 2 months

2
2
0 / 0

2024

2023

2022

2021

2020

2019

2018

2017

2016

2015

2014

2013

2012

2011

2010

2009

2008

2007

2006

2005

Devel August 2020